MKE04P24M48SF0RM

KE04 Sub-Family Reference Manual
Supports: MKE04Z8VTG4(R), MKE04Z8VWJ4(R) and

MKE04Z8VFK4(R)
Document Number: MKE04P24M48SF0RM

Rev 3, Feburary 2014
KE04 Sub-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 3, Feburary 2014
2 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.
Contents
Section number Title Page
Chapter 1
About This Document
1.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................................35
1.1.1 Purpose.............................................................................................................................................................35
1.1.2 Audience..........................................................................................................................................................35
1.2 Conventions....................................................................................................................................................................35
1.2.1 Numbering systems..........................................................................................................................................35
1.2.2 Typographic notation.......................................................................................................................................36
1.2.3 Special terms....................................................................................................................................................36
Chapter 2
Introduction
2.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................................37
2.2 Module functional categories..........................................................................................................................................37
2.2.1 ARM Cortex-M0+ core modules.....................................................................................................................38
2.2.2 System modules...............................................................................................................................................39
2.2.3 Memories and memory interfaces....................................................................................................................39
2.2.4 Clocks...............................................................................................................................................................40
2.2.5 Security and integrity modules........................................................................................................................40
2.2.6 Analog modules...............................................................................................................................................40
2.2.7 Timer modules.................................................................................................................................................41
2.2.8 Communication interfaces...............................................................................................................................42
2.2.9 Human-machine interfaces..............................................................................................................................42
2.2.10 Orderable part numbers....................................................................................................................................42
Chapter 3
Chip Configuration
3.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................45
3.2 Module to Module Interconnects....................................................................................................................................45
3.2.1 Interconnection overview.................................................................................................................................45

Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. 3
3.2.2 Analog reference options.................................................................................................................................47
3.2.3 ACMP output capture......................................................................................................................................48
3.2.4 UART0_TX modulation..................................................................................................................................48
3.2.5 UART0_RX capture........................................................................................................................................48
3.2.6 UART0_RX filter............................................................................................................................................49
3.2.7 RTC capture.....................................................................................................................................................49
3.2.8 FTM2 software synchronization......................................................................................................................50
3.2.9 ADC hardware trigger......................................................................................................................................50
3.3 Core Modules..................................................................................................................................................................50
3.3.1 ARM Cortex-M0+ core configuration.............................................................................................................50
3.3.1.1 ARM Cortex M0+ core ...............................................................................................................51
3.3.1.2 Buses, interconnects, and interfaces............................................................................................52
3.3.1.3 System Tick Timer.......................................................................................................................52
3.3.1.4 Core privilege levels....................................................................................................................53
3.3.1.5 Caches..........................................................................................................................................53
3.3.2 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) configuration...........................................................................53
3.3.2.1 Interrupt priority levels................................................................................................................54
3.3.2.2 Non-maskable interrupt................................................................................................................54
3.3.2.3 Interrupt channel assignments......................................................................................................54
3.3.3 Asynchronous wakeup interrupt controller (AWIC) configuration.................................................................56
3.3.3.1 Wakeup sources...........................................................................................................................57
3.4 System Modules..............................................................................................................................................................58
3.4.1 SIM configuration............................................................................................................................................58
3.4.2 PMC configuration...........................................................................................................................................58
3.4.3 MCM configuration.........................................................................................................................................59
3.4.4 Crossbar-light switch configuration.................................................................................................................60
3.4.4.1 Crossbar-Light switch master assignments..................................................................................60
3.4.4.2 Crossbar switch slave assignments..............................................................................................61

3.4.5 Peripheral bridge configuration.......................................................................................................................61
3.4.5.1 Number of peripheral bridges......................................................................................................61
3.4.5.2 Memory maps..............................................................................................................................61
3.5 System Security..............................................................................................................................................................62
3.5.1 CRC configuration...........................................................................................................................................62
3.5.2 Watchdog configuration...................................................................................................................................62
3.5.2.1 WDOG clocks..............................................................................................................................63
3.5.2.2 WDOG operation.........................................................................................................................63
3.6 Clock Modules................................................................................................................................................................64
3.6.1 ICS configuration.............................................................................................................................................64
3.6.1.1 Clock gating.................................................................................................................................65
3.6.2 OSC configuration...........................................................................................................................................65
3.7 Memories and Memory Interfaces..................................................................................................................................66
3.7.1 Flash memory configuration............................................................................................................................66
3.7.1.1 Flash memory sizes......................................................................................................................67
3.7.1.2 Flash memory map.......................................................................................................................67
3.7.1.3 Flash security...............................................................................................................................68
3.7.1.4 Erase all flash contents.................................................................................................................68
3.7.2 Flash memory controller configuration............................................................................................................68
3.7.3 SRAM configuration........................................................................................................................................69
3.7.3.1 SRAM sizes..................................................................................................................................70
3.7.3.2 SRAM ranges...............................................................................................................................70
3.7.3.3 SRAM bit operation.....................................................................................................................71
3.8 Analog.............................................................................................................................................................................72
3.8.1 12-bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC) configuration..................................................................................72
3.8.1.1 ADC instantiation information.....................................................................................................72
3.8.1.2 ADC0 connections/channel assignment.......................................................................................73
3.8.1.3 ADC analog supply and reference connections...........................................................................74
3.8.1.4 Temperature sensor and bandgap.................................................................................................74

3.8.1.5 Alternate clock.............................................................................................................................74
3.8.2 ACMP configuration........................................................................................................................................75
3.8.2.1 ACMP overview..........................................................................................................................75
3.8.2.2 ACMP interconnections...............................................................................................................76
3.8.2.3 ACMP in Stop mode....................................................................................................................76
3.9 Timers.............................................................................................................................................................................77
3.9.1 FlexTimer configuration..................................................................................................................................77
3.9.1.1 FTM overview..............................................................................................................................77
3.9.1.2 FTM clock options.......................................................................................................................79
3.9.1.3 FTM interconnections..................................................................................................................79
3.9.1.4 FTM interrupts.............................................................................................................................80
3.9.2 PIT configuration.............................................................................................................................................80
3.9.2.1 PIT overview................................................................................................................................80
3.9.2.2 PIT interconnections....................................................................................................................81
3.9.3 RTC configuration...........................................................................................................................................81
3.9.3.1 RTC overview..............................................................................................................................81
3.9.3.2 RTC interconnections..................................................................................................................81
3.9.4 PWT configuration...........................................................................................................................................82
3.9.4.1 PWT overview.............................................................................................................................82
3.9.4.2 PWT interconnections..................................................................................................................83
3.10 Communication interfaces..............................................................................................................................................83
3.10.1 SPI configuration.............................................................................................................................................83
3.10.1.1 SPI overview................................................................................................................................84
3.10.2 I2C configuration.............................................................................................................................................84
3.10.2.1 I2C overview................................................................................................................................85
3.10.3 UART configuration........................................................................................................................................85
3.10.3.1 UART overview...........................................................................................................................86
3.10.3.2 UART interconnection.................................................................................................................86

3.11 Human-machine interfaces (HMI)..................................................................................................................................87
3.11.1 GPIO configuration..........................................................................................................................................87
3.11.1.1 GPIO overview............................................................................................................................87
3.11.2 KBI configuration............................................................................................................................................88
3.11.2.1 KBI overview...............................................................................................................................88
3.11.2.2 KBI assignments..........................................................................................................................88
3.11.3 IRQ configuration............................................................................................................................................89
3.11.3.1 IRQ assignment............................................................................................................................89
Chapter 4
Memory Map
4.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................91
4.2 System memory map.......................................................................................................................................................91
4.3 Aliased bit-band region...................................................................................................................................................92
4.4 Bit Manipulation Engine.................................................................................................................................................93
4.5 System ROM memory map............................................................................................................................................93
4.5.1 Entry (ROM_ENTRYn)...................................................................................................................................95
4.5.2 End of Table Marker Register (ROM_TABLEMARK)..................................................................................96
4.5.3 System Access Register (ROM_SYSACCESS)..............................................................................................96
4.5.4 Peripheral ID Register (ROM_PERIPHIDn)...................................................................................................97
4.5.5 Component ID Register (ROM_COMPIDn)...................................................................................................97
4.6 Peripheral bridge (AIPS-Lite) memory map...................................................................................................................98
4.6.1 Read-after-write sequence and required serialization of memory operations..................................................98
4.6.2 Peripheral Bridge (AIPS-Lite) Memory Map..................................................................................................99
4.7 Private Peripheral Bus (PPB) memory map....................................................................................................................102
Chapter 5
Clock Distribution
5.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................105
5.2 Programming model........................................................................................................................................................105
5.3 High-level device clocking diagram...............................................................................................................................105

5.4 Clock definitions.............................................................................................................................................................107
5.4.1 Device clock summary.....................................................................................................................................107
5.4.2 Clock distribution.............................................................................................................................................108
5.5 Internal clocking sources................................................................................................................................................109
5.6 External clock sources....................................................................................................................................................110
5.7 Clock gating....................................................................................................................................................................111
5.8 Module clocks.................................................................................................................................................................111
5.8.1 FTM and PWT clocking..................................................................................................................................112
Chapter 6
Reset and Boot
6.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................115
6.2 Reset................................................................................................................................................................................115
6.2.1 Power-on reset (POR)......................................................................................................................................115
6.2.2 System reset sources........................................................................................................................................116
6.2.2.1 External pin reset (RESET)..........................................................................................................116
6.2.2.2 Low-voltage detect (LVD)...........................................................................................................117
6.2.2.3 Watchdog timer............................................................................................................................117
6.2.2.4 ICS loss-of-clock (LOC)..............................................................................................................117
6.2.2.5 Stop mode acknowledge error (SACKERR) ..............................................................................118
6.2.2.6 Software reset (SW).....................................................................................................................118
6.2.2.7 Lockup reset (LOCKUP).............................................................................................................118
6.2.2.8 MDM-AP system reset request....................................................................................................118
6.2.3 MCU resets......................................................................................................................................................118
6.2.3.1 POR Only ....................................................................................................................................118
6.2.3.2 Chip POR ....................................................................................................................................119
6.2.3.3 Early Chip Reset .........................................................................................................................119
6.2.3.4 Chip Reset ...................................................................................................................................119
6.3 Boot.................................................................................................................................................................................119
6.3.1 Boot sources.....................................................................................................................................................119

6.3.2 Boot sequence..................................................................................................................................................120
Chapter 7
Power Management
7.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................121
7.2 Power modes...................................................................................................................................................................121
7.3 Entering and exiting power modes.................................................................................................................................122
7.4 Module operation in low-power modes..........................................................................................................................122
Chapter 8
Security
8.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................125
8.2 Flash security..................................................................................................................................................................125
8.3 Security interactions with other modules........................................................................................................................126
8.3.1 Security interactions with debug......................................................................................................................126
Chapter 9
Debug
9.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................127
9.2 Debug port pin descriptions............................................................................................................................................127
9.3 SWD status and control registers....................................................................................................................................128
9.3.1 MDM-AP status register..................................................................................................................................129
9.3.2 MDM-AP Control register...............................................................................................................................130
9.4 Debug resets....................................................................................................................................................................131
9.5 Debug in low-power modes............................................................................................................................................131
9.6 Debug and security.........................................................................................................................................................132
Chapter 10
Signal Multiplexing and Signal Descriptions
10.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................133
10.2 Pinout..............................................................................................................................................................................133
10.2.1 Signal Multiplexing and Pin Assignments.......................................................................................................133
10.2.2 Device pin assignment.....................................................................................................................................134

10.3 Module signal description tables....................................................................................................................................136
10.3.1 Core modules...................................................................................................................................................136
10.3.2 System modules...............................................................................................................................................136
10.3.3 Clock modules..................................................................................................................................................137
10.3.4 Analog..............................................................................................................................................................137
10.3.5 Timer modules.................................................................................................................................................138
10.3.6 Communication Interfaces...............................................................................................................................138
10.3.7 Human-machine interfaces (HMI)...................................................................................................................139
Chapter 11
Port Control (PORT)
11.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................141
11.2 Port data and data direction.............................................................................................................................................143
11.3 Internal pullup enable.....................................................................................................................................................144
11.4 Input glitch filter setting..................................................................................................................................................144
11.5 High current drive...........................................................................................................................................................145
11.6 Pin behavior in Stop mode..............................................................................................................................................145
11.7 Port data registers............................................................................................................................................................146
11.7.1 Port Filter Register (PORT_IOFLT)................................................................................................................146
11.7.2 Port Pullup Enable Low Register (PORT_PUEL)...........................................................................................149
11.7.3 Port High Drive Enable Register (PORT_HDRVE)........................................................................................152
Chapter 12
System Integration Module (SIM)
12.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................155
12.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................................155
12.2 Memory map and register definition...............................................................................................................................155
12.2.1 System Reset Status and ID Register (SIM_SRSID).......................................................................................156
12.2.2 System Options Register (SIM_SOPT)...........................................................................................................159
12.2.3 Pin Selection Register (SIM_PINSEL)............................................................................................................162
12.2.4 System Clock Gating Control Register (SIM_SCGC).....................................................................................164

12.2.5 Universally Unique Identifier Low Register (SIM_UUIDL)..........................................................................167
12.2.6 Universally Unique Identifier Middle Low Register (SIM_UUIDML)..........................................................168
12.2.7 Universally Unique Identifier Middle High Register (SIM_UUIDMH).........................................................168
12.2.8 Clock Divider Register (SIM_CLKDIV).........................................................................................................169
12.3 Functional description.....................................................................................................................................................170
Chapter 13
Power Management Controller (PMC)
13.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................171
13.2 Low voltage detect (LVD) system..................................................................................................................................171
13.2.1 Power-on reset (POR) operation......................................................................................................................172
13.2.2 LVD reset operation.........................................................................................................................................172
13.2.3 LVD enabled in Stop mode..............................................................................................................................172
13.2.4 Low-voltage warning (LVW)..........................................................................................................................173
13.3 Bandgap reference..........................................................................................................................................................173
13.4 Memory map and register descriptions...........................................................................................................................173
13.4.1 System Power Management Status and Control 1 Register (PMC_SPMSC1)................................................174
13.4.2 System Power Management Status and Control 2 Register (PMC_SPMSC2)................................................175
Chapter 14
Miscellaneous Control Module (MCM)
14.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................177
14.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................................177
14.2 Memory map/register descriptions.................................................................................................................................177
14.2.1 Crossbar Switch (AXBS) Slave Configuration (MCM_PLASC)....................................................................178
14.2.2 Crossbar Switch (AXBS) Master Configuration (MCM_PLAMC)................................................................178
14.2.3 Platform Control Register (MCM_PLACR)....................................................................................................179
Chapter 15
Peripheral Bridge (AIPS-Lite)
15.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................183
15.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................................183
15.1.2 General operation.............................................................................................................................................183

15.2.1 Access support.................................................................................................................................................184
Chapter 16
Watchdog Timer (WDOG)
16.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................185
16.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................................185
16.1.2 Block diagram..................................................................................................................................................186
16.2.1 Watchdog Control and Status Register 1 (WDOG_CS1)................................................................................187
16.2.2 Watchdog Control and Status Register 2 (WDOG_CS2)................................................................................189
16.2.3 Watchdog Counter Register: High (WDOG_CNTH)......................................................................................190
16.2.4 Watchdog Counter Register: Low (WDOG_CNTL).......................................................................................190
16.2.5 Watchdog Timeout Value Register: High (WDOG_TOVALH).....................................................................191
16.2.6 Watchdog Timeout Value Register: Low (WDOG_TOVALL)......................................................................191
16.2.7 Watchdog Window Register: High (WDOG_WINH).....................................................................................192
16.2.8 Watchdog Window Register: Low (WDOG_WINL)......................................................................................192
16.3.1 Watchdog refresh mechanism..........................................................................................................................193
16.3.1.1 Window mode..............................................................................................................................194
16.3.1.2 Refreshing the Watchdog.............................................................................................................194
16.3.1.3 Example code: Refreshing the Watchdog....................................................................................195
16.3.2 Configuring the Watchdog...............................................................................................................................195
16.3.2.1 Reconfiguring the Watchdog.......................................................................................................196
16.3.2.2 Unlocking the Watchdog.............................................................................................................196
16.3.2.3 Example code: Reconfiguring the Watchdog..............................................................................196
16.3.3 Clock source.....................................................................................................................................................197
16.3.4 Using interrupts to delay resets........................................................................................................................198
16.3.5 Backup reset.....................................................................................................................................................198
16.3.6 Functionality in debug and low-power modes.................................................................................................198

16.3.7 Fast testing of the watchdog.............................................................................................................................199
16.3.7.1 Testing each byte of the counter..................................................................................................199
16.3.7.2 Entering user mode......................................................................................................................200
Chapter 17
Bit Manipulation Engine (BME)
17.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................201
17.1.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................................................202
17.1.2 Features............................................................................................................................................................203
17.1.3 Modes of operation..........................................................................................................................................203
17.3.1 BME decorated stores......................................................................................................................................204
17.3.1.1 Decorated store logical AND (AND)...........................................................................................206
17.3.1.2 Decorated store logical OR (OR).................................................................................................207
17.3.1.3 Decorated store logical XOR (XOR)...........................................................................................208
17.3.1.4 Decorated store bit field insert (BFI)...........................................................................................209
17.3.2 BME decorated loads.......................................................................................................................................211
17.3.2.1 Decorated load: load-and-clear 1 bit (LAC1)..............................................................................214
17.3.2.2 Decorated Load: Load-and-Set 1 Bit (LAS1)..............................................................................215
17.3.2.3 Decorated load unsigned bit field extract (UBFX)......................................................................216
17.3.3 Additional details on decorated addresses and GPIO accesses........................................................................217
17.4 Application information..................................................................................................................................................218
Chapter 18
Flash Memory Module (FTMRE)
18.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................221
18.2 Feature.............................................................................................................................................................................221
18.2.1 Flash memory features.....................................................................................................................................221
18.2.2 Other flash module features.............................................................................................................................222

18.3.1.1 Wait mode....................................................................................................................................222
18.3.1.2 Stop mode....................................................................................................................................222
18.3.2 Flash memory map...........................................................................................................................................222
18.3.3 Flash initialization after system reset...............................................................................................................223
18.3.4 Flash command operations...............................................................................................................................223
18.3.4.1 Writing the FCLKDIV register....................................................................................................224
18.3.4.2 Command write sequence............................................................................................................226
18.3.5 Flash interrupts.................................................................................................................................................228
18.3.5.1 Description of flash interrupt operation.......................................................................................228
18.3.6 Protection.........................................................................................................................................................228
18.3.7 Security............................................................................................................................................................232
18.3.7.1 Unsecuring the MCU using backdoor key access........................................................................233
18.3.7.2 Unsecuring the MCU using SWD................................................................................................234
18.3.7.3 Mode and security effects on flash command availability...........................................................234
18.3.8 Flash commands...............................................................................................................................................234
18.3.8.1 Flash commands...........................................................................................................................234
18.3.9 Flash command summary................................................................................................................................235
18.3.9.1 Erase Verify All Blocks command..............................................................................................236
18.3.9.2 Erase Verify Block command......................................................................................................236
18.3.9.3 Erase Verify Flash Section command..........................................................................................237
18.3.9.4 Read once command....................................................................................................................238
18.3.9.5 Program Flash command.............................................................................................................239
18.3.9.6 Program Once command..............................................................................................................240
18.3.9.7 Erase All Blocks command..........................................................................................................241
18.3.9.8 Debugger mass erase request.......................................................................................................242
18.3.9.9 Erase flash block command.........................................................................................................242
18.3.9.10 Erase flash sector command.........................................................................................................243

18.3.9.11 Unsecure flash command.............................................................................................................244
18.3.9.12 Verify backdoor access key command.........................................................................................245
18.3.9.13 Set user margin level command...................................................................................................245
18.3.9.14 Set factory margin level command..............................................................................................247
18.4.1 Flash CCOB Index Register (FTMRE_FCCOBIX)........................................................................................249
18.4.2 Flash Security Register (FTMRE_FSEC)........................................................................................................249
18.4.3 Flash Clock Divider Register (FTMRE_FCLKDIV).......................................................................................250
18.4.4 Flash Status Register (FTMRE_FSTAT).........................................................................................................251
18.4.5 Flash Configuration Register (FTMRE_FCNFG)...........................................................................................252
18.4.6 Flash Common Command Object Register: Low (FTMRE_FCCOBLO).......................................................253
18.4.7 Flash Common Command Object Register:High (FTMRE_FCCOBHI)........................................................254
18.4.8 Flash Protection Register (FTMRE_FPROT)..................................................................................................254
18.4.9 Flash Option Register (FTMRE_FOPT)..........................................................................................................255
Chapter 19
Flash Memory Controller (FMC)
19.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................257
19.1.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................................................257
19.1.2 Features............................................................................................................................................................257
19.2 Modes of operation.........................................................................................................................................................258
19.3 External signal description..............................................................................................................................................258
Chapter 20
Internal Clock Source (ICS)
20.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................261
20.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................................261
20.1.2 Block diagram..................................................................................................................................................262

20.1.3.1 FLL engaged internal (FEI).........................................................................................................262
20.1.3.2 FLL engaged external (FEE)........................................................................................................262
20.1.3.3 FLL bypassed internal (FBI)........................................................................................................263
20.1.3.4 FLL bypassed internal low power (FBILP).................................................................................263
20.1.3.5 FLL bypassed external (FBE)......................................................................................................263
20.1.3.6 FLL bypassed external low power (FBELP)...............................................................................263
20.1.3.7 Stop (STOP).................................................................................................................................263
20.3 Register definition...........................................................................................................................................................264
20.3.1 ICS Control Register 1 (ICS_C1)....................................................................................................................264
20.3.5 ICS Status Register (ICS_S)............................................................................................................................267
20.4.1 Operational modes...........................................................................................................................................268
20.4.1.1 FLL engaged internal (FEI).........................................................................................................269
20.4.1.2 FLL engaged external (FEE)........................................................................................................269
20.4.1.3 FLL bypassed internal (FBI)........................................................................................................270
20.4.1.4 FLL bypassed internal low power (FBILP).................................................................................270
20.4.1.5 FLL bypassed external (FBE)......................................................................................................270
20.4.1.6 FLL bypassed external low power (FBELP)...............................................................................271
20.4.1.7 Stop..............................................................................................................................................271
20.4.2 Mode switching................................................................................................................................................271
20.4.3 Bus frequency divider......................................................................................................................................272
20.4.4 Low-power field usage.....................................................................................................................................272
20.4.5 Internal reference clock....................................................................................................................................272
20.4.6 Fixed frequency clock......................................................................................................................................272

20.4.7 FLL lock and clock monitor.............................................................................................................................273
20.4.7.1 FLL clock lock.............................................................................................................................273
20.4.7.2 External reference clock monitor.................................................................................................273
20.5 Initialization/application information.............................................................................................................................274
20.5.1 Initializing FEI mode.......................................................................................................................................274
20.5.2 Initializing FBI mode.......................................................................................................................................274
20.5.3 Initializing FEE mode......................................................................................................................................274
20.5.4 Initializing FBE mode......................................................................................................................................275
Chapter 21
Oscillator (OSC)
21.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................277
21.1.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................................................277
21.1.2 Features and modes..........................................................................................................................................277
21.1.3 Block diagram..................................................................................................................................................277
21.2 Signal description............................................................................................................................................................278
21.3 External crystal / resonator connections.........................................................................................................................279
21.4 External clock connections.............................................................................................................................................280
21.5.1 OSC Control Register (OSC_CR)....................................................................................................................281
21.6.1 OSC module states...........................................................................................................................................282
21.6.1.1 Off................................................................................................................................................283
21.6.1.2 Oscillator startup..........................................................................................................................284
21.6.1.3 Oscillator stable............................................................................................................................284
21.6.1.4 External clock mode.....................................................................................................................284
21.6.2 OSC module modes.........................................................................................................................................284
21.6.2.1 Low-frequency, high-gain mode..................................................................................................285
21.6.2.2 Low-frequency, low-power mode................................................................................................285
21.6.2.3 High-frequency, high-gain mode.................................................................................................285

21.6.2.4 High-frequency, low-power mode...............................................................................................286
21.6.3 Counter.............................................................................................................................................................286
21.6.4 Reference clock pin requirements....................................................................................................................286
Chapter 22
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)
22.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................287
22.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................................287
22.1.2 Block diagram..................................................................................................................................................287
22.1.3.1 Run mode.....................................................................................................................................288
22.1.3.2 Low-power modes (Wait or Stop)...............................................................................................288
22.2.1 CRC Data register (CRC_DATA)...................................................................................................................289
22.2.2 CRC Polynomial register (CRC_GPOLY)......................................................................................................290
22.2.3 CRC Control register (CRC_CTRL)................................................................................................................290
22.3.1 CRC initialization/reinitialization....................................................................................................................291
22.3.2 CRC calculations..............................................................................................................................................292
22.3.2.1 16-bit CRC...................................................................................................................................292
22.3.2.2 32-bit CRC...................................................................................................................................292
22.3.3 Transpose feature.............................................................................................................................................293
22.3.3.1 Types of transpose.......................................................................................................................293
22.3.4 CRC result complement...................................................................................................................................295
Chapter 23
Interrupt (IRQ)
23.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................297
23.2 Features...........................................................................................................................................................................297
23.2.1 Pin configuration options.................................................................................................................................298
23.2.2 Edge and level sensitivity................................................................................................................................299

23.3 Interrupt pin request register...........................................................................................................................................299
23.3.1 Interrupt Pin Request Status and Control Register (IRQ_SC).........................................................................299
Chapter 24
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
24.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................301
24.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................................301
24.1.2 Block Diagram.................................................................................................................................................302
24.2 External Signal Description............................................................................................................................................302
24.2.1 Analog Power (VDDA)...................................................................................................................................303
24.2.2 Analog Ground (VSSA)...................................................................................................................................303
24.2.3 Voltage Reference High (VREFH)..................................................................................................................303
24.2.4 Voltage Reference Low (VREFL)...................................................................................................................303
24.2.5 Analog Channel Inputs (ADx).........................................................................................................................303
24.3 ADC Control Registers...................................................................................................................................................304
24.3.1 Status and Control Register 1 (ADC_SC1)......................................................................................................304
24.3.5 Conversion Result Register (ADC_R).............................................................................................................311
24.3.6 Compare Value Register (ADC_CV)..............................................................................................................312
24.3.7 Pin Control 1 Register (ADC_APCTL1).........................................................................................................313
24.4.1 Clock select and divide control........................................................................................................................314
24.4.2 Input select and pin control..............................................................................................................................315
24.4.3 Hardware trigger..............................................................................................................................................315
24.4.4 Conversion control...........................................................................................................................................316
24.4.4.1 Initiating conversions...................................................................................................................316
24.4.4.2 Completing conversions...............................................................................................................316

24.4.4.3 Aborting conversions...................................................................................................................317
24.4.4.4 Power control...............................................................................................................................317
24.4.4.5 Sample time and total conversion time........................................................................................317
24.4.5 Automatic compare function............................................................................................................................319
24.4.6 FIFO operation.................................................................................................................................................320
24.4.7 MCU wait mode operation...............................................................................................................................324
24.4.8 MCU Stop mode operation..............................................................................................................................324
24.4.8.1 Stop mode with ADACK disabled...............................................................................................324
24.4.8.2 Stop mode with ADACK enabled................................................................................................324
24.5 Initialization information................................................................................................................................................325
24.5.1 ADC module initialization example................................................................................................................325
24.5.1.1 Initialization sequence..................................................................................................................325
24.5.1.2 Pseudo-code example...................................................................................................................326
24.5.2 ADC FIFO module initialization example.......................................................................................................326
24.5.2.1 Pseudo-code example...................................................................................................................327
24.6 Application information..................................................................................................................................................328
24.6.1 External pins and routing.................................................................................................................................328
24.6.1.1 Analog supply pins.......................................................................................................................328
24.6.1.2 Analog reference pins..................................................................................................................328
24.6.1.3 Analog input pins.........................................................................................................................329
24.6.2 Sources of error................................................................................................................................................330
24.6.2.1 Sampling error..............................................................................................................................330
24.6.2.2 Pin leakage error..........................................................................................................................330
24.6.2.3 Noise-induced errors....................................................................................................................330
24.6.2.4 Code width and quantization error...............................................................................................331
24.6.2.5 Linearity errors.............................................................................................................................332
24.6.2.6 Code jitter, non-monotonicity, and missing codes.......................................................................332

Chapter 25
Analog comparator (ACMP)
25.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................335
25.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................................335
25.1.2.1 Operation in Wait mode...............................................................................................................336
25.1.2.2 Operation in Stop mode...............................................................................................................336
25.1.2.3 Operation in Debug mode............................................................................................................336
25.1.3 Block diagram..................................................................................................................................................336
25.3.1 ACMP Control and Status Register (ACMPx_CS)..........................................................................................338
25.3.2 ACMP Control Register 0 (ACMPx_C0)........................................................................................................339
25.5 Setup and operation of ACMP........................................................................................................................................341
25.6 Resets..............................................................................................................................................................................342
25.7 Interrupts.........................................................................................................................................................................342
Chapter 26
FlexTimer Module (FTM)
26.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................343
26.1.1 FlexTimer philosophy......................................................................................................................................343
26.1.2 Features............................................................................................................................................................344
26.1.4 Block diagram..................................................................................................................................................346
26.2 FTM signal descriptions.................................................................................................................................................348
26.3.1 Memory map....................................................................................................................................................348

26.3.2 Register descriptions........................................................................................................................................348
26.3.3 Status And Control (FTMx_SC)......................................................................................................................351
26.3.4 Counter (FTMx_CNT).....................................................................................................................................353
26.3.5 Modulo (FTMx_MOD)....................................................................................................................................353
26.3.6 Channel (n) Status And Control (FTMx_CnSC)..............................................................................................354
26.3.7 Channel (n) Value (FTMx_CnV).....................................................................................................................356
26.3.8 Counter Initial Value (FTMx_CNTIN)............................................................................................................357
26.3.9 Capture And Compare Status (FTMx_STATUS)............................................................................................358
26.3.10 Features Mode Selection (FTMx_MODE)......................................................................................................360
26.3.11 Synchronization (FTMx_SYNC).....................................................................................................................361
26.3.12 Initial State For Channels Output (FTMx_OUTINIT).....................................................................................364
26.3.13 Output Mask (FTMx_OUTMASK).................................................................................................................365
26.3.14 Function For Linked Channels (FTMx_COMBINE).......................................................................................367
26.3.15 Deadtime Insertion Control (FTMx_DEADTIME).........................................................................................372
26.3.16 FTM External Trigger (FTMx_EXTTRIG).....................................................................................................373
26.3.17 Channels Polarity (FTMx_POL)......................................................................................................................375
26.3.18 Fault Mode Status (FTMx_FMS).....................................................................................................................377
26.3.19 Input Capture Filter Control (FTMx_FILTER)...............................................................................................379
26.3.20 Fault Control (FTMx_FLTCTRL)...................................................................................................................380
26.3.21 Configuration (FTMx_CONF).........................................................................................................................382
26.3.22 FTM Fault Input Polarity (FTMx_FLTPOL)...................................................................................................383
26.3.23 Synchronization Configuration (FTMx_SYNCONF)......................................................................................385
26.3.24 FTM Inverting Control (FTMx_INVCTRL)....................................................................................................387
26.3.25 FTM Software Output Control (FTMx_SWOCTRL)......................................................................................388
26.3.26 FTM PWM Load (FTMx_PWMLOAD).........................................................................................................390
26.4.1 Clock source.....................................................................................................................................................392
26.4.1.1 Counter clock source....................................................................................................................392
26.4.2 Prescaler...........................................................................................................................................................393

26.4.3 Counter.............................................................................................................................................................393
26.4.3.1 Up counting..................................................................................................................................393
26.4.3.2 Up-down counting........................................................................................................................396
26.4.3.3 Free running counter....................................................................................................................397
26.4.3.4 Counter reset................................................................................................................................398
26.4.3.5 When the TOF bit is set...............................................................................................................398
26.4.4 Input Capture mode..........................................................................................................................................398
26.4.4.1 Filter for Input Capture mode......................................................................................................400
26.4.5 Output Compare mode.....................................................................................................................................401
26.4.6 Edge-Aligned PWM (EPWM) mode...............................................................................................................402
26.4.7 Center-Aligned PWM (CPWM) mode............................................................................................................404
26.4.8 Combine mode.................................................................................................................................................406
26.4.8.1 Asymmetrical PWM....................................................................................................................413
26.4.9 Complementary mode......................................................................................................................................413
26.4.10 Registers updated from write buffers...............................................................................................................414
26.4.10.1 CNTIN register update.................................................................................................................414
26.4.10.2 MOD register update....................................................................................................................415
26.4.10.3 CnV register update.....................................................................................................................415
26.4.11 PWM synchronization......................................................................................................................................416
26.4.11.1 Hardware trigger..........................................................................................................................416
26.4.11.2 Software trigger............................................................................................................................417
26.4.11.3 Boundary cycle and loading points..............................................................................................418
26.4.11.4 MOD register synchronization.....................................................................................................419
26.4.11.5 CNTIN register synchronization..................................................................................................422
26.4.11.6 C(n)V and C(n+1)V register synchronization..............................................................................423
26.4.11.7 OUTMASK register synchronization..........................................................................................423
26.4.11.8 INVCTRL register synchronization.............................................................................................426
26.4.11.9 SWOCTRL register synchronization...........................................................................................427
26.4.11.10 FTM counter synchronization......................................................................................................429

26.4.12 Inverting...........................................................................................................................................................432
26.4.13 Software output control....................................................................................................................................434
26.4.14 Deadtime insertion...........................................................................................................................................436
26.4.14.1 Deadtime insertion corner cases..................................................................................................437
26.4.15 Output mask.....................................................................................................................................................439
26.4.16 Fault control.....................................................................................................................................................440
26.4.16.1 Automatic fault clearing...............................................................................................................442
26.4.16.2 Manual fault clearing...................................................................................................................442
26.4.16.3 Fault inputs polarity control.........................................................................................................443
26.4.17 Polarity control.................................................................................................................................................443
26.4.18 Initialization.....................................................................................................................................................444
26.4.19 Features priority...............................................................................................................................................444
26.4.20 Channel trigger output.....................................................................................................................................445
26.4.21 Initialization trigger..........................................................................................................................................446
26.4.22 Capture Test mode...........................................................................................................................................448
26.4.23 Dual Edge Capture mode.................................................................................................................................449
26.4.23.1 One-Shot Capture mode...............................................................................................................450
26.4.23.2 Continuous Capture mode............................................................................................................451
26.4.23.3 Pulse width measurement.............................................................................................................451
26.4.23.4 Period measurement.....................................................................................................................453
26.4.23.5 Read coherency mechanism.........................................................................................................455
26.4.24 Debug mode.....................................................................................................................................................456
26.4.25 Intermediate load..............................................................................................................................................457
26.4.26 Global time base (GTB)...................................................................................................................................459
26.4.26.1 Enabling the global time base (GTB)..........................................................................................460
26.5 Reset overview................................................................................................................................................................461
26.6 FTM Interrupts................................................................................................................................................................462
26.6.1 Timer Overflow Interrupt.................................................................................................................................463
26.6.2 Channel (n) Interrupt........................................................................................................................................463

26.6.3 Fault Interrupt..................................................................................................................................................463
Chapter 27
Pulse Width Timer (PWT)
27.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................465
27.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................................465
27.1.3 Block diagram..................................................................................................................................................466
27.2 PWT signal description...................................................................................................................................................467
27.2.1 PWTIN[3:0] - Pulse Width Timer Capture Inputs...........................................................................................467
27.2.2 ALTCLK- Alternative Clock Source for Counter...........................................................................................467
27.3 Memory Map and Register Descriptions........................................................................................................................467
27.3.1 Pulse Width Timer Register 1 (PWT_R1).......................................................................................................468
27.3.2 Pulse Width Timer Register 2 (PWT_R2).......................................................................................................470
27.4 Functional Description....................................................................................................................................................471
27.4.1 PWT Counter and PWT Clock Prescaler.........................................................................................................471
27.4.2 Edge detection and capture control .................................................................................................................471
27.5 Reset................................................................................................................................................................................475
27.5.1 General.............................................................................................................................................................475
27.5.2 Description of reset operation..........................................................................................................................475
27.6 Interrupts.........................................................................................................................................................................475
27.6.1 Description of interrupt operation....................................................................................................................475
27.6.2 Application examples.......................................................................................................................................476
Chapter 28
Periodic Interrupt Timer (PIT)
28.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................479
28.1.1 Block diagram..................................................................................................................................................479
28.1.2 Features............................................................................................................................................................480
28.2 Signal description............................................................................................................................................................480

28.3 Memory map/register description...................................................................................................................................481
28.3.1 PIT Module Control Register (PIT_MCR)......................................................................................................481
28.3.2 Timer Load Value Register (PIT_LDVALn)...................................................................................................482
28.3.3 Current Timer Value Register (PIT_CVALn).................................................................................................483
28.3.4 Timer Control Register (PIT_TCTRLn)..........................................................................................................483
28.3.5 Timer Flag Register (PIT_TFLGn)..................................................................................................................484
28.4.1 General operation.............................................................................................................................................485
28.4.1.1 Timers..........................................................................................................................................485
28.4.1.2 Debug mode.................................................................................................................................486
28.4.2 Interrupts..........................................................................................................................................................486
28.4.3 Chained timers.................................................................................................................................................487
28.5 Initialization and application information.......................................................................................................................487
28.6 Example configuration for chained timers......................................................................................................................488
Chapter 29
Real-Time Counter (RTC)
29.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................491
29.2 Features...........................................................................................................................................................................491
29.2.1.1 Wait mode....................................................................................................................................491
29.2.1.2 Stop modes...................................................................................................................................492
29.2.2 Block diagram..................................................................................................................................................492
29.4.1 RTC Status and Control Register (RTC_SC)..................................................................................................493
29.4.2 RTC Modulo Register (RTC_MOD)...............................................................................................................495
29.4.3 RTC Counter Register (RTC_CNT)................................................................................................................495
29.5.1 RTC operation example...................................................................................................................................497

Chapter 30
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
30.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................499
30.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................................499
30.1.3 Block diagrams................................................................................................................................................501
30.1.3.1 SPI system block diagram............................................................................................................501
30.1.3.2 SPI module block diagram...........................................................................................................501
30.2.1 SPSCK — SPI Serial Clock.............................................................................................................................503
30.2.2 MOSI — Master Data Out, Slave Data In.......................................................................................................504
30.2.3 MISO — Master Data In, Slave Data Out.......................................................................................................504
30.2.4 SS — Slave Select............................................................................................................................................504
30.3 Memory map/register definition.....................................................................................................................................505
30.3.1 SPI Control Register 1 (SPIx_C1)...................................................................................................................505
30.3.2 SPI Control Register 2 (SPIx_C2)...................................................................................................................507
30.3.3 SPI Baud Rate Register (SPIx_BR).................................................................................................................508
30.3.4 SPI Status Register (SPIx_S)...........................................................................................................................509
30.3.5 SPI Data Register (SPIx_D).............................................................................................................................510
30.3.6 SPI Match Register (SPIx_M)..........................................................................................................................511
30.4.1 General.............................................................................................................................................................511
30.4.2 Master mode.....................................................................................................................................................512
30.4.3 Slave mode.......................................................................................................................................................513
30.4.4 SPI clock formats.............................................................................................................................................515
30.4.5 SPI baud rate generation..................................................................................................................................518
30.4.6 Special features................................................................................................................................................518
30.4.6.1 SS Output.....................................................................................................................................518

30.4.6.2 Bidirectional mode (MOMI or SISO)..........................................................................................519
30.4.7 Error conditions................................................................................................................................................520
30.4.7.1 Mode fault error...........................................................................................................................520
30.4.8 Low-power mode options................................................................................................................................521
30.4.8.1 SPI in Run mode..........................................................................................................................521
30.4.8.2 SPI in Wait mode.........................................................................................................................521
30.4.8.3 SPI in Stop mode..........................................................................................................................522
30.4.9 Reset.................................................................................................................................................................522
30.4.10 Interrupts..........................................................................................................................................................523
30.4.10.1 MODF..........................................................................................................................................523
30.4.10.2 SPRF............................................................................................................................................523
30.4.10.3 SPTEF..........................................................................................................................................524
30.4.10.4 SPMF...........................................................................................................................................524
30.4.10.5 Asynchronous interrupt in low-power modes..............................................................................524
30.5.1 Initialization sequence......................................................................................................................................524
30.5.2 Pseudo-Code Example.....................................................................................................................................525
Chapter 31
Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
31.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................529
31.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................................529
31.1.3 Block diagram..................................................................................................................................................530
31.2 I2C signal descriptions....................................................................................................................................................531
31.3 Memory map/register definition.....................................................................................................................................532
31.3.1 I2C Address Register 1 (I2Cx_A1)..................................................................................................................532
31.3.2 I2C Frequency Divider register (I2Cx_F)........................................................................................................533
31.3.3 I2C Control Register 1 (I2Cx_C1)...................................................................................................................534
31.3.4 I2C Status register (I2Cx_S)............................................................................................................................535

31.3.5 I2C Data I/O register (I2Cx_D).......................................................................................................................537
31.3.6 I2C Control Register 2 (I2Cx_C2)...................................................................................................................538
31.3.7 I2C Programmable Input Glitch Filter register (I2Cx_FLT)...........................................................................539
31.3.8 I2C Range Address register (I2Cx_RA)..........................................................................................................540
31.3.9 I2C SMBus Control and Status register (I2Cx_SMB).....................................................................................541
31.3.10 I2C Address Register 2 (I2Cx_A2)..................................................................................................................542
31.3.11 I2C SCL Low Timeout Register High (I2Cx_SLTH)......................................................................................543
31.3.12 I2C SCL Low Timeout Register Low (I2Cx_SLTL).......................................................................................543
31.4.1 I2C protocol.....................................................................................................................................................543
31.4.1.1 START signal..............................................................................................................................544
31.4.1.2 Slave address transmission...........................................................................................................544
31.4.1.3 Data transfers...............................................................................................................................545
31.4.1.4 STOP signal.................................................................................................................................546
31.4.1.5 Repeated START signal...............................................................................................................546
31.4.1.6 Arbitration procedure...................................................................................................................546
31.4.1.7 Clock synchronization..................................................................................................................546
31.4.1.8 Handshaking.................................................................................................................................547
31.4.1.9 Clock stretching...........................................................................................................................547
31.4.1.10 I2C divider and hold values.........................................................................................................548
31.4.2 10-bit address...................................................................................................................................................549
31.4.2.1 Master-transmitter addresses a slave-receiver.............................................................................549
31.4.2.2 Master-receiver addresses a slave-transmitter.............................................................................550
31.4.3 Address matching.............................................................................................................................................550
31.4.4 System management bus specification............................................................................................................551
31.4.4.1 Timeouts.......................................................................................................................................551
31.4.4.2 FAST ACK and NACK...............................................................................................................553
31.4.5 Resets...............................................................................................................................................................554

31.4.6 Interrupts..........................................................................................................................................................554
31.4.6.1 Byte transfer interrupt..................................................................................................................555
31.4.6.2 Address detect interrupt...............................................................................................................555
31.4.6.3 Stop Detect Interrupt....................................................................................................................555
31.4.6.4 Exit from low-power/stop modes.................................................................................................555
31.4.6.5 Arbitration lost interrupt..............................................................................................................555
31.4.6.6 Timeout interrupt in SMBus........................................................................................................556
31.4.7 Programmable input glitch filter......................................................................................................................556
31.4.8 Address matching wake-up..............................................................................................................................557
Chapter 32
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
32.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................561
32.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................................561
32.1.3 Block diagram..................................................................................................................................................562
32.2 UART signal descriptions...............................................................................................................................................564
32.2.1 Detailed signal descriptions.............................................................................................................................564
32.3.1 UART Baud Rate Register: High (UARTx_BDH)..........................................................................................565
32.3.2 UART Baud Rate Register: Low (UARTx_BDL)...........................................................................................566
32.3.3 UART Control Register 1 (UARTx_C1).........................................................................................................566
32.3.5 UART Status Register 1 (UARTx_S1)............................................................................................................569
32.3.6 UART Status Register 2 (UARTx_S2)............................................................................................................571
32.3.8 UART Data Register (UARTx_D)...................................................................................................................574
32.4.1 Baud rate generation........................................................................................................................................575

32.4.2 Transmitter functional description...................................................................................................................576
32.4.2.1 Send break and queued idle.........................................................................................................576
32.4.3 Receiver functional description.......................................................................................................................577
32.4.3.1 Data sampling technique..............................................................................................................578
32.4.3.2 Receiver wake-up operation.........................................................................................................579
32.4.4 Interrupts and status flags................................................................................................................................580
32.4.5 Baud rate tolerance...........................................................................................................................................581
32.4.5.1 Slow data tolerance......................................................................................................................582
32.4.5.2 Fast data tolerance........................................................................................................................583
32.4.6 Additional UART functions.............................................................................................................................584
32.4.6.1 8- and 9-bit data modes................................................................................................................584
32.4.6.2 Stop mode operation....................................................................................................................585
32.4.6.3 Loop mode...................................................................................................................................585
32.4.6.4 Single-wire operation...................................................................................................................585
Chapter 33
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)
33.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................587
33.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................................587
33.1.3 GPIO signal descriptions.................................................................................................................................588
33.1.3.1 Detailed signal description...........................................................................................................588
33.2.1 GPIO/FGPIO register bits assignment.............................................................................................................589
33.2.2 Port Data Output Register (GPIOx_PDOR).....................................................................................................590
33.2.3 Port Set Output Register (GPIOx_PSOR)........................................................................................................591
33.2.4 Port Clear Output Register (GPIOx_PCOR)....................................................................................................591
33.2.5 Port Toggle Output Register (GPIOx_PTOR).................................................................................................592
33.2.6 Port Data Input Register (GPIOx_PDIR).........................................................................................................592
33.2.7 Port Data Direction Register (GPIOx_PDDR).................................................................................................593

33.2.8 Port Input Disable Register (GPIOx_PIDR)....................................................................................................593
33.3 FGPIO memory map and register definition..................................................................................................................593
33.3.1 GPIO/FGPIO register bits assignment.............................................................................................................594
33.3.2 Port Data Output Register (FGPIOx_PDOR)..................................................................................................595
33.3.3 Port Set Output Register (FGPIOx_PSOR).....................................................................................................595
33.3.4 Port Clear Output Register (FGPIOx_PCOR).................................................................................................596
33.3.5 Port Toggle Output Register (FGPIOx_PTOR)...............................................................................................596
33.3.6 Port Data Input Register (FGPIOx_PDIR).......................................................................................................597
33.3.7 Port Data Direction Register (FGPIOx_PDDR)..............................................................................................597
33.3.8 Port Input Disable Register (FGPIOx_PIDR)..................................................................................................598
33.4.1 General-purpose input......................................................................................................................................598
33.4.2 General-purpose output....................................................................................................................................598
33.4.3 IOPORT...........................................................................................................................................................599
Chapter 34
Keyboard Interrupts (KBI)
34.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................601
34.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................................601
34.1.2 Modes of Operation.........................................................................................................................................601
34.1.2.1 KBI in Wait mode........................................................................................................................601
34.1.2.2 KBI in Stop modes.......................................................................................................................602
34.1.3 Block Diagram.................................................................................................................................................602
34.2 External signals description............................................................................................................................................602
34.4 Memory Map and Registers............................................................................................................................................603
34.4.1 KBI Status and Control Register (KBIx_SC)..................................................................................................604
34.4.2 KBIx Pin Enable Register (KBIx_PE).............................................................................................................604
34.4.3 KBIx Edge Select Register (KBIx_ES)...........................................................................................................605

34.5 Functional Description....................................................................................................................................................605
34.5.1 Edge-only sensitivity........................................................................................................................................606
34.5.2 Edge and level sensitivity................................................................................................................................606
34.5.3 KBI Pullup Resistor.........................................................................................................................................606
34.5.4 KBI initialization..............................................................................................................................................606

Chapter 1
About This Document
1.1 Overview
1.1.1 Purpose
This document describes the features, architecture, and programming model of the
Freescale KE04 microcontroller.
1.1.2 Audience
This document is primarily for system architects and software application developers
who are using or considering using the KE04 microcontroller in a system.
1.2 Conventions
1.2.1 Numbering systems

The following suffixes identify different numbering systems:
This suffix Identifies a
b Binary number. For example, the binary equivalent of the
number 5 is written 101b. In some cases, binary numbers are
shown with the prefix 0b.
d Decimal number. Decimal numbers are followed by this suffix
only when the possibility of confusion exists. In general,
decimal numbers are shown without a suffix.
h Hexadecimal number. For example, the hexadecimal
equivalent of the number 60 is written 3Ch. In some cases,
hexadecimal numbers are shown with the prefix 0x.

Conventions
1.2.2 Typographic notation

The following typographic notation is used throughout this document:
Example Description
placeholder, x Items in italics are placeholders for information that you provide. Italicized text is also used for
the titles of publications and for emphasis. Plain lowercase letters are also used as
placeholders for single letters and numbers.
code Fixed-width type indicates text that must be typed exactly as shown. It is used for instruction
mnemonics, directives, symbols, subcommands, parameters, and operators. Fixed-width type
is also used for example code. Instruction mnemonics and directives in text and tables are
shown in all caps; for example, BSR.
SR[SCM] A mnemonic in brackets represents a named field in a register. This example refers to the
Scaling Mode (SCM) field in the Status Register (SR).
REVNO[6:4], XAD[7:0] Numbers in brackets and separated by a colon represent either:
• A subset of a register's named field
For example, REVNO[6:4] refers to bits 6–4 that are part of the COREREV field that
occupies bits 6–0 of the REVNO register.
• A continuous range of individual signals of a bus
For example, XAD[7:0] refers to signals 7–0 of the XAD bus.
1.2.3 Special terms

The following terms have special meanings:
Term Meaning
asserted Refers to the state of a signal as follows:
• An active-high signal is asserted when high (1).
• An active-low signal is asserted when low (0).
deasserted Refers to the state of a signal as follows:
• An active-high signal is deasserted when low (0).
• An active-low signal is deasserted when high (1).
In some cases, deasserted signals are described as negated.

reserved Refers to a memory space, register, or field that is either
reserved for future use or for which, when written to, the
module or chip behavior is unpredictable.

Chapter 2
Introduction
2.1 Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the Kinetis KE04 product family of ARM®
Cortex®-M0+ MCUs. It also presents high-level descriptions of the modules available on
the devices covered by this document.
2.2 Module functional categories

The modules on this device are grouped into functional categories. The following
sections describe the modules assigned to each category in more detail.
Table 2-1. Module functional categories
Module category Description
ARM Cortex-M0+ core • 32-bit MCU core from ARM’s Cortex-M class, 1.77 CoreMark®/MHz from
single-cycle access memories, 48 MHz CPU frequency
System • System integration module (SIM)
• Power management and mode controllers (PMC)
• Miscellaneous control module (MCM)
• Bit manipulation engine (BME)
• Peripheral bridge (AIPS)
• Watchdog (WDOG)
Memories • Internal memories include:
• Up to 8 KB flash memory
• Up to 1 KB SRAM
Clocks • External crystal oscillator or resonator
• Low range: 31.25–39.0625 kHz
• High range: 4– 24 MHz
• External square wave input clock
• Internal clock references
• 31.25 to 39.0625 kHz oscillator
• 1 kHz LPO oscillator
• Frequency-locked loop (FLL) range: 40–50 MHz
Table continues on the next page...

Module functional categories
Table 2-1. Module functional categories (continued)

Module category Description
Security • Watchdog (WDOG) with independent clock source
• Cyclic redundancy check (CRC) module for error detection
Analog • One 12-bit analog-to-digital converters (ADC) with up to 12 channels
• Two analog comparators (ACMP) with internal 6-bit digital-to-analog
converter (DAC)
Timers • One 6-channel FlexTimer (FTM) with full function
• One 2-channel FTM with basic TPM function
• 2-channel periodic interrupt timer (PIT)
• Real time clock (RTC)
• One pulse width timer (PWT)
• System tick timer (SysTick)
Communications • One 8-bit serial peripheral interface (SPI)
• One inter-integrated circuit (I2C) module
• One universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) module
Human-Machine Interfaces (HMI) • General purpose input/output (GPIO) controller
• Two keyboard Interrupt (KBI)
• Interrupt (IRQ)
2.2.1 ARM Cortex-M0+ core modules

The following core modules are available on this device.
Table 2-2. Core modules
Module Description
ARM Cortex-M0+ The ARM Cortex-M0+ is the newest member of the Cortex M Series of processors
targeting microcontroller applications focused on very cost sensitive, deterministic,
interrupt driven environments. The Cortex M0+ processor is based on the ARMv6
Architecture and Thumb®-2 ISA and is 100% instruction set compatible with its
predecessor, the Cortex-M0 core, and upward compatible to Cortex-M3 and M4
cores.
The ARM Cortex-M0+ improvements include an ARMv6 Thumb-2 DSP, ported
from the ARMv6-A/R profile architectures, that provide 32-bit instructions with
SIMD (single instruction multiple data) DSP style multiply-accumulates and
saturating arithmetic to support single cycle 32x32 multiplier.
Nested vectored interrupt controller The ARMv6-M exception model and nested-vectored interrupt controller (NVIC)
(NVIC) implement a relocatable vector table supporting many external interrupts, a single
non-maskable interrupt (NMI), and priority levels.
The NVIC replaces shadow registers with equivalent system and simplified
programmability. The NVIC contains the address of the function to execute for a
particular handler. The address is fetched via the instruction port allowing parallel
register stacking and look-up. The first sixteen entries are allocated to ARM
internal sources with the others mapping to MCU-defined interrupts.
Asynchronous wakeup interrupt The primary function of the Asynchronous Wake-up Interrupt Controller (AWIC) is
controller (AWIC) to detect asynchronous wake-up events in stop modes and signal to clock control
logic to resume system clocking. After clock restart, the NVIC observes the
pending interrupt and performs the normal interrupt or event processing.

Chapter 2 Introduction
Table 2-2. Core modules (continued)

Module Description
Single-cycle I/O port (IOPORT) For high-speed, single-cycle access to peripherals, the Cortex-M0+ processor
implements a dedicated single-cycle I/O port. On this device, fast GPIO (FGPIO) is
implemented on IOPORT interface.
Debug interfaces Most of this device's debug is based on the ARM CoreSight™ architecture. One
debug interface is supported:
• Serial Wire Debug (SWD)
2.2.2 System modules

The following system modules are available on this device.
Table 2-3. System modules
Module Description
System integration module (SIM) The SIM includes integration logic and several module configuration settings.
Power management controller (PMC) The PMC provides the user with multiple power options. Multiple modes are
supported that allow the user to optimize power consumption for the level of
functionality needed. Includes power-on-reset (POR) and integrated low voltage
detect (LVD) with reset (brownout) capability and selectable LVD trip points.
Miscellaneous control module (MCM) The MCM includes integration logic and details.
Peripheral bridge (AIPS-Lite) The peripheral bridge converts the ARM AHB interface to an interface to access a
majority of peripherals on the device.
Watchdog (WDOG) The WDOG monitors internal system operation and forces a reset in case of
failure. It can run from an independent 1 kHz low-power oscillator with a
programmable refresh window to detect deviations in program flow or system
frequency.
Bit manipulation engine (BME) The BME provides hardware support for atomic read-modify-write memory
operations to the peripheral address space in Cortex-M0+ based microcontrollers.
2.2.3 Memories and memory interfaces

The following memories and memory interfaces are available on this device.
Table 2-4. Memories and memory interfaces
Module Description
Flash memory (FTMRE) Flash memory — up to 8 KB of the non-volatile flash memory that can execute
program code.
Flash memory controller (FMC) FMC is a memory acceleration unit that provides an interface between Cortex M0+
core and the 32-bit program flash memory. The FMC contains one 32-bit

Table 2-4. Memories and memory interfaces (continued)

Module Description
speculation buffer and one 32-byte cache that can accelerate instruction fetch and
flash access.
SRAM Up to 1 KB internal system RAM, supporting bit operation through BME module or
aliased bit-band domain.
2.2.4 Clocks
The following clock modules are available on this device.
Table 2-5. Clock modules
Module Description
Internal Clock Source (ICS) ICS module containing an internal reference clock (ICSIRCLK) and a frequency-
locked-loop (FLL).
System oscillator (OSC) The system oscillator, in conjunction with an external crystal or resonator,
generates a reference clock for the MCU.
Low-Power Oscillator (LPO) The PMC module contains a 1 kHz low-power oscillator which acts as a standalone
low-frequency clock source in all modes.
2.2.5 Security and integrity modules

The following security and integrity modules are available on this device:
Table 2-6. Security and integrity modules
Module Description
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) CRC generates 16/32-bit CRC code for error detection.
Watchdog (WDOG) The WDOG monitors internal system operation and forces a reset in case of
failure. It can run from an independent 1 kHz low-power oscillator with a
programmable refresh window to detect deviations in program flow or system
frequency.
2.2.6 Analog modules

The following analog modules are available on this device:

Table 2-7. Analog modules

Module Description
Analog-to-digital converters (ADC) 12-bit successive-approximation ADC module with up to 12 channels.
Analog comparators (ACMP) Two comparators with support of analog input voltages across the full range of the
supply voltage and CPU interrupt. ACMP0/1 is further capable to trigger an ADC
acquisition and FTM update.
6-bit digital-to-analog converters (DAC) 64-tap resistor ladder network which provides a selectable voltage reference for
comparator.
2.2.7 Timer modules

The following timer modules are available on this device:
Table 2-8. Timer modules
Module Description
FlexTimer modules (FTM) • Selectable FTM source clock, supporting separate timer clock up to 48 MHz,
programmable prescaler
• 16-bit counter supporting free-running or initial/final value, and counting is up
or up-down
• Input capture, output compare, and edge-aligned and center-aligned PWM
modes
• Operation of FTM channels as pairs with equal outputs, pairs with
complementary outputs, or independent channels with independent outputs
• Deadtime insertion is available for each complementary pair
• Software control of PWM outputs
• Up to two fault inputs for global fault control
• Configurable channel polarity
• Programmable interrupt on input capture, reference compare, overflowed
counter, or detected fault condition
Periodic interrupt timers (PIT) • One general purpose interrupt timer
• Interrupt timers for triggering ADC conversions
• 32-bit counter resolution
• Clocked by bus clock frequency
Real-time counter (RTC) • 16-bit up-counter
• 16-bit modulo match limit
• Software controllable periodic interrupt on match
• Software selectable clock sources for input to prescaler with programmable
16-bit prescaler
• Bus clock
• IRC clock (31.25~39.0625 kHz)
• LPO (~1 kHz)
• System oscilator output clock
Pulse Width Timer (PWT) • Automatic measurement of pulse width with 16-bit resolution
• Separate positive and negative pulse width measurements
• Programmable triggering edge for starting measurement
• Programmable measuring time between successive alternating edges, rising
edges or falling edges
• Programmable pre-scaler from clock input as 16-bit counter time base
• Two selectable clock sources, supporting separate timer clock up to 48 MHz

Table 2-8. Timer modules

Module Description
• Four selectable pulse inputs
• Programmable interrupt generation upon pulse width value updated and
counter overflow
2.2.8 Communication interfaces

The following communication interfaces are available on this device:
Table 2-9. Communication modules
Module Description
Serial peripheral interface (SPI) One SPI synchronous serial bus for communication to an external device.
Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) One I2C module for inter device communications. Also supports the System
Management Bus (SMBus) Specification, version 2.
Universal asynchronous receiver/ One asynchronous serial bus communication interface (UART) modules with
transmitters (UART) optional 13-bit break, full duplex non-return to zero (NRZ), and LIN extension
support.
2.2.9 Human-machine interfaces

The following human-machine interfaces (HMI) are available on this device:
Table 2-10. HMI modules
Module Description
General purpose input/output (GPIO) Up to 22 general purpose input or output (GPIO) pins.
Keyboard Interrupts (KBI) Two KBI modules to support pin interrupts.
Interrupt (IRQ) IRQ module provides a maskable interrupt input.
2.2.10 Orderable part numbers

The following table summarizes the part numbers of the devices covered by this
document.

Table 2-11. Orderable part numbers summary

Freescale part number CPU Pin count Package Total flash RAM Temperature range
frequency memory
MKE04Z8VTG4(R) 48 MHz 16 TSSOP 8 KB 1 KB -40 to 105 °C
MKE04Z8VWJ4(R) 48 MHz 20 SOIC 8 KB 1 KB -40 to 105 °C
MKE04Z8VFK4(R) 48 MHz 24 QFN 8 KB 1 KB -40 to 105 °C


Chapter 3
Chip Configuration
3.1 Introduction
This chapter provides details on the individual modules of the microcontroller. It
includes:
• Module block diagrams showing immediate connections within the device
• Specific module-to-module interactions not necessarily discussed in the individual
module chapters
• Links for more information
3.2 Module to Module Interconnects
3.2.1 Interconnection overview

The following table captures the module-to-module interconnections for this device.
Table 3-1. Module-to-module interconnects
Peripheral Signal — to peripheral Use case Control Comm
ent
FTM2 INITTRG, to ADC (Trigger) ADC Triggering SIM_SOPT[ADHWT] —
MatchTRG
PIT TIF0,TIF1 to ADC (Trigger) ADC Triggering SIM_SOPT[ADHWT] —
RTC RTC Overflow to ADC (Trigger) ADC Triggering SIM_SOPT[ADHWT] —
FTM0 INITTRG to ADC (Trigger) ADC Triggering SIM_SOPT[ADHWT] —
ACMP0 CMP0_OUT to ADC (Trigger) ADC Triggering SIM_SOPT[ADHWT] —
ACMP1 CMP1_OUT to ADC (Trigger) ADC Triggering SIM_SOPT[ADHWT] —
RTC RTC Overflow to FTM0_CH0 FTM0 capture input SIM_SOPT[FTMIC] —
ACMP0 CMP0_OUT to FTM0_CH0 FTM0 capture input SIM_SOPT[FTMIC] —
ACMP1 CMP1_OUT to FTM0_CH0 FTM0 capture input SIM_SOPT[FTMIC] —

Module to Module Interconnects
Table 3-1. Module-to-module interconnects (continued)

Peripheral Signal — to peripheral Use case Control Comm
ent
ACMP0 CMP0_OUT to UART0_RxD UART0_RxD filter SIM_SOPT[RXDFE] —
ACMP1 CMP1_OUT to UART0_RxD UART0_RxD filter SIM_SOPT[RXDFE] —
UART0 UART0_TxD to Modulated by UART modulation SIM_SOPT[TXDME] —
FTM0 CH0
UART0 UART0_RxD to Tagged by FTM0 UART modulation SIM_SOPT[RXDCE] —
CH1
ACMP0 CMP0_OUT to FTM2 Trigger0 FTM2 Trigger input SIM_SOPT[ACTRG] and —
FTM2_SYNC[TRIG0]
ACMP1 CMP1_OUT to FTM2 Trigger0 FTM2 Trigger input SIM_SOPT[ACTRG] and —
FTM2_SYNC[TRIG0]
FTM0 FTM0 CH0 to FTM2 Trigger1 FTM2 Trigger input FTM2_SYNC[TRIG1] —
Output
FTM2 FTMSYNC to FTM2 Trigger2 FTM2 Trigger input SIM_SOPT[FTMSYNC] and —
FTM2_SYNC[TRIG2]
ACMP0 CMP0_OUT to FTM2 Fault0 FTM2 fault input FTM2_FLTCTRL[FAULT0EN] —
EXTRG_IN EXTRG_IN to FTM2 Fault1 FTM2 fault input FTM2_FLTCTRL[FAULT1EN] PTA6
EXTRG_IN EXTRG_IN to FTM2 Fault2 FTM2 fault input FTM2_FLTCTRL[FAULT2EN] PTA7
ACMP1 CMP1_OUT to FTM2 Fault3 FTM2 fault input FTM2_FLTCTRL[FAULT3EN] —
EXTRG_IN EXTRG_IN to PWT PWT_IN0 PWT_R1[PINSEL] PTC4
EXTRG_IN EXTRG_IN to PWT PWT_IN1 PWT_R1[PINSEL] PTB0
ACMP0 CMP0_OUT to PWT PWT_IN2 PWT_R1[PINSEL]
ACMP1 CMP1_OUT to PWT PWT_IN3 PWT_R1[PINSEL]

Chapter 3 Chip Configuration
RXDFE[1:0] FTMIC[1:0]
+
ACMP0
–
+
ACMP1
–
in0 PWT_IN0
in1 PWT_IN1
PWT in2
in3
ovf RTC
2
tif PITch0 1
ADC trg rxd
UART0 0 UART0_RX
tif PITch1 txd
0
UART0_TX
1
3
2
inittrg FTM0 ch0 1
ch1 1 0 FTM0_CH0
0 FTM0_CH1
0 inittrg fault0
FTM2_FLT1
ovf DELAY 1 matchtrg fault1
fault2 FTM2_FLT2
FTM2
fault3
Bus CLK 1 1
trigger0
2N trigger1 0
trigger2
ADHWT[2:0] BUSREF RXDCE ACTRG FTMSYNC TXDME
BUSOUT
CLKOE
Figure 3-1. System interconnection diagram
3.2.2 Analog reference options

Several analog blocks have selectable reference voltages as shown in Table 3-2. These
options allow analog peripherals to share or have separate analog references. Care must
be taken when selecting analog references to avoid cross talk noise.
Table 3-2. Analog reference options
Module Reference option Comment/ reference selection
12-bit ADC • VREFH VREFH is internally connected to VDD, VREFL is internally connected to
• VREFL VSS.
ACMP0 • VDDA Selected by ACMP0_C1[DACREF] or ACMP1_C1[DACREF]
• Bandgap
ACMP1

Module to Module Interconnects
3.2.3 ACMP output capture

When SIM_SOPT[RXDFE] is set, one of the ACMP outputs can be selected to work as a
filtered receiver channel of UART0. When SIM_SOPT[FTM IC] is set, one of the ACMP
outputs can be selected to be captured by FTM0_CH0. When SIM_SOPT[ACTRG] is
set, one of the ACMP outputs can be selected to work as FTM2 trigger input.
3.2.4 UART0_TX modulation

UART0_TX can be modulated by FTM0 channel 0 output. When SIM_SOPT[TXDME]
is set, the UART0_TX is gated by FTM0 channel0 output through an AND gate, and then
mapped to UART0_TX pinout. When this field is clear, the UART0_TX is directly
mapped on the pinout. To enable IR modulation function, both FTM0_CH0 and UART
must be active. The FTM0_CNT and FTM0_MOD registers specify the period of the
PWM, and the FTM0_C0V register specifies the duty cycle of the PWM. Then, when
SIM_SOPT[TXDME] is enabled, each data transmitted via UART0_TX from UART0 is
modulated by the FTM0 channel 0 output, and the FTM0_CH0 pin is released to other
shared functions regardless of the configuration of FTM0 pin reassignment.
TX
UART0 0 UART0_TX
FTM0_CH0 1
PORT LOGIC
TXDME
Figure 3-2. IR modulation diagram
3.2.5 UART0_RX capture

UART0_RX pin is selectable connected to UART0 module directly or tagged to FTM0
channel 1. When SIM_SOPT[RXDCE] is set, the UART0_RX pin is connected to both
UART0 and FTM0 channel 1, and the FTM0_CH1 pin is released to other shared
functions regardless of the configuration of FTM0 pin reassignment. When this field is
clear, the UART0_RX pin is connected to UART0 only.

RX
UART0 UART0_RX
1
FTM0_CH1
FTM0_CH1
0
RXDCE
Figure 3-3. UART0_RX capture function diagram
3.2.6 UART0_RX filter

When SIM_SOPT[RXDFE] is clear, the UART0_RX pin is connected to UART0 module
directly. When this field is correctly set, the ACMP output can be connected to the
receive channel of UART0. To enable UART0_RX filter function, both UART0 and
ACMP must be active. If this function is active, the UART0 external UART0_RX pin is
released to other shared functions regardless of the configuration of UART0 pin
reassignment. When UART0_RX capture function is active, the ACMP output is injected
to FTM0 channel 1 as well.
0 UART0_RX
RX ACMP0
UART0 1 ++
2 +
ACMP1
To UART0_RX
Capture Function
RXDFE From Internal or External
Reference Voltage
Figure 3-4. IR demodulation diagram
3.2.7 RTC capture

RTC overflow may be captured by FTM0 channel 0 by setting SIM_SOPT[FTMIC].
When this field is correctly set, the RTC overflow is connected to FTM0 channel 0 for
capture, the FTM0_CH0 pin is released to other shared functions.

Core Modules
3.2.8 FTM2 software synchronization

FTM2 contains three synchronization input triggers, one of which is a software trigger by
writing 1 to SIM_SOPT[FTMSYNC]. Writing 0 to this field takes no effect. This field is
always read 0.
3.2.9 ADC hardware trigger

ADC module may initiate a conversion via a hardware trigger. The following table shows
the available ADC hardware trigger sources by setting SIM_SOPT[ADHWT].
Table 3-3. ADC hardware trigger setting
ADHWT ADC hardware trigger
000 RTC overflow
001 FTM0 init trigger
010 FTM2 init trigger with 8-bit programmable delay
011 FTM2 match trigger with 8-bit programmable delay
100 PIT ch0 overflow
101 PIT ch1 overflow
110 ACMP0 out
111 ACMP1 out
When ADC hardware trigger selects the output of FTM2 triggers, an 8-bit delay block
will be enabled. This logic delays any trigger from FTM2 with an 8-bit counter whose
value is specified by SIM_SOPT[DELAY]. The reference clock to this module is the bus
clock with selectable predivider specified by SIM_SOPT[BUSREF].
3.3 Core Modules
3.3.1 ARM Cortex-M0+ core configuration

This section summarizes how the module has been configured in the chip. Full
documentation for this module is provided by ARM and can be found at arm.com.

Debug Interrupts
Crossbar ARM Cortex-M0+

switch Core
Figure 3-5. Core configuration
Table 3-4. Reference links to related information

Topic Related module Reference
Full description ARM Cortex-M0+ core, ARM Cortex-M0+ Technical Reference Manual, r0p0
r0p0
System memory map System memory map
Clocking Clock distribution
Power management Power management
System/instruction/data Crossbar switch Crossbar switch
bus module
Debug Serial Wire Debug Debug
(SWD)
Interrupts Nested Vectored NVIC
Interrupt Controller
(NVIC)
Miscellaneous Control MCM
Module (MCM)
3.3.1.1 ARM Cortex M0+ core

The ARM Cortex M0+ parameter settings are as follows:
Table 3-5. ARM Cortex-M0+ parameter settings
Parameter Verilog name Value Description
Arch Clock Gating ACG 1 = Present Implements architectural clock gating
DAP Slave Port AHBSLV 1 Supports any AHB debug access port (like the
Support CM4 DAP)
DAP ROM Table Base BASEADDR 0xF000_2003 Base address for DAP ROM table
Endianess BE 0 Little endian control for data transfers
Breakpoints BKPT 2 Implements 2 breakpoints
Debug Support DBG 1 = Present —

Core Modules
Table 3-5. ARM Cortex-M0+ parameter settings (continued)

Parameter Verilog name Value Description
Halt Event Support HALTEV 1 = Present —
I/O Port IOP 1 = Present Implements single-cycle ld/st accesses to special
addr space
IRQ Mask Enable IRQDIS 0x0 —
Debug Port Protocol JTAGnSW 0 = SWD SWD protocol, not JTAG
Core Memory MPU 0 = Absent No MPU
Protection
Number of IRQs NUMIRQ 32 Assume full NVIC request vector
Reset all regs RAR 0 = Standard Do not force all registers to be async reset
Multiplier SMUL 0 = Fast Mul Implements single-cycle multiplier
Multi-drop Support SWMD 0 = Absent Do not include serial wire support for multi-drop
System Tick Timer SYST 1 = Present Implements system tick timer (for CM4
compatibility)
DAP Target ID TARGETID 0 —
User/Privileged USER 1 = Present Implements processor operating modes
Vector Table Offset VTOR 1 = Present Implements relocation of exception vector table
Register
WIC Support WIC 1 = Present Implements WIC interface
WIC Requests WICLINES 34 Exact number of wakeup IRQs is 34
Watchpoints WPT 2 Implements 2 watchpoints
For details on the ARM Cortex-M0+ processor core see the ARM website: arm.com.
3.3.1.2 Buses, interconnects, and interfaces

The ARM Cortex-M0+ core has two bus interfaces:
• Single 32-bit AMBA-3 AHB-Lite system interface that provides connections to
peripherals and all system memory, which includes flash and RAM.
• Single 32-bit I/O port bus (IOPORT) interfacing to the FGPIO with 1-cycle loads
and stores.
3.3.1.3 System Tick Timer

The CLKSOURCE field in SysTick Control and Status register selects either the core
clock (when CLKSOURCE = 1) or a divide-by-16 of the core clock (when
CLKSOURCE = 0). Because the timing reference is a variable frequency, the TENMS
field in the SysTick Calibration Value Register is always zero.

3.3.1.4 Core privilege levels

The core on this device is implemented with both privileged and unprivileged levels. The
ARM documentation uses different terms than this document to distinguish between
privilege levels.
If you see this term... it also means this term...
Privileged Supervisor
Unprivileged or user User
3.3.1.5 Caches
This device does not have processor related cache memories, but the flash controller has
an internal 32-byte cache for flash access.
3.3.2 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) configuration

Interrupts
ARM Cortex-M0+
Module
PPB Nested Vectored
Module
core
(NVIC)
Module
Figure 3-6. NVIC configuration

Full description Nested Vectored ARM Cortex-M0+ Technical Reference Manual
(NVIC)
System memory map — System memory map
Clocking — Clock distribution
Private Peripheral Bus ARM Cortex-M0+ core ARM Cortex-M0+ core
(PPB)

Core Modules
3.3.2.1 Interrupt priority levels

This device supports four priority levels for interrupts. Therefore in the NVIC, each
source in the IPR registers contains two bits. For example, IPR0 is shown below:
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
IRQ3 IRQ2 IRQ1 IRQ0
W
3.3.2.2 Non-maskable interrupt

The non-maskable interrupt request to the NVIC is controlled by the external NMI signal.
The pin, which the NMI signal is multiplexed on, must be configured for the NMI
function to generate the non-maskable interrupt request.
3.3.2.3 Interrupt channel assignments

The interrupt vector assignments are defined in the following table.
• Vector number — the value stored on the stack when an interrupt is serviced.
• IRQ number — non-core interrupt source count, which is the vector number minus
16.
The IRQ number is used within ARM's NVIC documentation.
Table 3-8. Interrupt vector assignments
Address Vector IRQ1 NVIC Source module Source description
IPR
register
number2
ARM Core System Handler Vectors
0x0000_0000 0 — — ARM core Initial Stack Pointer
0x0000_0004 1 — — ARM core Initial Program Counter
0x0000_0008 2 — — ARM core Non-maskable Interrupt (NMI)
0x0000_000C 3 — — ARM core Hard Fault
0x0000_0010 4 — — — —
0x0000_0014 5 — — — —
0x0000_0018 6 — — — —
0x0000_001C 7 — — — —

Table 3-8. Interrupt vector assignments (continued)

IPR
register
number2
0x0000_0020 8 — — — —
0x0000_0024 9 — — — —
0x0000_0028 10 — — — —
0x0000_002C 11 — — ARM core Supervisor call (SVCall)
0x0000_0030 12 — — — —
0x0000_0034 13 — — — —
0x0000_0038 14 — — ARM core Pendable request for system service
(PendableSrvReq)
0x0000_003C 15 — — ARM core System tick timer (SysTick)
Non-Core Vectors
0x0000_0040 16 0 0 — —
0x0000_0044 17 1 0 — —
0x0000_0048 18 2 0 — —
0x0000_004C 19 3 0 — —
0x0000_0050 20 4 1 — —
0x0000_0054 21 5 1 FTMRE Command complete
0x0000_0058 22 6 1 PMC Low-voltage warning
0x0000_005C 23 7 1 IRQ External interrupt
0x0000_0060 24 8 2 I2C0 Single interrupt vector for all sources
0x0000_0064 25 9 2 — —
0x0000_0068 26 10 2 SPI0 Single interrupt vector for all sources
0x0000_006C 27 11 2 —
0x0000_0070 28 12 3 UART0 Status and error
0x0000_0074 29 13 3 —
0x0000_0078 30 14 3 —
0x0000_007C 31 15 3 ADC0 ADC conversion complete interrupt
0x0000_0080 32 16 4 ACMP0 Analog comparator 0 interrupt
0x0000_0084 33 17 4 FTM0 Single interrupt vector for all sources
0x0000_0088 34 18 4 —
0x0000_008C 35 19 4 FTM2 Single interrupt vector for all sources
0x0000_0090 36 20 5 RTC RTC overflow
0x0000_0094 37 21 5 ACMP1 Analog comparator 1 interrupt
0x0000_0098 38 22 5 PIT_CH0 PIT CH0 overflow
0x0000_009C 39 23 5 PIT_CH1 PIT CH1 overflow
0x0000_00A0 40 24 6 KBI0 Keyboard interrupt0
0x0000_00A4 41 25 6 KBI1 Keyboard interrupt1
0x0000_00A8 42 26 6 —
0x0000_00AC 43 27 6 ICS Clock loss of lock

Core Modules
Table 3-8. Interrupt vector assignments (continued)

IPR
register
number2
0x0000_00B0 44 28 7 WDOG Watchdog timeout
0x0000_00B4 45 29 7 PWT Single interrupt vector for all sources
0x0000_00B8 46 30 7 —
0x0000_00BC 47 31 7 —
1. Indicates the NVIC's interrupt source number.

2. Indicates the NVIC's IPR register number used for this IRQ. The equation to calculate this value is: IRQ div 4
3.3.2.3.1 Determining the field and register location for configuring a

particular interrupt
Suppose you need to configure the SPI0 interrupt. The following table is an excerpt of the
SPI0 row from Interrupt priority levels.
Table 3-9. Interrupt vector assignments
Address Vector IRQ1 NVIC IPR Source module Source description
register
number2
0x0000_0068 26 10 2 SPI0 Single interrupt vector for all sources
1. Indicates the NVIC's interrupt source number.

2. Indicates the NVIC's IPR register number used for this IRQ. The equation to calculate this value is: IRQ div 4.
• The NVIC registers you would use to configure the interrupt are:
• NVICIPR2
• To determine the particular IRQ's field location within these particular registers:
• NVICIPR2 field starting location = 8 * (IRQ mod 4) + 6 = 22
Since the NVICIPR fields are 2-bit wide (4 priority levels), the NVICIPR2 field
range is bits 22–23.
Therefore, the field locations NVICIPR2[23:22] are used to configure the SPI0 interrupts.
3.3.3 Asynchronous wakeup interrupt controller (AWIC)

configuration

Clock logic
Wake-up
requests
interrupt controller
Nested vectored
Asynchronous
(NVIC)
Module
Wake-up Interrupt
Controller (AWIC)
Module
Figure 3-7. Asynchronous wake-up interrupt controller configuration

Interrupt control Nested vectored NVIC
interrupt controller
(NVIC)
Wake-up requests AWIC wake-up sources
3.3.3.1 Wakeup sources

The device uses the following internal and external inputs to the AWIC module.
Table 3-11. AWIC stop wakeup sources
Wake-up source Description
Available system resets RESET pin when LPO is its clock source
Low-voltage warning Power management controller
IRQ IRQ pin
Pin interrupts KBI - Any enabled pin interrupt is capable of waking the system.
ADC The ADC is functional in Stop mode when using internal clock source.
ACMP Interrupt in normal
I2C Address match wake-up
SPI SPI slave mode interrupt
UART UART active edge detect at UART_RX pin
RTC Alarm interrupt
Non-maskable interrupt NMI pin

System Modules
3.4 System Modules
3.4.1 SIM configuration

This section summarizes how the module has been configured in the chip. For a
comprehensive description of the module itself, see the module’s dedicated chapter.
Peripheral
bridge
Register
access
System integration
module (SIM)
Figure 3-8. SIM configuration

Full description SIM SIM
Power management — Power management
3.4.2 PMC configuration


Peripheral
bridge
Register access
Power Management
Controller (PMC)
Figure 3-9. PMC configuration

Full description PMC PMC
3.4.3 MCM configuration

ARM Cortex-M0+
Miscellaneous
core
Control Module
Transfers
(MCM)
Figure 3-10. MCM configuration

Full description Miscellaneous Control MCM
module (MCM)
Private Peripheral Bus ARM Cortex-M0+ core ARM Cortex-M0+ core
(PPB)
Transfer Flash memory Flash memory controller
controller

System Modules
3.4.4 Crossbar-light switch configuration

GPIO
controller
Crossbar Switch
Flash
S0
controller
BME
ARM core
M0
unified bus
SRAML
S1
SRAMU
Peripheral
S2
Peripherals
bridge 0
Master Modules Slave Modules
Figure 3-11. Crossbar-Light switch integration

Clocking — Clock Distribution
Crossbar switch master ARM Cortex-M0+ core ARM Cortex-M0+ core
Crossbar switch slave Flash memory Flash memory controller
controller
Crossbar switch slave SRAM controller SRAM configuration
Crossbar switch slave Peripheral bridge Peripheral bridge
2-ported peripheral GPIO controller GPIO controller
3.4.4.1 Crossbar-Light switch master assignments

The masters connected to the crossbar switch are assigned as follows:

Master module Master port number

ARM core unified bus 0
3.4.4.2 Crossbar switch slave assignments

This device contains 3 slaves connected to the crossbar switch.
The slave assignment is as follows:
Slave module Slave port number
Flash memory controller 0
SRAM controller 1
Peripheral bridge 2
3.4.5 Peripheral bridge configuration

Crossbar switch
Peripherals
Transfers Transfers
AIPS-Lite
peripheral bridge
Figure 3-12. Peripheral bridge configuration

Full description Peripheral bridge Peripheral bridge (AIPS-Lite)
(AIPS-Lite)
3.4.5.1 Number of peripheral bridges

This device contains one peripheral bridge.

System Security
3.4.5.2 Memory maps

The peripheral bridges are used to access the registers of most of the modules on this
device. See AIPS-Lite Memory Map for the memory slot assignment for each module.
3.5 System Security
3.5.1 CRC configuration

Peripheral
bridge
Register
access
CRC
Figure 3-13. CRC configuration

Full description CRC CRC
3.5.2 Watchdog configuration

This section summarizes how the module has been configured in the chip.

Peripheral
bridge
Register
access
System integration
module
WDOG
Figure 3-14. Watchdog configuration

Full description Watchdog (WDOG) Watchdog (WDOG)
Programming model System Integration SIM
Module (SIM)
3.5.2.1 WDOG clocks

The watchdog has four selectable clock sources:
• 1 kHz internal low power oscillator (LPOCLK)
• Internal 32 kHz reference clock (ICSIRCLK)
• External clock (OSCERCLK)
• Bus clock
3.5.2.2 WDOG operation

The WDOG module provides a fail-safe mechanism to ensure the system can be reset to a
known state of operation in case of system failure, such as the CPU clock stopping or
there being a run away condition in the software code. The watchdog counter runs
continuously off a selectable clock source and expects to be serviced (refreshed)
periodically. If it is not, it resets the system.
After any reset, the WDOG watchdog is enabled. If the WDOG watchdog is not used in
an application, it can be disabled by clearing WDOG_CS1[EN].
The refresh write sequence is a write of 0xA602 followed by a write of 0xB480 to the
WDOG_CNTH:L registers. The write of the 0xB480 must occur within 16 bus clocks
after the write of 0xA602; otherwise, the watchdog resets the MCU.
Clock Modules
The watchdog counter has four clock source options selected by programming
WDOG_CS2[CLK]. The clock source options are the bus clock, internal 1 kHz clock,
external clock, or an internal 32 kHz clock source.
The refresh timeout time is defined by WDOG_TOVALH:L. In addition, if window
mode is used, software must not start the refresh sequence until after the time value set in
the WDOG_WINH:L registers.
An optional fixed prescaler for all clock sources allows for longer timeout periods. When
WDOG_CS2[PRES] is set, the clock source is prescaled by 256 before clocking the
watchdog counter.
The watchdog counter registers CNTH:L provide access to the value of the free-running
watchdog counter. The software can read the counter registers at any time but cannot
write directly to the watchdog counter. The refresh sequence resets the watchdog counter
to 0x0000. Write to the WDOG_CNTH:L registers of 0xC520 followed by 0xD928
within 16 bus clocks start the unlock sequence. On completing the unlock sequence, the
user must reconfigure the watchdog within 128 bus clocks; otherwise, the watchdog
forces a reset to the MCU.
By default, the watchdog is not functional in Debug mode, Wait mode, or Stop mode.
Setting WDOG_CS1[DBG], WDOG_CS1[WAIT] or WDOG_CS1[STOP] can activate
the watchdog in Debug, Wait or Stop modes.
3.6 Clock Modules
3.6.1 ICS configuration


Peripheral
bridge
Register
access
System integration
module (SIM)
oscillator
System
ICS
Figure 3-15. ICS configuration

Full description ICS ICS
3.6.1.1 Clock gating

This family of devices includes clock gating control for each peripheral, that is, the clock
to each peripheral can explicitly be gated on or off, using clock-gate control bits in the
SIM_SCGC register.
3.6.2 OSC configuration


Memories and Memory Interfaces
Peripheral
bridge
Register
access
Signal multiplexing
Module signals
ICS
System oscillator
Figure 3-16. OSC configuration

Full description OSC OSC
Full description ICS ICS
3.7 Memories and Memory Interfaces
3.7.1 Flash memory configuration


Peripheral bus
controller 0
Register
access
Flash memory
controller
Transfers
Flash memory
Figure 3-17. Flash memory configuration

Full description Flash memory Flash memory
Transfers Flash memory Flash memory controller
controller
Register access Peripheral bridge Peripheral bridge
3.7.1.1 Flash memory sizes

The devices covered in this document contain one flash block consisting of up to 16
sectors of 512 bytes.
The amounts of flash memory for the devices covered in this document are:
Table 3-22. KE04 flash memory size
Device EEPROM (B) Flash (KB) Block 0 (flash) address
range
MKE04Z8VTG4(R) 0 8 0x0000_0000 – 0x0000_1FFF
MKE04Z8VWJ4(R) 0 8 0x0000_0000 – 0x0000_1FFF
MKE04Z8VFK4(R) 0 8 0x0000_0000 – 0x0000_1FFF
3.7.1.2 Flash memory map

The flash memory and the flash registers are located at different base addresses as shown
in the figure found here.
The base address for each is specified in System memory map.

Flash memory base address

Registers
Flash base address

Flash configuration field
Flash
Figure 3-18. Flash memory map
The on-chip flash memory is implemented in a portion of the allocated Flash range to
form a contiguous block in the memory map beginning at address 0x0000_0000. See
Flash memory sizes for details of supported ranges.
Access to the flash memory ranges outside the amount of flash on the device causes the
bus cycle to be terminated with an error followed by the appropriate response in the
requesting bus master.
3.7.1.3 Flash security

For information on how flash security is implemented on this device, see Chip Security.
3.7.1.4 Erase all flash contents

In addition to software, the entire flash memory may be erased external to the flash
memory via the SW-DP debug port by setting MDM-AP CONTROL[0] (bit 0 of the
MDM-AP Control register). MDM-AP STATUS[0] (bit 0 of the MDM-AP Status
register) is set to indicate the mass erase command has been accepted. MDM-AP
CONTROL[0] is cleared when the mass erase completes.
3.7.2 Flash memory controller configuration

See Platform Control Register (MCM_PLACR) register description for details on the
reset configuration of the FMC.

MCM
Crossbar switch
Flash memory
Transfers Transfers
Flash memory
controller
Figure 3-19. Flash memory controller configuration

Full description Flash memory Flash memory controller
controller
Clocking Clock Distribution
Transfers Flash memory Flash memory
Transfers Crossbar switch Crossbar Switch
Register access MCM MCM
3.7.3 SRAM configuration

This section summarizes how the module has been configured in the chip.
Transfers
crossbar SRAM upper
Cortex-M0+ SRAM
core switch controller
SRAM lower
Figure 3-20. SRAM configuration

Full description SRAM SRAM
ARM Cortex-M0+ core — ARM Cortex-M0+ core

3.7.3.1 SRAM sizes

The SRAM supports single cycle access (zero wait states) at all core speeds.
The amounts of SRAM for the devices covered in this document are:
Table 3-25. SRAM size
Freescale part number SRAM
MKE04Z8VTG4(R) 1 KB
MKE04Z8VWJ4(R) 1 KB
MKE04Z8VFK4(R) 1 KB
3.7.3.2 SRAM ranges

The on-chip SRAM is split into two ranges; 1/4 is allocated to SRAM_L and 3/4 is
allocated to SRAM_U.
The on-chip RAM is implemented such that the SRAM_L and SRAM_U ranges form a
contiguous block in the memory map. As such:
• SRAM_L is anchored to 0x1FFF_FFFF and occupies the space before this ending
address.
• SRAM_U is anchored to 0x2000_0000 and occupies the space after this beginning
address.
Valid address ranges for SRAM_L and SRAM_U are then defined as:
• SRAM_L = [0x2000_0000–(SRAM_size/4)] to 0x1FFF_FFFF
• SRAM_U = 0x2000_0000 to [0x2000_0000+(SRAM_size*(3/4))-1]
This is illustrated in the following figure.

SRAM size *(1/4)

0x2000_0000 – SRAM_size/4
SRAM_L
0x1FFF_FFFF
0x2000_0000
SRAM size * (3/4)
SRAM_U
0x2000_0000 + SRAM_size(3/4) - 1
Figure 3-21. SRAM blocks memory map
For example, for a device containing 1 KB of SRAM, the ranges are:

• SRAM_L: 0x1FFF_FF00 – 0x1FFF_FFFF
• SRAM_U: 0x2000_0000 – 0x2000_02FF
3.7.3.3 SRAM bit operation

The on-chip SRAM is split to two range: SRAM_L and SRAM_U. The SRAM_U range
supports bit operation on this device through two ways:
• Aliased bit-band region
• Bit Manipulation Engine (BME)
A 32-bit write in the aliased region has the same effect as a read-modify-write operation
on the targeted bit in the SRAM_U region. See Aliased bit-band region for details.
The aliased bit-band region only supports simple set or clear operation. More
complicated bit operations (AND, OR, XOR, etc) could be further supported through the
BME engine. See Bit Manipulation Engine for details.

Analog
3.8 Analog
3.8.1 12-bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC) configuration

Peripheral
bridge
Register
access
Signal multiplexing
Transfers Module signals
Other peripherals SAR ADC
Figure 3-22. 12-bit SAR ADC configuration

Full description 12-bit SAR ADC 12-bit SAR ADC
3.8.1.1 ADC instantiation information

This device contains one 12-bit successive approximation ADC with up to 12 channels.
Table 3-27. ADC channels
Freescale part number ADC channels
MKE04Z8VTG4(R) 6
MKE04Z8VWJ4(R) 10
MKE04Z8VFK4(R) 12

The ADC supports both software and hardware triggers. The ADC hardware trigger,
ADHWT, is selectable from ACMP0, ACMP1, FTM0 init trigger, FTM2 init trigger,
FTM2 match trigger, RTC overflow, or PITCH0/1 overflow. The hardware trigger can be
configured to cause a hardware trigger in MCU Run, Wait, and Stop modes.
The hardware trigger sources details are listed in the Module-to-Module section.
3.8.1.2 ADC0 connections/channel assignment

The ADC channel assignments for the device are shown in following table. Reserved
channels convert to an unknown value.
Table 3-28. ADC channel assigement
ADCH Channel Input
00000 AD0 PTA0/ADP0
00001 AD1 PTA1/ADP1
00010 AD2 PTA6/ADP2
00011 AD3 PTA7/ADP3
00100 AD4 PTB0/ADP4
00101 AD5 PTB1/ADP5
00110 AD6 PTB2/ADP6
00111 AD7 PTB3/ADP7
01000 AD8 PTC0/ADP8
01001 AD9 PTC1/ADP9
01010 AD10 PTC2/ADP10
01011 AD11 PTC3/ADP11
01100 AD12 Vss
01101 AD13 Vss
01110 AD14 Vss
01111 AD15 Vss
10000 AD16 Vss
10001 AD17 Vss
10010 AD18 Vss
10011 AD19 Vss
10100 AD20 Reserved
10101 AD21 Reserved
10110 AD22 Temperature Sensor
10111 AD23 Bandgap
11000 AD24 Reserved
11001 AD25 Reserved
11010 AD26 Reserved

Analog
Table 3-28. ADC channel assigement (continued)

ADCH Channel Input
11011 AD27 Reserved
11100 AD28 Reserved
11101 AD29 VREFH
11110 AD30 VREFL
11111 Module disabled None
3.8.1.3 ADC analog supply and reference connections

This device only includes VDD and VSS pin at chip package.
The VDDA and VREFH of ADC are internally connected to VDD pin. The VSSA and
VREFL of ADC are internally connected to VSS pin.
3.8.1.4 Temperature sensor and bandgap

The ADC module integrates an on-chip temperature sensor. Following actions must be
performed to use this temperature sensor.
• Configure ADC for long sample with a maximum of 1 MHz clock
• Convert the bandgap voltage reference channel (AD23)
• By converting the digital value of the bandgap voltage reference channel using
the value of VBG, the user can determine VDD.
• Convert the temperature sensor channel (AD22)
• By using the calculated value of VDD, convert the digital value of AD22 into a
voltage, VTEMP
3.8.1.5 Alternate clock

The ADC module is capable of performing conversions using the MCU bus clock, the
bus clock divided by 2, the local asynchronous clock (ADACK) within the module, or the
alternate clock, ALTCLK. The alternate clock for the devices is the external oscillator
output (OSC_OUT).
The selected clock source must run at a frequency such that the ADC conversion clock
(ADCK) runs at a frequency within its specified range (fADCK) after being divided down
from the ALTCLK input as determined by ADC_SC3[ADIV].

ALTCLK is active while the MCU is in Wait mode provided the conditions described
above are met. This allows ALTCLK to be used as the conversion clock source for the
ADC while the MCU is in Wait mode.
ALTCLK cannot be used as the ADC conversion clock source while the MCU is in Stop
mode.
3.8.2 ACMP configuration

Peripheral
bridge 0
Register
access
Signal multiplexing
Module signals
Other peripherals ACMP
Figure 3-23. ACMP configuration

Full description Analog comparator Comparator
(ACMP)
3.8.2.1 ACMP overview

The device contains two analog comparator modules (ACMP) which provide a circuit for
comparing two analog input voltages or for comparing one analog input voltage to an
internal reference voltage. The comparator circuit is used to operate across the full range
of the supply voltage (rail-to-rail operation).
The ACMP features four different inputs muxed with both positive and negative inputs to
the ACMP. One is fixed connected to built-in DAC output, the others are externally
mapped on pinouts.

Analog
The ACMP modules support internal bandgap reference voltage. When using the
bandgap reference, the user must enable the PMC bandgap buffer first.
The ACMP modules can continue to operate in Wait and Stop mode if enabled, and can
wake the MCU when a compare event occurs.
3.8.2.2 ACMP interconnections

The ACMP0 or ACMP1 output can be configured to connect with FTM0 input capture
channel 0 by setting SIM_SOPT[FTMIC] with correct value. Writing any value other
than 00b to SIM_SOPT[FTMIC], the FTM0_CH0 pin is not available externally
regardless of the configuration of the FTM0 module for channel 0.
ACMP0 and ACMP1 output are also internal connected to FTM2 trigger input and Fault
input. By configuring SIM_SOPT[ACTRG] user can connect either ACMP0_OUT or
ACMP1_OUT to FTM2 trigger input 0. ACMP0_OUT is connected to FTM2 fault input
0 and ACMP1_OUT is connected to FTM2 fault input 3.
ACMP0 or ACMP1 output can be directly ejected to UART0_RX by setting
SIM_SOPT[RXDCE]. In this mode, UART0_RX pinout does not work. Any external
signal tagged to ACMP0 or ACMP1 inputs can be regarded as input pins.
The following table shows the input connections to the ACMP0 and ACMP1:
Table 3-30. ACMP0 input connections
ACMP0 channel Connection
0 PTB2/ACMP0_IN0
1 PTA1/ACMP0_IN1
2 PTA0/ACMP0_IN2
3 DAC output
Table 3-31. ACMP1 input connections

ACMP1 channel Connection
0 PTA6/ACMP1_IN0
1 PTA7/ACMP1_IN1
2 PTB4/ACMP1_IN2
3 DAC output

3.8.2.3 ACMP in Stop mode

ACMP continues to operate in Stop mode if enabled. If ACMPx_SC[ACOPE] is enabled,
comparator output will operate as in the normal operating mode and will control
ACMPx_OUT pin. The MCU is brought out of Stop mode when a compare event occurs
and ACMPx_CS[ACIE] is enabled; ACMPx_CS[ACF] flag sets accordingly.
3.9 Timers
3.9.1 FlexTimer configuration

Peripheral bus
controller 0
Register
access
Signal multiplexing
Transfers Module signals
Other peripherals FlexTimer
Figure 3-24. FlexTimer configuration

Full description FlexTimer FlexTimer
Signal multiplexing Port control Signal multiplexing
3.9.1.1 FTM overview

The FTM timer contains up to six channels which support input capture, output compare
and the generation of PWM signals to control electric motor and power management
applications. FTM time reference is a 16-bit counter which can be used as an unsigned or
signed counter.

Timers
This device contains up to two FTM modules of one 6-channel FTM with full functions
and one 2-channel FTM with basic TPM functions. Each FTM module can use
independent external clock input. The table below summarizes the configuration of FTM
modules.
Table 3-33. FTM modules features
Feature FTM0 FTM2
Number of channels 2 6
Initial counting value no yes
Periodic TOF no yes
Input capture mode yes yes
Channel input filter no channels 0, 1, 2 and 3
Output compare mode yes yes
Edge-Aligned PWM (EPWM) yes yes
Center-Aligned PWM (CPWM) yes yes
Combine mode no yes
Complementary mode no yes
PWM synchronization no yes
Inverting no yes
Software output control (SWOC) no yes
Deadtime insertion no yes
Output mask no yes
Fault control no yes
Number of fault inputs 0 4
Fault input filter no fault inputs 0, 1 ,2 and 3
Polarity control no yes
Initialization no yes
Channel match trigger no yes
Initialization trigger yes yes
Capture test mode no yes
DMA no no
Dual edge capture mode no yes
Quadrature decoder mode no no
Quadrature decoder input filter no no
Debug modes no yes
Intermediary load no yes
Global time base enable1 no yes
Registers available FTM_SC, FTM_CNT, FTM_SC, FTM_CNT, FTM_MOD, FTM_C0SC,
FTM_MOD, FTM_C0V, FTM_C1SC, and FTM_C1V,
FTM_C0SC, FTM_C0V, FTM_C2SC, FTM_C2V, FTM_C3SC, FTM_C3V,
FTM_C1SC, and FTM_C4SC, FTM_C4V, FTM_C5SC, FTM_C5V,
FTM_C1V, FTM_CNTIN, FTM_STATUS, FTM_MODE,
FTM_EXTTRIG FTM_SYNC, FTM_OUTINIT, FTM_OUTMASK,

Table 3-33. FTM modules features

Feature FTM0 FTM2
FTM_COMBINE, FTM_DEADTIME,
FTM_EXTTRIG, FTM_POL, FTM_FMS,
FTM_FILTER, FTM_FLTCTRL, FTM_CONF,
FTM_FLTPOL, FTM_SYNCONF,
FTM_INVCTRL, FTM_SWOCTRL, and
FTM_PWMLOAD
1. The global time base (GTB) feature allows the synchronization of multiple FTM modules on a chip. It requires the GTB
function supported by all the related FTM modules. On this device, only one FTM module (FTM2) supports the GTB
function, so the GTB function is actually not usable.
3.9.1.2 FTM clock options

The selectable FTM source clock can be the timer clock (up to 48 MHz), the fixed
frequency clock, or an external clock. The selected control source is controlled by
FTMx_SC[CLKS].
• When FTMx_SC[CLKS] = 00, no clock is selected (this in effect, disables the FTM
counter).
• When FTMx_SC[CLKS] = 01, the timer clock is selected.
• When FTMx_SC[CLKS] = 10, the fixed frequency clock(ICSFFCLK) is selected.
• When FTMx_SC[CLKS] = 11, the external clock is selected.
3.9.1.3 FTM interconnections

FTM0 has following interconnections:
• UART0_TX signal can be modulated by FTM0 channel 0 PWM output.
• UART0_RX signal can be tagged by FTM0 channel 1 input capture function by
writing 1 to SIM_SOPT[RXDCE].
• ACMP0, ACMP1 and RTC output signals can be captured by FTM0 channel 0.
FTM2 supports three PWM synchronization sources:
• Trigger0 is connected to the output of ACMP0 or ACMP1 by writing 0 or 1 to
SIM_SOPT[ACTRG].
• Trigger1 is connected to FTM0 channel 0 output.
• Trigger2 is a software trigger by writing 1 to SIM_SOPT[FTMSYNC].
FTM2 supports four FTM fault sources:
• Fault 0 is connected to ACMP0 output.
• Fault1 is connected to PTA6.
Timers
• Fault 2 is connected to PTA7.

• Fault 3 is connected to ACMP1 output.
3.9.1.4 FTM interrupts

The FlexTimer has multiple sources of interrupt. However, either source can generate a
single interrupt request to the interrupt controller. When an FTM interrupt occurs, read
the FTM status registers to determine the exact interrupt source.
3.9.2 PIT configuration

Peripheral
bridge
Register
access
Periodic interrupt
timer
Figure 3-25. PIT configuration

Full description PIT PIT
3.9.2.1 PIT overview

The PIT module is an array of timers that can be used to raise interrupts and triggers.
This device contains one PIT module with two channels and supporting chained timer
mode.

3.9.2.2 PIT interconnections

The PIT channel 0 and channel 1 trigger output can be used as ADC hardware trigger by
setting SIM_SOPT[ADHWT].
3.9.3 RTC configuration

Peripheral
bridge
Register
access
Signal multiplexing
Module signals
Real-time clock
Figure 3-26. RTC configuration

Full description RTC RTC
3.9.3.1 RTC overview

The real-time counter (RTC) used on this device consists of one 16-bit counter, one 16-
bit comparator, several binary-based and decimal-based prescaler dividers, four clock
sources, and one programmable periodic interrupt. This module can be used for time-of-
day, calendar or any task scheduling functions. It can also serve as a cyclic wake-up from
low-power modes without external components.

Timers
3.9.3.2 RTC interconnections

Four software selectable clock sources are available for input to prescaler with selectable
binary-based and decimal-based divider values
• 1 kHz internal low-power oscillator (LPOCLK)
• External clock (OSCERCLK)
• 32 kHz internal reference clock (ICSIRCLK)
• Bus clock
RTC overflow trigger can be used as hardware trigger for ADC and may also be captured
by FTM0 channel0 through configuring SIM_SOPT register.
3.9.4 PWT configuration

Peripheral bus
controller 0
Register
access
Signal multiplexing
Transfers Pulse width timer Module signals
Other peripherals
(PWT)
Figure 3-27. PWT configuration

Full description PWT PWT
Signal multiplexing Port control Signal multiplexing
3.9.4.1 PWT overview

The Pulse Width Timer (PWT) module on this device consists of one 16-bit counter,
which can be used to capture or measure the pulse width mapping on its input channels.

The counter of PWT has two selectable clocks sources, which are sharing with FTM
modules, and support up to 48 MHz with internal timer clock. PWT module supports
programmable positive or negative pulse edges, and programmable interrupt generation
upon pulse width values or counter overflow.
3.9.4.2 PWT interconnections

Two software selectable clock sources are available for input to pre-scaler divider of
PWT module:
• Timer clock : up to 48 MHz, also the option of clock source for FTM modules
• TCLK: external clock from the pads
PWT module has four input channels, which is connected as following:
Table 3-37. PWT input connections
PWT input channel Connection
0 PTC4
1 PTB0
2 ACMP0 output
3 ACMP1 output
3.10 Communication interfaces
3.10.1 SPI configuration


Communication interfaces
Peripheral
bridge
Register
access
Module signals
Signal
SPI
multiplexing
Figure 3-28. SPI configuration

Full description SPI SPI
3.10.1.1 SPI overview

This device contains one SPI module that supports 8-bit data length.
The serial peripheral interface (SPI) module provides for full-duplex, synchronous, serial
communication between the MCU and peripheral devices. These peripheral devices can
include other microcontrollers, analog-to-digital converters, shift registers, sensors,
memories, etc.
The SPI runs at a baud rate up to the bus clock divided by two in master mode and up to
the bus clock divided by 4 in slave mode. Software can poll the status flags, or SPI
operation can be interrupt-driven.
3.10.2 I2C configuration


Peripheral
bridge
Register
access
Signal multiplexing
Module signals
I2 C
Figure 3-29. I2C configuration

Full description I2C I2C
3.10.2.1 I2C overview

This device contains an inter-integrated circuit (I2C) module providing a method of
communication between a number of devices. The interface is designed to operate up to
100 kbit/s with maximum bus loading and timing. The device is capable of operating at
higher baud rates, up to a maximum of clock/20, with reduced bus loading. The
maximum communication length and the number of devices that can be connected are
limited by a maximum bus capacitance of 400 pF.
3.10.3 UART configuration


Peripheral
bridge
Register
access
Signal multiplexing
Module signals
UART
Figure 3-30. UART configuration

Full description UART UART
3.10.3.1 UART overview

This device includes one universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) module.
Typically, these systems are used to connect to the RS232 serial input/output port of a
personal computer or workstation. They can also be used to communicate with other
embedded controllers.
A flexible, 13-bit, modulo-based baud rate generator supports a broad range of standard
baud rates beyond 115.2 kbaud. Transmit and receive within the same UART use a
common baud rate, and each UART module has a separate baud rate generator.
This UART system offers many advanced features not commonly found on other
asynchronous serial I/O peripherals on other embedded controllers. The receiver employs
an advanced data sampling technique that ensures reliable communication and noise
detection. Hardware parity, receiver wakeup, and double buffering on transmit and
receive are also included.
3.10.3.2 UART interconnection

UART0 can implement infrared functions through following tricks:
UART0_TX Modulation:

• UART0_TX output can be modulated by FTM0 channel 0 PWM output.

UART0_RX Tag:
• UART0_RX input can be tagged to FTM0 channel 1 or filtered by ACMP0 or
ACMP1. module
3.11 Human-machine interfaces (HMI)
3.11.1 GPIO configuration

Peripheral
bridge
Register
access
Signal multiplexing
ARM Cortex -M0+
Register access Module signals

Core
GPIO controller
Figure 3-31. GPIO configuration

Full description GPIO GPIO
Crossbar switch Crossbar switch Crossbar switch
3.11.1.1 GPIO overview

The GPIO is multi-ported and can be accessed directly by the core with zero wait states at
base address 0xF800_0000 (FGPIO). It can also be accessed by the core through the
crossbar/AIPS interface at 0x400F_F000 and at an aliased slot (15) at address
0x4000_F000. All BME operations to the GPIO space can be accomplished referencing
the aliased slot (15) at address 0x4000_F000. Only some of the BME operations can be
accomplished referencing GPIO at address 0x400F_F000.

Human-machine interfaces (HMI)
3.11.2 KBI configuration

Peripheral
bridge
Register
access
Signal multiplexing
ARM Cortex -M0+

Core
KBI
Figure 3-32. KBI configuration

Full description KBI KBI
3.11.2.1 KBI overview

This device has two keyboard interrupt modules (KBI) with up to 16 keyboard interrupt
inputs grouped in two KBI modules available depending on package.
3.11.2.2 KBI assignments

The KBI port assignments is shown by the following table.
Table 3-43. KBI port assignment
KBI Port pin KBI Port pin
KBI0_P0 PTA0 KBI1_P0 PTC4
KBI0_P4 PTB0 KBI1_P4 PTC2

Table 3-43. KBI port assignment (continued)

KBI Port pin KBI Port pin
KBI0_P5 PTB1 KBI1_P5 PTC3
KBI0_P6 PTB2 KBI1_P6 PTB4
KBI0_P7 PTB3 KBI1_P7 PTB5
3.11.3 IRQ configuration

Peripheral
bridge
Register
access
Signal multiplexing
ARM Cortex -M0+

Core
IRQ
Figure 3-33. IRQ configuration

Full description IRQ IRQ
3.11.3.1 IRQ assignment

The IRQ is assigned to pin PTA5 by default .

Human-machine interfaces (HMI)

Chapter 4
Memory Map
4.1 Introduction
This device contains various memories and memory-mapped peripherals which are
located in a 4 GB memory space. This chapter describes the memory and peripheral
locations within that memory space.
4.2 System memory map

The following table shows the high-level device memory map.
Table 4-1. System memory map
System 32-bit Address Range Destination Slave Access
0x0000_0000–0x07FF_FFFF1 Program flash and read-only data Cortex-M0+ core
(Includes exception vectors in first 196 bytes)
0x0800_0000–0x0FFF_FFFF Reserved —
0x1000_0000– 0x1FFF_FEFF Reserved —
0x1FFF_FF00-0x1FFF_FFFF2 SRAM_L: Lower SRAM Cortex-M0+ core
0x2000_0000-0x2000_02FF SRAM_U: Upper SRAM (bit band region) Cortex-M0+ core
0x2000_0300–0x21FF_FFFF Reserved –
0x2200_0000–0x2200_5FFF Aliased SRAM_U bit-band region Cortex-M0+ core
0x2400_0000–0x3FFF_FFFF Bit Manipulation Engine (BME) access to SRAM_U Cortex-M0+ core
0x4000_0000–0x4007_FFFF AIPS Peripherals Cortex-M0+ core
0x4008_0000–0x400F_EFFF Reserved –
0x400F_F000–0x400F_FFFF General purpose input/output (GPIO) Cortex-M0+ core
0x4400_0000–0x5FFF_FFFF Bit Manipulation Engine (BME) access to AIPS Peripherals for Cortex-M0+ core
slots 0-1273
0x6000_0000–0xDFFF_FFFF Reserved –

Aliased bit-band region
Table 4-1. System memory map (continued)

System 32-bit Address Range Destination Slave Access
0xE000_0000–0xE00F_FFFF Private Peripherals Cortex-M0+ core
0xE010_0000–0xEFFF_FFFF Reserved –
0xF000_0000–0xF000_0FFF Reserved –
0xF000_1000–0xF000_1FFF Reserved –
0xF000_2000–0xF000_2FFF System ROM table4 Cortex-M0+ core
0xF000_3000–0xF000_3FFF Miscellaneous Control Module (MCM) Cortex-M0+ core
0xF000_4000–0xF7FF_FFFF Reserved –
0xF800_0000–0xFFFF_FFFF IOPORT: FGPIO (single cycle) Cortex-M0+ core
1. The program flash always begins at 0x0000_0000 but the end of implemented flash varies depending on the amount of
flash implemented for a particular device. See Flash memory sizes for details.
2. This range varies depending on SRAM sizes. See SRAM Sizes for details.
3. Includes BME operations to GPIO at slot 15 (based at 0x4000_F000).
4. This device implements a system ROM table which is used to redirect to ARM Cortex M0+ (Flycatcher) ROM table in
CoreSight debug system. See System ROM memory map for details.
4.3 Aliased bit-band region

The device supports aliased SRAM_U bit-band region with Cortex M0+ core. A 32-bit
write in the alias region has the same result as a read-modify-write operation on the
targeted bit in the bit-band region, but with only one cycle time. Aliased bit-band region
is much more efficient for bit operation.
Bit 0 of the value written to the alias region determines what value is written to the target
bit:
• Writing a value with bit 0 set writes a 1 to the target bit.
• Writing a value with bit 0 clear writes a 0 to the target bit.
A 32-bit read in the alias region returns either:
• a value of 0x0000_0000 to indicate the target bit is clear
• a value of 0x0000_0001 to indicate the target bit is set

Chapter 4 Memory Map
Bit-band region Alias bit-band region
31 0 31 0
1 KByte
32 KByte
Figure 4-1. Alias bit-band mapping
4.4 Bit Manipulation Engine

The Bit Manipulation Engine (BME) provides hardware support for atomic read-modify-
write memory operations to the peripheral and SRAM_U address space. By combining
the basic load and store instruction support in the Cortex-M instruction set architecture
with the concept of decorated storage provided by the BME, the resulting implementation
provides a robust and efficient read-modify-write capability to this class of ultra low-end
microcontrollers. See Bit Manipulation Engine (BME) for a detailed description of its
functionality.
4.5 System ROM memory map

The system ROM table is optionally required by ARM CoreSight debug infrastructure to
discover the components on the chip.
For core configurations like that supported by Cortex-M0+, ARM recommends that a
debugger identifies and connects to the debug components using the CoreSight debug
infrastructure.

System ROM memory map
ARM recommends that a debugger follows the flow as shown in the following figure to
discover the components in the CoreSight debug infrastructure. In this case, a debugger
reads the peripheral and component ID registers for each CoreSight component in the
CoreSight system.
CoreSight access port
Base pointer
Redirection from the

+ System ROM table, if implemented
+
Flycatcher ROM table
CoreSight ID
Pointers
System control space + Data watchpoint unit

+ + Breakpoint unit
+
CoreSight ID CoreSight ID CoreSight ID
Flycatcher CPUID Watchpoint control Breakpoint control

Debug control
+ Optional component
+
Figure 4-2. CoreSight discovery process
Following table shows the Freescale system ROM table memory map. It includes the
ROM entry, peripheral ID and component ID required by ARM CoreSight debug
infrastructure.
NOTE
This device contains only standard ARM M0+ core debug
components which defined in Flycatcher ROM table. No
custom-built debug components are included.
ROM memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
address Register name Access Reset value
(in bits) page
(hex)
F000_2000 Entry (ROM_ENTRY0) 32 R See section 4.5.1/95
F000_2004 End of Table Marker Register (ROM_TABLEMARK) 32 R 0000_0000h 4.5.2/96
F000_2FCC System Access Register (ROM_SYSACCESS) 32 R 0000_0001h 4.5.3/96
F000_2FD0 Peripheral ID Register (ROM_PERIPHID4) 32 R See section 4.5.4/97

ROM memory map (continued)

Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
F000_2FDC Peripheral ID Register (ROM_PERIPHID7) 32 R See section 4.5.4/97
F000_2FE0 Peripheral ID Register (ROM_PERIPHID0) 32 R See section 4.5.4/97
F000_2FEC Peripheral ID Register (ROM_PERIPHID3) 32 R See section 4.5.4/97
F000_2FF0 Component ID Register (ROM_COMPID0) 32 R See section 4.5.5/97
F000_2FFC Component ID Register (ROM_COMPID3) 32 R See section 4.5.5/97
4.5.1 Entry (ROM_ENTRYn)

The System ROM Table begins with "n" relative 32-bit addresses, one for each debug
component present in the device and terminating with an all-zero value signaling the end
of the table at the "n+1"-th value.
It is hardwired to specific values used during the auto-discovery process by an external
debug agent.
Address: F000_2000h base + 0h offset + (4d × i), where i=0d to 0d
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R ENTRY
W
Reset x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x*
* Notes:
• x = Undefined at reset.
ROM_ENTRYn field descriptions

Field Description
ENTRY ENTRY
Entry 0 (CM0+ ROM Table) is hardwired to 0xF00F_D003.

System ROM memory map
4.5.2 End of Table Marker Register (ROM_TABLEMARK)

This register indicates end of table marker. It is hardwired to specific values used during
the auto-discovery process by an external debug agent.
Address: F000_2000h base + 4h offset = F000_2004h
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R MARK
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ROM_TABLEMARK field descriptions

Field Description
MARK Hardwired to 0x0000_0000
4.5.3 System Access Register (ROM_SYSACCESS)

This register indicates system access. It is hardwired to specific values used during the
auto-discovery process by an external debug agent.
Address: F000_2000h base + FCCh offset = F000_2FCCh
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R SYSACCESS
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
ROM_SYSACCESS field descriptions

Field Description
SYSACCESS Hardwired to 0x0000_0001

4.5.4 Peripheral ID Register (ROM_PERIPHIDn)

These registers indicate the peripheral IDs. They are hardwired to specific values used
during the auto-discovery process by an external debug agent.
Address: F000_2000h base + FD0h offset + (4d × i), where i=0d to 7d
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R PERIPHID
W
* Notes:
ROM_PERIPHIDn field descriptions

Field Description
PERIPHID Peripheral ID1 is hardwired to 0x0000_00E0; ID2 to 0x0000_0008; and all the others to 0x0000_0000.
4.5.5 Component ID Register (ROM_COMPIDn)

These registers indicate the component IDs. They are hardwired to specific values used
during the auto-discovery process by an external debug agent.
Address: F000_2000h base + FF0h offset + (4d × i), where i=0d to 3d
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R COMPID
W
* Notes:
ROM_COMPIDn field descriptions

Field Description
COMPID Component ID
Component ID0 is hardwired to 0x0000_000D; ID1 to 0x0000_0010; ID2 to 0x0000_0005; ID3 to

0x0000_00B1.

Peripheral bridge (AIPS-Lite) memory map
4.6 Peripheral bridge (AIPS-Lite) memory map

The Peripheral Bridge memory map is accessible via one slave port on the crossbar in the
0x4000_0000–0x400F_FFFF region. The device implements one peripheral bridge that
defines a 1024 KB address space.
The three regions associated with this space are:
• A 128 KB region, partitioned as 32 spaces, each 4 KB in size and reserved for on-
platform peripheral devices. The AIPS controller generates unique module enables
for all 32 spaces.
• A 384 KB region, partitioned as 96 spaces, each 4 KB in size and reserved for off-
platform modules. The AIPS controller generates unique module enables for all 96
spaces.
• The last slot is a 4 KB region beginning at 0x400F_F000 for accessing the GPIO
module. The GPIO slot (slot 128) is an alias of slot 15. This block is also directly
interfaced to the core and provides direct access without incurring wait states
associated with accesses via the AIPS controller.
Modules that are disabled via their clock gate control bits in the SIM registers disable the
associated AIPS slots. Access to any address within an unimplemented or disabled
peripheral bridge slot results in a transfer error termination.
For programming model accesses via the peripheral bridges, there is generally only a
small range within the 4 KB slots that is implemented. Accessing an address that is not
implemented in the peripheral results in a transfer error termination.
4.6.1 Read-after-write sequence and required serialization of

memory operations
In some situations, a write to a peripheral must be completed fully before a subsequent
action can occur. Examples of such situations include:
• Exiting an interrupt service routine (ISR)
• Changing a mode
• Configuring a function
In these situations, the application software must perform a read-after-write sequence to
guarantee the required serialization of the memory operations:
1. Write the peripheral register.
2. Read the written peripheral register to verify the write.
3. Continue with subsequent operations.

4.6.2 Peripheral Bridge (AIPS-Lite) Memory Map

NOTE
• Slots 0-95 and 128 are 32-bit data width modules, with the
exception that slots 49,82 are 8-bit data width modules
(IRQ, WDOG)
• Slots 96-127 are 8-bit data width modules.
Table 4-21. Peripheral bridge 0 slot assignments
System 32-bit base address Slot Module
number
0x4000_0000 0 —
0x4000_1000 1 —
0x4000_2000 2 —
0x4000_3000 3 —
0x4000_4000 4 —
0x4000_5000 5 —
0x4000_6000 6 —
0x4000_7000 7 —
0x4000_8000 8 —
0x4000_9000 9 —
0x4000_A000 10 —
0x4000_B000 11 —
0x4000_C000 12 —
0x4000_D000 13 —
0x4000_E000 14 —
0x4000_F000 15 GPIO controller (aliased to 0x400F_F000)
0x4001_0000 16 —
0x4001_1000 17 —
0x4001_2000 18 —
0x4001_3000 19 —
0x4001_4000 20 —
0x4001_5000 21 —
0x4001_6000 22 —
0x4001_7000 23 —
0x4001_8000 24 —
0x4001_9000 25 —
0x4001_A000 26 —
0x4001_B000 27 —
0x4001_C000 28 —

Peripheral bridge (AIPS-Lite) memory map
Table 4-21. Peripheral bridge 0 slot assignments (continued)

number
0x4001_D000 29 —
0x4001_E000 30 —
0x4001_F000 31 —
0x4002_0000 32 Flash memory (FTMRE)
0x4002_1000 33 —
0x4002_2000 34 —
0x4002_3000 35 —
0x4002_4000 36 —
0x4002_5000 37 —
0x4002_6000 38 —
0x4002_7000 39 —
0x4002_8000 40 —
0x4002_9000 41 —
0x4002_A000 42 —
0x4002_B000 43 —
0x4002_C000 44 —
0x4002_D000 45 —
0x4002_E000 46 —
0x4002_F000 47 —
0x4003_0000 48 —
0x4003_1000 49 IRQ controller (IRQ)
0x4003_2000 50 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)
0x4003_3000 51 Pulse width timer (PWT)
0x4003_4000 52 —
0x4003_5000 53 —
0x4003_6000 54 —
0x4003_7000 55 Periodic interrupt timers (PIT)
0x4003_8000 56 Flex timer 0 (FTM0)
0x4003_9000 57 —
0x4003_A000 58 Flex timer 2 (FTM2)
0x4003_B000 59 Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
0x4003_C000 60 —
0x4003_D000 61 Real time clock (RTC)
0x4003_E000 62 —
0x4003_F000 63 —
0x4004_0000 64 —
0x4004_1000 65 —
0x4004_2000 66 —
0x4004_3000 67 —


number
0x4004_4000 68 —
0x4004_5000 69 —
0x4004_6000 70 —
0x4004_7000 71 —
0x4004_8000 72 System integration module (SIM)
0x4004_9000 73 Port controller
0x4004_A000 74 —
0x4004_B000 75 —
0x4004_C000 76 —
0x4004_D000 77 —
0x4004_E000 78 —
0x4004_F000 79 —
0x4005_0000 80 —
0x4005_1000 81 —
0x4005_2000 82 Watchdog (WDOG)
0x4005_3000 83 —
0x4005_4000 84 —
0x4005_5000 85 —
0x4005_6000 86 —
0x4005_7000 87 —
0x4005_8000 88 —
0x4005_9000 89 —
0x4005_A000 90 —
0x4005_B000 91 —
0x4005_C000 92 —
0x4005_D000 93 —
0x4005_E000 94 —
0x4005_F000 95 —
0x4006_0000 96 —
0x4006_1000 97 —
0x4006_2000 98 —
0x4006_3000 99 —
0x4006_4000 100 Internal clock source (ICS)
0x4006_5000 101 System oscillator (OSC)
0x4006_6000 102 I2C0
0x4006_7000 103 —
0x4006_8000 104 —
0x4006_9000 105 —
0x4006_A000 106 Universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter 0 (UART0)

Private Peripheral Bus (PPB) memory map

number
0x4006_B000 107 —
0x4006_C000 108 —
0x4006_D000 109 —
0x4006_E000 110 —
0x4006_F000 111 —
0x4007_0000 112 —
0x4007_1000 113 —
0x4007_2000 114 —
0x4007_3000 115 Analog comparator 0 (ACMP0)
0x4007_4000 116 Analog comparator 1 (ACMP1)
0x4007_5000 117 —
0x4007_6000 118 Serial peripheral interface 0 (SPI0)
0x4007_7000 119 —
0x4007_8000 120 —
0x4007_9000 121 Keyboard interrupt 0 (KBI0)
0x4007_A000 122 Keyboard interrupt 1 (KBI1)
0x4007_B000 123 —
0x4007_C000 124 —
0x4007_D000 125 Power management controller (PMC)
0x4007_E000 126 —
0x4007_F000 127 —
0x400F_F000 128 GPIO controller
4.7 Private Peripheral Bus (PPB) memory map

The PPB is part of the defined ARM bus architecture and provides access to select
processor-local modules. These resources are only accessible from the core; other system
masters do not have access to them.
Table 4-22. PPB memory map
System 32-bit Address Range Resource Additional Range Detail Resource
0xE000_0000–0xE000_DFFF Reserved
0xE000_E000–0xE000_EFFF System Control Space 0xE000_E000–0xE000_E00F Reserved
(SCS)
0xE000_E010–0xE000_E0FF SysTick
0xE000_E100–0xE000_ECFF NVIC
0xE000_ED00–0xE000_ED8F System Control Block

Table 4-22. PPB memory map (continued)

System 32-bit Address Range Resource Additional Range Detail Resource
0xE000_ED90–0xE000_EDEF Reserved
0xE000_EDF0–0xE000_EEFF Debug
0xE000_EF00–0xE000_EFFF Reserved
0xE000_F000–0xE00F_EFFF Reserved
0xE00F_F000–0xE00F_FFFF Core ROM Space (CRS)

Private Peripheral Bus (PPB) memory map

Chapter 5
Clock Distribution
5.1 Introduction
This chapter presents the clock architecture for the device, the overview of the clocks and
includes a terminology section.
The Cortex M0+ resides within a synchronous core platform, where the processor and
bus masters, flash and peripherals clocks can be configured independently.
The ICS module will be used for main system clock generation. The ICS module controls
which clock sources (internal references, external crystals or external clock signals)
generate the source of the system clocks.
5.2 Programming model

The selection and multiplexing of system clock sources is controlled and programmed via
the ICS module. The setting of clock dividers and module clock gating for the system are
programmed via the SIM module. See those sections for detailed register and bit
descriptions.
5.3 High-level device clocking diagram

This device contains following on-chip clock sources:
• Internal Clock Source (ICS) module: The main clock source generator providing bus
clock and other reference clocks to peripherals

High-level device clocking diagram
• System Oscillator (OSC) module: The system oscillator providing reference clock to
internal clock source (ICS), the real-time clock counter clock module (RTC), and
other MCU sub-systems
• Low-Power Oscillator (LPO) module: The on-chip low-power oscillator providing 1
kHz reference clock to RTC and Watchdog (WDOG)
Figure 5-1 shows how clocks from the ICS and OSC modules are distributed to the
microcontroller’s other function units. Some modules in the microcontroller have
selectable clock input.
The following registers of the system oscillator, ICS, and SIM modules control the
multiplexers, dividers, and clock gates shown in the figure:
Table 5-1. Registers controlling multiplexers, dividers, and clock gate
OSC ICS SIM
Multiplexers OSC_CR ICS_C1 SIM_SOPT
Dividers — ICS_C2 SIM_CLKDIV
Clock gates OSC_CR ICS_C1 SIM_SCGC
ICS SIM
ICSIRCLK
CG CG RTC / WDOG
ICSFFCLK
CG FTM
32 kHz IRC
FLL
IREFS DIV3 CG FTM / PWT

ICSOUTCLK
BDIV
ICSFLLCLK DIV1 CG Core/System Clock
CLKS
RDIV
DIV2 CG Bus/Flash Clock
CLK_GEN
System oscillator
EXTAL OSCCLK OSCERCLK
CG RTC / WDOG / ADC
XTAL_CLK
OSC
XTAL logic OSCOS
PMC
LPOCLK
1kHz LPO RTC / WDOG
CG — Clock gate
Note: See subsequent sections for details on where these clocks are used.
Figure 5-1. Clocking diagram

Chapter 5 Clock Distribution
5.4 Clock definitions

The following table describes the clocks in Figure 5-1.
Table 5-2. Clock definitions
Clock name Description
Core clock ICSOUTCLK divided by DIV1, clocks the ARM Cortex-M0+ core. It's the CPU HCLK
Platform clock ICSOUTCLK divided by DIV1, clocks the crossbar switch and NVIC, It's the free-running
FCLK
System clock ICSOUTCLK divided by DIV1, clocks the bus masters directly
Bus clock System clock divided by DIV2, clocks the bus slaves and peripherals
Flash clock System clock divided by DIV2, clocks the Flash memory module. It is same as Bus clock in
this device
Timer clock ICSOUTCLK divided by DIV3, clocks the FTM and PWT modules
Debug clock Debug logic clock. On this device it is derived from platform clock
SWD clock DAP interface clock. SWD clock is typically driven by an external debugger and completely
asynchronous to Core clock and platform clock
ICSIRCLK ICS output of the internal 32 kHz IRC reference clock. ICSIRCLK can be selected as the
clock source of RTC or WDOG modules
ICSOUTCLK ICS output of either IRC, ICSFLLCLK or ICS's external reference clock that sources the core,
system, bus, and flash clock
ICSFLLCLK Output of the FLL, FLL locks the frequency to 1280 times the internal or external reference
frequency
ICSFFCLK ICS output of the fixed frequency clock. ICSFFCLK can be selected as clock source for the
FTM modules. The frequency of the ICSFFCLK is determined by the setting of the ICS
OSCCLK System oscillator output of the internal oscillator or sourced directly from EXTAL. Used as
ICS external reference clock
OSCERCLK System oscillator output sourced from OSCCLK that can be selected as the clock source of
RTC, WDOG or ADC modules
LPOCLK PMC 1 kHz output, The LPOCLK can be selected as the clock source to the RTC or WDOG
modules
5.4.1 Device clock summary

The following table provides more information regarding the on-chip clocks.
Table 5-3. Clock summary
Clock name Run mode frequency Clock source Clock is disabled when…
Core clock Up to 48 MHz ICSOUTCLK clock In Wait and Stop modes
divider

Clock definitions
Table 5-3. Clock summary (continued)

Clock name Run mode frequency Clock source Clock is disabled when…
Platform clock Up to 48 MHz ICSOUTCLK clock In Stop mode
divider
System clock Up to 48 MHz ICSOUTCLK clock In Stop mode
divider
Timer clock Up to 48 MHz ICSOUTCLK clock In Stop mode
divider
Bus clock Up to 24 MHz ICSOUTCLK clock In Stop mode
divider
Debug clock Up to 24 MHz Derive from Platform Debug not enabled
clock
SWD clock Up to 24MHz SWD_CLK pin Input from external clock, so will not be
disabled.
Flash clock Up to 24 MHz ICSOUTCLK clock In Stop mode
divider
Internal reference 31.25–39.0625 kHz IRC IRC ICS_C1[IRCLKEN]=0,
(ICSIRCLK) or
In Stop mode and ICS_C1[IREFSTEN]=0
External reference DC up to 48 MHz (bypass), System OSC OSC_CR[OSCEN]=0,
(OSCERCLK) 31.25–39.0625 kHz or
or In Stop mode and OSC_CR[OSCSTEN]=0
4–24 MHz (crystal)
FLL out clock 40-50 MHz System OSC In Stop mode,
(ICSFLLCLK) or IRC or
FLL not enabled
ICS Fixed Frequency 31.25–39.0625 kHz System OSC In Stop mode
clock (ICSFFCLK)
or IRC
LPOCLK 1 kHz PMC Available in all power modes
5.4.2 Clock distribution

The following figure shows a simplified clock distribution diagram

1-kHz LPOCLK
LPO
EXTAL OSCCLK
OSC
XTAL
ICSIRCLK
TCLK1
TCLK2
ICSFFCLK
FTM0 FTM2 PWT WDOG RTC ADC
TIMER_CLK
32-kHz BUS_CLK
IRC
ACMP0
PIT CRC IIC SPI0 UART0
ACMP1
CPU NVIC AWIC DEBUG DAP RAM

FLL
CORE_CLK
ICSOUTCLK PLAT_CLK
CLK_GEN
SYS_CLK
FLASH_CLK
FLASH FMC RGPIO AIPS

ICS
Figure 5-2. High-level clock distribution diagram
NOTE
Clock divide and gating are not shown in clock distribution
diagram.
5.5 Internal clocking sources

The internal clock sources on this device are as following:
• On-chip RC oscillator range of 31.25–39.0625 kHz as the reference of FLL input.
• On-chip internal 1 kHz oscillator as the low-frequency low-power source for RTC
and WDOG according to specific use case requirement.
The following table shows the frequency availability of this device:

Table 5-4. ICS bus frequency availability with internal reference
Reference ICSOUTCLK
FEI (high range) BDIV = 0 40 MHz ~ 50 MHz1
BDIV = 1 20 MHz ~ 25 MHz
BDIV = 2 10 MHz ~ 12.5 MHz
BDIV = 4 5 MHz ~ 6.25 MHz

External clock sources
Table 5-4. ICS bus frequency availability with internal reference (continued)
Reference ICSOUTCLK
BDIV = 8 2.5 MHz ~ 3.125 MHz
BDIV = 16 1.25 MHz ~ 1.5625 MHz
BDIV = 32 625 kHz ~ 781.25 kHz
BDIV = 64 312.5 kHz ~ 390.625 kHz
BDIV = 128 156.25 kHz ~ 195.3125 kHz
1. Carefully configure SIM_CLKDIV and BDIV to avoid any clock frequency higher than 48 MHz.
5.6 External clock sources

This device supports the following two external clock sources:
• External square wave input clock up to DC-48 MHz.
• External crystal oscillator or resonator:
• Low-range: 31.25–39.0625 kHz
• High-range: 4–24 MHz
NOTE
The external square wave input clock is only used when the
OSC module is working under external clock mode (bypass).
With the external square wave clock source, the user can use
FBE mode with FLL disabled to achieve lower power
consumption or precise clock source.
The following table shows the frequency availability of this device when sourcing from
OSC clock. OSC external clock mode is not shown.
Table 5-5. OSC frequency availability
ICS configuration External reference RDIV
FBE 31.25 kHz ~ 39.0625 kHz ̶
4 MHz ~ 24 MHz ̶
FEE1 31.25 kHz ~ 39.0625 kHz RDIV = 1
62.5 kHz ~ 78.125 kHz RDIV = 2
125 kHz ~ 56.25 kHz RDIV = 4
250 kHz ~ 312.5 kHz RDIV = 8
500 kHz ~ 625 kHz RDIV = 16
1 MHz ~ 1.25 MHz RDIV = 32
2 MHz ~ 2.5 MHz RDIV = 64
4 MHz ~ 5 MHz RDIV = 128

Table 5-5. OSC frequency availability (continued)

ICS configuration External reference RDIV
8 MHz ~ 10 MHz RDIV = 256
16 MHz ~ 20 MHz RDIV = 512
1. In FEE mode, FLL output frequency = OSC/RDIV *1280. Select the OSC and RDIV carefully to keep the FLL output
frequency within the limits.
5.7 Clock gating

The clock to each module can be individually gated on and off using the System Clock
Gating Control Register (SIM_SCGC). Prior to initializing a module, set the
corresponding bit in System Clock Gating Control Register (SIM_SCGC) to enable the
clock. Before turning off the clock, make sure to disable the module.
Any bus access to a peripheral that has its clock disabled generates an error termination.
5.8 Module clocks

The following table summarizes the clocks associated with each module.
Table 5-6. Module clocks
Module Bus interface clock Internal clocks I/O interface clocks
Core modules
ARM Cortex-M0+ core Platform clock Core clock —
NVIC Platform clock — —
DAP Platform clock — SWD_CLK
System modules
Port control Bus clock — —
Crossbar Switch Platform clock — —
Peripheral bridges System clock Bus clock —
PMC, SIM Bus clock LPOCLK —
MCM Platform clock — —
CRC Bus clock — —
Watchdog timer Bus clock Bus clock —
LPOCLK
ICSIRCLK
OSCERCLK
Clocks

Module clocks
Table 5-6. Module clocks (continued)

Module Bus interface clock Internal clocks I/O interface clocks
ICS Bus clock ICSOUTCLK —
ICSFLLCLK
ICSIRCLK
OSCERCLK
OSC Bus clock OSCERCLK —
Memory and memory interfaces
Flash Controller System clock — —
Flash memory Flash clock — —
SRAM Platform clock — —
Analog
ADC Bus clock Bus clock —
OSCERCLK
ADACK
ACMP0 Bus clock — —
ACMP1 Bus clock — —
Timers
PIT Bus clock — —
PWT Timer clock — TCLK1, TCLK2
FTM0 Timer clock Timer clock TCLK1, TCLK2
ICSFFCLK
FTM2 Timer clock Timer clock TCLK1, TCLK2
ICSFFCLK
RTC Bus clock Bus clock RTC_CLKOUT
LPOCLK
ICSIRCLK
OSCERCLK
SPI0 Bus clock — SPI0_SCK
I2C0 Bus clock — I2C0_SCL
UART0 Bus clock — —
Human-machine interfaces
GPIO System clock — —
KBI0 Bus clock — —
KBI1 Bus clock — —

5.8.1 FTM and PWT clocking

The counters for the FTM and PWT modules have a selectable clock as shown in the
following figure. TCLK1 and TCLK2 are optional external clock inputs for the timers.
NOTE
If TCLK1 or TCLK2 are selected as the counter clock for
FTMs or PWT, the on-chip timer clock (TIMER_CLK) is still
required to synchronize the counter results. And the on-chip
timer clock (TIMER_CLK) must be at least 4x faster than the
external clock from TCLK1 or TCLK2.

Module clocks
ICSIRCLK
TIMER_CLK
ICSFLLCLK DIV3
OSCERCLK
ICSFFCLK FTM0 clock
TCLK1
TCLK2
FTM0_SC[CLKS]
SIM_PINSEL[FTM0CLKPS]
FTM2 clock
SIM_PINSEL[FTM2CLKPS] FTM2_SC[CLKS]
PWT clock
SIM_PINSEL[PWTCLKPS]
PWT_R1[PCLKS]
Figure 5-3. FTM and PWT clock generation

Chapter 6
Reset and Boot
6.1 Introduction
The following reset sources are supported in this MCU:
Table 6-1. Reset sources
Reset sources Description
POR reset • Power-on reset (POR)
System resets • External pin reset (PIN)
• Low-voltage detect (LVD)
• Watchdog (WDOG) timer
• ICS loss of clock (LOC) reset
• Stop mode acknowledge error (SACKERR)
• Software reset (SW)
• Lockup reset (LOCKUP)
• MDM DAP system reset
Each of the system reset sources has an associated bit in the System Reset Status and ID
Register (SIM_SRSID).
The MCU can exit and reset in functional mode where the CPU is executing code
(default) or the CPU is in a debug halted state. There are several boot options that can be
configured. See Boot for more details.
6.2 Reset
This section discusses basic reset mechanisms and sources. Some modules that cause
resets can be configured to cause interrupts instead. Consult the individual peripheral
chapters for more information.

Reset
6.2.1 Power-on reset (POR)

When power is initially applied to the MCU or when the supply voltage drops below the
power-on reset voltage level (VPOR), the POR circuit causes a POR reset condition.
As the supply voltage rises, the LVD circuit holds the MCU in reset until the supply has
risen above the LVD low threshold (VLVDL). POR and LVD fields of the System Reset
Status and ID Register (SIM_SRSID). (SIM_SRSID[POR] and SIM_SRSID[LVD]) are
set following a POR.
6.2.2 System reset sources

Resetting the MCU provides a way to start processing from a known set of initial
conditions. System reset begins with the on-chip regulator in full regulation and system
clocking generation from an internal reference. When the processor exits reset, it
performs the following:
• Reads the start SP (SP_main) from vector-table offset 0
• Reads the start program counter (PC) from vector-table offset 4
• The Link Register (LR) is set to 0xFFFF_FFFF.
The on-chip peripheral modules are disabled and the non-analog I/O pins are initially
configured as disabled (except that the SWD_DIO/SWD_CLK, NMI and RESET pins
could be enabled after system reset according to the System Options Register
(SIM_SOPT) setting). The pins with analog functions assigned to them default to their
analog function after reset.
6.2.2.1 External pin reset (RESET)

This pin has an internal pullup resistor. Asserting RESET wakes the device from any
mode.
After POR reset, the PTA5 pin functions as RESET. SIM_SOPT[RSTPE] must be
programmed to enable the other functions. When this field is clear, this pin can function
as PTA5 or other alternative functions.
6.2.2.1.1 Reset pin filter

The RESET/IRQ pin filter supports filtering from both the 1 kHz LPO clock and the bus
clock. It can be used as a simple low-pass filter to filter any glitch that is introduced from
the pin of RESET/IRQ.

Chapter 6 Reset and Boot
The glitch width threshold can be adjusted easily by setting Port Filter Register
(PORT_IOFLT) between 1~4096 BUSCLKs (or 1~128 LPOCLKs). This configurable
glitch filter can replace an on-board external analog filter, and greatly improve the EMC
performance. Setting Port Filter Register (PORT_IOFLT) can configure the filter of the
whole port.
6.2.2.2 Low-voltage detect (LVD)

This device includes a system to protect against low-voltage conditions in order to protect
memory contents and control MCU system states during supply voltage variations. This
system consists of a power-on reset (POR) circuit, and an LVD circuit with a user
selectable trip voltage, either high (VLVDH) or low (VLVDL).
The LVD circuit is enabled when PMC_SPMSC1[LVDE] is set and the trip voltage is
selected by PMC_SPMSC2[LVDV]. The LVD is disabled upon entering the stop modes
unless PMC_SPMSC1[LVDSE] is set or in Serial Wire Debug (SWD) mode. If
PMC_SPMSC1[LVDSE] and PMC_SPMSC1[LVDE] are both set, the current
consumption will be higher in Stop mode with the LVD enabled.
6.2.2.3 Watchdog timer

The watchdog timer (WDOG) monitors the operation of the system by expecting periodic
communication from the software. This communication is generally known as servicing
(or refreshing) the watchdog. If this periodic refreshing does not occur, the watchdog
issues a system reset. The WDOG reset causes SIM_SRSID[WDOG] to set.
6.2.2.4 ICS loss-of-clock (LOC)

The ICS on this chip supports external reference clock monitor with reset capability.
In FBE, or FEE modes, if 1 is written to ICS_C4[CME], the clock monitor is enabled. If
the external reference falls below a certain frequency, such as floc_high or floc_low
depending on OSC_CR[RANGE], the MCU will reset. SIM_SRSID[LOC] will be set to
indicate the error.
In FBILP mode, the FLL is not on, so the external reference clock monitor will not
function even if 1 is written to ICS_C4[CME].
External reference clock monitor uses FLL as the internal reference clock. The FLL must
be functional before ICS_C4[CME] is set.

Reset
6.2.2.5 Stop mode acknowledge error (SACKERR)

This reset is generated if the core attempts to enter Stop mode, but not all modules
acknowledge Stop mode within 1025 cycles of the 1 kHz LPO clock.
A module might not acknowledge the entry to Stop mode if an error condition occurs.
The error can be caused by a failure of an external clock input to a module.
6.2.2.6 Software reset (SW)

The SYSRESETREQ field in the NVIC application interrupt and reset control register
can be set to force a software reset on the device. (See ARM's NVIC documentation for
the full description of the register fields, especially the VECTKEY field requirements.)
Setting SYSRESETREQ generates a software reset request. This reset forces a system
reset of all major components except for the debug module.
6.2.2.7 Lockup reset (LOCKUP)

The LOCKUP gives immediate indication of seriously errant kernel software. This is the
result of the core being locked because of an unrecoverable exception following the
activation of the processor’s built in system state protection hardware.
The LOCKUP condition causes a system reset and also causes SIM_SRSID[LOCKUP]
to set.
6.2.2.8 MDM-AP system reset request

Set the System Reset Request field in the MDM-AP Control register to initiate a system
reset. This is the primary method for resets via the SWD interface. The system reset is
held until this bit is cleared.
Set the Core Hold Reset field in the MDM-AP Control register to hold the core in reset as
the rest of the chip comes out of system reset.
6.2.3 MCU resets

A variety of resets are generated by the MCU to reset different modules.

Chapter 6 Reset and Boot
6.2.3.1 POR Only

The POR Only reset asserts on the POR reset source only. It resets the PMC and RTC.
The POR Only reset also causes all other reset types to occur.
6.2.3.2 Chip POR

The Chip POR asserts on POR and LVD reset sources. It resets the Reset Pin Filter
registers and parts of the SIM and ICS.
The Chip POR also causes the Chip Reset (including Early Chip Reset) to occur.
6.2.3.3 Early Chip Reset

The Early Chip Reset asserts on all reset sources. It resets only the flash memory module
and ARM platform. It negates before flash memory initialization begins ("earlier" than
when the Chip Reset negates).
6.2.3.4 Chip Reset

Chip Reset asserts on all reset sources and only negates after the RESET pin has also
negated. It resets the remaining modules (the modules not reset by other reset types).
6.3 Boot
This section describes the boot sequence, including sources and options.
Some configuration information such as clock trim values stored in factory programmed
flash locations is auto-loaded.
6.3.1 Boot sources

The CM0+ core adds support for a programmable Vector Table Offset Register (VTOR1 )
to relocate the exception vector table. This device supports booting from internal flash
and RAM.
1. VTOR: refer to Vector Table Offset Register in the ARMv6-M Architecture Reference Manual.

Boot
This device supports booting from internal flash with the reset vectors located at
addresses 0x0 (initial SP_main), 0x4 (initial PC), and RAM with relocating the exception
vector table to RAM.
6.3.2 Boot sequence

At power-up, the on-chip regulator holds the system in a POR state until the input supply
is above the POR threshold. The system continues to be held in this static state until the
internally regulated supplies have reached a safe operating voltage as determined by the
LVD. The Reset Controller logic then controls a sequence to exit reset.
1. A system reset is held on internal logic, the RESET pin is driven out low (about 4.2
µs), and the ICS is enabled in its default clocking mode.
2. The RESET pin is released. If RESET pin continues to be asserted (an indication of a
slow rise time on the RESET pin or external drive in low), the system continues to be
held in reset. Once the RESET pin is detected high, the core clock is enabled and the
system is released from reset.
3. The NVM starts internal initialization. Flash Controller is released from reset and
begins initialization operations while the core is still halted before the flash
initialization completes.
4. When the flash Initialization completes(16 µs) , the core sets up the stack, program
counter (PC), and link register (LR). The processor reads the start SP (SP_main)
from vector-table offset 0. The core reads the start PC from vector-table offset 4. LR
is set to 0xFFFF_FFFF. The CPU begins execution at the PC location.
Subsequent system resets follow this same reset flow.

Chapter 7
Power Management
7.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the various chip power modes and functionality of the individual
modules in these modes.
7.2 Power modes

The power management controller (PMC) provides the user with multiple power options.
The different modes of operation are supported to allow the user to optimize power
consumption for the level of functionality needed.
The device supports Run, Wait, and Stop modes which are easy to use for customers both
from different power consumption level and functional requirement. I/O states are held in
all the modes.
• Run mode—CPU clocks can be run at full speed and the internal supply is fully
regulated.
• Wait mode—CPU shuts down to conserve power; system clocks and bus clock are
running and full regulation is maintained.
• Stop mode—LVD optional enabled, and voltage regulator is in standby.
The three modes of operation are Run, Wait, and Stop. The WFI instruction invokes both
Wait and Stop modes for the chip.
Table 7-1. Chip power modes
Power mode Description Core mode Normal recover
method
Normal RUN Allows maximum performance of chip. Default mode out of Run —
reset; on-chip voltage regulator is on.

Entering and exiting power modes
Table 7-1. Chip power modes (continued)

Power mode Description Core mode Normal recover
method
Normal Wait via Allows peripherals to function while the core is in Sleep mode, Sleep Interrupt
WFI reducing power. NVIC remains sensitive to interrupts;
peripherals continue to be clocked.
Normal Stop via Places chip in static state. Lowest power mode that retains all Sleep Deep Interrupt
WFI registers while optionally maintaining LVD protection. NVIC is
disabled; AWIC is used to wake up from interrupt; peripheral
clocks are stopped.
7.3 Entering and exiting power modes

The WFI instruction invokes Wait and Stop modes for the chip. The processor exits the
low-power mode via an interrupt.
NOTE
The WFE instruction can have the side effect of entering a low-
power mode, but that is not its intended usage. See ARM
documentation for more on the WFE instruction.
7.4 Module operation in low-power modes

The following table illustrates the functionality of each module while the chip is in each
of the low-power modes. The standard behavior is shown with some exceptions.
Table 7-2. Module operation in low-power modes
Modules Run Wait Stop
Core modules
CPU On Standby Standby
NVIC On On Standby
System modules
PMC Full regulation Full regulation Loose regulation
WDOG On On Optional on
LVD On On Optional on
CRC On On Standby
Clock
ICS On On Optional on
OSC On On Optional on
LPO On On Always on

Chapter 7 Power Management
Table 7-2. Module operation in low-power modes (continued)

Modules Run Wait Stop
Memory
Flash On On Standby
RAM On Standby1 Standby
Timer
FTM On On Standby
PIT On On Standby
PWT On On Standby
RTC On On Optional on
Analog
ADC On On Optional on
ACMP On On Optional on
UART On On Standby2
SPI On On Standby3
IIC On On Standby4
Human-machine interfaces
KBI On On Standby5
IRQ On On Standby5
I/O On On State held
1. SRAM enable signal disables internal clock signal and masks the address and data inputs when held low, RAM clock at
chip can be active in Wait mode.
2. Supports wake-up on edge in Stop mode
3. Supports slave mode receive and wake-up in Stop mode
4. Supports address match wake-up in Stop mode
5. Supports pin interrupt wake-up in Stop mode

Module operation in low-power modes

Chapter 8
Security
8.1 Introduction
This device implements security based on the mode selected from the flash module. The
following sections provide an overview of flash security and details of the effects of
security on non-flash modules.
8.2 Flash security

The flash module provides security information to the MCU based on the state held by
the FTMRE_FSEC[SEC ]. The MCU, in turn, confirms the security request and limits
access to flash resources. During reset, the flash module initializes the Flash Security
Register (FTMRE_FSEC) using data read from the security byte of the flash
configuration field.
NOTE
The security features apply only to external accesses: CPU
accesses to the flash are not affected by the status of Flash
Security Register (FTMRE_FSEC).
In the unsecured state all flash commands are available on the programming interfaces
either from the debug port (SWD) or user code execution. When the flash is secured
(FTMRE_FSEC[SEC ] = 00, 01, or 11), the programmer interfaces are only allowed to
launch mass erase operations. Additionally, in this mode, the debug port has no access to
memory locations.

Security interactions with other modules
8.3 Security interactions with other modules

The flash security settings are used by the system to determine what resources are
available. The following sections describe the interactions between modules and the flash
security settings or the impact that the flash security has on non-flash modules.
8.3.1 Security interactions with debug

When flash security is active, the SWD port cannot access the memory resources of the
MCU.
Although most debug functions are disabled, the debugger can write to the Flash Mass
Erase in Progress field of the MDM-AP Control Register to trigger a mass erase (Erase
All Blocks) command. A mass erase via the debugger is allowed even when some
memory locations are protected.

Chapter 9
Debug
9.1 Introduction
This device's debug is based on the ARM CoreSight architecture and is configured to
provide the maximum flexibility as allowed by the restrictions of the pinout and other
available resources.
It provides register and memory accessibility from the external debugger interface, basic
run/halt control plus 2 breakpoints and 2 watchpoints.
This device supports only one debug interface, Serial Wire Debug (SWD).
9.2 Debug port pin descriptions

The debug port pins default to their SWD functionality after power-on-reset (POR).
Table 9-1. Serial wire debug pin description
Pin Name Type Description
SWD_CLK Input Serial Wire Clock. This pin is the clock for debug logic when in the Serial
Wire Debug mode. 1
SWD_DIO Input / Output Serial Wire Debug Data input/output. The SWD_DIO pin is used by an
external debug tool for communication and device control. This pin is
pulled up internally.
1. The pad library of this device does not support on-chip pull down; the SWD_CLK pin supports only pullup controlled by
PTAPE0, external pulldown resistor is required to fully support SWD protocol.

SWD status and control registers
9.3 SWD status and control registers

Through the ARM Debug Access Port (DAP), the debugger has access to the status and
control elements, implemented as registers on the DAP bus as shown in Figure 9-1. These
registers provide additional control and status for low-power mode recovery and typical
run-control scenarios. The status register bits also provide a means for the debugger to
get updated status of the core without having to initiate a bus transaction across the
crossbar switch, thus remaining less intrusive during a debug session.
A miscellaneous debug module (MDM) is implemented on this device, which contains
the DAP control and status registers. It is important to note that these DAP control and
status registers are not memory-mapped within the system memory map and are only
accessible via the Debug Access Port using SWD. The MDM-AP is accessible as Debug
Access Port 1 with the available registers shown in the table below.
Table 9-2. MDM-AP register summary
Address Register Description
0x0100_0000 Status See MDM-AP status register
0x0100_0004 Control See MDM-AP Control register
0x0100_00FC IDR Read-only identification register that
always reads as 0x001C_0020

Chapter 9 Debug
DPACC APACC
Data[31:0] A[3:2] RnW Data[31:0] A[3:2] RnW
0x0C
Debug Port ID Register (IDCODE) 0x00
0x04
0x08
Debug Port
SW-DP
Control/Status (CTRL/STAT)
See the ARM Debug Interface v5p1 Supplement.

DP Registers
Read Buffer (RDBUFF)

AP Select (SELECT)
Generic
Debug Port
(DP)
APSEL Data[31:0] A[7:4] A[3:2] RnW

Decode
Internal Bus
SELECT[31:24] (APSEL) selects the AP
SELECT[7:4] (APBANKSEL) selects the bank
A[3:2] from the APACC selects the register
within the bank
AHB-AP
0x00
0x3F
0x01
SELECT[31:24] = 0x00 selects the AHB-AP

See ARM documentation for further details
AHB Access Port
(AHB -AP) MDM -AP Access Port
MDM-AP
Control
Status
SELECT[31:24] = 0x01 selects the MDM-AP

IDR
SELECT[7:4] = 0x0 selects the bank with Status and Ctrl

A[3:2] = 2’b00 selects the Status Register
A[3:2] = 2’b01 selects the Control Register
Bus Matrix SELECT[7:4] = 0xF selects the bank with IDR

See Control and Status Register Descriptions A[3:2] = 2’b11 selects the IDR Register
(IDR register reads 0x001C_0020)
Figure 9-1. MDM AP addressing
9.3.1 MDM-AP status register

Table 9-3. MDM-AP status register assignments
Bit Name Description
0 Flash Mass Erase Acknowledge The Flash Mass Erase Acknowledge field is cleared after POR reset. The
field is also cleared at launch of a mass erase command due to write of
Flash Mass Erase in Progress field in MDM AP Control Register. The
Flash Mass Erase Acknowledge is set after Flash control logic has started
the mass erase operation.
1 Flash Ready Indicates that flash memory has been initialized and debugger can be
configured even if system is continuing to be held in reset via the
debugger.
0 Flash is under initialization.

SWD status and control registers
Table 9-3. MDM-AP status register assignments (continued)

Bit Name Description
1 Flash is ready.
2 System Security Indicates the security state. When secure, the debugger does not have
access to the system bus or any memory mapped peripherals. This field
indicates when the part is locked and no system bus access is possible.
NOTE: This bit is not valid until Flash Ready bit set.
0 Device is unsecured.
1 Device is secured.
3 System Reset Indicates the system reset state.
0 System is in reset.
1 System is not in reset.
4 Reserved
5 – 15 Reserved for future use Always read 0.
16 Core Halted Indicates the core has entered Debug Halt mode
0 Core is not halted.
1 Core is halted.
17 Core SLEEPDEEP SLEEPDEEP=1 indicates the core has entered Stop mode.
18 Core SLEEPING SLEEPING=1 indicates the core has entered Wait mode.
19 – 31 Reserved for future use Always reads 0.
9.3.2 MDM-AP Control register

Table 9-4. MDM-AP Control register assignments
Bit Name Secure1 Description
0 Flash Mass Erase in Progress Y Set to cause mass erase. Cleared by hardware after mass erase
operation completes.
1 Debug Disable N Set to disable debug. Clear to allow debug operation. When set, it
overrides the C_DEBUGEN field within the DHCSR2 and forces to
disable Debug logic.
2 Debug Request N Set to force the core to halt.
If the core is in Stop or Wait mode, this field can be used to wake the
core and transition to a halted state.
3 System Reset Request Y Set to force a system reset. The system remains held in reset until
this field is cleared. When this bit is set, RESET pin does not reflect
the status of system reset and does not keep low.
4 Core Hold N Configuration field to control core operation at the end of system
reset sequencing.
0 Normal operation—release the core from reset along with the rest
of the system at the end of system reset sequencing.

Chapter 9 Debug
Table 9-4. MDM-AP Control register assignments (continued)

Bit Name Secure1 Description
1 Suspend operation—hold the core in reset at the end of reset
sequencing. Once the system enters this suspended state, clearing
this control bit immediately releases the core from reset and CPU
operation begins.
5– 31 Reserved for future use N
1. Command available in secure mode

2. DHCSR: refer to the Debug Halting Control and Status Register in the ARMv6-M Architecture Reference Mannual.
9.4 Debug resets

The debug system receives the following sources of reset:
• System POR reset
Conversely, the debug system is capable of generating system reset using the following
mechanism:
• A system reset in the DAP control register which allows the debugger to hold the
system in reset.
• Writing 1 to the SYSRESETREQ field in the NVIC Application Interrupt and Reset
Control register
• A system reset in the DAP control register which allows the debugger to hold the
core in reset.
9.5 Debug in low-power modes

In low-power modes in which the debug modules are kept static or powered off, the
debugger cannot gather any debug data for the duration of the low-power mode.
• If the debugger is held static, the debug port returns to full functionality as soon as
the low-power mode exits and the system returns to a state with active debug.
• If the debugger logic is powered off, the debugger is reset on recovery and must be
reconfigured once the low-power mode is exited.
The active debug will prevent the chip from entering low-power mode. In case the chip is
already in low-power mode, a debug request from MDM-AP control register will wake
the chip from low-power mode.

Debug and security
9.6 Debug and security

When flash security is enabled, the debug port capabilities are limited in order to prevent
exploitation of secure data. In the secure state, the debugger still has access to the status
register and can determine the current security state of the device. In the case of a secure
device, the debugger has the capability of performing only a mass erase operation.

Chapter 10
Signal Multiplexing and Signal Descriptions
10.1 Introduction
To optimize functionality in small packages, pins have several functions available via
signal multiplexing. This chapter illustrates which of this device's signals are multiplexed
on which external pin.
The Pin Selection Register (SIM_PINSEL) controls which signal is present on the
external pin. Refer to that register to find the detailed control operation of a specific
multiplexed pin.
10.2 Pinout
10.2.1 Signal Multiplexing and Pin Assignments

The following table shows the signals available on each pin and the locations of these
pins on the devices supported by this document.
NOTE
• PTB5, PTC1, and PTC5 pins support high-current drive
output, refer to the PORT_HDRVE register in Port Control
chapter for details.
• VDD and VREFH are internally connected. Only one pin
(VDD or VREFH) is available on chip.
• VSS and VREFL are internally connected. Only one pin
(VSS or VREFL) is available on chip.
• PTA2 and PTA3 are true open-drain pins when operated as
output

Pinout
24 20 16 Pin Name Default ALT0 ALT1 ALT2 ALT3 ALT4 ALT5 ALT6 ALT7
QFN SOIC TSSO
P
1 — — PTC5 DISABLED PTC5 KBI1_P1 FTM2_CH3 BUSOUT
2 — — PTC4 DISABLED PTC4 KBI1_P0 FTM2_CH2 PWT_IN0
3 3 3 VDD VDD VDD
3 3 3 VREFH VDDA/ VDDA VREFH
VREFH
4 4 4 VREFL VREFL VREFL
4 4 4 VSS VSS/ VSSA VSS
VSSA
5 5 5 PTB7 EXTAL PTB7 I2C0_SCL EXTAL
6 6 6 PTB6 XTAL PTB6 I2C0_SDA XTAL
7 7 7 PTB5 ACMP1_OUT PTB5 KBI1_P7 FTM2_CH5 SPI0_PCS ACMP1_OUT
8 8 8 PTB4 NMI_b PTB4 KBI1_P6 FTM2_CH4 SPI0_MISO ACMP1_IN2 NMI_b
9 9 — PTC3 ADC0_SE11 PTC3 KBI1_P5 FTM2_CH3 ADC0_SE11
13 13 9 PTB3 ADC0_SE7 PTB3 KBI0_P7 SPI0_MOSI FTM0_CH1 ADC0_SE7
14 14 10 PTB2 ADC0_SE6 PTB2 KBI0_P6 SPI0_SCK FTM0_CH0 ACMP0_IN0 ADC0_SE6
15 15 11 PTB1 ADC0_SE5 PTB1 KBI0_P5 UART0_TX SPI0_MISO TCLK2 ADC0_SE5
16 16 12 PTB0 ADC0_SE4 PTB0 KBI0_P4 UART0_RX SPI0_PCS PWT_IN1 ADC0_SE4
17 — — PTA7 ADC0_SE3 PTA7 FTM2_FLT2 SPI0_MOSI ACMP1_IN1 ADC0_SE3
18 — — PTA6 ADC0_SE2 PTA6 FTM2_FLT1 SPI0_SCK ACMP1_IN0 ADC0_SE2
19 17 13 PTA3 DISABLED PTA3 KBI0_P3 UART0_TX I2C0_SCL
20 18 14 PTA2 DISABLED PTA2 KBI0_P2 UART0_RX I2C0_SDA
21 19 15 PTA1 ADC0_SE1 PTA1 KBI0_P1 FTM0_CH1 ACMP0_IN1 ADC0_SE1
22 20 16 PTA0 SWD_CLK PTA0 KBI0_P0 FTM0_CH0 RTCO ACMP0_IN2 ADC0_SE0 SWD_CLK
23 1 1 PTA5 RESET_b PTA5 IRQ TCLK1 RESET_b
24 2 2 PTA4 SWD_DIO PTA4 ACMP0_OUT SWD_DIO
10.2.2 Device pin assignment

Chapter 10 Signal Multiplexing and Signal Descriptions
PTA4
PTA5
PTA0
PTA1
PTA2
PTA3
21
22
19
20
24
23
PTC5 1 18 PTA6
PTC4 2 17 PTA7
VDD VREFH 3 16 PTB0
VREFL VSS 4 15 PTB1
PTB7 5 14 PTB2
PTB6 6 13 PTB3
10
11
12
9
7
PTC1
PTC0
PTC3
PTB5
PTB4
PTC2
Figure 10-1. 24-pin QFN package
PTA5 1 20 PTA0
PTA4 2 19 PTA1
VDD /VREFH 3 18 PTA2
VSS /VREFL 4 17 PTA3
PTB7 5 16 PTB0
PTB6 6 15 PTB1
PTB5 7 14 PTB2
PTB4 8 13 PTB3
PTC3 9 12 PTC0
PTC2 10 11 PTC1
Figure 10-2. 20-pin SOIC package

Module signal description tables
PTA5 1 16 PTA0
PTA4 2 15 PTA1
VDD /VREFH 3 14 PTA2
VSS /VREFL 4 13 PTA3
PTB7 5 12 PTB0
PTB6 6 11 PTB1
PTB5 7 10 PTB2
PTB4 8 9 PTB3
Figure 10-3. 16-pin TSSOP package
10.3 Module signal description tables

The following sections correlate the chip-level signal name with the signal name used in
the module's chapter. They also briefly describe the signal function and direction.
10.3.1 Core modules

Table 10-1. SWD signal descriptions
Chip signal name Module signal Description I/O
name
SWD_DIO SWD_DIO Serial Wire Debug Data input/output. The SWD_DIO pin is used by Input /
an external debug tool for communication and device control. This Output
pin is pulled up internally.
SWD_CLK SWD_CLK Serial Wire Clock. This pin is the clock for debug logic when in the Input
Serial Wire Debug mode. 1
1. The pad library of this device does not support on-chip pull down; the SWD_CLK pin supports only pullup controlled by
PTAPE0, external pulldown resistor is required to fully support SWD protocol.
10.3.2 System modules
Table 10-2. System signal descriptions

name
NMI — Non-maskable interrupt I
NOTE: Driving the NMI signal low forces a non-maskable

interrupt, if the NMI function is selected on the
corresponding pin.

Table 10-2. System signal descriptions (continued)

name
RESET — Reset bidirectional signal I/O
VDD — MCU power I
VSS — MCU ground I
10.3.3 Clock modules

Table 10-3. OSC signal descriptions
name
EXTAL EXTAL External clock/oscillator input Analog
input
XTAL XTAL Oscillator output Analog
output
10.3.4 Analog
Table 10-4. ADC0 signal descriptions
name
ADC0_SEn AD11-AD0 Analog channel inputs I
VDD/VREFH VDDA/VREFH Analog power supply / voltage reference high I
VSS/VREFL VSSA/VREFL Analog power ground / voltage reference low I
Table 10-5. ACMP0 signal descriptions

name
ACMP0_INn ACMP0_IN[2:0] Analog voltage inputs I
ACMP0_OUT ACMP0_OUT Comparator output O
Table 10-6. ACMP1 signal descriptions

name
ACMP1_INn ACMP1_IN[2:0] Analog voltage inputs I
ACMP1_OUT ACMP1_OUT Comparator output O

10.3.5 Timer modules

Table 10-7. FTM0 signal descriptions
name
TCLKn EXTCLK FTM external clock I
FTM0_CHn CHn FTM channel I/O
Table 10-8. FTM2 signal descriptions

name
TCLKn EXTCLK FTM external clock I
FTM2_CHn CHn FTM channel I/O
FTM2_FLT1 FAULT1 Fault input (1) I
FTM2_FLT2 FAULT2 Fault input (2) I
Table 10-9. RTC signal descriptions

name
RTCO RTCO RTC clock output O
Table 10-10. PWT signal descriptions

name
TCLKn ALTCLK PWT alternate external clock O
PWT_IN0 PWTIN[0] PWT input channel0 I
PWT_IN1 PWTIN[1] PWT input channel1 I
10.3.6 Communication Interfaces

Table 10-11. SPI0 signal descriptions
name
SPI0_MISO MISO Master Data In, Slave Data Out I/O
SPI0_MOSI MOSI Master Data Out, Slave Data In I/O

Table 10-11. SPI0 signal descriptions (continued)

name
SPI0_SCK SPSCK SPI Serial Clock I/O
SPI0_PCS SS Slave Select I/O
Table 10-12. I2C0 signal descriptions

name
I2C0_SCL SCL Bidirectional serial clock line of the I2C system. I/O
I2C0_SDA SDA Bidirectional serial data line of the I2C system. I/O
Table 10-13. UART0 signal descriptions

name
UART0_TX TxD Transmit data I/O
UART0_RX RxD Receive data I
10.3.7 Human-machine interfaces (HMI)

Table 10-14. GPIO signal descriptions
name
PTA[7:0]1 PORTA7-PORTA0 General-purpose input/output I/O
1
PTB[7:0] PORTA15-PORTA8 General-purpose input/output I/O
1
PTC[5:0] PORTA21-PORTA16 General-purpose input/output I/O
1. The available GPIO pins depend on the specific package. See the signal multiplexing section for which exact GPIO signals
are available.
Table 10-15. KBI0 signal descriptions

name
KBI0_Pn KBI0Pn Keyboard interrupt pins, n can be 0 ~ 7 I/O
Table 10-16. KBI1 signal descriptions

name
KBI1_Pn KBI1Pn Keyboard interrupt pins, n can be 0 ~ 7 I/O

Table 10-17. IRQ signal descriptions

name
IRQ IRQ IRQ input I

Chapter 11
Port Control (PORT)
11.1 Introduction
This device has three sets of I/O ports, which include up to 22 general-purpose I/O pins.
Not all pins are available on all devices.
Many of the I/O pins are shared with on-chip peripheral functions. The peripheral
modules have priority over the I/O, so when a peripheral is enabled, the associated I/O
functions are disabled.
After reset, the shared peripheral functions are disabled so that the pins are controlled by
the parallel I/O except PTA4, PTA0, PTB4 and PTA5 that are default to SWD_DIO,
SWD_CLK, NMI and RESET function. All of the parallel I/O are configured as high-
impedance (Hi-Z). The pin control functions for each pin are configured as follows:
• input disabled (GPIOx_PIDR[PID] = 1),
• output disabled ( GPIOx_PDDR[PDD] = 0), and
• internal pullups disabled (PORT_PUE(L)[PTxPEn] = 0).
Additionally, the parallel I/O that support high drive capability are disabled (HDRVE =
0x00) after reset.
The following three figures show the structures of each I/O pin.

Introduction
PORT_PUEL[PTxPEn]
GPIOx_PDDR[PDD]
GPIOx_PDOR[PDO]
GPIOx_PIDR[PID]
1 0 (except RESET/NMI)
CPU read GPIOx_PDIR[PDI]
0 Glitch filter
PORT_IOFLT
Figure 11-1. Normal I/O structure
PORT_PUEL[PTxPEn]
GPIOx_PDDR[PDD]
GPIOx_PDOR[PDO]
GPIOx_PIDR[PID]
0 Glitch filter
PORT_IOFLT
Figure 11-2. SDA(PTA2)/SCL(PTA3) structure

Chapter 11 Port Control (PORT)
PORT_PUEL[PTxPEn]
GPIOx_PDDR[PDD]
GPIOx_PDOR[PDO]
GPIOx_PIDR[PID]
HDRVE
0 Glitch filter
PORT_IOFLT
Figure 11-3. High drive I/O structure
11.2 Port data and data direction

Reading and writing of parallel I/O is accomplished through the port data registers
(GPIOx_PDIR/PDOR). The direction, input or output, is controlled through the input
disable register (GPIOx_PIDR) and data direction register (GPIOx_PDDR).
After reset, all parallel I/O default to the Hi-Z state. The corresponding bit in port data
direction register (GPIOx_PDDR) or input disable register (GPIOx_PIDR) must be
configured for output or input operation. Each port pin has an input disable bit and an
output enable bit. When GPIOx_PIDR[PID] = 0, a read from GPIOx_PDIR returns the
input value of the associated pin; when GPIOx_PIDR[PID] = 1, a read from
GPIOx_PDIR[PDI] returns 0 except for RESET/NMI.
NOTE
The GPIOx_PDDR must be clear when the corresponding pin is
used as input function to avoid contention. If set the
corresponding GPIOx_PDDR and GPIOx_PIDR bits at same
time, read from GPIOx_PDIR will always read the pin status.

Internal pullup enable
When a peripheral module or system function is in control of a port pin, the data direction
register bit still controls what is returned for reads of the port data register, even though
the peripheral system has overriding control of the actual pin direction.
When a shared analog function is enabled for a pin, all digital pin functions are disabled.
A read of the port data register returns a value of 0 for any bits that have shared analog
functions enabled. In general, whenever a pin is shared with both an alternate digital
function and an analog function, the analog function has priority such that if both of the
digital and analog functions are enabled, the analog function controls the pin.
A write of valid data to a port data register must occur before setting the output enable bit
of an associated port pin. This ensures that the pin will not be driven with an incorrect
data value.
11.3 Internal pullup enable

An internal pullup device can be enabled for each port pin by setting the corresponding
bit in one of the pullup enable registers (PORT_PUEL). The internal pullup device is
disabled if the pin is configured as an output by the parallel I/O control logic, or by any
shared peripheral function, regardless of the state of the corresponding pullup enable
register bit. The internal pullup device is also disabled if the pin is controlled by an
analog function.
NOTE
When configuring I2C0 to use "SDA(PTA2/PTB6) and
SCL(PTA3/PTB7)" pins, and if an application uses internal
pullups instead of external pullups, the internal pullups remain
at present setting when the pins are configured as outputs, but
they are automatically disabled to save power when the output
values are low.
11.4 Input glitch filter setting

A filter is implemented for each port pin that is configured as a digital input. It can be
used as a simple low-pass filter to filter any glitch that is introduced from the pins of
GPIO, FTM0, PWT, IRQ,RESET, NMI and KBI. The glitch width threshold can be
adjusted easily by setting PORT_IOFLT[FLTDIVn] between 1~4096 BUSCLKs (or
1~128 LPOCLKs). This configurable glitch filter can take the place of an on board
external analog filter, and greatly improve the EMC performance because any glitch will
not be wrongly sampled or ignored.

Setting register PORT_IOFLT can configure the filters of the whole port or peripheral
inputs. For example, setting PORT_IOFLT[FLTA] will affect all PTAn pins.
Glitches that are shorter than the selected clock period will be filtered out; Glitches that
are more than twice the selected clock period will not be filtered out. It will pass to
internal circuitry.
Pass to
internal rate
100%
Input high/low width

0
1(FLTxxx period) 2(FLTxxx period)
Note: FLTxxx is contents in register PORT_IOFLT.
Figure 11-4. Input glitch filter
11.5 High current drive

Output high sink/source current drive can be enabled by setting the corresponding bit in
the HDRVE register for PTC5, PTC1, and PTB5. These pins can used as output and
input; the pins output high sink/source current when they are operated as output.
• High-current drive function is disabled, if the pin is configured as an input by the
parallel I/O control logic.
• When configured as any shared peripheral function, high-current drive function still
works on these pins, but only when they are configured as outputs.
11.6 Pin behavior in Stop mode

In Stop mode, all I/O is maintained because internal logic circuitry stays powered up.
Upon recovery, normal I/O function is available to the user.

Port data registers
11.7 Port data registers

PORT memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4004_9000 Port Filter Register (PORT_IOFLT) 32 R/W 00C0_0000h 11.7.1/146
4004_9004 Port Pullup Enable Low Register (PORT_PUEL) 32 R/W 0000_0001h 11.7.2/149
4004_900C Port High Drive Enable Register (PORT_HDRVE) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 11.7.3/152
11.7.1 Port Filter Register (PORT_IOFLT)

This register sets the filters for input pins. Configure the high/low level glitch width
threshold. Glitches that are shorter than the selected clock period will be filtered out;
glitches that are more than twice the selected clock period will not be filtered out and will
pass to internal circuitry.
Address: 4004_9000h base + 0h offset = 4004_9000h
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R
W
FLTDIV3 FLTDIV2 FLTDIV1 FLTNMI FLTKBI1 FLTKBI0 FLTRST
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0
FLTPWT FLTFTM0 FLTIIC FLTC FLTB FLTA
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PORT_IOFLT field descriptions

Field Description
31–29 Filter Division Set 3
FLTDIV3
Port Filter Division Set 3
000 LPOCLK
001 LPOCLK/2
010 LPOCLK/4
011 LPOCLK/8
100 LPOCLK/16
101 LPOCLK/32
110 LPOCLK/64
111 LPOCLK/128
FLTDIV2

PORT_IOFLT field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
000 BUSCLK/32
001 BUSCLK/64
010 BUSCLK/128
011 BUSCLK/256
100 BUSCLK/512
101 BUSCLK/1024
110 BUSCLK/2048
111 BUSCLK/4096
FLTDIV1
00 BUSCLK/2
01 BUSCLK/4
10 BUSCLK/8
11 BUSCLK/16
23–22 Filter Selection for Input from NMI
FLTNMI
00 No filter.
01 Selects FLTDIV1, and will switch to FLTDIV3 in Stop mode automatically.
11 FLTDIV3
21–20 Filter Selection for Input from KBI1
FLTKBI1
00 No filter
11 FLTDIV3
19–18 Filter selection for Input from KBI0
FLTKBI0
00 No filter.
11 FLTDIV3
17–16 Filter Selection for Input from RESET/IRQ
FLTRST
00 No filter.
11 FLTDIV3
15–14 Filter Selection For Input from PWT_IN1/PWT_IN0
FLTPWT
00 No filter
01 Select FLTDIV1
10 Select FLTDIV2
11 Select FLTDIV3

Port data registers
PORT_IOFLT field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
13–12 Filter Selection For Input from FTM0CH0/FTM0CH1
FLTFTM0
00 No filter
01 Select FLTDIV1
10 Select FLTDIV2
11 Select FLTDIV3
11–10 Filter Selection For Input from SCL/SDA
FLTIIC
00 No filter
01 Select FLTDIV1
10 Select FLTDIV2
11 Select BUSCLK
9–6 This field is reserved.
Reserved This read-only field is reserved and always has the value 0.
5–4 Filter Selection for Input from PTC
FLTC
00 BUSCLK
01 FLTDIV1
10 FLTDIV2
11 FLTDIV3
3–2 Filter Selection for Input from PTB
FLTB
00 BUSCLK
01 FLTDIV1
10 FLTDIV2
11 FLTDIV3
FLTA Filter Selection for Input from PTA
00 BUSCLK
01 FLTDIV1
10 FLTDIV2
11 FLTDIV3

11.7.2 Port Pullup Enable Low Register (PORT_PUEL)

Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
PTCPE5
PTCPE4
PTCPE3
PTCPE2
PTCPE1
PTCPE0
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
PTBPE7
PTBPE6
PTBPE5
PTBPE4
PTBPE3
PTBPE2
PTBPE1
PTBPE0
PTAPE7
PTAPE6
PTAPE5
PTAPE4
PTAPE3
PTAPE2
PTAPE1
PTAPE0
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
PORT_PUEL field descriptions

Field Description
21 Pull Enable for Port C Bit 5
PTCPE5
This control field determines if the internal pullup device is enabled for the associated PTC pin. For port C
pins that are configured as outputs or Hi-Z, this field has no effect.
0 Pullup is disabled for port C bit 5.

1 Pullup is enabled for port C bit 5.
PTCPE4

PTCPE3

PTCPE2


Port data registers
PORT_PUEL field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
PTCPE1

PTCPE0

15 Pull Enable for Port B Bit 7
PTBPE7
This control field determines if the internal pullup device is enabled for the associated PTB pin. For port B
0 Pullup is disabled for port B bit 7.

1 Pullup is enabled for port B bit 7.
PTBPE6

PTBPE5

PTBPE4

PTBPE3

PTBPE2


Field Description

PTBPE1
pins that are configured as outputs or Hi-Z, tthis field has no effect.

PTBPE0

7 Pull Enable for Port A Bit 7
PTAPE7
This control field determines if the internal pullup device is enabled for the associated PTA pin. For port A
0 Pullup is disabled for port A bit 7.

1 Pullup is enabled for port A bit 7.
PTAPE6

PTAPE5

PTAPE4

PTAPE3

Port data registers

Field Description
NOTE: When configuring to use this pin as output high for IIC, the internal pullup device remains active
when PTAPE3 is set. It is automatically disabled to save power when output low.

PTAPE2
NOTE: When configuring to use this pin as output high for IIC, the internal pullup device remains active
when PTAPE2 is set. It is automatically disabled to save power when output low.

PTAPE1

PTAPE0

11.7.3 Port High Drive Enable Register (PORT_HDRVE)

Address: 4004_9000h base + Ch offset = 4004_900Ch
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 0
PTC5 PTC1 PTB5
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PORT_HDRVE field descriptions

Field Description

PORT_HDRVE field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
3 High Current Drive Capability of PTC5
PTC5
This read/write field enables the high current drive capability of PTC5.
0 PTC5 is disabled to offer high current drive capability.

1 PTC5 is enabled to offer high current drive capability.
2 High Current Drive Capability of PTC1
PTC1
This read/write field enables the high current drive capability of PTC1
0 PTC1 is disabled to offer high current drive capability.

1 PTC1 is enabled to offer high current drive capability.
1 High Current Drive Capability of PTB5
PTB5
This read/write field enables the high current drive capability of PTB5
0 PTB5 is disabled to offer high current drive capability.

1 PTB5 is enabled to offer high current drive capability.
0 This field is reserved.

Port data registers

Chapter 12
System Integration Module (SIM)
12.1 Introduction
The system integration module (SIM) provides system control and chip configuration
registers.
12.1.1 Features
The features of the SIM module are listed below.
• Reset status and device ID information
• System interconnection configuration and special pin enable
• Pin re-map control
• System clock gating control and clock divide
12.2 Memory map and register definition

The SIM module contains many fields for selecting the clock source and dividers for
various module clocks.
SIM memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4004_8000 System Reset Status and ID Register (SIM_SRSID) 32 R See section 12.2.1/156
4004_8004 System Options Register (SIM_SOPT) 32 R/W See section 12.2.2/159
4004_8008 Pin Selection Register (SIM_PINSEL) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 12.2.3/162
4004_800C System Clock Gating Control Register (SIM_SCGC) 32 R/W 0000_3000h 12.2.4/164
4004_8010 Universally Unique Identifier Low Register (SIM_UUIDL) 32 R Undefined 12.2.5/167

Memory map and register definition
SIM memory map (continued)

Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
Universally Unique Identifier Middle Low Register
4004_8014 32 R Undefined 12.2.6/168
(SIM_UUIDML)
Universally Unique Identifier Middle High Register
4004_8018 32 R Undefined 12.2.7/168
(SIM_UUIDMH)
4004_801C Clock Divider Register (SIM_CLKDIV) 32 R/W See section 12.2.8/169
12.2.1 System Reset Status and ID Register (SIM_SRSID)

Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R FAMID SUBFAMID RevID PINID
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 * * * * * * * *
LVD 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 * * * * * * * *
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SACKERR
LOCKUP
MDMAP
WDOG
POR
LOC
LVD
R 0 0 SW 0 PIN 0 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
LVD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u* 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
* Notes:
• RevID field: Decided by device revision number.
• PINID field: Decided by device pin number.
• u = Unaffected by reset.

Chapter 12 System Integration Module (SIM)
SIM_SRSID field descriptions

Field Description
31–28 Kinetis family ID
FAMID
0000 KE0x family.
other Reserved.
27–24 Kinetis sub-family ID
SUBFAMID
0100 KEx4 sub-family
other Reserved
23–20 Device Revision Number
RevID
19–16 Device Pin ID
PINID
0000 8-pin
0001 16-pin
0010 20-pin
0011 24-pin
0100 32-pin
0101 44-pin
0110 48-pin
0111 64-pin
1000 80-pin
1010 100-pin
other Reserved
13 Stop Mode Acknowledge Error Reset
SACKERR
Indicates that after an attempt to enter Stop mode, a reset has been caused by the failure of one or more
IICs to acknowledge within approximately one second to enter stop mode.
0 Reset is not caused by peripheral failure to acknowledge attempt to enter Stop mode.
1 Reset is caused by peripheral failure to acknowledge attempt to enter Stop mode.
11 MDM-AP System Reset Request
MDMAP
Indicates a reset has been caused by the host debugger system setting of the System Reset Request field
in the MDM-AP Control Register.
0 Reset is not caused by host debugger system setting of the System Reset Request bit.
1 Reset is caused by host debugger system setting of the System Reset Request bit.
10 Software
SW
Indicates a reset has been caused by software setting of SYSRESETREQ bit in Application Interrupt and
Reset Control Register in the ARM core.
0 Reset is not caused by software setting of SYSRESETREQ bit.

1 Reset caused by software setting of SYSRESETREQ bit
9 Core Lockup
LOCKUP

SIM_SRSID field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
Indicates a reset has been caused by the ARM core indication of a LOCKUP event.
0 Reset is not caused by core LOCKUP event.

1 Reset is caused by core LOCKUP event.
7 Power-On Reset
POR
Causes reset by the power-on detection logic. When the internal supply voltage is ramping up, the low-
voltage reset (LVR) status field is also set at that time, to indicate that the reset has occurred while the
internal supply was below the LVR threshold.
NOTE: This bit POR to 1, LVR to uncertain value and reset to 0 at any other conditions.
0 Reset not caused by POR.

1 POR caused reset.
6 External Reset Pin
PIN
Causes reset by an active low-level on the external reset pin.
0 Reset is not caused by external reset pin.

1 Reset came from external reset pin.
5 Watchdog (WDOG)
WDOG
Causes reset by the WDOG timer timing out. This reset source may be blocked by WDOG_CS1[EN] = 0.
0 Reset is not caused by WDOG timeout.

1 Reset is caused by WDOG timeout.
2 Internal Clock Source Module Reset
LOC
Causes reset by an ICS module reset.
0 Reset is not caused by the ICS module.

1 Reset is caused by the ICS module.
1 Low Voltage Detect
LVD
If PMC_SPMSC1[LVDRE] is set in Run mode or both PMC_SPMSC1[LVDRE] and
PMC_SPMSC1[LVDSE] are set in Stop mode, and the supply drops below the LVD trip voltage, an LVD
reset will occur. This field is also set by POR.
NOTE: This field is reset to 1 on POR and LVR, and reset to 0 on other reset.
0 Reset is not caused by LVD trip or POR.

1 Reset is caused by LVD trip or POR.

12.2.2 System Options Register (SIM_SOPT)
NOTE
RSTPE and NMIE are write-once only on each reset.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
DLYACT
R
CLKOE
DELAY ADHWT BUSREF
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
POR/ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
LVD
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 0 0 0 0
TXDME
RXDCE
ACTRG
RSTPE
SWDE
RXDFE FTMIC NMIE

FTMSYNC
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 u* u* 0
POR/ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
LVD
* Notes:
SIM_SOPT field descriptions

Field Description
31–24 FTM2 Trigger Delay
DELAY
Specifies the delay from FTM2 initial or match trigger to ADC hardware trigger when 1 is written to
ADHWT. The 8-bit modulo value allows the delay from 0 to 255 upon the BUSREF clock settings. This is a
SIM_SOPT field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
one-shot counter that starts ticking when the trigger arrives and stops ticking when the counter value
reaches the modulo value that is defined.
23 FTM2 Trigger Delay Active
DLYACT
This read-only field specifies the status if the FTM2 initial or match delay is active. This field is set when an
FTM2 trigger arrives and the delay counter is ticking. Otherwise, this field will be clear.
0 The delay is inactive.

1 The delay is active.
22–20 ADC Hardware Trigger Source
ADHWT
Selects the ADC hardware trigger source. All trigger sources start ADC conversion on rising-edge.
000 RTC overflow as the ADC hardware trigger

001 FTM0 init trigger as the ADC hardware trigger
010 FTM2 init trigger with 8-bit programmable counter delay
011 FTM2 match trigger with 8-bit programmable counter delay
100 PIT channel0 overflow as the ADC hardware trigger
101 PIT channel1 overflow as the ADC hardware trigger
110 ACMP0 out as the ADC hardware trigger.
111 ACMP1 out as the ADC hardware trigger
19 Bus Clock Output Enable
CLKOE
Enables bus clock output on
0 Bus clock output is disabled on PTC5.

1 Bus clock output is enabled on PTC5.
18–16 BUS Clock Output select
BUSREF
Enables bus clock output via an optional prescaler.
000 Bus
001 Bus divided by 2
15 UART0_TX Modulation Select
TXDME
Enables the UART0_TX output modulated by FTM0 channel 0.
0 UART0_TX output is connected to pinout directly.

1 UART0_TX output is modulated by FTM0 channel 0 before mapped to pinout.
14 FTM2 Synchronization Select
FTMSYNC
Generates a PWM synchronization trigger to the FTM2 module if 1 is written to this field.
0 No synchronization triggered.
1 Generates a PWM synchronization trigger to the FTM2 modules.


Field Description
12 UART0_RX Capture Select
RXDCE
Enables the UART0_RX to be captured by FTM0 channel 1.
0 UART0_RX input signal is connected to the UART0 module only.

1 UART0_RX input signal is connected to the UART0 module and FTM0 channel 1.
9–8 UART0 RxD Filter Select
RXDFE
Enables the UART0 RxD input to be filtered by ACMP. When this function is enabled, any signal tagged
with ACMP inputs can be regarded UART0.
00 RXD0 input signal is connected to UART0 module directly.

01 RXD0 input signal is filtered by ACMP0, then injected to UART0.
10 RXD0 input signal is filtered by ACMP1, then injected to UART0.
11 Reserved.
7–6 FTM0CH0 Input Capture Source
FTMIC
Selects the sources for FTM0CH0 as capture input.
00 FTM0_CH0 pin
01 ACMP0 OUT
10 ACMP1 OUT
11 RTC overflow
5 ACMP Trigger FTM2 selection
ACTRG
Selects the two ACMP outputs as the trigger0 input of FTM2
0 ACMP0 out
1 ACMP1 out
3 Single Wire Debug Port Pin Enable
SWDE
Enables the PTA4/ACMP0_OUT/SWD_DIO pin to function as SWD_DIO, and PTA0/KBI0_P0/
FTM0_CH0/RTCO/ACMP0_IN2/ADC0_SE0/SWD_CLK pin function as SWD_CLK. When clear, the two
pins function as PTA4 and PTA0. This pin defaults to the SWD_DIO and SWD_CLK function following any
MCU reset.
0 PTA4/ACMP0_OUT/SWD_DIO as PTA4 or ACMP0_OUT function, PTA0/KBI0_P0/FTM0_CH0/

RTCO/ACMP0_IN2/ADC0_SE0/SWD_CLK as PTA0, KBI0_P0, FTM0_CH0, RTCO, ACMP0_IN2 or
ADC0_SE0 function.
1 PTA4/ACMP0_OUT/SWD_DIO as SWD_DIO function, PTA0/KBI0_P0/FTM0_CH0/RTCO/
ACMP0_IN2/ADC0_SE0/SWD_CLK as SWD_CLK function.
2 RESET Pin Enable
RSTPE
This write-once field can be written after any reset. When RSTPE is set, the PTA5/IRQ/TCLK1/RESET pin
functions as RESET. When clear, the pin functions as one of its alternative functions. This pin defaults to


Field Description
RESET following an MCU POR. Other resets will not affect this field. When RSTPE is set, an internal
pullup device on RESET is enabled.
0 PTA5/IRQ/TCLK1/RESET pin functions as PTA5, IRQ, or TCLK1.

1 PTA5/IRQ/TCLK1/RESET pin functions as RESET.
1 NMI Pin Enable
NMIE
This write-once field can be written after any reset. When NMIE is set, the PTB4/KBI1_P6/FTM2_CH4/
SPI0_MISO/ACMP1_IN2/NMI pin functions as NMI. When clear, the pin functions as one of its alternative
functions. This pin defaults to NMI following an MCU POR. Other resets will not affect this bit. When NMIE
is set, an internal pullup device on NMI is enabled.
0 PTB4/KBI1_P6/FTM2_CH4/SPI0_MISO/ACMP1_IN2/NMI pin functions as PTB4, KBI1_P6,

FTM2_CH4, SPI0_MISO or ACMP1_IN2.
1 PTB4/KBI1_P6/FTM2_CH4/SPI0_MISO/ACMP1_IN2/NMI pin functions as NMI.
12.2.3 Pin Selection Register (SIM_PINSEL)

Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
FTM2CLKPS
FTM0CLKPS
PWTCLKPS
R 0 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 0
UART0PS
FTM2PS3
FTM2PS2
FTM0PS1
FTM0PS0
SPI0PS
I2C0PS
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SIM_PINSEL field descriptions

Field Description
31 PWT TCLK Pin Select
PWTCLKPS
Selects the TCLK pinout.
0 Selects TCLK1 for PWT module.

1 Selects TCLK2 for PWT module.

SIM_PINSEL field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
30 FTM2 TCLK Pin Select
FTM2CLKPS
0 Selects TCLK1 for FTM2 module.

28 FTM0 TCLK Pin Select
FTM0CLKPS

15 FTM2_CH3 Port Pin Select
FTM2PS3
Selects the FTM2_CH3 channel pinout.
0 FTM2_CH3 channels are mapped on PTC3.

FTM2PS2

FTM0PS1
0 FTM0_CH1 channels are mapped on PTA1.

1 FTM0_CH1 channels are mapped on PTB3.
FTM0PS0
0 FTM0_CH0 channels are mapped on PTA0.

1 FTM0_CH0 channels are mapped on PTB2.
7 UART0 Pin Select
UART0PS
Selects the UART0 pinouts.
0 UART0_RX and UART0_TX are mapped on PTB0 and PTB1.

1 UART0_RX and UART0_TX are mapped on PTA2 and PTA3.
6 SPI0 Pin Select
SPI0PS
Selects the SPI0 Pinouts.

SIM_PINSEL field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 SPI0_SCK, SPI0_MOSI, SPI0_MISO, and SPI0_PCS are mapped on PTB2, PTB3, PTB4, and PTB5.
1 SPI0_SCK, SPI0_MOSI, SPI0_MISO, and SPI0_PCS are mapped on PTA6, PTA7, PTB1, and PTB0.
5 I2C0 Port Pin Select
I2C0PS
Selects the I2C0 port pins.
0 I2C0_SCL and I2C0_SDA are mapped on PTA3 and PTA2, respectively.

1 I2C0_SCL and I2C0_SDA are mapped on PTB7 and PTB6, respectively.
Reserved This field is reserved.
This read-only field is reserved and always has the value 0.
12.2.4 System Clock Gating Control Register (SIM_SCGC)

Address: 4004_8000h base + Ch offset = 4004_800Ch
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0 0 0 0 0 0
ACMP1
ACMP0
UART0
ADC IRQ KBI1 KBI0 SPI0 I2C
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 0 0 0 0
FLASH
FTM2
FTM0
SWD CRC PWT PIT RTC

W
Reset 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SIM_SCGC field descriptions

Field Description
31 ACMP1 Clock Gate Control
ACMP1
Controls the clock gate to the ACMP1 module.
0 Bus clock to the ACMP1 module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the ACMP1 module is enabled.
30 ACMP0 Clock Gate Control
ACMP0
Controls the clock gate to the ACMP0 module.
0 Bus clock to the ACMP0 module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the ACMP0 module is enabled.
29 ADC Clock Gate Control
ADC
Controls the clock gate to the ADC module.

SIM_SCGC field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 Bus clock to the ADC module is disabled.
1 Bus clock to the ADC module is enabled.
27 IRQ Clock Gate Control
IRQ
Controls the clock gate to the IRQ module.
0 Bus clock to the IRQ module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the IRQ module is enabled.
25 KBI1 Clock Gate Control
KBI1
Controls the clock gate to the KBI1 module.
0 Bus clock to the KBI1 module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the KBI1 module is enabled.
24 KBI0 Clock Gate Control
KBI0
Controls the clock gate to the KBI0 module.
0 Bus clock to the KBI0 module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the KBI0 module is enabled.
20 UART0 Clock Gate Control
UART0
Controls the clock gate to the UART0 module.
0 Bus clock to the UART0 module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the UART0 module is enabled.
18 SPI0 Clock Gate Control
SPI0
Controls the clock gate to the SPI0 module.
0 Bus clock to the SPI0 module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the SPI0 module is enabled.
17 I2C Clock Gate Control
I2C
Controls the clock gate to the I2C module.
0 Bus clock to the IIC module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the IIC module is enabled.


Field Description
13 SWD (single wire debugger) Clock Gate Control
SWD
Controls the clock gate to the SWD module.
0 Bus clock to the SWD module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the SWD module is enabled.
12 Flash Clock Gate Control
FLASH
Controls the clock gate to the flash module.
0 Bus clock to the flash module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the flash module is enabled.
10 CRC Clock Gate Control
CRC
Controls the clock gate to the CRC module.
0 Bus clock to the CRC module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the CRC module is enabled.
7 FTM2 Clock Gate Control
FTM2
Controls the clock gate to the FTM2 module.
0 Bus clock to the FTM2 module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the FTM2 module is enabled.
5 FTM0 Clock Gate Control
FTM0
Controls the clock gate to the FTM0 module.
0 Bus clock to the FTM0 module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the FTM0 module is enabled.
4 PWT Clock Gate Control
PWT
Controls the clock gate to the PWT module.
0 Timer clock to the PWT module is disabled.

1 Timer clock to the PWT module is enabled.
1 PIT Clock Gate Control
PIT
Controls the clock gate to the PIT module.
0 Bus clock to the PIT module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the PIT module is enabled.


Field Description
0 RTC Clock Gate Control
RTC
Controls the clock gate to the RTC module.
0 Bus clock to the RTC module is disabled.

1 Bus clock to the RTC module is enabled.
12.2.5 Universally Unique Identifier Low Register (SIM_UUIDL)

The read-only SIM_UUIDL register contains a series of number to identify the unique
device in the family.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R ID[31:0]
W
* Notes:
SIM_UUIDL field descriptions

Field Description
ID[31:0] Universally Unique Identifier

12.2.6 Universally Unique Identifier Middle Low Register

(SIM_UUIDML)
The read-only SIM_UUIDML register contains a series of number to identify the unique
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R ID[63:32]
W
* Notes:
SIM_UUIDML field descriptions

Field Description
12.2.7 Universally Unique Identifier Middle High Register

(SIM_UUIDMH)
The read-only SIM_UUIDMH register contains a series of number to identify the unique
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 ID[80:64]
W
* Notes:
SIM_UUIDMH field descriptions

Field Description

12.2.8 Clock Divider Register (SIM_CLKDIV)

This register sets the divide value for the clock.
NOTE
Carefully confiugre the OUTDIV1 and OUTDIV2 to avoid bus
clock frequency high than 24 MHz.
While configuring the OUTDIV1, OUTDIV2 and OUTDIV3 to
set the clocks, the clock for the timers (FTM0, FTM2, PWT)
must not be slower than bus clock.
Address: 4004_8000h base + 1Ch offset = 4004_801Ch
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0 0 0 0
OUTDIV2
OUTDIV3
OUTDIV1
W
Reset 0 0 u* u* 0 0 0 u* 0 0 0 u* 0 0 0 0
POR/ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
LVD
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
POR/ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
LVD
* Notes:
SIM_CLKDIV field descriptions

Field Description
29–28 Clock 1 output divider value
OUTDIV1
This field sets the divide value for the core/system clock,.
00 Same as ICSOUTCLK.
01 ICSOUTCLK divides by 2.

Functional description
SIM_CLKDIV field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
24 Clock 2 output divider value
OUTDIV2
This field sets the divide value for the bus/FLASH, follow OUTDIV1.
0 Not divided from divider1.

1 Divide by 2 from divider1.
20 Clock 3 output divider value
OUTDIV3
This field sets the divide value for the timers(FTM0, FTM2,PWT).
0 Same as ICSOUTCLK.
12.3 Functional description

See Introduction section.

Chapter 13
Power Management Controller (PMC)
13.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the functionality of the individual modules in the chip’s low-
power modes and the operation of Power Management Controller module.
13.2 Low voltage detect (LVD) system

This device includes a system to protect against low voltage conditions in order to protect
memory contents and control MCU system states during supply voltage variations. This
system consists of a power-on reset (POR) circuit and an LVD circuit with a user
selectable trip voltage, either high (VLVDH) or low (VLVDL). The LVD circuit is enabled
when SPMSC1[LVDE] is set and the trip voltage is selected by SPMSC2[LVDV]. The
LVD is disabled upon entering the Stop mode unless SPMSC1[LVDSE] is set. If
SPMSC1[LVDSE] and SPMSC1[LVDE] are both set, the current consumption will be
greater in Stop mode with the LVD system enabled.
The following figure presents the block diagram of the low-voltage detect (LVD) system.

Low voltage detect (LVD) system
vDD
LVDV:LVWV
R1
LVD0
-
LVD1
LVD
+
LVW0
LVW1
LVW2 -
LVW3 LVW
+
vBG
Bandgap
R7
vss
Figure 13-1. Low voltage detect (LVD) block diagram
13.2.1 Power-on reset (POR) operation

When power is initially applied to the MCU, or when the supply voltage drops below the
VPOR level, the POR circuit will cause a reset condition. As the supply voltage rises, the
LVD circuit will hold the chip in reset until the supply has risen above the VLVDL level.
Both the SIM_SRSID[POR] and SIM_SRSID[LVD] are set following a POR.
13.2.2 LVD reset operation

The LVD can be configured to generate a reset upon detection of a low-voltage condition
by setting SPMSC1[LVDRE] to 1. After an LVD reset has occurred, the LVD system
will hold the MCU in reset until the supply voltage has risen above the level determined
by LVDV. SIM_SRSID[LVD] is set following either an LVD reset or POR.
13.2.3 LVD enabled in Stop mode

The LVD system is capable of generating a reset when the supply voltage drops below
the LVD voltage. If the LVD is enabled in Stop (both SPMSC1[LVDE] and
SPMSC1[LVDSE] set to 1) at the time the CPU executes a STOP instruction, then the
voltage regulator remains active during Stop mode.

Chapter 13 Power Management Controller (PMC)
13.2.4 Low-voltage warning (LVW)

The LVD system has a low voltage warning flag to indicate that the supply voltage is
approaching the LVW voltage. When a low voltage condition is detected and the LVD
circuit is configured for interrupt operation (SPMSC1[LVDE] set, SPMSC1[LVWIE]
set), SPMSC1[LVWF] will be set and LVW interrupt will occur. There are four user-
selectable trip voltages for the LVW upon each LVDV configuration. The trip voltage is
selected by SPMSC2[LVWV].
13.3 Bandgap reference

This device includes an on-chip bandgap reference (≈1.2 V) connected to the ADC
channel. The bandgap reference voltage will not drop under the full operating voltage
even when the operating voltage is falling. This reference voltage acts as an ideal
reference voltage for accurate measurements.
13.4 Memory map and register descriptions

PMC memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
System Power Management Status and Control 1 Register
4007_D000 8 R/W 1Ch 13.4.1/174
(PMC_SPMSC1)
System Power Management Status and Control 2 Register
4007_D001 8 R/W 00h 13.4.2/175
(PMC_SPMSC2)

Memory map and register descriptions
13.4.1 System Power Management Status and Control 1 Register

(PMC_SPMSC1)
This high-page register contains status and control bits to support the low-voltage
detection function, and to enable the bandgap voltage reference for use by the ADC
module. This register must be written during the user's reset initialization program to set
the desired controls, even if the desired settings are the same as the reset settings.
Address: 4007_D000h base + 0h offset = 4007_D000h
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read LVWF 0
LVWIE LVDRE LVDSE LVDE BGBE
Write LVWACK 0
Reset 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
PMC_SPMSC1 field descriptions

Field Description
7 Low-Voltage Warning Flag
LVWF
Indicates the low-voltage warning status.
NOTE: LVWF will be set in the case when VSupply transitions below the trip point or after reset and VSupply
is already below VLVW. LVWF may be 1 after power-on-reset, therefore, to use LVW interrupt
function, before enabling LVWIE, LVWF must be cleared by writing LVWACK first.
0 Low-voltage warning is not present.

1 Low-voltage warning is present or was present.
6 Low-Voltage Warning Acknowledge
LVWACK
If LVWF = 1, a low-voltage condition has occurred. To acknowledge this low-voltage warning, write 1 to
LVWACK, which automatically clears LVWF to 0 if the low-voltage warning is no longer present.
5 Low-Voltage Warning Interrupt Enable
LVWIE
Enables hardware interrupt requests for LVWF.
0 Hardware interrupt is disabled (use polling).

1 Requests a hardware interrupt when LVWF = 1.
4 Low-Voltage Detect Reset Enable
LVDRE
This write-once bit enables LVD events to generate a hardware reset (provided LVDE = 1).
NOTE: This field can be written only one time after reset. Additional writes are ignored.
If LVDRE = 0, use LVW to monitor status because no flag was assert.
0 LVD events do not generate hardware resets.

1 Forces an MCU reset when an enabled low-voltage detect event occurs.
3 Low-Voltage Detect Stop Enable
LVDSE

Chapter 13 Power Management Controller (PMC)
PMC_SPMSC1 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
Provided LVDE = 1, this read/write field determines whether the low-voltage detect function operates
when the MCU is in Stop mode.
0 Low-voltage detect is disabled during Stop mode.

1 Low-voltage detect is enabled during Stop mode.
2 Low-Voltage Detect Enable
LVDE
This write-once bit enables low-voltage detect logic and qualifies the operation of other fields in this
register.
NOTE: This field can be written only one time after reset. Additional writes are ignored.
0 LVD logic is disabled.

1 LVD logic is enabled.
Reserved
0 Bandgap Buffer Enable
BGBE
Enables an internal buffer for the bandgap voltage reference for use by the ADC module on one of its
internal channels or bandgap selected as ACMP's reference.
0 Bandgap buffer is disabled.

1 Bandgap buffer is enabled.
13.4.2 System Power Management Status and Control 2 Register

(PMC_SPMSC2)
This register is used to report the status of the low-voltage warning function, and to
configure the Stop mode behavior of the MCU. This register should be written during the
user's reset initialization program to set the desired controls, even if the desired settings
are the same as the reset settings.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 0
LVDV LVWV
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PMC_SPMSC2 field descriptions

Field Description
6 Low-Voltage Detect Voltage Select
LVDV
This write-once bit selects the low-voltage detect (LVD) trip point setting. See data sheet for details.

PMC_SPMSC2 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 Low trip point is selected (VLVD = VLVDL).
1 High trip point is selected (VLVD = VLVDH).
5–4 Low-Voltage Warning Voltage Select
LVWV
Selects the low-voltage warning (LVW) trip point voltage. See data sheet for details.
00 Low trip point is selected (VLVW = VLVW1).

01 Middle 1 trip point is selected (VLVW = VLVW2).
10 Middle 2 trip point is selected (VLVW = VLVW3).
11 High trip point is selected (VLVW = VLVW4).

Chapter 14
Miscellaneous Control Module (MCM)
14.1 Introduction
NOTE
For the chip-specific implementation details of this module's
instances, see the chip configuration information.
The Miscellaneous Control Module (MCM) provides a myriad of miscellaneous control
functions.
14.1.1 Features
The MCM includes the following features:
• Program-visible information on the platform configuration
• Flash controller speculation buffer and cache configurations
14.2 Memory map/register descriptions

The memory map and register descriptions found here describe the registers using byte
addresses. The registers can be written only when in supervisor mode.
MCM memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
Crossbar Switch (AXBS) Slave Configuration
F000_3008 16 R 0007h 14.2.1/178
(MCM_PLASC)
Crossbar Switch (AXBS) Master Configuration
F000_300A 16 R 0001h 14.2.2/178
(MCM_PLAMC)
F000_300C Platform Control Register (MCM_PLACR) 32 R/W 0000_0800h 14.2.3/179

Memory map/register descriptions
14.2.1 Crossbar Switch (AXBS) Slave Configuration (MCM_PLASC)
PLASC is a 16-bit read-only register identifying the presence/absence of bus slave

connections to the device’s crossbar switch.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 ASC
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
MCM_PLASC field descriptions

Field Description
ASC Each bit in the ASC field indicates whether there is a corresponding connection to the crossbar switch's
slave input port.
0 A bus slave connection to AXBS input port n is absent.

1 A bus slave connection to AXBS input port n is present.
14.2.2 Crossbar Switch (AXBS) Master Configuration (MCM_PLAMC)
PLAMC is a 16-bit read-only register identifying the presence/absence of bus master

connections to the device's crossbar switch.
Address: F000_3000h base + Ah offset = F000_300Ah
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 AMC
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
MCM_PLAMC field descriptions

Field Description
AMC Each bit in the AMC field indicates whether there is a corresponding connection to the AXBS master input
port.

Chapter 14 Miscellaneous Control Module (MCM)
MCM_PLAMC field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 A bus master connection to AXBS input port n is absent
1 A bus master connection to AXBS input port n is present
14.2.3 Platform Control Register (MCM_PLACR)

The speculation buffer and cache in the flash memory controller is configurable via
PLACR[15:10 ].
The speculation buffer is enabled only for instructions after reset. It is possible to have
these states for the speculation buffer:
DFCS EFDS Description
0 0 Speculation buffer is on for instruction
and off for data.
0 1 Speculation buffer is on for instruction
and on for data.
1 X Speculation buffer is off.
The cache in flash controller is enabled and caching both instruction and data type fetches
after reset. It is possible to have these states for the cache:
DFCC DFCIC DFCDA Description
0 0 0 Cache is on for both
instruction and data.
0 0 1 Cache is on for instruction
and off for data.
0 1 0 Cache is off for instruction
and on for data.
0 1 1 Cache is off for both
instruction and data.
1 X X Cache is off.

Address: F000_3000h base + Ch offset = F000_300Ch
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
ESFC
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 0
DFCDA
DFCIC
DFCC
DFCS
EFDS
CFCC
Reset 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MCM_PLACR field descriptions

Field Description
16 Enable Stalling Flash Controller
ESFC
Enables stalling flash controller when flash is busy.
When software needs to access the flash memory while a flash memory resource is being manipulated by
a flash command, software can enable a stall mechanism to avoid a read collision. The stall mechanism
allows software to execute code from the same block on which flash operations are being performed.
However, software must ensure the sector the flash operations are being performed on is not the same
sector from which the code is executing.
ESFC enables the stall mechanism. This bit must be set only just before the flash operation is executed
and must be cleared when the operation completes.
0 Disable stalling flash controller when flash is busy.

1 Enable stalling flash controller when flash is busy.
15 Disable Flash Controller Speculation
DFCS
Disables flash controller speculation.
0 Enable flash controller speculation.

1 Disable flash controller speculation.
14 Enable Flash Data Speculation
EFDS
Enables flash data speculation.

Chapter 14 Miscellaneous Control Module (MCM)
MCM_PLACR field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 Disable flash data speculation.
1 Enable flash data speculation.
13 Disable Flash Controller Cache
DFCC
Disables flash controller cache.
0 Enable flash controller cache.

1 Disable flash controller cache.
12 Disable Flash Controller Instruction Caching
DFCIC
Disables flash controller instruction caching.
0 Enable flash controller instruction caching.

1 Disable flash controller instruction caching.
11 Disable Flash Controller Data Caching
DFCDA
Disables flash controller data caching.
0 Enable flash controller data caching

1 Disable flash controller data caching.
10 Clear Flash Controller Cache
CFCC
Writing a 1 to this field clears the cache. Writing a 0 to this field is ignored. This field always reads as 0.


Chapter 15
Peripheral Bridge (AIPS-Lite)
15.1 Introduction
NOTE
The peripheral bridge converts the crossbar switch interface to an interface that can
access most of the slave peripherals on this chip.
The peripheral bridge occupies 64 MB of the address space, which is divided into
peripheral slots of 4 KB. (It might be possible that all the peripheral slots are not used.
See the memory map chapter for details on slot assignments.) The bridge includes
separate clock enable inputs for each of the slots to accommodate slower peripherals.
15.1.1 Features
Key features of the peripheral bridge are:
• Supports peripheral slots with 8-, 16-, and 32-bit datapath width
15.1.2 General operation

The slave devices connected to the peripheral bridge are modules which contain a
programming model of control and status registers. The system masters read and write
these registers through the peripheral bridge. The peripheral bridge performs a bus
protocol conversion of the master transactions and generates the following as inputs to
the peripherals:
• Module enables
• Module addresses

• Transfer attributes
• Byte enables
• Write data
The peripheral bridge selects and captures read data from the peripheral interface and
returns it to the crossbar switch.
The register maps of the peripherals are located on 4-KB boundaries. Each peripheral is
allocated one or more 4-KB block(s) of the memory map.
The AIPS-Lite module uses the data width of accessed peripheral to perform proper data
byte lane routing; bus decomposition (bus sizing) is performed when the access size is
larger than the peripheral's data width.

The peripheral bridge functions as a bus protocol translator between the crossbar switch
and the slave peripheral bus.
The peripheral bridge manages all transactions destined for the attached slave devices and
generates select signals for modules on the peripheral bus by decoding accesses within
the attached address space.
15.2.1 Access support

All combinations of access size and peripheral data port width are supported. An access
that is larger than the target peripheral's data width will be decomposed to multiple,
smaller accesses. Bus decomposition is terminated by a transfer error caused by an access
to an empty register area.

Chapter 16
Watchdog Timer (WDOG)
16.1 Introduction
The Watchdog Timer (WDOG) module is an independent timer that is available for
system use. It provides a safety feature to ensure that software is executing as planned
and that the CPU is not stuck in an infinite loop or executing unintended code. If the
WDOG module is not serviced (refreshed) within a certain period, it resets the MCU.
16.1.1 Features
Features of the WDOG module include:
• Configurable clock source inputs independent from the bus clock
• Internal 32 kHz RC oscillator
• Internal 1 kHz RC oscillator
• External clock source
• Programmable timeout period
• Programmable 16-bit timeout value
• Optional fixed 256 clock prescaler when longer timeout periods are needed
• Robust write sequence for counter refresh
• Refresh sequence of writing 0x02A6 and then 0x80B4 within 16 bus clocks
• Window mode option for the refresh mechanism
• Programmable 16-bit window value

Introduction
• Provides robust check that program flow is faster than expected

• Early refresh attempts trigger a reset.
• Optional timeout interrupt to allow post-processing diagnostics
• Interrupt request to CPU with interrupt vector for an interrupt service routine
(ISR)
• Forced reset occurs 128 bus clocks after the interrupt vector fetch.
• Configuration bits are write-once-after-reset to ensure watchdog configuration cannot
be mistakenly altered.
• Robust write sequence for unlocking write-once configuration bits
• Unlock sequence of writing 0x20C5 and then 0x28D9 within 16 bus clocks for
allowing updates to write-once configuration bits
• Software must make updates within 128 bus clocks after unlocking and before
WDOG closing unlock window.
16.1.2 Block diagram

The following figure provides a block diagram of the WDOG module.
0x02A6 Refresh Sequence

16-bit Timeout Value Register
0x80B4 Write Control
Backup Reset
BUS CLK Counter

Compare Logic Overflow
1K CLK
MUX
MUX
32K CLK
Counter Control 128 Bus CPU Reset
MUX
EXT CLK 16-bit Counter Register Reset Logic Clock Delay

256
Compare Logic Window
Protect IRQ Interrupt
0x20C5 Control Status 128 Bus Cycle

16-bit Window Register Disable Protect
EN 0x28D9 Bit Write Control
UPDATE
CLK PRES WIN INT
Figure 16-1. WDOG block diagram

Chapter 16 Watchdog Timer (WDOG)

NOTE
If the device uses half-word to access WDOG_CNT,
WDOG_TOVAL and WDOG_WIN, the transposed 16-bit
bytes must follow the format of LowByte:HighByte. So 8-bit R/
W is preferred.
WDOG memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4005_2000 Watchdog Control and Status Register 1 (WDOG_CS1) 8 R/W 80h 16.2.1/187
4005_2001 Watchdog Control and Status Register 2 (WDOG_CS2) 8 R/W 01h 16.2.2/189
4005_2002 Watchdog Counter Register: High (WDOG_CNTH) 8 R 00h 16.2.3/190
4005_2003 Watchdog Counter Register: Low (WDOG_CNTL) 8 R 00h 16.2.4/190
4005_2004 Watchdog Timeout Value Register: High (WDOG_TOVALH) 8 R/W 00h 16.2.5/191
4005_2005 Watchdog Timeout Value Register: Low (WDOG_TOVALL) 8 R/W 04h 16.2.6/191
4005_2006 Watchdog Window Register: High (WDOG_WINH) 8 R/W 00h 16.2.7/192
4005_2007 Watchdog Window Register: Low (WDOG_WINL) 8 R/W 00h 16.2.8/192
16.2.1 Watchdog Control and Status Register 1 (WDOG_CS1)

This section describes the function of Watchdog Control and Status Register 1.
NOTE
TST is cleared (0:0) on POR only. Any other reset does not
affect the value of this field.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read EN INT UPDATE TST DBG WAIT STOP
Write
Reset 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
WDOG_CS1 field descriptions

Field Description
7 Watchdog Enable
EN
This write-once bit enables the watchdog counter to start counting.
0 Watchdog disabled.
1 Watchdog enabled.

WDOG_CS1 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
6 Watchdog Interrupt
INT
This write-once bit configures the watchdog to generate an interrupt request upon a reset-triggering event
(timeout or illegal write to the watchdog), prior to forcing a reset. After the interrupt vector fetch, the reset
occurs after a delay of 128 bus clocks.
0 Watchdog interrupts are disabled. Watchdog resets are not delayed.

1 Watchdog interrupts are enabled. Watchdog resets are delayed by 128 bus clocks.
5 Allow updates
UPDATE
This write-once bit allows software to reconfigure the watchdog without a reset.
0 Updates not allowed. After the initial configuration, the watchdog cannot be later modified without
forcing a reset.
1 Updates allowed. Software can modify the watchdog configuration registers within 128 bus clocks
after performing the unlock write sequence.
4–3 Watchdog Test
TST
Enables the fast test mode. The test mode allows software to exercise all bits of the counter to
demonstrate that the watchdog is functioning properly. See the Fast testing of the watchdog section.
This write-once field is cleared (0:0) on POR only. Any other reset does not affect the value of this field.
00 Watchdog test mode disabled.

01 Watchdog user mode enabled. (Watchdog test mode disabled.) After testing the watchdog, software
should use this setting to indicate that the watchdog is functioning normally in user mode.
10 Watchdog test mode enabled, only the low byte is used. WDOG_CNTL is compared with
WDOG_TOVALL.
11 Watchdog test mode enabled, only the high byte is used. WDOG_CNTH is compared with
WDOG_TOVALH.
2 Debug Enable
DBG
This write-once bit enables the watchdog to operate when the chip is in debug mode.
0 Watchdog disabled in chip debug mode.

1 Watchdog enabled in chip debug mode.
1 Wait Enable
WAIT
This write-once bit enables the watchdog to operate when the chip is in wait mode.
0 Watchdog disabled in chip wait mode.

1 Watchdog enabled in chip wait mode.
0 Stop Enable
STOP
This write-once bit enables the watchdog to operate when the chip is in stop mode.
0 Watchdog disabled in chip stop mode.

1 Watchdog enabled in chip stop mode.

16.2.2 Watchdog Control and Status Register 2 (WDOG_CS2)

This section describes the function of the watchdog control and status register 2.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read FLG 0 0
WIN PRES CLK
Write w1c
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
WDOG_CS2 field descriptions

Field Description
7 Watchdog Window
WIN
This write-once bit enables window mode. See the Window mode section.
0 Window mode disabled.

1 Window mode enabled.
6 Watchdog Interrupt Flag
FLG
This bit is an interrupt indicator when INT is set in control and status register 1. Write 1 to clear it.
0 No interrupt occurred.
1 An interrupt occurred.
4 Watchdog Prescalar
PRES
This write-once bit enables a fixed 256 pre-scaling of watchdog counter reference clock. (The block
diagram shows this clock divider option.)
0 256 prescalar disabled.

1 256 prescalar enabled.
CLK Watchdog Clock
This write-once field indicates the clock source that feeds the watchdog counter. See the Clock source
section.
00 Bus clock.
01 1 kHz internal low-power oscillator (LPOCLK).
10 32 kHz internal oscillator (ICSIRCLK).
11 External clock source.

16.2.3 Watchdog Counter Register: High (WDOG_CNTH)

This section describes the watchdog counter registers: high (CNTH) and low (CNTL)
combined.
The watchdog counter registers CNTH and CNTL provide access to the value of the free-
running watchdog counter. Software can read the counter registers at any time.
Software cannot write directly to the watchdog counter; however, two write sequences to
these registers have special functions:
1. The refresh sequence resets the watchdog counter to 0x0000. See the Refreshing the
Watchdog section.
2. The unlock sequence allows the watchdog to be reconfigured without forcing a reset
(when WDOG_CS1[UPDATE] = 1). See the Example code: Reconfiguring the
Watchdog section.
NOTE
All other writes to these registers are illegal and force a reset.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read CNTHIGH
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
WDOG_CNTH field descriptions

Field Description
CNTHIGH High byte of the Watchdog Counter
16.2.4 Watchdog Counter Register: Low (WDOG_CNTL)

See the description of the WDOG_CNTH register.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read CNTLOW
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

WDOG_CNTL field descriptions

Field Description
CNTLOW Low byte of the Watchdog Counter
16.2.5 Watchdog Timeout Value Register: High (WDOG_TOVALH)

This section describes the watchdog timeout value registers: high (WDOG_TOVALH)
and low (WDOG_TOVALL) combined. WDOG_TOVALH and WDOG_TOVALL
contains the 16-bit value used to set the timeout period of the watchdog.
The watchdog counter (WDOG_CNTH and WDOG_CNTL) is continuously compared
with the timeout value (WDOG_TOVALH and WDOG_TOVALL). If the counter
reaches the timeout value, the watchdog forces a reset.
NOTE
Do not write 0 to the Watchdog Timeout Value Register,
otherwise, the watchdog always generates a reset.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read TOVALHIGH
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
WDOG_TOVALH field descriptions

Field Description
TOVALHIGH High byte of the timeout value
16.2.6 Watchdog Timeout Value Register: Low (WDOG_TOVALL)

See the description of the WDOG_TOVALH register.
NOTE
All the bits reset to 0 in read.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read TOVALLOW
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

WDOG_TOVALL field descriptions

Field Description
TOVALLOW Low byte of the timeout value
16.2.7 Watchdog Window Register: High (WDOG_WINH)

This section describes the watchdog window registers: high (WDOG_WINH) and low
(WDOG_WINL) combined. When window mode is enabled (WDOG_CS2[WIN] is set),
WDOG_WINH and WDOG_WINL determine the earliest time that a refresh sequence is
considered valid. See the Watchdog refresh mechanism section.
WDOG_WINH and WDOG_WINL must be less than WDOG_TOVALH and
WDOG_TOVALL.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read WINHIGH
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
WDOG_WINH field descriptions

Field Description
WINHIGH High byte of Watchdog Window
16.2.8 Watchdog Window Register: Low (WDOG_WINL)

See the description of the WDOG_WINH register.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read WINLOW
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
WDOG_WINL field descriptions

Field Description
WINLOW Low byte of Watchdog Window


The WDOG module provides a fail safe mechanism to ensure the system can be reset to a
known state of operation in case of system failure, such as the CPU clock stopping or
there being a run away condition in the software code. The watchdog counter runs
continuously off a selectable clock source and expects to be serviced (refreshed)
periodically. If it is not, it resets the system.
The timeout period, window mode, and clock source are all programmable but must be
configured within 128 bus clocks after a reset.
16.3.1 Watchdog refresh mechanism

The watchdog resets the MCU if the watchdog counter is not refreshed. A robust refresh
mechanism makes it very unlikely that the watchdog can be refreshed by runaway code.
To refresh the watchdog counter, software must execute a refresh write sequence before
the timeout period expires. In addition, if window mode is used, software must not start
the refresh sequence until after the time value set in the WDOG_WINH and
WDOG_WINL registers. See the following figure.

WDOG counter
WDOG_TOVALH and
WDOG_TOVALL
WDOG_WINH and
WDOG_WINL Refresh opportunity
in window mode
0 Time
Refresh opportunity (not in window mode)
Figure 16-10. Refresh opportunity for the Watchdog counter
16.3.1.1 Window mode

Software finishing its main control loop faster than expected could be an indication of a
problem. Depending on the requirements of the application, the WDOG can be
programmed to force a reset when refresh attempts are early.
When Window mode is enabled, the watchdog must be refreshed after the counter has
reached a minimum expected time value; otherwise, the watchdog resets the MCU. The
minimum expected time value is specified in the WDOG_WINH:L registers. Setting
CS1[WIN] enables Window mode.
16.3.1.2 Refreshing the Watchdog

The refresh write sequence is a write of 0x02A6 followed by a write of 0x80B4 to the
WDOG_CNTH and WDOG_CNTL registers. The write of the 0x80B4 must occur within
16 bus clocks after the write of 0x02A6; otherwise, the watchdog resets the MCU.

Note
Before starting the refresh sequence, disable global interrupts.
Otherwise, an interrupt could effectively invalidate the refresh
sequence if writing the four bytes takes more than 16 bus
clocks. Re-enable interrupts when the sequence is finished.
16.3.1.3 Example code: Refreshing the Watchdog

The following code segment shows the refresh write sequence of the WDOG module.
NOTE
The following example code combines the 8-bit
WDOG_CNTH and WDOG_CNTL as one 16-bit
WDOG_CNT, the 8-bit WDOG_TOVALH and
WDOG_TOVALL as one 16-bit WDOG_TOVAL,
WDOG_WINH and WDOG_WINL as WDOG_WIN and uses
16-bit access.
/* Refresh watchdog */
for (;;) // main loop

{
...
DisableInterrupts; // disable global interrupt
WDOG_CNT = 0x02A6; // write the 1st refresh word
WDOG_CNT = 0x80B4; // write the 2nd refresh word to refresh counter
EnableInterrupts; // enable global interrupt
...
}
16.3.2 Configuring the Watchdog

All watchdog control bits, timeout value, and window value are write-once after reset.
This means that after a write has occurred they cannot be changed unless a reset occurs.
This provides a robust mechanism to configure the watchdog and ensure that a runaway
condition cannot mistakenly disable or modify the watchdog configuration after
configured.
This is guaranteed by the user configuring the window and timeout value first, followed
by the other control bits, and ensuring that CS1[UPDATE] is also set to 0. The new
configuration takes effect only after all registers except WDOG_CNTH:L are written

once after reset. Otherwise, the WDOG uses the reset values by default. If window mode
is not used (CS2[WIN] is 0), writing to WDOG_WINH:L is not required to make the new
configuration take effect.
16.3.2.1 Reconfiguring the Watchdog

In some cases (such as when supporting a bootloader function), users may want to
reconfigure or disable the watchdog without forcing a reset first. By setting
CS1[UPDATE] to a 1 on the initial configuration of the watchdog after a reset, users can
reconfigure the watchdog at any time by executing an unlock sequence. (Conversely, if
CS1[UPDATE] remains 0, the only way to reconfigure the watchdog is by initiating a
reset.) The unlock sequence is similar to the refresh sequence but uses different values.
16.3.2.2 Unlocking the Watchdog

The unlock sequence is a write to the WDOG_CNTH:L registers of 0x20C5 followed by
0x28D9 within 16 bus clocks at any time after the watchdog has been configured. On
completing the unlock sequence, the user must reconfigure the watchdog within 128 bus
clocks; otherwise, the watchdog forces a reset to the MCU.
NOTE
Due to 128 bus clocks requirement for reconfiguring the
watchdog, some delays must be inserted before executing
STOP or WAIT instructions after reconfiguring the watchdog.
This ensures that the watchdog's new configuration takes effect
before MCU enters low power mode. Otherwise, the MCU may
not be waken up from low power mode.
16.3.2.3 Example code: Reconfiguring the Watchdog

The following code segment shows an example reconfiguration of the WDOG module.
/* Initialize watchdog with ~1-kHz clock source, ~1s time-out */
DisableInterrupts; // disable global interrupt
WDOG_CNT = 0x20C5; // write the 1st unlock word
WDOG_CNT = 0x28D9; // write the 2nd unlock word
WDOG_TOVAL = 1000; // setting timeout value
WDOG_CS2 = WDOG_CS2_CLK_MASK; // setting 1-kHz clock source
WDOG_CS1 = WDOG_CS1_EN_MASK; // enable counter running

EnableInterrupts; // enable global interrupt
16.3.3 Clock source

The watchdog counter has four clock source options selected by programming
CS2[CLK]:
• bus clock
• internal Low-Power Oscillator (LPO) running at approximately 1 kHz (This is the
default source.)
• internal 32 kHz clock
• external clock
The options allow software to select a clock source independent of the bus clock for
applications that need to meet more robust safety requirements. Using a clock source
other than the bus clock ensures that the watchdog counter continues to run if the bus
clock is somehow halted; see Backup reset.
An optional fixed prescaler for all clock sources allows for longer timeout periods. When
CS2[PRES] is set, the clock source is prescaled by 256 before clocking the watchdog
counter.
The following table summarizes the different watchdog timeout periods available.
Table 16-10. Watchdog timeout availability
Reference clock Prescaler Watchdog time-out availability
Pass through ~1 ms–65.5 s1
Internal ~1 kHz (LPO)
÷256 ~256 ms–16,777 s
Pass through ~31.25 µs–2.048 s
Internal ~32 kHz
÷256 ~8 ms–524.3 s
Pass through 1 µs–65.54 ms
1 MHz (from bus or external)
÷256 256 µs–16.777 s
Pass through 50 ns–3.277 ms
20 MHz (from bus or external)
÷256 12.8 µs–838.8 ms
1. The default timeout value after reset is approximately 4 ms.
NOTE
When the programmer switches clock sources during
reconfiguration, the watchdog hardware holds the counter at
zero for 2.5 periods of the previous clock source and 2.5
periods of the new clock source after the configuration time
period (128 bus clocks) ends. This delay ensures a smooth
transition before restarting the counter with the new

configuration.
16.3.4 Using interrupts to delay resets

When interrupts are enabled (CS1[INT] = 1), the watchdog first generates an interrupt
request upon a reset triggering event (such as a counter timeout or invalid refresh
attempt). The watchdog delays forcing a reset for 128 bus clocks to allow the interrupt
service routine (ISR) to perform tasks, such as analyzing the stack to debug code.
When interrupts are disabled (CS1[INT] = 0), the watchdog does not delay forcing a
reset.
16.3.5 Backup reset

NOTE
A clock source other than the bus clock must be used as the
reference clock for the counter; otherwise, the backup reset
function is not available.
The backup reset function is a safeguard feature that independently generates a reset in
case the main WDOG logic loses its clock (the bus clock) and can no longer monitor the
counter. If the watchdog counter overflows twice in succession (without an intervening
reset), the backup reset function takes effect and generates a reset.
16.3.6 Functionality in debug and low-power modes

By default, the watchdog is not functional in Active Background mode, Wait mode, or
Stop mode. However, the watchdog can remain functional in these modes as follows:
• For Active Background mode, set CS1[DBG]. (This way the watchdog is functional
in Active Background mode even when the CPU is held by the Debug module.)
• For Wait mode, set CS1[WAIT].
• For Stop mode, set CS1[STOP].
NOTE
The watchdog can not generate interrupt in Stop mode even if
CS1[STOP] is set and will not wake the MCU from Stop mode.
It can generate reset during Stop mode.

For Active Background mode and Stop mode, in addition to the

above configurations, a clock source other than the bus clock
must be used as the reference clock for the counter; otherwise,
the watchdog cannot function.
16.3.7 Fast testing of the watchdog

Before executing application code in safety critical applications, users are required to test
that the watchdog works as expected and resets the MCU. Testing every bit of a 16-bit
counter by letting it run to the overflow value takes a relatively long time (64 kHz
clocks).
To help minimize the startup delay for application code after reset, the watchdog has a
feature to test the watchdog more quickly by splitting the counter into its constituent
byte-wide stages. The low and high bytes are run independently and tested for timeout
against the corresponding byte of the timeout value register. (For complete coverage
when testing the high byte of the counter, the test feature feeds the input clock via the 8th
bit of the low byte, thus ensuring that the overflow connection from the low byte to the
high byte is tested.)
Using this test feature reduces the test time to 512 clocks (not including overhead, such as
user configuration and reset vector fetches). To further speed testing, use a faster clock
(such as the bus clock) for the counter reference.
On a power-on reset, the POR bit in the system reset register is set, indicating the user
should perform the WDOG fast test.
16.3.7.1 Testing each byte of the counter

The test procedure follows these steps:
1. Program the preferred watchdog timeout value in the WDOG_TOVALH and
WDOG_TOVALL registers during the watchdog configuration time period.
2. Select a byte of the counter to test using the WDOG_CS1[TST] = 10b for the low
byte; WDOG_CS1[TST] = 11b for the high byte.
3. Wait for the watchdog to timeout. Optionally, in the idle loop, increment RAM
locations as a parallel software counter for later comparison. Because the RAM is not
affected by a watchdog reset, the timeout period of the watchdog counter can be
compared with the software counter to verify the timeout period has occurred as
expected.
4. The watchdog counter times out and forces a reset.

5. Confirm the WDOG flag in the system reset register is set, indicating that the
watchdog caused the reset. (The POR flag remains clear.)
6. Confirm that WDOG_CS1[TST] shows a test (10b or 11b) was performed.
If confirmed, the count and compare functions work for the selected byte. Repeat the
procedure, selecting the other byte in step 2.
NOTE
WDOG_CS1[TST] is cleared by a POR only and not affected
by other resets.
16.3.7.2 Entering user mode

After successfully testing the low and high bytes of the watchdog counter, the user can
configure WDOG_CS1[TST] to 01b to indicate the watchdog is ready for use in
application user mode. Thus if a reset occurs again, software can recognize the reset
trigger as a real watchdog reset caused by runaway or faulty application code.
As an ongoing test when using the default 1-kHz clock source, software can periodically
read the WDOG_CNTH and WDOG_CNTL registers to ensure the counter is being
incremented.

Chapter 17
Bit Manipulation Engine (BME)
17.1 Introduction
The Bit Manipulation Engine (BME) provides hardware support for atomic read-modify-
write memory operations to the peripheral address space in Cortex-M0+ based
microcontrollers.
This architectural capability is also known as "decorated storage" as it defines a
mechanism for providing additional semantics for load and store operations to memory-
mapped peripherals beyond just the reading and writing of data values to the addressed
memory locations. In the BME definition, the "decoration", that is, the additional
semantic information, is encoded into the peripheral address used to reference the
memory.
By combining the basic load and store instructions of the ARM Cortex-M instruction set
architecture (v6M, v7M) with the concept of decorated storage provided by the BME, the
resulting implementation provides a robust and efficient read-modify-write capability to
this class of ultra low-end microcontrollers. The resulting architectural capability defined
by this core platform function is targeted at the manipulation of n-bit fields in peripheral
registers and is consistent with I/O hardware addressing in the Embedded C standard. For
most BME commands, a single core read or write bus cycle is converted into an atomic
read-modify-write, that is, an indivisible "read followed by a write" bus sequence.
BME decorated references are only available on system bus transactions generated by the
processor core and targeted at the standard 512 KB peripheral address space based at
0x4000_00001 and SRAM_U space based at 0x2000_0000. The decoration semantic is
embedded into address bits[28:19], creating a 448 MB space at addresses 0x4400_0000–
1. To be perfectly accurate, the peripheral address space occupies a 516 KB region: 512 KB based at 0x4000_0000 plus a 4
KB space based at 0x400F_F000 for GPIO accesses. This organization provides compatibility with the Kinetis K Family.
Attempted accesses to the memory space located between 0x4008_0000 - 0x400F_EFFF are error terminated due to an
illegal address.

Introduction
0x5FFF_FFFF for AIPS and a 448 MB space at addresses 0x2400_0000–0x3FFF_FFFF

for SRAM_U; these bits are stripped out of the actual address sent to the peripheral bus
controller and used by the BME to define and control its operation.
17.1.1 Overview
The following figure is a generic block diagram of the processor core and platform for
this class of ultra low-end microcontrollers.
Cortex-M0+ Core
Dbg Fetch CM0+ Core Platform
AGU Dec Rn
NVIC SHFT
LD/ST
ALU MUL
IO Port
32
RAM
PRAM Array
GPIO
BME
m0 s1
AXBS Slave
-Lite 32 Peripherals
s2 PBRIDGE
s0
32
NVM
FMC
Array
Note: BME can be accessed only by the core.
Figure 17-1. Cortex-M0+ core platform block diagram
As shown in the block diagram, the BME module interfaces to the master port on the
crossbar switch allowing it to support atomic read-modify-write operations to the
SRAM_U (shown as platform RAM (PRAM) in the figure) and the Peripheral Bridge
(PBRIDGE) controller. The BME hardware microarchitecture is a 2-stage pipeline design
matching the protocol of the AMBA-AHB system bus interfaces. The PBRIDGE module
converts the AHB system bus protocol into the IPS/APB protocol used by the attached
slave peripherals.

Chapter 17 Bit Manipulation Engine (BME)
17.1.2 Features
The key features of the BME include:
• Lightweight implementation of decorated storage for selected address spaces
• Additional access semantics encoded into the reference address
• Resides between processor core and a switch master port
• Two-stage pipeline design matching the AHB system bus protocol
• Combinationally passes non-decorated accesses to slave bus controllers
• Conversion of decorated loads and stores from processor core into atomic read-
modify-writes
• Decorated loads support unsigned bit field extracts, load-and-{set,clear} 1-bit
operations
• Decorated stores support bit field inserts, logical AND, OR, and XOR operations
• Support for byte, halfword and word-sized decorated operations
• Supports minimum signal toggling on AHB output bus to reduce power dissipation
17.1.3 Modes of operation

The BME module does not support any special modes of operation. As a memory-
mapped device located on a crossbar master AHB system bus port, BME responds strictly
on the basis of memory addresses for accesses to the SRAM_U and peripheral bridge bus
controller.
All functionality associated with the BME module resides in the core platform's clock
domain; this includes its connections with the crossbar master port, SRAM_U and the
PBRIDGE bus controller.

The BME module provides a memory-mapped capability and does not include any
programming model registers.
The exact set of functions supported by the BME are detailed in the Functional
description.

The peripheral address space occupies a 516 KB region: 512 KB based at 0x4000_0000
plus a 4 KB space based at 0x400F_F000 for GPIO accesses; the decorated address space
is mapped to the 448 MB region located at 0x4400_0000–0x5FFF_FFFF. The decorated
address space associated with the SRAM_U is the 448 MB region mapped at
0x2400_0000 - 0x3FFF_FFFF.

Information found here details the specific functions supported by the BME.
Recall the combination of the basic load and store instructions of the Cortex-M
instruction set architecture (v6M, v7M) plus the concept of decorated storage provided by
the BME, the resulting implementation provides a robust and efficient read-modify-write
capability to this class of ultra low-end microcontrollers. The resulting architectural
capability defined by this core platform function is targeted at the manipulation of n-bit
fields in peripheral registers and RAM and is consistent with I/O hardware addressing in
the Embedded C standard. For most BME commands, a single core read or write bus
cycle is converted into an atomic read-modify-write, that is, an indivisible "read followed
by a write" bus sequence.
Consider decorated store operations first, then decorated loads.
17.3.1 BME decorated stores

The functions supported by the BME's decorated stores include three logical operators
(AND, OR, XOR) plus a bit field insert.
For all these operations, BME converts a single decorated AHB store transaction into a 2-
cycle atomic read-modify-write sequence, where the combined read-modify operation is
performed in the first AHB data phase, and then the write is performed in the second
AHB data phase.
A generic timing diagram of a decorated store showing a peripheral bit field insert
operation is shown as follows:

CYCLE RULER x x+1 x+2 x+3

hclk
BME AHB Input Bus
mx_haddr 5..v_wxyz next
mx_hattr next
mx_hwrite next
mx_hwdata wdata
mx_hrdata
mx_hready
BME AHB Output Bus
sx_haddr 400v_wxyz 400v_wxyz next
sx_hattr next
sx_hwrite next
sx_hwdata wdata bfi rdata
sx_hrdata rdata
sx_hready
BME States + Datapath
control_state_dp1
control_state_dp2
reg_addr_data_dp 5..v_wxyz wdata bfi rdata
Figure 17-2. Decorated store: bit field insert timing diagram
All the decorated store operations follow the same execution template shown in Figure
17-2, a two-cycle read-modify-write operation:
1. Cycle x, 1st AHB address phase: Write from input bus is translated into a read
operation on the output bus using the actual memory address (with the decoration
removed) and then captured in a register.
2. Cycle x+1, 2nd AHB address phase: Write access with the registered (but actual)
memory address is output
3. Cycle x+1, 1st AHB data phase: Memory read data is modified using the input bus
write data and the function defined by the decoration and captured in a data register;
the input bus cycle is stalled.
4. Cycle x+2, 2nd AHB data phase: Registered write data is sourced onto the output
write data bus.
NOTE
Any wait states inserted by the slave device are simply passed
through the BME back to the master input bus, stalling the
AHB transaction cycle for cycle.

17.3.1.1 Decorated store logical AND (AND)

This command performs an atomic read-modify-write of the referenced memory location.
1. First, the location is read;
2. It is then modified by performing a logical AND operation using the write data
operand sourced for the system bus cycle
3. Finally, the result of the AND operation is written back into the referenced memory
location.
The data size is specified by the write operation and can be byte (8-bit), halfword (16-bit)
or word (32-bit). The core performs the required write data lane replication on byte and
halfword transfers.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ioandb 0 * * 0 0 1 - - - - - - mem_addr
ioandh 0 * * 0 0 1 - - - - - - mem_addr 0
ioandw 0 * * 0 0 1 - - - - - - mem_addr 0 0
Figure 17-3. Decorated store address: logical AND
See Figure 17-3 where addr[30:29] = 01 for SRAM_U, addr[30:29] = 10 for peripheral,
addr[28:26] = 001 specifies the AND operation, and mem_addr[19:0] specifies the
address offset into the space based at 0x2000_0000 for SRAM_U, and 0x4000_0000 for
peripherals. The "-" indicates an address bit "don't care".
The decorated AND write operation is defined in the following pseudo-code as:
ioand<sz>(accessAddress, wdata) // decorated store AND
tmp = mem[accessAddress & 0xE00FFFFF, size] // memory read
tmp = tmp & wdata // modify
mem[accessAddress & 0xE00FFFFF, size] = tmp // memory write
where the operand size <sz> is defined as b(yte, 8-bit), h(alfword, 16-bit) and w(ord, 32-
bit). This notation is used throughout the document.
In the cycle definition tables, the notations AHB_ap and AHB_dp refer to the address and
data phases of the BME AHB transaction. The cycle-by-cycle BME operations are
detailed in the following table.

Table 17-1. Cycle definitions of decorated store: logical AND

Pipeline stage Cycle
x x+1 x+2
BME AHB_ap Forward addr to memory; Recirculate captured addr + <next>
Decode decoration; Convert attr to memory as slave_wt
master_wt to slave_rd;
Capture address, attributes
BME AHB_dp <previous> Perform memory read; Form Perform write sending
(rdata & wdata) and capture registered data to memory
destination data in register
17.3.1.2 Decorated store logical OR (OR)

1. First, the location is read.
2. It is then modified by performing a logical OR operation using the write data operand
sourced for the system bus cycle.
3. Finally, the result of the OR operation is written back into the referenced memory
location.
halfword transfers.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ioorb 0 * * 0 1 0 - - - - - - mem_addr
ioorh 0 * * 0 1 0 - - - - - - mem_addr 0
ioorw 0 * * 0 1 0 - - - - - - mem_addr 0 0
Figure 17-4. Decorated address store: logical OR
See Figure 17-4,where addr[30:29] = 01 for SRAM_U, addr[30:29] =10 for peripheral,
addr[28:26] = 010 specifies the OR operation, and mem_addr[19:0] specifies the address
offset into the space based at 0x2000_0000 for SRAM_U, and 0x4000_0000 for
peripherals. The "-" indicates an address bit "don't care".
The decorated OR write operation is defined in the following pseudo-code as:
ioor<sz>(accessAddress, wdata) // decorated store OR

tmp = tmp | wdata // modify
The cycle-by-cycle BME operations are detailed in the following table.

Table 17-2. Cycle definitions of decorated store: logical OR

x x+1 x+2
(rdata | wdata) and capture registered data to memory
17.3.1.3 Decorated store logical XOR (XOR)

1. First, the location is read.
2. It is then modified by performing a logical XOR (exclusive-OR) operation using the
write data operand sourced for the system bus cycle.
3. Finally, the result of the XOR operation is written back into the referenced memory
location.
halfword transfers.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ioxorb 0 * * 0 1 1 - - - - - - mem_addr
ioxorh 0 * * 0 1 1 - - - - - - mem_addr 0
ioxorw 0 * * 0 1 1 - - - - - - mem_addr 0 0
Figure 17-5. Decorated address store: logical XOR
See Figure 17-5, where addr[30:29] = 01 for SRAM_U, addr[30:29] =10 for peripheral,
addr[28:26] = 011 specifies the XOR operation, and mem_addr[19:0] specifies the
address offset into the peripheral space based at 0x2000_0000 for SRAM_U, and
0x4000_0000 for peripherals. The "-" indicates an address bit "don't care".
The decorated XOR write operation is defined in the following pseudo-code as:
ioxor<sz>(accessAddress, wdata) // decorated store XOR

tmp = tmp ^ wdata // modify

Table 17-3. Cycle definitions of decorated store: logical XOR

Pipeline Stage Cycle
x x+1 x+2
(rdata ^ wdata) and capture registered data to memory
17.3.1.4 Decorated store bit field insert (BFI)

This command inserts a bit field contained in the write data operand, defined by LSB
position (b) and the bit field width (w+1), into the memory "container" defined by the
access size associated with the store instruction using an atomic read-modify-write
sequence.
or word (32-bit).
NOTE
For the word sized operation, the maximum bit field width is 16
bits. The core performs the required write data lane replication
on byte and halfword transfers.
The BFI operation can be used to insert a single bit into a peripheral. For this case, the w
field is simply set to 0, indicating a bit field width of 1.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
iobfib 0 * * 1 - - b b b - w w w mem_addr
iobfih 0 * * 1 - b b b b w w w w mem_addr 0
iobfiw 0 * * 1 b b b b b w w w w mem_addr 0 0
Figure 17-6. Decorated address store: bit field insert
where addr[30:29] = 01 for SRAM_U, addr[30:29] =10 for peripheral,addr[28] = 1

signals a BFI operation, addr[27:23] is "b", the LSB identifier, addr[22:19] is "w", the bit
field width minus 1 identifier, and addr[18:0] specifies the address offset into the
peripheral space based at 0x2000_0000 for SRAM_U, and 0x4000_0000 for peripherals.

The "-" indicates an address bit "don't care". Note, unlike the other decorated store
operations, BFI uses addr[19] as the least significant bit in the "w" specifier and not as an
address bit.
The decorated BFI write operation is defined in the following pseudo-code as:
iobfi<sz>(accessAddress, wdata) // decorated bit field insert
tmp = mem[accessAddress & 0xE007FFFF, size] // memory read

mask = ((1 << (w+1)) - 1) << b // generate bit mask
tmp = tmp & ~mask // modify
| wdata & mask
mem[accessAddress & 0xE007FFFF, size] = tmp // memory write
The write data operand (wdata) associated with the store instruction contains the bit field
to be inserted. It must be properly aligned within a right-aligned container, that is, within
the lower 8 bits for a byte operation, the lower 16 bits for a halfword, or the entire 32 bits
for a word operation.
To illustrate, consider the following example of the insertion of the 3-bit field "xyz" into
an 8-bit memory container, initially set to "abcd_efgh". For all cases, w is 2, signaling a
bit field width of 3.
if b = 0 and the decorated store (strb) Rt register[7:0] = ----_-xyz,
then destination is "abcd_exyz"
if b = 1 and the decorated store (strb) Rt register[7:0] = ----_xyz-,
then destination is "abcd_xyzh"
if b = 2 and the decorated store (strb) Rt register[7:0] = ---x_yz--,
then destination is "abcx_yzgh"
if b = 3 and the decorated store (strb) Rt register[7:0] = --xy_z---,
then destination is "abxy_zfgh"
if b = 4 and the decorated store (strb) Rt register[7:0] = -xyz_----,
then destination is "axyz_efgh"
if b = 5 and the decorated store (strb) Rt register[7:0] = xyz-_----,
then destination is "xyzd_efgh"
if b = 6 and the decorated store (strb) Rt register[7:0] = yz--_----,
then destination is "yzcd_efgh"
if b = 7 and the decorated store (strb) Rt register[7:0] = z---_----,
then destination is "zbcd_efgh"
Note from the example, when the starting bit position plus the field width exceeds the
container size, only part of the source bit field is inserted into the destination memory
location. Stated differently, if (b + w+1) > container_width, only the low-order
"container_width - b" bits are actually inserted.
Table 17-4. Cycle definitions of decorated store: bit field insert
x x+1 x+2

Table 17-4. Cycle definitions of decorated store: bit field insert (continued)
x x+1 x+2
bit mask; Form bitwise registered data to memory
((mask) ? wdata : rdata)) and
capture destination data in
register
17.3.2 BME decorated loads

The functions supported by the BME's decorated loads include two single-bit load-and-
{set, clear} operators plus unsigned bit field extracts.
For the two load-and-{set, clear} operations, BME converts a single decorated AHB load
transaction into a two-cycle atomic read-modify-write sequence, where the combined
read-modify operations are performed in the first AHB data phase, and then the write is
performed in the second AHB data phase as the original read data is returned to the
processor core. For an unsigned bit field extract, the decorated load transaction is stalled
for one cycle in the BME as the data field is extracted, then aligned and returned to the
processor in the second AHB data phase. This is the only decorated transaction that is not
an atomic read-modify-write, as it is a simple data read.
A generic timing diagram of a decorated load showing a peripheral load-and-set 1-bit
operation is shown as follows.

CYCLE RULER x x+1 x+2 x+3

hclk
BME AHB Input Bus
mx_haddr 4c.v_wxyz next
mx_hattr next
mx_hwrite next
mx_hwdata
mx_hrdata orig_1bit
mx_hready
BME AHB Output Bus
sx_haddr 400v_wxyz 400v_wxyz next

sx_hattr next
sx_hwrite next
sx_hwdata rdata + 1bit
sx_hrdata rdata
sx_hready
BME States + Datapath
control_state_dp1
control_state_dp2
reg_addr_data_dp 4c.v_wxyz rdata + 1bit
Figure 17-7. Decorated load: load-and-set 1-bit field insert timing diagram
Decorated load-and-{set, clear} 1-bit operations follow the execution template shown in
the above figure: a 2-cycle read-modify-write operation:
1. Cycle x, first AHB address phase: Read from input bus is translated into a read
operation on the output bus with the actual memory address (with the decoration
removed) and then captured in a register
2. Cycle x+1, second AHB address phase: Write access with the registered (but actual)
memory address is output
3. Cycle x+1, first AHB data phase: The "original" 1-bit memory read data is captured
in a register, while the 1-bit field is set or clear based on the function defined by the
decoration with the modified data captured in a register; the input bus cycle is stalled
4. Cycle x+2, second AHB data phase: The selected original 1-bit is right-justified,
zero-filled and then driven onto the input read data bus, while the registered write
data is sourced onto the output write data bus

NOTE
A generic timing diagram of a decorated load showing an unsigned peripheral bit field
operation is shown in the following figure.
1 2 3 4
5..v_wxyz next
next
next
ubfx
400v_wxyz next
next
next
rdata
5..v_wxyz rdata
Figure 17-8. Decorated load: unsigned bit field insert timing diagram
The decorated unsigned bit field extract follows the same execution template shown in
the above figure, a 2-cycle read operation:
• Cycle x, 1st AHB address phase: Read from input bus is translated into a read
operation on the output bus with the actual memory address (with the decoration
removed) and then captured in a register
• Cycle x+1, 2nd AHB address phase: Idle cycle

• Cycle x+1, 1st AHB data phase: A bit mask is generated based on the starting bit
position and the field width; the mask is AND'ed with the memory read data to
isolate the bit field; the resulting data is captured in a data register; the input bus
cycle is stalled
• Cycle x+2, 2nd AHB data phase: Registered data is logically right-aligned for proper
alignment and driven onto the input read data bus
NOTE
17.3.2.1 Decorated load: load-and-clear 1 bit (LAC1)

This command loads a 1-bit field defined by the LSB position (b) into the core's general
purpose destination register (Rt) and zeroes the bit in the memory space after performing
an atomic read-modify-write sequence.
The extracted 1-bit data field from the memory address is right-justified and zero-filled in
the operand returned to the core.
The data size is specified by the read operation and can be byte (8-bit), halfword (16-bit)
or word (32-bit).
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
iolac1b 0 * * 0 1 0 - - b b b - mem_addr
iolac1h 0 * * 0 1 0 - b b b b - mem_addr 0
iolac1w 0 * * 0 1 0 b b b b b - mem_addr 0 0
Figure 17-9. Decorated load address: load-and-clear 1 bit
See Figure 17-9 where addr[30:29] = 01 for SRAM_U, addr[30:29] = 10 for peripheral,
addr[28:26] = 010 specifies the load-and-clear 1 bit operation, addr[25:21] is "b", the bit
identifier, and mem_addr[19:0] specifies the address offset into the space based at
0x2000_0000 for SRAM_U, and 0x4000_0000 for peripheral. The "-" indicates an
address bit "don't care".
The decorated load-and-clear 1-bit read operation is defined in the following pseudo-code
as:
rdata = iolac1<sz>(accessAddress) // decorated load-and-clear 1

mask = 1 << b // generate bit mask
rdata = (tmp & mask) >> b // read data returned to core

tmp = tmp & ~mask // modify

Table 17-5. Cycle definitions of decorated load: load-and-clear 1 bit
x x+1 x+2
Decode decoration; Capture attr to memory as slave_wt
address, attributes
BME AHB_dp <previous> Perform memory read; Form Return extracted bit to master;
bit mask; Extract bit from Perform write sending
rdata; Form (rdata & ~mask) registered data to memory
and capture destination data
in register
17.3.2.2 Decorated Load: Load-and-Set 1 Bit (LAS1)

This command loads a 1-bit field defined by the LSB position (b) into the core's general
purpose destination register (Rt) and sets the bit in the memory space after performing an
atomic read-modify-write sequence.
The extracted one bit data field from the memory address is right justified and zero filled
in the operand returned to the core.
The data size is specified by the read operation and can be byte (8-bit), halfword (16-bit)
or word (32-bit).
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
iolaslb 0 * * 0 1 1 - - b b b - mem_addr
iolaslh 0 * * 0 1 1 - b b b b - mem_addr 0
iolaslw 0 * * 0 1 1 b b b b b - mem_addr 0 0
Figure 17-10. Decorated load address: load-and-set 1 bit
where addr[30:29] = 01 for SRAM_U, addr[30:29] = 10 for peripheral, addr[28:26] = 011

specifies the load-and-set 1 bit operation, addr[25:21] is "b", the bit identifier, and
mem_addr[19:0] specifies the address offset into the space based at 0x2000_0000 for
SRAM_U, and 0x4000_0000 for peripheral. The "-" indicates an address bit "don't care".
The decorated Load-and-Set 1 Bit read operation is defined in the following pseudo-code
as:
rdata = iolas1<sz>(accessAddress) // decorated load-and-set 1

mask = 1 << b // generate bit mask
tmp = tmp | mask // modify

Table 17-6. Cycle definitions of decorated load: load-and-set 1-bit
x x+1 x+2
Decode decoration; Capture attr to memory as slave_wt
address, attributes
BME AHB_dp <previous> Perform memory read; Form Return extracted bit to master;
bit mask; Extract bit from Perform write sending
rdata; Form (rdata | mask) registered data to memory
and capture destination data
in register
17.3.2.3 Decorated load unsigned bit field extract (UBFX)

This command extracts a bit field defined by LSB position (b) and the bit field width (w
+1) from the memory "container" defined by the access size associated with the load
instruction using a two-cycle read sequence.
The extracted bit field from the memory address is right-justified and zero-filled in the
operand returned to the core. Recall this is the only decorated operation that does not
perform a memory write, that is, UBFX only performs a read.
or word (32-bit). Note for the word sized operation, the maximum bit field width is 16
bits.
The use of a UBFX operation is recommended to extract a single bit. For this case, the w
field is simply set to 0, indicating a bit field width of 1.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ioubfxb 0 * * 1 - - b b b - w w w mem_addr
ioubfxh 0 * * 1 - b b b b w w w w mem_addr 0
ioubfxw 0 * * 1 b b b b b w w w w mem_addr 0 0
Figure 17-11. Decorated load address: unsigned bit field extract

See Figure 17-11, where addr[30:29] = 01 for SRAM_U, addr[30:29] = 10 for peripheral,
addr[28] = 1 specifies the unsigned bit field extract operation, addr[27:23] is "b", the LSB
identifier, addr[22:19] is "w", the bit field width minus 1 identifier, and mem_addr[18:0]
specifies the address offset into the space based at 0x2000_0000 for SRAM_U, and
0x4000_0000 for peripheral. The "-" indicates an address bit "don't care". Note, unlike
the other decorated load operations, UBFX uses addr[19] as the least significant bit in the
"w" specifier and not as an address bit.
The decorated unsigned bit field extract read operation is defined in the following
pseudo-code as:
rdata = ioubfx<sz>(accessAddress) // unsigned bit field extract
tmp = mem[accessAddress & 0xE007FFFF, size] // memory read

mask = ((1 << (w+1)) - 1) << b // generate bit mask
Like the BFI operation, when the starting bit position plus the field width exceeds the
container size, only part of the source bit field is extracted from the destination memory
location. Stated differently, if (b + w+1) > container_width, only the low-order
"container_width - b" bits are actually extracted. The cycle-by-cycle BME operations are
detailed in the following table.
Table 17-7. Cycle definitions of decorated load: unsigned bit field extract
x x+1 x+2
BME AHB_ap Forward addr to memory; Idle AHB address phase <next>
Decode decoration; Capture
address, attributes
BME AHB_dp <previous> Perform memory read; Form Logically right shift registered
bit mask; Form (rdata & mask) data; Return justified rdata to
and capture destination data master
in register
17.3.3 Additional details on decorated addresses and GPIO

accesses
As previously noted, the peripheral address space occupies a 516 KB region: 512 KB
based at 0x4000_0000 plus a 4 KB space based at 0x400F_F000 for GPIO accesses. This
memory layout provides compatibility with the Kinetis K Family and provides 129
address "slots", each 4 KB in size.
The GPIO address space is multiply-mapped by the hardware: it appears at the "standard"
system address 0x400F_F000 and is physically located in the address slot corresponding
to address 0x4000_F000. Decorated loads and stores create a slight complication

Application information
involving accesses to the GPIO. Recall the use of address[19] varies by decorated
operation; for AND, OR, XOR, LAC1 and LAS1, this bit functions as a true address bit,
while for BFI and UBFX, this bit defines the least significant bit of the "w" bit field
specifier.
As a result, undecorated GPIO references and decorated AND, OR, XOR, LAC1 and
LAS1 operations can use the standard 0x400F_F000 base address, while decorated BFI
and UBFX operations must use the alternate 0x4000_F000 base address. Another
implementation can simply use 0x400F_F000 as the base address for all undecorated
GPIO accesses and 0x4000_F000 as the base address for all decorated accesses. Both
implementations are supported by the hardware.
Table 17-8. Decorated peripheral and GPIO address details
Peripheral address space Description
0x4000_0000–0x4007_FFFF Undecorated (normal) peripheral accesses
0x4008_0000–0x400F_EFFF Illegal addresses; attempted references are aborted and error terminated
0x400F_F000–0x400F_FFFF Undecorated (normal) GPIO accesses using standard address
0x4010_0000–0x43FF_FFFF Illegal addresses; attempted references are aborted and error terminated
0x4400_0000–0x4FFF_FFFF Decorated AND, OR, XOR, LAC1, LAS1 references to peripherals and GPIO based at
either 0x4000_F000 or 0x400F_F000
0x5000_0000–0x5FFF_FFFF Decorated BFI, UBFX references to peripherals and GPIO only based at 0x4000_F000
17.4 Application information

In this section, GNU assembler macros with C expression operands are presented as
examples of the required instructions to perform decorated operations.
This section specifically presents a partial bme.h file defining the assembly language
expressions for decorated logical stores: AND, OR, and XOR. Comparable functions for
BFI and the decorated loads are more complex and available in the complete BME header
file.
These macros use the same function names presented in Functional description.
#define IOANDW(ADDR,WDATA) \
__asm("ldr r3, =(1<<26);" \
"orr r3, %[addr];" \
"mov r2, %[wdata];" \
"str r2, [r3];" \
:: [addr] "r" (ADDR), [wdata] "r" (WDATA) : "r2", "r3");
#define IOANDH(ADDR,WDATA) \
__asm("ldr r3, =(1<<26);" \
"strh r2, [r3];" \

#define IOANDB(ADDR,WDATA) \
__asm("ldr r3, =(1<<26);" \
"strb r2, [r3];" \
#define IOORW(ADDR,WDATA) \
__asm("ldr r3, =(1<<27);" \
"str r2, [r3];" \
#define IOORH(ADDR,WDATA) \
__asm("ldr r3, =(1<<27);" \
"strh r2, [r3];" \
#define IOORB(ADDR,WDATA) \
__asm("ldr r3, =(1<<27);" \
"strb r2, [r3];" \
#define IOXORW(ADDR,WDATA) \
__asm("ldr r3, =(3<<26);" \
"str r2, [r3];" \
#define IOXORH(ADDR,WDATA) \
__asm("ldr r3, =(3<<26);" \
"strh r2, [r3];" \
#define IOXORB(ADDR,WDATA) \
__asm("ldr r3, =(3<<26);" \
"strb r2, [r3];" \


Chapter 18
Flash Memory Module (FTMRE)
18.1 Introduction
The FTMRE module implements the following:
• Program flash (flash) memory
The flash memory is ideal for single-supply applications allowing for field
reprogramming without requiring external high voltage sources for program or erase
operations. The flash module includes a memory controller that executes commands to
modify flash memory contents. The user interface to the memory controller consists of
the indexed Flash Common Command Object (FCCOB) register which is written to with
the command, global address, data, and any required command parameters. The memory
controller must complete the execution of a command before the FCCOB register can be
written to with a new command.
CAUTION
A flash byte or longword must be in the erased state before
being programmed. Cumulative programming of bits within a
flash byte or longword is not allowed.
The flash memory is read as bytes. Read access time is one bus cycle for bytes. For flash
memory, an erased bit reads 1 and a programmed bit reads 0.
18.2 Feature
18.2.1 Flash memory features

The flash memory has the following features:
• 8 KB of flash memory composed of one 8 KB flash block divided into 16 sectors of
512 bytes
• Automated program and erase algorithm with verify

• Fast sector erase and longword program operation

• Flexible protection scheme to prevent accidental programming or erasing of flash
memory
18.2.2 Other flash module features

The flash memory module has the following other features:
• No external high-voltage power supply required for flash memory program and erase
operations
• Interrupt generation on flash command completion
• Security mechanism to prevent unauthorized access to the flash memory

The flash memory module provides the normal user mode of operation. The operating
mode is determined by module-level inputs and affects the FCNFG, and FCLKDIV
registers.
18.3.1.1 Wait mode

The flash memory module is not affected if the MCU enters Wait mode. The flash
module can recover the MCU from Wait via the CCIF interrupt. See Flash interrupts.
18.3.1.2 Stop mode

If a flash command is active, that is, FSTAT[CCIF] = 0, when the MCU requests Stop
mode, the current NVM operation will be completed before the MCU is allowed to enter
Stop mode.
18.3.2 Flash memory map

The MCU places the flash memory as shown in the following table.

Chapter 18 Flash Memory Module (FTMRE)
MKE04Z8 contains a piece of 8 KB flash memory. This flash block is divided into 16
sectors of 512 bytes.
Table 18-1. Flash memory addressing
Device Global address Size (Bytes) Description
MKE04Z8VTG4(R)
Flash block contains flash
MKE04Z8VWJ4(R) 0x0000–0x1FFF 8 KB
configuration field.
MKE04Z8VFK4(R)
18.3.3 Flash initialization after system reset

On each system reset, the flash module executes an initialization sequence that
establishes initial values for the flash block configuration parameters, the FPROT
protection register, and the FOPT and FSEC registers. The initialization routine reverts to
built-in default values that leave the module in a fully protected and secured state if errors
are encountered during execution of the reset sequence. If an error is detected during the
reset sequence, both FSTAT[MGSTAT] bits will be set.
FSTAT[CCIF] is cleared throughout the initialization sequence. The NVM module holds
off all CPU access for a portion of the initialization sequence. Flash reads are allowed
after the hold is removed. Completion of the initialization sequence is marked by setting
FSTAT[CCIF] high, which enables user commands. While FSTAT[CCIF] remains
cleared, it is not possible to write on registers FCCOBIX or FCCOB.
If a reset occurs while any flash command is in progress, that command will be
immediately aborted. The state of the word being programmed or the sector/block being
erased is not guaranteed.
18.3.4 Flash command operations

Flash command operations are used to modify flash memory contents.
The command operations contain three steps:
1. Configure the clock for flash program and erase command operations.
2. Use command write sequence to set flash command parameters and launch
execution.
3. Execute valid flash commands according to MCU functional mode and MCU
security state.

The figure below shows a general flowchart of the flash command write sequence.
START
Read: FCLKDIV
register
Clock Divider FDIV No

Value Check Correct? Read: FSTAT
register
Yes
FCCOB Read: FSTAT CCIF No

NOTE: FCLKDIV must be
Availability Check register Set? set after each reset
Yes
No CCIF Write: FCLKDIV

Set? register
Yes
ACCERR No
Access Error and
or FPVIOL Set?
Protection Violation Check Results from previous Command
Yes
Write: FSTAT register Write to FCCOBIX register

Clear ACCERR to identify specific command
FPVIOL 0x30 parameter to load
Write to FCCOB register

to load required command
parameter
More No
Parameters? Write: FSTAT register
(to launch command)
Yes
Clear CCIF 0x80
Read: FSTAT register
No
Bit Polling for CCIF Set?
Command Completion Check
Yes
END
Figure 18-1. Generic flash command write sequence flowchart

18.3.4.1 Writing the FCLKDIV register

Prior to issuing any flash program or erase command after a reset, the user is required to
write the FCLKDIV register to divide BUSCLK down to a target FCLK of 1 MHz. The
following table shows recommended values for FCLKDIV[FDIV] based on BUSCLK
frequency.
Table 18-2. FDIV values for various BUSCLK frequencies
BUSCLK frequency
(MHz) FDIV[5:0]
MIN1 MAX2
1.0 1.6 0x00
1.6 2.6 0x01
2.6 3.6 0x02
3.6 4.6 0x03
4.6 5.6 0x04
5.6 6.6 0x05
6.6 7.6 0x06
7.6 8.6 0x07
8.6 9.6 0x08
9.6 10.6 0x09
10.6 11.6 0x0A
11.6 12.6 0x0B
12.6 13.6 0x0C
13.6 14.6 0x0D
14.6 15.6 0x0E
15.6 16.6 0x0F
16.6 17.6 0x10
17.6 18.6 0x11
18.6 19.6 0x12
19.6 20.6 0x13
20.6 21.6 0x14
21.6 22.6 0x15
22.6 23.6 0x16
23.6 24.6 0x17
24.6 25.6 0x18
1. BUSCLK is greater than this value.

2. BUSCLK is less than or equal to this value.

CAUTION
Programming or erasing the flash memory cannot be performed
if the bus clock runs at less than 0.8 MHz. Setting
FCLKDIV[FDIV] too high can destroy the flash memory due to
overstress. Setting FCLKDIV[FDIV] too low can result in
incomplete programming or erasure of the flash memory cells.
When the FCLKDIV register is written, FCLKDIV[FDIVLD] is set automatically. If
FCLKDIV[FDIVLD] is 0, the FCLKDIV register has not been written since the last
reset. If the FCLKDIV register has not been written, any flash program or erase
command loaded during a command write sequence will not execute and
FSTAT[ACCERR] will be set.
18.3.4.2 Command write sequence

The memory controller will launch all valid flash commands entered using a command
write sequence.
Before launching a command, FSTAT[ACCERR] and FSTAT[FPVIOL] must be cleared
and the FSTAT[CCIF] flag will be tested to determine the status of the current command
write sequence. If FSTAT[CCIF] is 0, indicating that the previous command write
sequence is still active, a new command write sequence cannot be started and all writes to
the FCCOB register are ignored.
The FCCOB parameter fields must be loaded with all required parameters for the flash
command being executed. Access to the FCCOB parameter fields is controlled via
FCCOBIX[CCOBIX].
Flash command mode uses the indexed FCCOB register to provide a command code and
its relevant parameters to the memory controller. First, the user must set up all required
FCCOB fields. Then they can initiate the command's execution by writing a 1 to
FSTAT[CCIF]. This action clears the CCIF command completion flag to 0. When the
user clears FSTAT[CCIF], all FCCOB parameter fields are locked and cannot be changed
by the user until the command completes (evidenced by the memory controller returning
FSTAT[CCIF] to1). Some commands return information to the FCCOB register array.
The generic format for the FCCOB parameter fields in flash command mode is shown in
the following table. The return values are available for reading after the FSTAT[CCIF]
flag has been returned to 1 by the memory controller. Writes to the unimplemented
parameter fields, FCCOBIX[CCOBIX] =110b and FCCOBIX[CCOBIX] = 111b, are
ignored with read from these fields returning 0x0000.

Table 18-3 shows the generic flash command format. The high byte of the first word in
the CCOB array contains the command code, followed by the parameters for this specific
flash command. For details on the FCCOB settings required by each command, see the
flash command descriptions in Flash command summary .
Table 18-3. FCCOB – flash command mode typical usage
CCOBIX[2:0] Byte FCCOB parameter fields in flash command mode
HI FCMD[7:0] defining flash command
000
LO Global address [23:16]
HI Global address [15:8]
001
LO Global address [7:0]
HI Data 0 [15:8]
010
LO Data 0 [7:0]
HI Data 1 [15:8]
011
LO Data 1 [7:0]
HI Data 2 [15:8]
100
LO Data 2 [7:0]
HI Data 3 [15:8]
101
LO Data 3 [7:0]
The contents of the FCCOB parameter fields are transferred to the memory controller
when the user clears the FSTAT[CCIF] command completion flag by writing 1. The
CCIF flag will remain clear until the flash command has completed. Upon completion,
the memory controller will return FSTAT[CCIF] to 1 and the FCCOB register will be
used to communicate any results.
The following table presents the valid flash commands, as enabled by the combination of
the functional MCU mode with the MCU security state of unsecured or secured.
MCU secured state is selected by FSEC[SEC].
Table 18-4. Flash commands by mode and security state
Unsecured Secured
FCMD Command
U1 U2
0x01 Erase verify all blocks * *
0x02 Erase verify block * *
0x03 Erase verify flash section * *
0x04 Read once * *
0x06 Program flash * *
0x07 Program once * *
0x08 Erase all block * *
0x09 Erase flash block * *

Table 18-4. Flash commands by mode and security state (continued)

Unsecured Secured
FCMD Command
U1 U2
0x0A Erase flash sector * *
0x0B Unsecure flash * *
0x0C Verify backdoor access key * *
0x0D Set user margin level * *
0x0E Set factory margin level * *
1. Unsecured user mode

2. Secured user mode
18.3.5 Flash interrupts

The flash module can generate an interrupt when a flash command operation has
completed.
Table 18-5. Flash interrupt source
Interrupt source Interrupt flag Local enable Global (CCR) mask
CCIF CCIE
Flash command complete I Bit
(FSTAT register) (FCNFG register)
18.3.5.1 Description of flash interrupt operation

The flash module uses the FSTAT[CCIF] flag in combination with the FCNFG[CCIE]
interrupt enable bit to generate the flash command interrupt request.
The logic used for generating the flash module interrupts is shown in the following
figure.
Flash command
CCIE complete interrupt request
CCIF
Figure 18-2. Flash module interrupts implementation

18.3.6 Protection
The FPROT register can be set to protect regions in the flash memory from accidental
programing or erasing. The memory region growing upward from global address 0x0000
in the flash memory can be activated for protection. The flash memory addresses covered
by these protectable regions are shown in the flash memory map.
Flash start = 0x0_0000 16 bytes (0x0_0400 - 0x0_040F)

Flash configuration field
0x0_0400
Fixed start
protection 0x0_0800
1, 2, 4, 8 KB
0x0_1000 Flash protected/unprotected lower region
Movable end
protection
Flash end= 0x0_1FFF
Figure 18-3. 8 KB flash protection memory map
Default protection settings as well as security information that allows the MCU to restrict
access to the flash module are stored in the flash configuration field as described in the
table below.
Table 18-6. Flash configuration field
Global address Size (Bytes) Description
Backdoor comparison key. See Verify backdoor access key command and
0x0400–0x0407 8
Unsecuring the MCU using backdoor key access.
0x0408–0x040B
4 Reserved
1
1 Flash nonvolatile byte - data[31:24]

0x040C–0x040F1 1 Flash security byte - data[23:16]
1 Flash protection byte - data[15:8]
1 Reserved - data [7:0]
1. 0x0_0408–0x040B and 0x040C–0x0_040F form a flash longword in each address range and must be programmed in a
single command write sequence. Each byte in these longwords that are marked as reserved must be programmed to
0xFF. Alternatively, the Flash phrase 0x0408-0x040F can also be programmed in a single command write sequence.
The flash module provides protection to the MCU. During the reset sequence, the FPROT
register is loaded with the contents of the flash protection byte in the flash configuration
field at global address 0x040D in flash memory. The protection functions depend on the
configuration of bit settings in FPROT register.

Table 18-7. Flash protection function

FPOPEN FPLDIS Function
1 1 No flash protection
1 0 Protected low range
0 1 Full flash memory protected
0 0 Unprotected low range
The flash protection scheme can be used by applications requiring reprogramming in

single chip mode while providing as much protection as possible if reprogramming is not
required.

FPLDIS = 1 FPLDIS = 0
Scenario 7 5
FPLS[1:0]
0x0_0000
FPOPEN = 1
FLASHEND
Scenario 3 1
0x0_0000
FPLS[1:0]
FPOPEN = 0
FLASHEND
Unprotected region
Protected region with size

Protected region not defined by FPLS defined by FPLS
Figure 18-4. Flash protection scenarios

The general guideline is that flash protection can only be added and not removed. The
following table specifies all valid transitions between flash protection scenarios. Any
attempt to write an invalid scenario to the FPROT register will be ignored. The contents
of the FPROT register reflect the active protection scenario. See the FPROT[FPLS] field
descriptions for additional restrictions.
Table 18-8. Flash protection scenario transitions
From protection To protection scenario1
scenario
1 3 5 7
1 × ×
3 ×
5 × ×
7 × × × ×
1. Allowed transitions marked with X.
The flash protection address range is listed in the following two tables regarding the
scenarios in the table above.
Table 18-9. Flash protection lower address range
FPLS[1:0] Global address range Protected size
00 0x0000–0x03FF 1 KB
01 0x0000–0x07FF 2 KB
10 0x0000–0x0FFF 4 KB
11 0x0000–0x1FFF 8 KB
All possible flash protection scenarios are shown in Figure 18-4. Although the protection
scheme is loaded from the flash memory at global address 0x040D during the reset
sequence, it can be changed by the user.
18.3.7 Security
The flash module provides security information to the MCU. The flash security state is
defined by FSEC[SEC]. During reset, the flash module initializes the FSEC register using
data read from the security byte of the flash configuration field. The security state out of
reset can be permanently changed by programming the security byte, assuming that the
MCU is starting from a mode where the necessary flash erase and program commands are
available and that the upper region of the flash is unprotected. If the flash security byte is
successfully programmed, its new value will take effect after the next MCU reset.
The following subsections describe these security-related subjects:

• Unsecuring the MCU using backdoor key access

• Unsecuring the MCU using SWD
• Mode and security effects on flash command availability
18.3.7.1 Unsecuring the MCU using backdoor key access

The MCU may be unsecured by using the backdoor key access feature which requires
knowledge of the contents of the backdoor keys, which are four 16-bit words
programmed at addresses 0x400–0x407. If the KEYEN[1:0] bits are in the enabled state,
the verify backdoor access key command – see Verify backdoor access key command,
allows the user to present four prospective keys for comparison to the keys stored in the
flash memory via the memory controller. If the keys presented in the verify backdoor
access key command match the backdoor keys stored in the flash memory, FSEC[SEC]
will be changed to unsecure the MCU. Key values of 0x0000 and 0xFFFF are not
permitted as backdoor keys. While the Verify Backdoor Access Key command is active,
flash memory will not be available for read access and will return invalid data.
The user code stored in the flash memory must have a method of receiving the backdoor
keys from an external stimulus. This external stimulus would typically be through one of
the on-chip serial ports.
If the KEYEN[1:0] bits are in the enabled state, the MCU can be unsecured by the
backdoor key access sequence described below:
1. Follow the command sequence for the verify backdoor access key command as
explained in Verify backdoor access key command.
2. If the verify backdoor access key command is successful, the MCU is unsecured and
FSEC[SEC] is forced to the unsecure state of 10.
The verify backdoor access key command is monitored by the memory controller and an
illegal key will prohibit future use of the verify backdoor access key command. A reset of
the MCU is the only method to re-enable the verify backdoor access key command. The
security as defined in the flash security byte is not changed by using the verify backdoor
access key command sequence. The backdoor keys stored in addresses 0x400–0x407 are
unaffected by the verify backdoor access key command sequence. The verify backdoor
access key command sequence has no effect on the program and erase protections
defined in the flash protection register, FPROT.

After the backdoor keys have been correctly matched, the MCU will be unsecured. After
the MCU is unsecured, the sector containing the flash security byte can be erased and the
flash security byte can be reprogrammed to the unsecure state, if desired. In the unsecure
state, the user has full control of the contents of the backdoor keys by programming
addresses 0x400–0x407 in the flash configuration field.
18.3.7.2 Unsecuring the MCU using SWD

A secured MCU can be unsecured by using the following method to erase the flash
memory:
1. Reset the device by asserting RESET pin or DAP_CTRL[3].
2. Set DAP_CTRL[0] bit to invoke debug mass erase via SWD
3. Release reset by deasserting RESET pin or DAP_CTRL[3] bit via SWD.
4. Wait till DAP_CTRL[0] bit is cleared ( After mass erase completes, DAP_CTRL[0]
bit is cleared automatically). At this time, CPU will be in hold state, MASS erase is
completed, and the device is in unsecure state (flash security byte in flash
configuration field is programmed with 0xFE) .
5. Reset the device.
18.3.7.3 Mode and security effects on flash command availability

The availability of flash module commands depends on the MCU operating mode and
security state as shown in Table 18-4.
18.3.8 Flash commands
18.3.8.1 Flash commands

The following table summarizes the valid flash commands as well as the effects of the
commands on the flash block and other resources within the flash module.
Table 18-10. Flash commands
FCMD Command Function on flash memory
0x01 Erase Verify All Blocks Verifies that all flash blocks are erased
0x02 Erase Verify Block Verifies that a flash block is erased
0x03 Erase Verify Flash Section Verifies that a given number of words starting at the address provided are erased

Table 18-10. Flash commands (continued)

FCMD Command Function on flash memory
Reads a dedicated 64-byte field in the nonvolatile information register in flash
0x04 Read Once
block that was previously programmed using the program once command
0x06 Program Flash Programs up to two longwords in a flash block
Programs a dedicated 64 byte field in the nonvolatile information register in flash
0x07 Program Once
block that is allowed to be programmed only once
Erases all flash blocks
0x08 Erase All Block An erase of all flash blocks is possible only when the FPROT[FPHDIS],
FPROT[FPLDIS] and FPROT[FPOEN] and the bit are set prior to launching the
command
Erases a flash block
0x09 Erase Flash Block An erase of the full flash block is possible only when FPROT[FPLDIS],
FPROT[FPHDIS], and FPROT[FPOEN] are set prior to launching the command.
0x0A Erase Flash Sector Erases all bytes in a flash sector
Supports a method of releasing MCU security by erasing all flash blocks and
0x0B Unsecure Flash
verifying that all flash blocks are erased
0x0C Verify Backdoor Access key Supports a method of releasing MCU security by verifying a set of security keys
0x0D Set User Margin Level Specifies a user margin read level for all flash blocks
0x0E Set Factory Margin Level Specifies a factory margin read level for all flash blocks
18.3.9 Flash command summary

This section provides details of all available flash commands launched by a command
write sequence. The FSTAT[ACCERR] will be set during the command write sequence if
any of the following illegal steps are performed, causing the command not to be
processed by the memory controller:
• Starting any command write sequence that programs or erases flash memory before
initializing the FLCKDIV register.
• Writing an invalid command as part of the command write sequence.
• For additional possible errors, refer to the error handling table provided for each
command.
If a flash block is read during the execution of an algorithm (FSTAT[CCIF] = 0) on that

same block, the read operation will return invalid data. It will also trigger an illegal
access exception.
If FSTAT[ACCERR] or FSTAT[FPVIOL] are set, the user must clear these fields before
starting any command write sequence.

CAUTION
An flash longword must be in the erased state before being
programmed. Cumulative programming of bits within an flash
longword is not allowed.
18.3.9.1 Erase Verify All Blocks command

The Erase Verify All Blocks command will verify that all flash blocks have been erased.
Table 18-11. Erase Verify All Blocks command FCCOB requirements
CCOBIX[2:0] FCCOBHI parameters FCCOBLO parameters
000 0x01 Not required
Upon clearing FSTAT[CCIF] to launch the Erase Verify All Blocks command, the
memory controller will verify that the entire flash memory space is erased. The
FSTAT[CCIF] flag will set after the erase verify all blocks operation has completed. If all
blocks are not erased, it means blank check failed and both FSTAT[MGSTAT] bits will
be set.
Table 18-12. Erase verify all blocks command error handling
Register Error bit Error condition
ACCERR Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 000 at command launch
FPVIOL None
FSTAT Set if any errors have been encountered during the read1 or if blank check
MGSTAT1
failed
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the read
MGSTAT0
or if blank check failed
1. As found in the memory map for NVM
18.3.9.2 Erase Verify Block command

The Erase Verify Block command allows the user to verify that an entire flash block has
been erased. The FCCOB global address [23:0] bits determine which block must be
verified.
Table 18-13. Erase Verify Block Command FCCOB requirements
000 0x02 Global address [23:16] to identify flash block
001 Global address [15:0] in flash block to be verified

Upon clearing FSTAT[CCIF] to launch the erase verify block command, the memory
controller will verify that the selected flash block is erased. The FSTAT[CCIF] flag will
set after the erase verify block operation has completed. If the block is not erased, it
means blank check failed and both FSTAT[MGSTAT] bits will be set.
Table 18-14. Erase Verify Block command error handling
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 000 at command launch
ACCERR
Set if an invalid global address [23:0] is supplied1
FPVIOL None
FSTAT Set if any errors have been encountered during the read or if blank check
MGSTAT1
failed
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the read
MGSTAT0
18.3.9.3 Erase Verify Flash Section command

The Erase Verify Flash Section command will verify that a section of code in the flash
memory is erased. The Erase Verify Flash Section command defines the starting point of
the code to be verified and the number of longwords.
Table 18-15. Erase verify flash section command FCCOB requirements
000 0x03 Global address [23:16] of flash block
001 Global address [15:0] of the first longwords to be verified
010 Number of long words to be verified
Upon clearing FSTAT[CCIF] to launch the erase verify flash section command, the
memory controller will verify that the selected section of flash memory is erased. The
FSTAT[CCIF] flag will set after the erase verify flash section operation has completed. If
the section is not erased, it means blank check failed and both FSTAT[MGSTAT] bits
will be set.
Table 18-16. Erase Verify Flash Section command error handling
FSTAT ACCERR Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 18-4)
Set if an invalid global address [23:0] is supplied (see Table 18-1)1

Table 18-16. Erase Verify Flash Section command error handling (continued)
Set if a misaligned long words address is supplied (global address[1:0] !=
00)
Set if the requested section crosses flash address boundary
FPVIOL None
Set if any errors have been encountered during the read2 or if blank check
MGSTAT1
failed
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the read2
MGSTAT0
1. As defined by the memory map for NVM

18.3.9.4 Read once command

The read once command provides read access to a reserved 64-byte field (8 phrase)
located in the nonvolatile information register of flash. The read once field can only be
programmed once and can not be erased. It can be used to store the product ID or any
other information that can be written only once. It is programmed using the program once
command described in Program Once command. To avoid code runaway, the read once
command must not be executed from the flash block containing the program once
reserved field.
Table 18-17. Read Once command FCCOB requirements
CCOBIX[2:0] FCCOB parameters
001 Read once phrase index (0x0000 – 0x0007)
010 Read once word 0 value
Upon clearing FSTAT[CCIF] to launch the read once command, a read once phrase is
fetched and stored in the FCCOB indexed register. The FSTAT[CCIF] flag will set after
the read once operation has completed. Valid phrase index values for the read once
command range from 0x0000 to 0x0007. During execution of the read once command,
any attempt to read addresses within flash block will return invalid data.

Table 18-18. Read Once command error handling

ACCERR Set if command is not available in current mode (see Table 18-4)
Set if an invalid phrase index is supplied
FSTAT
FPVIOL None
MGSTAT1 Set if any errors have been encountered during the read
MGSTAT0 Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the read
18.3.9.5 Program Flash command

The program flash operation will program up to two previously erased longwords in the
flash memory using an embedded algorithm.
Note
A flash phrase must be in the erased state before being
programmed. Cumulative programming of bits within a flash
phrase is not allowed.
Table 18-19. Program Flash command FCCOB requirements
001 Global address [15:0] of longwords location to be programmed1
010 Word 0 (longword 0) program value
1. Global address [1:0] must be 00.
Upon clearing FSTAT[CCIF] to launch the Program Flash command, the memory
controller will program the data words to the supplied global address and will then
proceed to verify the data words read back as expected. The FSTAT[CCIF] flag will set
after the program flash operation has completed.
Table 18-20. Program Flash command error handling
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] ≠ 011 or 101 at command launch
FSTAT ACCERR Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 18-4)
Set if an invalid global address [23:0] is supplied (see Table 18-1.1

Table 18-20. Program Flash command error handling (continued)

Set if a misaligned longword address is supplied (global address [1:0] !=
00)
Set if the requested group of words breaches the end of the flash block.
FPVIOL Set if the global address [23:0] points to a protected data
MGSTAT1 Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify
MGSTAT0
operation
1. As defined by the memory map of NVM.
18.3.9.6 Program Once command

The Program Once command restricts programming to a reserved 64-byte field (8
phrases) in the nonvolatile information register located in flash. The program once
reserved field can be read using the read once command as described in Read once
command. The program once command must be issued only once because the nonvolatile
information register in flash cannot be erased. To avoid code runaway, the program once
command must not be executed from the flash block containing the program once
reserved field.
Table 18-21. Program Once command FCCOB requirements
001 Program Once phrase index (0x000 – 0x0007)
010 Program once Word 0 value
011 Program once Word 1value
Upon clearing FSTAT[CCIF] to launch the program once command, the memory
controller first verifies that the selected phrase is erased. If erased, then the selected
phrase will be programmed and then verified with read back. The FSTAT[CCIF] flag will
remain clear, setting only after the program once operation has completed.
The reserved nonvolatile information register accessed by the Program Once command
cannot be erased, and any attempt to program one of these phrases a second time will not
be allowed. Valid phrase index values for the program once command range from 0x0000
to 0x0007. During execution of the program once command, any attempt to read
addresses within flash will return invalid data.

Table 18-22. Program Once ommand error handling

Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 18-4)
ACCERR
Set if an invalid phrase index is supplied
Set if the requested phrase has already been programmed1
FSTAT
FPVIOL None
MGSTAT0
operation
1. If a program once phrase is initially programmed to 0xFFFF_FFFF_FFFF_FFFF, the program once command will be
allowed to execute again on that same phrase.
18.3.9.7 Erase All Blocks command

The Erase All Blocks operation will erase the entire flash memory space.
Table 18-23. Erase All Blocks command FCCOB requirements
Upon clearing FSTAT[CCIF] to launch the Erase All Blocks command, the memory
controller will erase the entire NVM memory space and verify that it is erased. If the
memory controller verifies that the entire NVM memory space was properly erased,
security will be released. Therefore, the device is in unsecured state. During the execution
of this command (FSTAT[CCIF] = 0) the user must not write to any NVM module
register. The FSTAT[CCIF] flag will set after the erase all blocks operation has
completed.
Table 18-24. Erase All Blocks command error handling
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] ≠ 000 at command launch
ACCERR
FPVIOL Set if any area of the flash memory is protected
FSTAT
MGSTAT1 Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation1
MGSTAT0
operation1
1. As found in the memory map for NVM.

18.3.9.8 Debugger mass erase request

The functionality of the Erase All Blocks command is also available in an uncommanded
fashion from the Debugger Mass Erase Request feature.
The Debugger Mass Erase request requires the clock divider register FCLKDIV to be
loaded before invoking this function. Please look into the Reference Manual for
information about the default value of FCLKDIV in case direct writes to register
FCLKDIV are not allowed by the time this feature is invoked. If FCLKDIV is not set the
Debugger Mass Erase request will not execute and the FSTAT[ACCERR] flag will set.
After the execution of the Mass Erase function, the FCLKDIV register will be reset and
the value of register FCLKDIV must be loaded before launching any other command
afterwards.
Before invoking the erase-all function, the FSTAT[ACCERR]and FSTAT[FPVIOL]
flags must be clear. When invoked the Debugger Mass Erase request will erase all flash
memory space regardless of the protection settings. If the post-erase verify passes, the
routine will then release security by setting the FSEC[SEC] to the unsecure state. The
security byte in the Flash Configuration Field will be programmed to the unsecure state.
The status of the Debugger Mass Erase request is reflected in the FCNFG[ERSAREQ].
The FCNFG[ERSAREQ] will be cleared once the operation has completed and the
normal FSTAT error reporting will be available as described in the following table.
At the end of the Mass Erase sequence Protection will remain configured as it was before
executing the Mass Erase function. If the application requires programming P-Flash after
the Mass Erase function completes, the existing protection limits must be taken into
account. If protection needs to be disabled the user may need to reset the system right
after completing the Mass Erase function.
Table 18-25. Debugger mass erase request error handling
Register Error Bit Error Condition
FSTAT ACCERR Set if command not available in current mode.
MGSTAT1 Set if any errors have been encountered during the erase verify operation,
or during the program verify operation.
MGSTAT0 Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the erase
verify operation, or during the program verify operation.
18.3.9.9 Erase flash block command

The erase flash block operation will erase all addresses in a flash block.

Table 18-26. Erase flash block command FCCOB requirements

001 Global address[15:0] in flash block to be erased
Upon clearing FSTAT[CCIF] to launch the erase flash block command, the memory
controller will erase the selected flash block and verify that it is erased. The
FSTAT[CCIF] flag will set after the erase flash block operation has completed.
Table 18-27. Erase flash block command error handling
Register Error Bit Error Condition
ACCERR Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 18-4)
Set if an invalid global address [23:16] is supplied1
FSTAT FPVIOL Set if an area of the selected flash block is protected
MGSTAT0
operation2
1. As defined by the memory map for NVM.

2. As found in the memory map for NVM.
18.3.9.10 Erase flash sector command

The erase flash sector operation will erase all addresses in a flash sector.
Table 18-28. Erase flash sector command FCCOB requirements
000 0x0A Global address [23:16] to identify flash block to be erased
Global address [15:0] anywhere within the sector to be erased. Refer to Overview for the flash
001
sector size
Upon clearing FSTAT[CCIF] to launch the erase flash sector command, the memory
controller will erase the selected flash sector and then verify that it is erased. The
FSTAT[CCIF] flag will be set after the erase flash sector operation has completed.
Table 18-29. Erase flash sector command error handling
FSTAT ACCERR

Table 18-29. Erase flash sector command error handling (continued)

Set if an invalid global address [23:16] is supplied.1 (see Table 18-1)
Set if a misaligned longword address is supplied (global address [1:0] !=
00)
FPVIOL Set if the selected flash sector is protected
MGSTAT0
operation
1. As defined by the memory map for NVM
18.3.9.11 Unsecure flash command

The unsecure flash command will erase the entire flash memory space, and if the erase is
successful, will release security.
Table 18-30. Unsecure flash command FCCOB requirements
000 0x0B Not required
Upon clearing FSTAT[CCIF] to launch the unsecure flash command, the memory
controller will erase the entire flash memory space and verify that it is erased. If the
memory controller verifies that the entire flash memory space was properly erased,
security will be released. If the erase verify is not successful, the unsecure flash operation
sets FSTAT[MGSTAT1] and terminates without changing the security state. During the
execution of this command (FSTAT[CCIF] = 0), the user must not write to any flash
module register. The FSTAT[CCIF] flag is set after the unsecure flash operation has
completed.
Table 18-31. Unsecure flash command error handling
ACCERR
Set if command is not available in current mode (see Table 18-4)
FSTAT
FPVIOL Set if any area of the flash memory is protected
MGSTAT0
operation1

18.3.9.12 Verify backdoor access key command

The verify backdoor access key command will execute only if it is enabled by the
FSEC[KEYEN] bits. The verify backdoor access key command releases security if user-
supplied keys match those stored in the flash security bytes of the flash configuration
field. See Table 18-1 for details. The code that performs verifying backdoor access
command must be running from RAM.
Table 18-32. Verify backdoor access key command FCCOB requirements
000 0x0C Not required
001 Key 0
010 Key 1
011 Key 2
100 Key 3
Upon clearing FSTAT[CCIF] to launch the verify backdoor access key command, the
memory controller will check the FSEC[KEYEN] bits to verify that this command is
enabled. If not enabled, the memory controller sets the FSTAT[ACCERR] bit. If the
command is enabled, the memory controller compares the key provided in FCCOB to the
backdoor comparison key in the flash configuration field with Key 0 compared to
0x0400, and so on. If the backdoor keys match, security will be released. If the backdoor
keys do not match, security is not released and all future attempts to execute the verify
backdoor access key command are aborted (set FSTAT[ACCERR]) until a reset occurs.
The FSTAT[CCIF] flag is set after the verify backdoor access key operation has
completed.
Table 18-33. Verify backdoor access key command error handling
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] ≠ 100 at command launch
Set if an incorrect backdoor key is supplied
ACCERR
Set if backdoor key access has not been enabled (KEYEN[1:0] ≠ 10
FSTAT Set if the backdoor key has mismatched since the last reset
FPVIOL None
MGSTAT1 None
MGSTAT0 None

18.3.9.13 Set user margin level command

The user margin is a small delta to the normal read reference level and, in effect, is a
minimum safety margin. That is, if the reads pass at the tighter tolerances of the user
margins, the normal reads have at least that much safety margin before users experience
data loss.
The set user margin level command causes the memory controller to set the margin level
for future read operations of the flash block.
Table 18-34. Set user margin level command FCCOB requirements
000 0x0D Global address [23:16] to identify flash block
001 Global address [15:0] to identify flash block
010 Margin level setting
Upon clearing FSTAT[CCIF] to launch the set user margin level command, the memory
controller will set the user margin level for the targeted block and then set the
FSTAT[CCIF] flag.
Note
Valid margin level settings for the set user margin level command are defined in the
following tables.
Table 18-35. Valid set user margin level settings
CCOB
Level description
(CCOBIX = 010)
0x0000 Return to normal level
0x0001 User margin-1 level1
1. Read margin to the erased state

2. Read margin to the programmed state
Table 18-36. Set user margin level command error handling

ACCERR
Set if an invalid global address [23:0] is supplied
FSTAT Set if an invalid margin level setting is supplied
FPVIOL None
MGSTAT1 None
MGSTAT0 None

Note
User margin levels can be used to check that NVM memory
contents have adequate margin for normal level read operations.
If unexpected results are encountered when checking NVM
memory contents at user margin levels, a potential loss of
information has been detected.
18.3.9.14 Set factory margin level command

The set factory margin Level command causes the memory controller to set the margin
level specified for future read operations of the flash block.
Table 18-37. Set factory margin level command FCCOB requirements
000 0x0E Global address [23:16] to identify flash block
001 Global address [15:0] to identify flash block
010 Margin level setting
Upon clearing FSTAT[CCIF] to launch the set factory margin level command, the
memory controller will set the factory margin level for the targeted block and then set the
FSTAT[CCIF] flag.
Note
Valid margin level settings for the set factory margin level command are defined in the
following tables.
Table 18-38. Valid set factory margin level settings
CCOB
Level description
(CCOBIX = 010)
0x0000 Return to normal level
0x0003 Factory margin-1 level1
0x0004 Factory margin-0 level2
1. Read margin to the erased state

2. Read margin to the programmed state

Table 18-39. Set factory margin level command error handling

ACCERR
Set if an invalid global address [23:0] is supplied
FSTAT Set if an invalid margin level setting is supplied
FPVIOL None
MGSTAT1 None
MGSTAT0 None
CAUTION
Factory margin levels must only be used during verify of the
initial factory programming.
Note
Factory margin levels can be used to check that Flash memory
contents have adequate margin for data retention at the normal
level setting. If unexpected results are encountered when
checking flash memory contents at factory margin levels, the
fash memory contents must be erased and reprogrammed.

This section presents a high-level summary of the registers and how they are mapped.
The registers can be accessed in 32-bits, 16-bits (aligned on data[31:16] or on data[15:0])
or 8-bits. In the case of the writable registers, the write accesses are forbidden during
flash command execution. For more details, see Caution note in Flash memory map.
FTMRE memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4002_0001 Flash CCOB Index Register (FTMRE_FCCOBIX) 8 R/W 00h 18.4.1/249
4002_0002 Flash Security Register (FTMRE_FSEC) 8 R Undefined 18.4.2/249
4002_0003 Flash Clock Divider Register (FTMRE_FCLKDIV) 8 R/W 00h 18.4.3/250
4002_0005 Flash Status Register (FTMRE_FSTAT) 8 R/W 80h 18.4.4/251
4002_0007 Flash Configuration Register (FTMRE_FCNFG) 8 R/W 00h 18.4.5/252
Flash Common Command Object Register: Low
4002_0008 8 R/W 00h 18.4.6/253
(FTMRE_FCCOBLO)

FTMRE memory map (continued)

Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
Flash Common Command Object Register:High
4002_0009 8 R/W 00h 18.4.7/254
(FTMRE_FCCOBHI)
4002_000B Flash Protection Register (FTMRE_FPROT) 8 R See section 18.4.8/254
4002_000F Flash Option Register (FTMRE_FOPT) 8 R Undefined 18.4.9/255
18.4.1 Flash CCOB Index Register (FTMRE_FCCOBIX)

The FCCOBIX register is used to index the FCCOB register for NVM memory
operations.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 CCOBIX
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMRE_FCCOBIX field descriptions

Field Description
CCOBIX Common Command Register Index
Selects which word of the FCCOB register array is being read or written to.
18.4.2 Flash Security Register (FTMRE_FSEC)

The FSEC register holds all bits associated with the security of the MCU and NVM
module. All fields in the FSEC register are readable but not writable. During the reset
sequence, the FSEC register is loaded with the contents of the flash security byte in the
flash configuration field located in flash memory.
See Security for security function.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read KEYEN Reserved SEC
Write
Reset x* x* x* x* x* x* x* x*
* Notes:

FTMRE_FSEC field descriptions

Field Description
7–6 Backdoor Key Security Enable Bits
KEYEN
The KEYEN[1:0] bits define the enabling of backdoor key access to the flash module.
NOTE: 01 is the preferred KEYEN state to disable backdoor key access.
00 Disabled
01 Disabled
10 Enabled
11 Disabled
Reserved
SEC Flash Security Bits
Defines the security state of the MCU. If the flash module is unsecured using backdoor key access, the
SEC field is forced to 10.
NOTE: 01 is the preferred SEC state to set MCU to secured state.
00 Secured
01 Secured
10 Unsecured
11 Secured
18.4.3 Flash Clock Divider Register (FTMRE_FCLKDIV)

The FCLKDIV register is used to control timed events in program and erase algorithms.
NOTE
The FCLKDIV register must not be written while a flash
command is executing (FSTAT[CCIF] = 0)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read FDIVLD
FDIVLCK FDIV
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMRE_FCLKDIV field descriptions

Field Description
7 Clock Divider Loaded
FDIVLD

FTMRE_FCLKDIV field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 FCLKDIV register has not been written since the last reset.
1 FCLKDIV register has been written since the last reset.
6 Clock Divider Locked
FDIVLCK
0 FDIV field is open for writing.
1 FDIV value is locked and cannot be changed. After the lock bit is set high, only reset can clear this bit
and restore writability to the FDIV field in user mode.
FDIV Clock Divider Bits
FDIV[5:0] must be set to effectively divide BUSCLK down to 1MHz to control timed events during flash
program and erase algorithms. Refer to the table in the Writing the FCLKDIV register for the
recommended values of FDIV based on the BUSCLK frequency.
18.4.4 Flash Status Register (FTMRE_FSTAT)
The FSTAT register reports the operational status of the flash module.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 MGBUSY 0 MGSTAT

CCIF ACCERR FPVIOL
Write
Reset 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMRE_FSTAT field descriptions

Field Description
7 Command Complete Interrupt Flag
CCIF
Indicates that a flash command has completed. The CCIF flag is cleared by writing a 1 to CCIF to launch a
command and CCIF will stay low until command completion or command violation.
0 Flash command is in progress.

1 Flash command has completed.
5 Flash Access Error Flag
ACCERR
Indicates an illegal access has occurred to the flash memory caused by either a violation of the command
write sequence or issuing an illegal flash command. While ACCERR is set, the CCIF flag cannot be
cleared to launch a command. Writing 1 to this field clears it while writing a 0 to this field has no effect.
0 No access error is detected.

1 Access error is detected.

FTMRE_FSTAT field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
4 Flash Protection Violation Flag
FPVIOL
Indicates an attempt was made to program or erase an address in a protected area of flash memory
during a command write sequence. Writing 1 to FPVIOL clears this field while writing 0 to this field has no
effect. While FPIOL is set, it is not possible to launch a command or start a command write sequence.
0 No protection violation is detected.

1 Protection violation is detected.
3 Memory Controller Busy Flag
MGBUSY
Reflects the active state of the memory controller.
0 Memory controller is idle.

1 Memory controller is busy executing a flash command (CCIF = 0).
MGSTAT Memory Controller Command Completion Status Flag
One or more MGSTAT flag bits are set if an error is detected during execution of a flash command or
during the flash reset sequence.
NOTE: Reset value can deviate from the value shown if a double bit fault is detected during the reset
sequence.
18.4.5 Flash Configuration Register (FTMRE_FCNFG)

The FCNFG register enables the flash command complete interrupt and forces ECC
faults on flash array read access from the CPU.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 ERSAREQ 0
CCIE
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMRE_FCNFG field descriptions

Field Description
7 Command Complete Interrupt Enable
CCIE
Controls interrupt generation when a flash command has completed.
0 Command complete interrupt is disabled.

1 An interrupt will be requested whenever the CCIF flag in the FSTAT register is set.

FTMRE_FCNFG field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
5 Debugger Mass Erase Request
ERSAREQ
Requests the MGATE to execute the Erase All Blocks command and release security. ERSAREQ is not
directly writable but is under indirect user control.
The ERSAREQ field sets to 1 when the MGATE starts executing the sequence. ERSAREQ will be reset to
0 by the MGATE when the operation is completed
0 No request or request complete

1 Request to
• run the Erase All Blocks command
• verify the erased state
• program the security byte in the Flash Configuration Field to the unsecure state
• release MCU security by setting FSEC[SEC] to the unsecure state
18.4.6 Flash Common Command Object Register: Low

(FTMRE_FCCOBLO)
The FCCOB is an array of six words addressed via the CCOBIX index found in the
FCCOBIX register. Byte-wide reads and writes are allowed to the FCCOB register.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read CCOB
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMRE_FCCOBLO field descriptions

Field Description
CCOB Common Command Object Bit 7:0
Low 8 bits of Common Command Object register

18.4.7 Flash Common Command Object Register:High

(FTMRE_FCCOBHI)
The FCCOB is an array of six words addressed via the CCOBIX index found in the
FCCOBIX register. Byte-wide reads and writes are allowed to the FCCOB register.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read CCOB
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMRE_FCCOBHI field descriptions

Field Description
CCOB Common Command Object Bit 15:8
High 8 bits of Common Command Object register
18.4.8 Flash Protection Register (FTMRE_FPROT)

The FPROT register defines which flash sectors are protected against program and erase
operations.
The unreserved bits of the FPROT register are writable with the restriction that the size of
the protected region can only be increased (see Protection).
During the reset sequence, the FPROT register is loaded with the contents of the flash
protection byte in the flash configuration field at global address 0x40D located in flash
memory. To change the flash protection that will be loaded during the reset sequence, the
upper sector of the flash memory must be unprotected, then the flash protection byte must
be reprogrammed.
Trying to alter data in any protected area in the flash memory will result in a protection
violation error and the FPVIOL bit will be set in the FSTAT register. The block erase of a
flash block is not possible if any of the flash sectors contained in the same flash block are
protected.
Address: 4002_0000h base + Bh offset = 4002_000Bh
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read RNV6 RNV

FPOPEN FPLDIS FPLS
Write
Reset * * 0 0 0 * * *
* Notes:

•
FTMRE_FPROT field descriptions

Field Description
7 Flash Protection Operation Enable
FPOPEN
The FPOPEN bit determines the protection function for program or erase operations.
0 When FPOPEN is clear, the FPLDIS field defines unprotected address ranges as specified by the
corresponding FPLS field.
1 When FPOPEN is set, the FPLDIS field enables protection for the address range specified by the
corresponding FPLS field.
6 Reserved Nonvolatile Bit
RNV6
The RNV bit must remain in the erased state.
5–3 Reserved Nonvolatile Bit
RNV
The RNV bit must remain in the erased state.
2 Flash Protection Lower Address Range Disable
FPLDIS
The FPLDIS bit determines whether there is a protected/unprotected area in a specific region of the flash
memory beginning with global address 0x0_0000.
0 Protection/Unprotection enabled.
1 Protection/Unprotection disabled.
FPLS Flash Protection Lower Address Size
The FPLS bits determine the size of the protected/unprotected area in flash memory. The FPLS bits can
only be written to while the FPLDIS bit is set.
18.4.9 Flash Option Register (FTMRE_FOPT)

The FOPT register is the flash option register.
During the reset sequence, the FOPT register is loaded from the flash nonvolatile byte in
the flash configuration field at global address 0x040F located in flash memory as
indicated by reset condition.
Address: 4002_0000h base + Fh offset = 4002_000Fh
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read NV
Write
* Notes:

FTMRE_FOPT field descriptions

Field Description
NV Nonvolatile Bits
The NV[7:0] bits are available as nonvolatile bits. During the reset sequence, the FOPT register is loaded
from the flash nonvolatile byte in the flash configuration field at global address 0x40F located in flash
memory.

Chapter 19
Flash Memory Controller (FMC)
19.1 Introduction
The Flash Memory Controller (FMC) is a memory acceleration unit. A list of features
provided by the FMC can be found here.
• an interface between bus masters and the 32-bit program flash memory.
• a buffer and a cache that can accelerate program flash memory data transfers.
19.1.1 Overview
The Flash Memory Controller manages the interface between bus masters and the 32-bit
program flash memory. The FMC receives status information detailing the configuration
of the flash memory and uses this information to ensure a proper interface. The FMC
supports 8-bit, 16-bit, and 32-bit read operations from the program flash memory. A write
operation to program flash memory results in a bus error.
In addition, the FMC provides two separate mechanisms for accelerating the interface
between bus masters and program flash memory. A 32-bit speculation buffer can prefetch
the next 32-bit flash memory location, and a 4-way, 2-set program flash memory cache
can store previously accessed program flash memory data for quick access times.
19.1.2 Features
The features of FMC module include:
• Interface between bus masters and the 32-bit program flash memory:
• 8-bit, 16-bit, and 32-bit read operations to nonvolatile flash memory.
• Acceleration of data transfer from the program flash memory to the device:

Modes of operation
• 32-bit prefetch speculation buffer for program flash accesses with controls for
instruction/data access
• 4-way, 2-set, 32-bit line size program flash memory cache for a total of eight 32-
bit entries with invalidation control
19.2 Modes of operation

The FMC operates only when a bus master accesses the program flash memory.
In terms of chip power modes:
• The FMC operates only in Run and Wait modes.
• For any power mode where the program flash memory cannot be accessed, the FMC
is disabled.
19.3 External signal description

The FMC has no external (off-chip) signals.

The MCM's programming model provides control and configuration of the FMC's
features.
For details, see the description of the MCM's Platform Control Register (PLACR).

The FMC is a flash acceleration unit with flexible buffers for user configuration.
Besides managing the interface between bus masters and the program flash memory, the
FMC can be used to customize the program flash memory cache and buffer to provide
single-cycle system clock data access times. Whenever a hit occurs for the prefetch
speculation buffer or the cache (when enabled), the requested data is transferred within a
single system clock.
Upon system reset, the FMC is configured as follows:
• Flash cache is enabled.
• Instruction speculation and caching are enabled.

Chapter 19 Flash Memory Controller (FMC)
• Data speculation is disabled.

• Data caching is enabled.
Though the default configuration provides flash acceleration, advanced users may desire
to customize the FMC buffer configurations to maximize throughput for their use cases.
For example, the user may adjust the controls to enable buffering per access type (data or
instruction).
NOTE
When reconfiguring the FMC, do not program the control and
configuration inputs to the FMC while the program flash
memory is being accessed. Instead, change them with a routine
executing from RAM in supervisor mode.


Chapter 20
Internal Clock Source (ICS)
20.1 Introduction
The internal clock source (ICS) module provides clock source choices for the MCU. The
module contains a frequency-locked loop (FLL) as a clock source that is controllable by
either an internal or an external reference clock. The module can provide this FLL clock
or either of the internal or external reference clocks as a source for the MCU system
clock. There are also signals provided to control a low-power oscillator (OSC) module.
These signals configure and enable the OSC module to generate its external crystal/
resonator clock (OSC_OUT) used by peripheral modules and as the ICS external
reference clock source. The ICS external reference clock can be the external crystal/
resonator (OSC_OUT) supplied by an OSC, or it can be another external clock source.
The ICS clock source chosen is passed through a reduced bus divider (BDIV) which
allows a lower final output clock frequency to be derived.
20.1.1 Features
The key features of the ICS module are given below:
• Frequency-locked loop (FLL) is trimmable for accuracy
• Internal or external reference clocks can be used to control the FLL.
• Reference divider is provided for external clock.
• Internal reference clock has 9 trim bits available.
• Internal or external reference clocks can be selected as the clock source for the MCU.
• Whichever clock is selected as the source can be divided down.
• 3-bit select for clock divider is provided
• Allowable dividers are: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 if OSC_CR[RANGE] = 0; 32,
64, 128, 256, 512, 1024 if OSC_CR[RANGE] = 1.
• FLL Engaged Internal mode is automatically selected out of reset.
• Selectable digitally-controlled oscillators (DCO) optimized frequency ranges
• FLL lock detector and external clock monitor

Introduction
• FLL lock detector with interrupt capability

• External reference clock monitor with reset capability
• Digitally controlled oscillators optimized for 40-48 MHz frequency range

The following figure is the ICS block diagram.
External Reference Clock /

Oscillator
Internal Clock Source Block

ICSIRCLK
IRCLKEN
IREFSTEN BDIV
Internal / 2n
Reference ICSOUT
Clock n=0-7
LP
SCFTRIMSCTRIM FLL CLKS
/ 2n Filter DCO
n=0-7
IREFS
RDIV
ICSFFCLK
IREFST CLKST LOLIE LOLS LOCK CME
Figure 20-1. Internal clock source (ICS) block diagram

There are seven modes of operation for the ICS: FEI, FEE, FBI, FBILP, FBE, FBELP,
and STOP. Each of these modes is explained briefly in the following subsections.
20.1.3.1 FLL engaged internal (FEI)

In FLL engaged internal mode, which is the default mode, the ICS supplies a clock
derived from the FLL which is controlled by the internal reference clock.

Chapter 20 Internal Clock Source (ICS)
20.1.3.2 FLL engaged external (FEE)

In FLL engaged external mode, the ICS supplies a clock derived from the FLL which is
controlled by an external reference clock source.
20.1.3.3 FLL bypassed internal (FBI)

In FLL bypassed internal mode, the FLL is enabled and controlled by the internal
reference clock, but is bypassed. The ICS supplies a clock derived from the internal
reference clock.
20.1.3.4 FLL bypassed internal low power (FBILP)

In FLL bypassed internal low power mode, the FLL is disabled and bypassed, and the
ICS supplies a clock derived from the internal reference clock.
20.1.3.5 FLL bypassed external (FBE)

In FLL bypassed external mode, the FLL is enabled and controlled by an external
reference clock, but is bypassed. The ICS supplies a clock derived from the external
reference clock source.
20.1.3.6 FLL bypassed external low power (FBELP)

In FLL bypassed external low power mode, the FLL is disabled and bypassed, and the
ICS supplies a clock derived from the external reference clock.
20.1.3.7 Stop (STOP)

In Stop mode, the FLL is disabled and the internal or the ICS external reference clocks
source (OSC_OUT) can be selected to be enabled or disabled. The ICS does not provide
any MCU clock sources.
NOTE
The DCO frequency changes from the pre-stop value to its reset
value and the FLL needs to reacquire the lock before the
frequency is stable. Timing sensitive operations must wait for
the FLL acquisition time, tAcquire, before executing.

External signal description

There are no ICS signals that connect off chip.
20.3 Register definition

ICS memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4006_4000 ICS Control Register 1 (ICS_C1) 8 R/W 04h 20.3.1/264
4006_4001 ICS Control Register 2 (ICS_C2) 8 R/W 20h 20.3.2/265
4006_4002 ICS Control Register 3 (ICS_C3) 8 R/W Undefined 20.3.3/266
4006_4003 ICS Control Register 4 (ICS_C4) 8 R/W See section 20.3.4/267
4006_4004 ICS Status Register (ICS_S) 8 R 10h 20.3.5/267
20.3.1 ICS Control Register 1 (ICS_C1)

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read CLKS RDIV IREFS IRCLKEN IREFSTEN
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
ICS_C1 field descriptions

Field Description
7–6 Clock Source Select
CLKS
Selects the clock source that controls the bus frequency. The actual bus frequency depends on the value
of ICS_C2[BDIV].
00 Output of FLL is selected.

01 Internal reference clock is selected.
10 External reference clock is selected.
11 Reserved, defaults to 00.
5–3 Reference Divider
RDIV
Selects the amount to divide down the FLL reference clock selected by the IREFS bits. Resulting
frequency must be in the range 31.25 kHz to 39.0625 kHz.

ICS_C1 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
RDIV OSC_CR[RANGE ]= 0 OSC_CR[RANGE ]= 1
000 11 32
001 2 64
010 4 128
011 8 256
100 16 512
101 32 1024
110 64 Reserved
111 128 Reserved
1. Reset default
2 Internal Reference Select
IREFS
Selects the reference clock source for the FLL.
0 External reference clock is selected.

1 Internal reference clock is selected.
1 Internal Reference Clock Enable
IRCLKEN
Enables the internal reference clock for use as ICSIRCLK.
0 ICSIRCLK is inactive.
1 ICSIRCLK is active.
0 Internal Reference Stop Enable
IREFSTEN
Controls whether or not the internal reference clock remains enabled when the ICS enters Stop mode.
0 Internal reference clock is disabled in Stop mode.

1 Internal reference clock stays enabled in Stop mode if IRCLKEN is set, or if ICS is in FEI, FBI, or
FBILP mode before entering Stop.
1. Reset default

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0
BDIV LP
Write
Reset 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

Field Description
7–5 Bus Frequency Divider
BDIV

Register definition
ICS_C2 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
Selects the amount to divide down the clock source selected by ICS_C1[CLKS]. This controls the bus
frequency.
000 Encoding 0—Divides the selected clock by 1.

001 Encoding 1—Divides the selected clock by 2 (reset default).
4 Low Power Select
LP
Controls whether the FLL is disabled in FLL bypassed modes.
0 FLL is not disabled in bypass mode.

1 FLL is disabled in bypass modes unless debug is active.

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read SCTRIM
Write
* Notes:

Field Description
SCTRIM Slow Internal Reference Clock Trim Setting
Controls the slow internal reference clock frequency by controlling the internal reference clock period. The
bits are binary weighted. In other words, bit 1 adjusts twice as much as bit 0. Increasing the binary value in
SCTRIM will increase the period, and decreasing the value will decrease the period. An additional fine trim
bit is available as the ICS_C4[SCFTRIM]. SCTRIM is loaded during reset from a factory programmed
location if the device is not in any debug mode.


Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 0
LOLIE CME SCFTRIM
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x*
* Notes:

Field Description
7 Loss of Lock Interrupt
LOLIE
Determines if an interrupt request is made following a loss of lock indication. This field has an effect only
when ICS_S[LOLS] is set.
0 No request on loss of lock.

1 Generates an interrupt request on loss of lock.
5 Clock Monitor Enable
CME
Determines if a reset request is made following a loss of external clock indication. This field must be set to
a logic 1 only when the ICS is in an operational mode that uses the external clock (FEE, FBE, or FBELP).
0 Clock monitor is disabled.

1 Generates a reset request on loss of external clock.
0 Slow Internal Reference Clock Fine Trim
SCFTRIM
Controls the smallest adjustment of the internal reference clock frequency. Setting SCFTRIM will increase
the period and clearing SCFTRIM will decrease the period by the smallest amount possible.
NOTE: SCFTRIM is loaded during reset from a factory programmed location when not in any debug
mode.
20.3.5 ICS Status Register (ICS_S)

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read LOLS LOCK 0 IREFST CLKST 0
Write w1c
Reset 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

ICS_S field descriptions

Field Description
7 Loss of Lock Status
LOLS
Indicates the lock status for the FLL. LOLS is set when lock detection is enabled and after acquiring lock,
the FLL output frequency has fallen outside the lock exit frequency tolerance, from ±4.7% to ±5.97%.
ICS_C4[LOLIE] determines whether an interrupt request is made when set. LOLS is cleared by reset or by
writing a logic 1 to LOLS when LOLS is set. Writing a logic 0 to LOLS has no effect.
0 FLL has not lost lock since LOLS was last cleared.
1 FLL has lost lock since LOLS was last cleared.
6 Lock Status
LOCK
Indicates whether the FLL has acquired lock. Lock detection is disabled when FLL is disabled. If the lock
status bit is set then changing the value of any of the following fields IREFS, RDIV[2:0], or, if in FEI or FBI
modes, TRIM[7:0] will cause the lock status bit to clear and stay cleared until the FLL has reacquired lock.
Stop mode entry will also cause the lock status bit to clear and stay cleared until the FLL has reacquired
lock.
0 FLL is currently unlocked.

1 FLL is currently locked.
4 Internal Reference Status
IREFST
Indicates the current source for the reference clock. This field does not update immediately after a write to
ICS_C1[IREFS] due to internal synchronization between clock domains.
0 Source of reference clock is external clock.

1 Source of reference clock is internal clock.
3–2 Clock Mode Status
CLKST
Indicates the current clock mode. This field doesn't update immediately after a write to ICS_C1[CLKS] due
to internal synchronization between clock domains.
00 Output of FLL is selected.

01 FLL Bypassed, internal reference clock is selected.
10 FLL Bypassed, external reference clock is selected.
11 Reserved.
20.4.1 Operational modes

The seven states of the ICS are shown as a state diagram and are described below. The
arrows indicate the allowed movements among the states.
IREFS=1
CLKS=00
FLL Engaged
Internal (FEI)
IREFS=0 IREFS=1
CLKS=10 CLKS=01
Debug Enabled Debug Enabled
or LP =0 or LP=0
FLL Bypassed FLL Bypassed

External Low FLL Bypassed FLL Bypassed
Internal Low
Power(FBELP) External (FBE) Internal (FBI)
Power(FBILP)
IREFS=0 IREFS=1
CLKS=10 CLKS=01
Debug Disabled Debug Disabled
and LP=1 and LP=1
FLL Engaged
External (FEE)
IREFS=0
CLKS=00
Returns to state that was active

Entered from any state Stop before MCU entered stop, unless
when MCU enters stop RESET occurs while in stop.
Figure 20-7. Clock switching modes
20.4.1.1 FLL engaged internal (FEI)

FLL engaged internal (FEI) is the default mode of operation and is entered when all the
following conditions occur:
• 00b is written to ICS_C1[CLKS].
• 1b is written to ICS_C1[IREFS].
In FLL engaged internal mode, the ICSOUT clock is derived from the FLL clock, which
is controlled by the internal reference clock. The FLL loop locks the frequency to 1280
times the internal reference frequency. The internal reference clock is enabled.
20.4.1.2 FLL engaged external (FEE)

The FLL engaged external (FEE) mode is entered when all the following conditions
occur:
• ICS_C1[RDIV] and and OSC_CR[RANGE ] are written to divide external reference
clock to be within the range of 31.25 kHz to 39.0625 kHz.

In FLL engaged external mode, the ICSOUT clock is derived from the FLL clock which
is controlled by the external reference clock source.The FLL loop locks the frequency to
1280 times the external reference frequency, as selected by ICS_C1[RDIV] and
OSC_CR[RANGE ]. The external reference clock is enabled.
20.4.1.3 FLL bypassed internal (FBI)

The FLL bypassed internal (FBI) mode is entered when all the following conditions
occur:
In FLL bypassed internal mode, the ICSOUT clock is derived from the internal reference
clock. The FLL clock is controlled by the internal reference clock, and the FLL loop
locks the FLL frequency to 1280 times the internal reference frequency. The internal
reference clock is enabled.
20.4.1.4 FLL bypassed internal low power (FBILP)

The FLL bypassed internal low power (FBILP) mode is entered when all the following
conditions occur:
In FLL bypassed internal low-power mode, the ICSOUT clock is derived from the
internal reference clock and the FLL is disabled. The internal reference clock is enabled.
20.4.1.5 FLL bypassed external (FBE)

The FLL bypassed external (FBE) mode is entered when all the following conditions
occur:
• ICS_C1[RDIV] and OSC_CR[RANGE ] fields are written to divide external
reference clock to be within the range of 31.25 kHz to 39.0625 kHz.
In FLL bypassed external mode, the ICSOUT clock is derived from the external reference
clock source. The FLL clock is controlled by the external reference clock, and the FLL
loop locks the FLL frequency to 1280 times the external reference frequency, as selected
by ICS_C1[RDIV] and OSC_CR[RANGE ].

20.4.1.6 FLL bypassed external low power (FBELP)

The FLL bypassed external low-power (FBELP) mode is entered when all the following
conditions occur:
In FLL bypassed external low-power mode, the ICSOUT clock is derived from the
external reference clock source and the FLL is disabled. The external reference clock
source is enabled.
20.4.1.7 Stop
NOTE
The DCO frequency changes from the pre-stop value to its reset
value and the FLL need to re-acquire the lock before the
frequency is stable. Timing sensitive operations must wait for
the FLL acquisition time, tAcquire, before executing.
Stop mode is entered whenever the MCU enters a STOP state. In this mode, all ICS clock
signals are static except in the following cases:
ICSIRCLK will be active in Stop mode when all the following conditions occur:
• 1b is written to ICS_C1[IRCLKEN].
• 1b is written to ICS_C1[IREFSTEN].
20.4.2 Mode switching

ICS_C1[IREFS] can be changed at anytime, but the actual switch to the newly selected
clock is shown by ICS_S[IREFST]. When switching between FLL engaged internal (FEI)
and FLL engaged external (FEE) modes, the FLL begins locking again after the switch is
completed.
ICS_C1[CLKS] can also be changed at anytime, but the actual switch to the newly
selected clock is shown by ICS_S[CLKST]. If the newly selected clock is not available,
the previous clock remains selected.
NOTE
When mode switching is from FEE, FBE or FBELP to FEI, it is
suggested to wait IREFST switch completion, then change
ICS_C1[CLKS].

20.4.3 Bus frequency divider

ICS_C2[BDIV] can be changed anytime and the actual switch to the new frequency
occurs immediately.
20.4.4 Low-power field usage

The Low-Power (LP) field in the ICS_C2 register is provided to allow the FLL to be
disabled and thus conserve power when it is not being used.
However, in some applications it may be desirable to allow the FLL to be enabled and to
lock for maximum accuracy before switching to an FLL engaged mode. To do this, write
0b to ICS_C2[LP].
20.4.5 Internal reference clock

When ICS_C1[IRCLKEN] is set, the internal reference clock signal is presented as
ICSIRCLK, which can be used as an additional clock source. To re-target the ICSIRCLK
frequency, write a new value to the ICS_C3[SCTRIM] bits to trim the period of the
internal reference clock:
• Writing a larger value slows down the ICSIRCLK frequency.
• Writing a smaller value to the ICS_C3 register speeds up the ICSIRCLK frequency.
The TRIM bits effect the ICSOUT frequency if the ICS is in FLL engaged internal (FEI),
FLL bypassed internal (FBI), or FLL bypassed internal low power (FBILP) mode.
Until ICSIRCLK is trimmed, programming low bus divider (ICS_C2[BDIV]) factors
may result in ICSOUT frequencies that exceed the maximum chip-level frequency and
violate the chip-level clock timing specifications.
If ICS_C1[IREFSTEN] is set and 1b is written to ICS_C1[IRCLKEN], the internal
reference clock keeps running during Stop mode in order to provide a fast recovery upon
exiting Stop mode.
All MCU devices are factory programmed with a trim value in a reserved memory
location. This value is uploaded to the ICS_C3 register and ICS_C4[SCFTRIM] during
any reset initialization. For finer precision, trim the internal oscillator in the application
and set ICS_C4[SCFTRIM] accordingly.

20.4.6 Fixed frequency clock

The ICS presents the divided FLL reference clock as ICSFFCLK for use as an additional
clock source. ICSFFCLK frequency must be no more than 1/4 of the ICSOUT frequency
to be valid. Because of this requirement, in bypass modes, the ICSFFCLK is valid only in
bypass external modes (FBE and FBELP) for the following conditions of
ICS_C2[BDIV], and divider factor of ICS_C1[RDIV] and OSC_CR[RANGE ] values:
if OSC_CR[RANGE ] is high,
• ICS_C2[BDIV] = 000, ICS_C2[RDIV] ≥ 010
• ICS_C2[BDIV] = 001 (divide by 2), ICS_C2[RDIV] ≥ 011
20.4.7 FLL lock and clock monitor
20.4.7.1 FLL clock lock

In FBE and FEE modes, the clock detector source uses the external reference as the
reference. When FLL is detected from lock to unlock, ICS_S[LOLS] is set. An interrupt
will be generated if ICS_C4[LOLIE] is set. ICS_S[LOLS] is cleared by reset or by
writing a logic 1 to ICS_S[LOLS] when ICS_S[LOLS] is set. Writing a logic 0 to
ICS_S[LOLS] has no effect.
In FBI and FEI modes, the lock detector source uses the internal reference as the
reference. When FLL is detected from lock to unlock, ICS_S[LOLS] is set. An interrupt
will be generated if ICS_C4[LOLIE] is set. ICS_S[LOLS] is cleared by reset or by
writing a logic 1 to ICS_S[LOLS] when ICS_S[LOLS] is set. Writing a logic 0 to
ICS_S[LOLS] has no effect.
In FBELP and FBILP modes, the FLL is not on so that lock detect function is not
applicable.
20.4.7.2 External reference clock monitor

In FBE, FEE, or FBELP modes, if 1 is written to ICS_C4[CME], the clock monitor is
enabled. If the external reference falls below a certain frequency, the MCU will reset.
The SIM_SRSID[LOC] will be set to indicate the error.

Initialization/application information
20.5 Initialization/application information

This section provides example code to give some basic direction to a user on how to
initialize and configure the ICS module. The example software is implemented in C
language.
20.5.1 Initializing FEI mode

The following code segment demonstrates setting ICS to FEI mode.
Example: 20.5.1.1 FEI mode initialization routine

/* the following code segment demonstrates setting ICS to FEI mode generating 36MHz bus*/
ICS_C2 = 0x00; /*BDIV=0, no prescalar
ICS_C1 = 0x04; /* internal reference clock to FLL */
ICS_C3 = TRIM_VALUE_35.15625KHZ; /* FLL output 36MHz */
/* the following code segment demonstrates setting ICS to FEI mode generating 4.5MHz bus*/
ICS_C2 = 0x60; /*BDIV=3, prescalar = 8 */
ICS_C1 = 0x04; /* internal reference clock to FLL */
ICS_C3 = TRIM_VALUE_35.15625KHZ; /* FLL output 4.5MHz */
20.5.2 Initializing FBI mode

The following code segment demonstrates setting ICS to FBI mode.
Example: 20.5.2.1 FBI mode initialization routine

/* the following code segment demonstrates setting ICS to FBI mode generating 32768Hz
bus*/
ICS_C2 = 0x00; /*BDIV=0, no prescalar
ICS_C1 = 0x44;
ICS_C3 = TRIM_VALUE_32K768HZ;
20.5.3 Initializing FEE mode

The following code segment demonstrates setting ICS to FEE mode.
Example: 20.5.3.1 FEE mode initialization routine

/* the following code segment demonstrates setting ICS to FEE mode generating 32.768MHZ bus*/
/* supposing external 32.768K crystal is installed */
OSC_CR = 0xB0; /* enable oscillator with low power mode */
ICS_C2 = 0x00; /* BDIV=0, no prescalar/
while ((OSC_CR & OSC_CR_OSCINIT_MASK) == 0); /* waiting until oscillator is ready */

ICS_C1 = 0x80; /* external clock reference (32.768kHz) to FLL, RDIV = 0, external prescalar
= 0 */
20.5.4 Initializing FBE mode

The following code segment demonstrates setting ICS to FBE mode.
Example: 20.5.4.1 FBE mode initialization routine

/* the following code segment demonstrates setting ICS to FBE mode generating 20MHZ bus*/
/* supposing external 20MHZ crystal is installed */
OSC_CR = 0xA6; /* enable clock in high range, high gain mode */
ICS_C2 = 0x00; /* BDIV=0, no prescalar*/
ICS_C1 = 0x80; /* external clock reference (20MHZ) to FLL output */


Chapter 21
Oscillator (OSC)
21.1 Introduction
21.1.1 Overview
The OSC module provides the clock source for the MCU. The OSC module, in
conjunction with an external crystal or resonator, generates a clock for the MCU that can
be used as reference clock or bus clock.
21.1.2 Features and modes

Key features of the OSC module are:
• Supports 32 kHz crystals (low range mode)
• Supports 4–24 MHz crystals and resonators (high range mode)
• Automatic gain control (AGC) to optimize power consumption in both frequency
ranges using low-power mode (low gain mode)
• High gain option in both frequency ranges: 32 kHz, 4–24 MHz
• Voltage and frequency filtering to guarantee clock frequency and stability
• Supports to be enabled by ICS.

See the following figure for OSC module block diagram.
The OSC module uses a crystal or resonator to generate three filtered oscillator clock
signals(XTL_CLK). The XTL_CLK can work in Stop mode since they come from Hard
block which always has power.

Signal description
The OSCOS decides whether OSC_OUT comes from internal oscillators(XTL_CLK) or

directly from external clock driven on EXTAL pin. The OSCOS signal allows the XTAL
pad to be used as I/O or test clock.
EXTAL XTAL
Digital Wrapper
Mux
HGO OSC_OUT
High Gain
RANGE 32 k/4-24 MHz
Oscillator
OSCOS XTL_CLK
EN
Low Power
4-24 MHz
ICS_OSC_EN Oscillator
4096
EN Counter
Low Power
STOP
32 kHz
OSCEN Oscillator
OSCSTEN
CNT_DONE_4096
OSC_INIT HARD BLOCK
Figure 21-1. OSC module block diagram
21.2 Signal description

The following table shows the user-accessible signals available for the OSC module. See
the chip-level specification to find out which signals are actually connected to external
pins.
Table 21-1. OSC signal descriptions
Signal Description I/O
EXTAL External clock/oscillator input Analog input
XTAL Oscillator output Analog output

Chapter 21 Oscillator (OSC)
21.3 External crystal / resonator connections

The connections for a crystal/resonator frequency reference are shown in Figure 21-2 and
Figure 21-3. When using low-frequency, low-power mode, the only external component
is the crystal or resonator itself. In the other oscillator modes, load capacitors (Cx, Cy)
and feedback resistor (RF) are required. In addition, a series resistor (RS) may be used in
high-gain modes. Recommended component values are listed in the data sheet.
Table 21-2. External crystal/resonator connections
Oscillator mode Connections
Low frequency, high gain Connection2
Low frequency, low-power Connection1
High frequency, high gain (4–20 MHz) Connection2
High frequency, low-power (4–20 MHz) Connection2
VLP Oscillator (OSC_VLP) Module
XTAL VSS EXTAL
Crystal or Resonator
Figure 21-2. Crystal/resonator connections - connection 1

External clock connections
XTAL VSS EXTAL
RS
Cx Cy
RF
Crystal or Resonator
Figure 21-3. Crystal/resonator connections - connection 2
21.4 External clock connections

In external clock mode (OSC_CR[OSCOS] = 0), the pins can be connected as shown in
the following figure.
XTAL VSS EXTAL
GPIO External Clock Input
Figure 21-4. External clock connections


OSC memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4006_5000 OSC Control Register (OSC_CR) 8 R/W 00h 21.5.1/281
21.5.1 OSC Control Register (OSC_CR)

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 0 OSCINIT
OSCEN OSCSTEN OSCOS RANGE HGO
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OSC_CR field descriptions

Field Description
7 OSC Enable
OSCEN
Enables the OSC module. The OSC module can also be enabled by the ICS module.
0 OSC module is disabled.

1 OSC module is enabled.
5 OSC Enable in Stop mode
OSCSTEN
Controls whether or not the OSC clock remains enabled when MCU enters Stop mode and OSCEN is set.
OSCSTEN has no effect if ICS requests OSC enable.
0 OSC clock is disabled in Stop mode.

1 OSC clock stays enabled in Stop mode.
4 OSC Output Select
OSCOS
Selects the output clock of the OSC module.
0 External clock source from EXTAL pin is selected.

1 Oscillator clock source is selected.
2 Frequency Range Select
RANGE
Selects the frequency range for the OSC module.

OSC_CR field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 Low frequency range of 32 kHz.
1 High frequency range of 4–24 MHz.
1 High Gain Oscillator Select
HGO
Controls the OSC mode of operation.
0 Low-power mode
1 High-gain mode
0 OSC Initialization
OSCINIT
This field is set after the initialization cycles of oscillator are completed.
0 Oscillator initialization is not complete.

1 Oscillator initialization is completed.
21.6.1 OSC module states

There are three states of the OSC module. A state diagram is shown in Figure 21-6. The
states and the transitions among each other are described in this section.

Off
• Oscillator OFF
EN
• OSC_OUT = Static
EN EN
&& OSCOS && OSCOS
Start-Up Start-Up
• Oscillator On, not yet stable • Oscillator On
• OSC_OUT = Static • OSC_OUT = EXTAL
CNT_DONE_4096
Stable
• Oscillator On, Stable

• OSC_OUT = XTL_CLK
Figure 21-6. OSC module state diagram
EN is decided by OSC_CR[OSCEN], Stop, OSC_CR[OSCSTEN], and external request

(ICS_OSC_EN). See the following table for details.
Table 21-5. EN status
EN ICS_OSC_EN OSC_CR[OSCEN] OSC_CR[OSCSTEN] Stop
1 1 - - -
1 0 1 - 0
1 0 1 1 1
0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 - -

21.6.1.1 Off
The off state is entered whenever the EN signal is negated. Upon entering this state,
XTL_CLK and OSC_OUT is static. The EXTAL and XTAL pins are also decoupled
from all other oscillator circuitry in this state. The OSC module circuitry is configured to
draw minimal current.
21.6.1.2 Oscillator startup

The oscillator startup state is entered whenever the oscillator is first enabled (EN
transitions high) and OSC_CR[OSCOS] is high. In this state, the OSC module is enabled
and oscillations are starting up, but have not yet stabilized. When the oscillation
amplitude becomes large enough to pass through the input buffer, XTL_CLK begins
clocking the counter. When the counter has seen 4096 cycles of XTL_CLK, the oscillator
is considered stable and XTL_CLK is passed to the output clock OSC_OUT.
21.6.1.3 Oscillator stable

The oscillator stable state is entered whenever the oscillator is enabled (EN is high),
OSC_CR[OSCOS] is high, and the counter has seen 4096 cycles of XTL_CLK
(CNT_DONE_4096 is high). In this state, the OSC module is producing a stable output
clock on OSC_OUT. Its frequency is determined by the external components being used.
21.6.1.4 External clock mode

The external clock state is entered when the oscillator is enabled(EN is high) and
OSC_CR[OSCOS] is low. In this state, the OSC module is set up to buffer (with
hysteresis) a clock from EXTAL onto the OSC_OUT. Its frequency is determined by the
external clock being supplied.
21.6.2 OSC module modes

The oscillator is a Pierce-type oscillator that supports external crystals or resonators
operating over the frequency ranges shown in the following table. These modes assume
EN = 1, OSC_CR[OSCOS] = 1.

Table 21-6. Oscillator modes

RANGE HGO Mode Frequency range
0 1 Low-frequency, high-gain flo(min) up to flo(max)
0 0 Low-frequency, low-power
(VLP)
1 1 High-frequency mode1, high- fhi(min) up to fhi(max)
gain
1 0 High-frequency mode1, low-
power
21.6.2.1 Low-frequency, high-gain mode

In low-frequency, high-gain mode (OSC_CR[RANGE] = 0, OSC_CR[HGO] = 1) the
oscillator uses a simple inverter-style amplifier. The gain is set to achieve rail-to-rail
oscillation amplitudes. The oscillator input buffer in this mode is single-ended. It
provides low pass frequency filtering as well as hysteresis for voltage filtering and
converts the output to logic levels.
21.6.2.2 Low-frequency, low-power mode

In low-frequency, low-power mode (OSC_CR[RANGE] = 0, OSC_CR[HGO] = 0), the
oscillator uses a gain control loop to minimize power consumption. As the oscillation
amplitude increases, the amplifier current is reduced. This continues until a desired
amplitude is achieved at steady-state.
The oscillator input buffer in this mode is single-ended. It provides low pass frequency
filtering as well as hysteresis for voltage filtering and converts the output to logic levels.
In this mode, the amplifier inputs, gain-control input, and input buffer input are all
capacitively coupled for leakage tolerance (not sensitive to the DC level of EXTAL).
Also in this mode, all external components except for the resonator itself are integrated,
which includes the load capacitors and feeback resistor which biases EXTAL.
21.6.2.3 High-frequency, high-gain mode

In high-frequency, high-gain Mode (OSC_CR[RANGE] = 1, OSC_CR[HGO] = 1), the
oscillator uses a simple inverter-style amplifier. The gain is set to achieve rail-to-rail
oscillation amplitudes.

The oscillator input buffer in this mode is single-ended. It provides low pass frequency
21.6.2.4 High-frequency, low-power mode

In high-frequency, low-power mode (OSC_CR[RANGE] = 1, OSC_CR[HGO] = 0) the
oscillator uses a gain control loop to minimize power consumption. As the oscillation
amplitude increases, the amplifier current is reduced. This continues until a desired
amplitude is achieved at steady-state.
The oscillator input buffer in this mode is differential. It provides low pass frequency
21.6.3 Counter
The oscillator output clock (OSC_OUT) is gated off until the counter has detected 4096
cycles of its input clock (XTL_CLK). Once 4096 cycles are complete, the counter passes
XTL_CLK onto OSC_OUT. This counting timeout is used to guarantee output clock
stability.
21.6.4 Reference clock pin requirements

The OSC module requires use of both the EXTAL and XTAL pins to generate an output
clock in oscillator mode but requires only the EXTAL pin in external clock mode. The
EXTAL and XTAL pins can be used for I/O or test clock purposes as long as the
specifications listed in the data sheet are met.

Chapter 22
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)
22.1 Introduction
NOTE
The cyclic redundancy check (CRC) module generates 16/32-bit CRC code for error
detection.
The CRC module provides a programmable polynomial, WAS, and other parameters
required to implement a 16-bit or 32-bit CRC standard.
The 16/32-bit code is calculated for 32 bits of data at a time.
22.1.1 Features
Features of the CRC module include:
• Hardware CRC generator circuit using a 16-bit or 32-bit programmable shift register
• Programmable initial seed value and polynomial
• Option to transpose input data or output data (the CRC result) bitwise or bytewise.
This option is required for certain CRC standards. A bytewise transpose operation is
not possible when accessing the CRC data register via 8-bit accesses. In this case, the
user's software must perform the bytewise transpose function.
• Option for inversion of final CRC result
• 32-bit CPU register programming interface

The following is a block diagram of the CRC.

TOT WAS FXOR TOTR

CRC Data Register
[31:24][ CRC Data Register
23:16] Reverse Seed [31:24]
[15:8] Logic NOT Reverse [23:16]
MUX
[7:0] CRC Data
Logic Logic [15:8]
[7:0]
Checksum
CRC Polynomial CRC Engine
Register Data
[31:24]
[23:16] Combine
Polynomial
[15:8] Logic
[7:0]
16-/32-bit Select
TCRC
Figure 22-1. Programmable cyclic redundancy check (CRC) block diagram

Various MCU modes affect the CRC module's functionality.
22.1.3.1 Run mode

This is the basic mode of operation.
22.1.3.2 Low-power modes (Wait or Stop)

Any CRC calculation in progress stops when the MCU enters a low-power mode that
disables the module clock. It resumes after the clock is enabled or via the system reset for
exiting the low-power mode. Clock gating for this module is dependent on the MCU.

CRC memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4003_2000 CRC Data register (CRC_DATA) 32 R/W FFFF_FFFFh 22.2.1/289
4003_2004 CRC Polynomial register (CRC_GPOLY) 32 R/W 0000_1021h 22.2.2/290
4003_2008 CRC Control register (CRC_CTRL) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 22.2.3/290

Chapter 22 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)
22.2.1 CRC Data register (CRC_DATA)

The CRC Data register contains the value of the seed, data, and checksum. When
CTRL[WAS] is set, any write to the data register is regarded as the seed value. When
CTRL[WAS] is cleared, any write to the data register is regarded as data for general CRC
computation.
In 16-bit CRC mode, the HU and HL fields are not used for programming the seed value,
and reads of these fields return an indeterminate value. In 32-bit CRC mode, all fields are
used for programming the seed value.
When programming data values, the values can be written 8 bits, 16 bits, or 32 bits at a
time, provided all bytes are contiguous; with MSB of data value written first.
After all data values are written, the CRC result can be read from this data register. In 16-
bit CRC mode, the CRC result is available in the LU and LL fields. In 32-bit CRC mode,
all fields contain the result. Reads of this register at any time return the intermediate CRC
value, provided the CRC module is configured.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
W
HU HL LU LL
Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CRC_DATA field descriptions

Field Description
31–24 CRC High Upper Byte
HU
In 16-bit CRC mode (CTRL[TCRC] is 0), this field is not used for programming a seed value. In 32-bit CRC
mode (CTRL[TCRC] is 1), values written to this field are part of the seed value when CTRL[WAS] is 1.
When CTRL[WAS] is 0, data written to this field is used for CRC checksum generation in both 16-bit and
32-bit CRC modes.
23–16 CRC High Lower Byte
HL
In 16-bit CRC mode (CTRL[TCRC] is 0), this field is not used for programming a seed value. In 32-bit CRC
mode (CTRL[TCRC] is 1), values written to this field are part of the seed value when CTRL[WAS] is 1.
When CTRL[WAS] is 0, data written to this field is used for CRC checksum generation in both 16-bit and
32-bit CRC modes.
15–8 CRC Low Upper Byte
LU
When CTRL[WAS] is 1, values written to this field are part of the seed value. When CTRL[WAS] is 0, data
written to this field is used for CRC checksum generation.
LL CRC Low Lower Byte
When CTRL[WAS] is 1, values written to this field are part of the seed value. When CTRL[WAS] is 0, data
written to this field is used for CRC checksum generation.

22.2.2 CRC Polynomial register (CRC_GPOLY)

This register contains the value of the polynomial for the CRC calculation. The HIGH
field contains the upper 16 bits of the CRC polynomial, which are used only in 32-bit
CRC mode. Writes to the HIGH field are ignored in 16-bit CRC mode. The LOW field
contains the lower 16 bits of the CRC polynomial, which are used in both 16- and 32-bit
CRC modes.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
W
HIGH LOW
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
CRC_GPOLY field descriptions

Field Description
31–16 High Polynominal Half-word
HIGH
Writable and readable in 32-bit CRC mode (CTRL[TCRC] is 1). This field is not writable in 16-bit CRC
mode (CTRL[TCRC] is 0).
LOW Low Polynominal Half-word
Writable and readable in both 32-bit and 16-bit CRC modes.
22.2.3 CRC Control register (CRC_CTRL)

This register controls the configuration and working of the CRC module. Appropriate bits
must be set before starting a new CRC calculation. A new CRC calculation is initialized
by asserting CTRL[WAS] and then writing the seed into the CRC data register.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0 0
TCRC
TOT TOTR FXOR WAS

W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CRC_CTRL field descriptions

Field Description
31–30 Type Of Transpose For Writes
TOT
Defines the transpose configuration of the data written to the CRC data register. See the description of the
transpose feature for the available transpose options.
00 No transposition.
01 Bits in bytes are transposed; bytes are not transposed.
10 Both bits in bytes and bytes are transposed.
11 Only bytes are transposed; no bits in a byte are transposed.
29–28 Type Of Transpose For Read
TOTR
Identifies the transpose configuration of the value read from the CRC Data register. See the description of
the transpose feature for the available transpose options.
00 No transposition.
01 Bits in bytes are transposed; bytes are not transposed.
10 Both bits in bytes and bytes are transposed.
11 Only bytes are transposed; no bits in a byte are transposed.
26 Complement Read Of CRC Data Register
FXOR
Some CRC protocols require the final checksum to be XORed with 0xFFFFFFFF or 0xFFFF. Asserting
this bit enables on the fly complementing of read data.
0 No XOR on reading.
1 Invert or complement the read value of the CRC Data register.
25 Write CRC Data Register As Seed
WAS
When asserted, a value written to the CRC data register is considered a seed value. When deasserted, a
value written to the CRC data register is taken as data for CRC computation.
0 Writes to the CRC data register are data values.

1 Writes to the CRC data register are seed values.
24 Width of CRC protocol.
TCRC
0 16-bit CRC protocol.
1 32-bit CRC protocol.

22.3.1 CRC initialization/reinitialization

To enable the CRC calculation, the user must program CRC_CTRL[WAS],
CRC_GPOLY, necessary parameters for transposition and CRC result inversion in the
applicable registers. Asserting CRC_CTRL[WAS] enables the programming of the seed
value into the CRC_DATA register.
After a completed CRC calculation, reasserting CRC_CTRL[WAS] and programming a
seed, whether the value is new or a previously used seed value, reinitialize the CRC
module for a new CRC computation. All other parameters must be set before
programming the seed value and subsequent data values.
22.3.2 CRC calculations

In 16-bit and 32-bit CRC modes, data values can be programmed 8 bits, 16 bits, or 32 bits
at a time, provided all bytes are contiguous. Noncontiguous bytes can lead to an incorrect
CRC computation.
22.3.2.1 16-bit CRC

To compute a 16-bit CRC:
1. Clear CRC_CTRL[TCRC] to enable 16-bit CRC mode.
2. Program the transpose and complement options in the CTRL register as required for
the CRC calculation. See Transpose feature and CRC result complement for details.
3. Write a 16-bit polynomial to the CRC_GPOLY[LOW] field. The
CRC_GPOLY[HIGH] field is not usable in 16-bit CRC mode.
4. Set CRC_CTRL[WAS] to program the seed value.
5. Write a 16-bit seed to CRC_DATA[LU:LL]. CRC_DATA[HU:HL] are not used.
6. Clear CRC_CTRL[WAS] to start writing data values.
7. Write data values into CRC_DATA[HU:HL:LU:LL]. A CRC is computed on every
data value write, and the intermediate CRC result is stored back into
CRC_DATA[LU:LL].
8. When all values have been written, read the final CRC result from
CRC_DATA[LU:LL].
Transpose and complement operations are performed on the fly while reading or writing
values. See Transpose feature and CRC result complement for details.

22.3.2.2 32-bit CRC

To compute a 32-bit CRC:
1. Set CRC_CTRL[TCRC] to enable 32-bit CRC mode.
2. Program the transpose and complement options in the CTRL register as required for
the CRC calculation. See Transpose feature and CRC result complement for details.
3. Write a 32-bit polynomial to CRC_GPOLY[HIGH:LOW].
4. Set CRC_CTRL[WAS] to program the seed value.
5. Write a 32-bit seed to CRC_DATA[HU:HL:LU:LL].
6. Clear CRC_CTRL[WAS] to start writing data values.
7. Write data values into CRC_DATA[HU:HL:LU:LL]. A CRC is computed on every
data value write, and the intermediate CRC result is stored back into
CRC_DATA[HU:HL:LU:LL].
8. When all values have been written, read the final CRC result from
CRC_DATA[HU:HL:LU:LL]. The CRC is calculated bytewise, and two clocks are
required to complete one CRC calculation.
Transpose and complement operations are performed on the fly while reading or writing
values. See Transpose feature and CRC result complement for details.
22.3.3 Transpose feature

By default, the transpose feature is not enabled. However, some CRC standards require
the input data and/or the final checksum to be transposed. The user software has the
option to configure each transpose operation separately, as desired by the CRC standard.
The data is transposed on the fly while being read or written.
Some protocols use little endian format for the data stream to calculate a CRC. In this
case, the transpose feature usefully flips the bits. This transpose option is one of the types
supported by the CRC module.
22.3.3.1 Types of transpose

The CRC module provides several types of transpose functions to flip the bits and/or
bytes, for both writing input data and reading the CRC result, separately using the
CTRL[TOT] or CTRL[TOTR] fields, according to the CRC calculation being used.
The following types of transpose functions are available for writing to and reading from
the CRC data register:
1. CTRL[TOT] or CTRL[TOTR] is 00.

No transposition occurs.
2. CTRL[TOT] or CTRL[TOTR] is 01
Bits in a byte are transposed, while bytes are not transposed.
reg[31:0] becomes {reg[24:31], reg[16:23], reg[8:15], reg[0:7]}
31 24 23 16 15 8 7 0
24 31 16 23 8 15 0 7
Figure 22-5. Transpose type 01

Both bits in bytes and bytes are transposed.
reg[31:0] becomes = {reg[0:7], reg[8:15],reg[16:23], reg[24:31]}
31 0
0 31

Bytes are transposed, but bits are not transposed.
reg[31:0] becomes {reg[7:0], reg[15:8], reg[23:16], reg[31:24]}

31 24 23 16 15 8 7 0
7 0 15 8 23 16 31 24
NOTE
For 8-bit and 16-bit write accesses to the CRC data register, the
data is transposed with zeros on the unused byte or bytes
(taking 32 bits as a whole), but the CRC is calculated on the
valid byte(s) only. When reading the CRC data register for a
16-bit CRC result and using transpose options 10 and 11, the
resulting value after transposition resides in the CRC[HU:HL]
fields. The user software must account for this situation when
reading the 16-bit CRC result, so reading 32 bits is preferred.
22.3.4 CRC result complement

When CTRL[FXOR] is set, the checksum is complemented. The CRC result complement
function outputs the complement of the checksum value stored in the CRC data register
every time the CRC data register is read. When CTRL[FXOR] is cleared, reading the
CRC data register accesses the raw checksum value.


Chapter 23
Interrupt (IRQ)
23.1 Introduction
The external interrupt (IRQ) module provides a maskable interrupt input.
23.2 Features
Features of the IRQ module include:
• A dedicated external interrupt pin IRQ
• IRQ Interrupt Control bits
• Programmable edge-only or edge and level interrupt sensitivity
• Automatic interrupt acknowledge
• Internal pullup device
A low level applied to the external interrupt request (IRQ) pin can latch a CPU interrupt
request. The following figure shows the structure of the IRQ module:

Features
IRQACK
RESET
TO CPU
SYNCHRONIZER
BUSCLK
VDD
IRQF
CLR
1 D Q
SYNCHRONIZER
IRQ 0 CK
S IRQPE
STOP STOP
BYPASS
IRQEDG
To pullup enable logic for IRQ IRQIE

IRQMOD TO INTERNAL
IRQPDD IRQ
MODULES INTERRUPT
WAKE-UP REQUEST
INPUTS
Figure 23-1. IRQ module block diagram
External interrupts are managed by the IRQSC status and control register. When the IRQ
function is enabled, synchronous logic monitors the pin for edge-only or edge-and-level
events. When the MCU is in Stop mode and system clocks are shut down, a separate
asynchronous path is used so that the IRQ, if enabled, can wake the MCU.
23.2.1 Pin configuration options

The IRQ Pin Enable (IRQSC[IRQPE]) control field must be 1 for the IRQ pin to act as
the IRQ input. The user can choose the polarity of edges or levels detected (IRQEDG),
whether the pin detects edges-only or edges and levels (IRQMOD), or whether an event
causes an interrupt or only sets the IRQSC[IRQF] flag, which can be polled by software.
When enabled, the IRQ pin defaults to use an internal pullup device (IRQSC[IRQPDD] =
0). If the user uses an external pullup or pulldown, the IRQSC[IRQPDD] can be written
to a 1 to turn off the internal device.
BIH and BIL instructions may be used to detect the level on the IRQ pin when it is
configured to act as the IRQ input.
Note
This pin does not contain a clamp diode to VDD and must not be
driven above VDD. The voltage measured on the internally
pullup IRQ pin may be as low as VDD – 0.7 V. The internal
gates connected to this pin are pulled all the way to VDD.

Chapter 23 Interrupt (IRQ)
When enabling the IRQ pin for use, IRQSC[IRQF] will be set,
and must be cleared prior to enabling the interrupt. When
configuring the pin for falling edge and level sensitivity in a 3
V system, it is necessary to wait at least cycles between
clearing the flag and enabling the interrupt.
23.2.2 Edge and level sensitivity

The IRQSC[IRQMOD] control field reconfigures the detection logic so that it can detect
edge events and pin levels. In this detection mode, IRQSC[IRQF] status flag is set when
an edge is detected, if the IRQ pin changes from the deasserted to the asserted level, but
the flag is continuously set and cannot be cleared as long as the IRQ pin remains at the
asserted level.
23.3 Interrupt pin request register

IRQ memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4003_1000 Interrupt Pin Request Status and Control Register (IRQ_SC) 8 R/W 00h 23.3.1/299
23.3.1 Interrupt Pin Request Status and Control Register (IRQ_SC)

This direct page register includes status and control bits, which are used to configure the
IRQ function, report status, and acknowledge IRQ events.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 IRQF 0
IRQPDD IRQEDG IRQPE IRQIE IRQMOD
Write IRQACK
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
IRQ_SC field descriptions

Field Description
6 Interrupt Request (IRQ) Pull Device Disable
IRQPDD

Interrupt pin request register
IRQ_SC field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
This read/write control bit is used to disable the internal pullup device when the IRQ pin is enabled (IRQPE
= 1) allowing for an external device to be used.
0 IRQ pull device enabled if IRQPE = 1.

1 IRQ pull device disabled if IRQPE = 1.
5 Interrupt Request (IRQ) Edge Select
IRQEDG
This read/write control field is used to select the polarity of edges or levels on the IRQ pin that cause IRQF
to be set. The IRQMOD control field determines whether the IRQ pin is sensitive to both edges and levels
or only edges. When the IRQ pin is enabled as the IRQ input and is configured to detect rising edges, the
optional pullup resistor is disabled.
0 IRQ is falling-edge or falling-edge/low-level sensitive.

1 IRQ is rising-edge or rising-edge/high-level sensitive.
4 IRQ Pin Enable
IRQPE
This read/write control field enables the IRQ pin function. When this field is set, the IRQ pin can be used
as an interrupt request.
0 IRQ pin function is disabled.

1 IRQ pin function is enabled.
3 IRQ Flag
IRQF
This read-only status field indicates when an interrupt request event has occurred.
0 No IRQ request
1 IRQ event is detected.
2 IRQ Acknowledge
IRQACK
This write-only field is used to acknowledge interrupt request events (write 1 to clear IRQF). Writing 0 has
no meaning or effect. Reads always return 0. If edge-and-level detection is selected (IRQMOD = 1), IRQF
cannot be cleared while the IRQ pin remains at its asserted level.
1 IRQ Interrupt Enable
IRQIE
This read/write control field determines whether IRQ events generate an interrupt request.
0 Interrupt request when IRQF set is disabled (use polling).

1 Interrupt requested whenever IRQF = 1.
0 IRQ Detection Mode
IRQMOD
This read/write control field selects either edge-only detection or edge-and-level detection.
0 IRQ event is detected only on falling/rising edges.

1 IRQ event is detected on falling/rising edges and low/high levels.

Chapter 24
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
24.1 Introduction
The 12-bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC) is a successive approximation ADC
designed for operation within an integrated microcontroller system-on-chip.
24.1.1 Features
Features of the ADC module include:
• Linear Successive Approximation algorithm with 8-, 10-, or 12-bit resolution
• Up to 12 external analog inputs, external pin inputs, and 5 internal analog inputs
including internal bandgap, temperature sensor, and references
• Output formatted in 8-, 10-, or 12-bit right-justified unsigned format
• Single or Continuous Conversion (automatic return to idle after single conversion)
• Support up to eight result FIFO with selectable FIFO depth
• Configurable sample time and conversion speed/power
• Conversion complete flag and interrupt
• Input clock selectable from up to four sources
• Operation in Wait or Stop modes for lower noise operation
• Asynchronous clock source for lower noise operation
• Selectable asynchronous hardware conversion trigger
• Automatic compare with interrupt for less-than, or greater-than or equal-to,
programmable value

External Signal Description
24.1.2 Block Diagram

This figure provides a block diagram of the ADC module.
AFDEP
7 5-bit ch 0 12-bit AD result

AD CHANNEL FIFO
AD RESULT FIFO
Off-chip Source Channels

AD0 Input Channel Analog Result AIEN
FIFO Fulfilled FIFO Fulfilled
AD1
AD2
AD0 to AD11 from External Interrupt to CPU

Pin Inputs or Reserved
AD10
ANALOG MUX
SAR ADC COCO

AD11
AD12
Reserved
AD21-AD20
Reserved
AD22 ADCK CONTROL COMPARE
Temperature Sensor
AD23 SEQUENCER LOGIC
Internal Bandgap
AD29
Reserved
AD30
VREFL
AD31
VREFH
AD32
None (Module Disabled) ADTRG MODE ADLSMP ADLPC ACFGT
On-chip Source Channels
ADCO STOP ACFE
ADHWT
ALT CLK
CLK MUX
BUS CLK CLOCK

2 DIVIDER
Compare Value
ADACK
ASYNC
CLOCK
GENERATOR
ADICLK ADIV
Figure 24-1. ADC Block Diagram
24.2 External Signal Description

The ADC module supports up to 24 separate analog inputs. It also requires four supply/
reference/ground connections.

Chapter 24 Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
Table 24-1. Signal Properties

Name Function
AD23–AD0 Analog Channel inputs
VREFH High reference voltage
VREFL Low reference voltage
VDDA Analog power supply
VSSA Analog ground
24.2.1 Analog Power (VDDA)

The ADC analog portion uses VDDA as its power connection. In some packages, VDDA is
connected internally to VDD. If externally available, connect the VDDA pin to the same
voltage potential as VDD. External filtering may be necessary to ensure clean VDDA for
good results.
24.2.2 Analog Ground (VSSA)

The ADC analog portion uses VSSA as its ground connection. In some packages, VSSA is
connected internally to VSS. If externally available, connect the VSSA pin to the same
voltage potential as VSS.
24.2.3 Voltage Reference High (VREFH)

VREFH is the high reference voltage for the converter. In some packages, VREFH is
connected internally to VDDA. If externally available, VREFH may be connected to the
same potential as VDDA or may be driven by an external source between the minimum
VDDA specified in the data sheet and the VDDA potential (VREFH must never exceed
VDDA).
24.2.4 Voltage Reference Low (VREFL)

VREFL is the low-reference voltage for the converter. In some packages, VREFL is
connected internally to VSSA. If externally available, connect the VREFL pin to the same
voltage potential as VSSA.

ADC Control Registers
24.2.5 Analog Channel Inputs (ADx)

The ADC module supports up to 24 separate analog inputs. An input is selected for
conversion through the ADCH channel select bits.
24.3 ADC Control Registers

ADC memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4003_B000 Status and Control Register 1 (ADC_SC1) 32 R/W 0000_001Fh 24.3.1/304
4003_B004 Status and Control Register 2 (ADC_SC2) 32 R/W 0000_0008h 24.3.2/307
4003_B008 Status and Control Register 3 (ADC_SC3) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 24.3.3/309
4003_B00C Status and Control Register 4 (ADC_SC4) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 24.3.4/310
4003_B010 Conversion Result Register (ADC_R) 32 R 0000_0000h 24.3.5/311
4003_B014 Compare Value Register (ADC_CV) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 24.3.6/312
4003_B018 Pin Control 1 Register (ADC_APCTL1) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 24.3.7/313
4003_B01C Status and Control Register 5 (ADC_SC5) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 24.3.8/313
24.3.1 Status and Control Register 1 (ADC_SC1)

This section describes the function of the ADC status and control register (ADC_SC1).
Writing ADC_SC1 aborts the current conversion and initiates a new conversion (if the
ADCH bits are equal to a value other than all 1s).
When FIFO is enabled, the analog input channel FIFO is written via ADCH. The analog
input channel queue must be written to ADCH continuously. The resulting FIFO follows
the order in which the analog input channel is written. The ADC will start conversion
when the input channel FIFO is fulfilled at the depth indicated by the
ADC_SC4[AFDEP]. Any write 0x1F to these bits will reset the FIFO and stop the
conversion if it is active.

Address: 4003_B000h base + 0h offset = 4003_B000h
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
COCO
R 0
ADCO
AIEN ADCH
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
ADC_SC1 field descriptions

Field Description
7 Conversion Complete Flag
COCO
Conversion Complete Flag. The COCO flag is a read-only bit set each time a conversion is completed
when the compare function is disabled (ADC_SC2[ACFE] = 0). When the compare function is enabled
(ADC_SC2[ACFE] = 1), the COCO flag is set upon completion of a conversion only if the compare result is
true. When the FIFO function is enabled (ADC_SC4[AFDEP] > 0), the COCO flag is set upon completion
of the set of FIFO conversion. This bit is cleared when ADC_SC1 is written or when ADC_R is read.
0 Conversion not completed.

1 Conversion completed.
6 Interrupt Enable
AIEN
AIEN enables conversion complete interrupts. When COCO becomes set while AIEN is high, an interrupt
is asserted.
0 Conversion complete interrupt disabled.

1 Conversion complete interrupt enabled.
5 Continuous Conversion Enable
ADCO

ADC_SC1 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
ADCO enables continuous conversions.
0 One conversion following a write to the ADC_SC1 when software triggered operation is selected, or
one conversion following assertion of ADHWT when hardware triggered operation is selected. When
the FIFO function is enabled (AFDEP > 0), a set of conversion are triggered when
ADC_SC2[ADTRG]=0 or both ADC_SC2[ADTRG]=1 and ADC_SC4[HTRGME]=1.
1 Continuous conversions are initiated following a write to ADC_SC1 when software triggered operation
is selected. Continuous conversions are initiated by an ADHWT event when hardware triggered
operation is selected. When the FIFO function is enabled (AFDEP > 0), a set of conversions are loop
triggered.
ADCH Input Channel Select
The ADCH bits form a 5-bit field that selects one of the input channels.
00000-01011 AD0-AD11
01100-10011 VSS
10100-10101 Reserved
10110 Temperature Sensor
10111 Bandgap
11000-11100 Reserved
11101 VREFH
11110 VREFL
11111 Module disabled
NOTE: Reset FIFO in FIFO mode.


The ADC_SC2 register controls the compare function, conversion trigger, and conversion
active of the ADC module.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FEMPTY
ADACT
FFULL
R 0
ADTRG
ACFGT
ACFE
REFSEL
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

Field Description
7 Conversion Active
ADACT
Indicates that a conversion is in progress. ADACT is set when a conversion is initiated and cleared when a
conversion is completed or aborted.
0 Conversion not in progress.

1 Conversion in progress.
6 Conversion Trigger Select
ADTRG
Selects the type of trigger used for initiating a conversion. Two types of trigger are selectable: software
trigger and hardware trigger. When software trigger is selected, a conversion is initiated following a write


Field Description
to ADC_SC1. When hardware trigger is selected, a conversion is initiated following the assertion of the
ADHWT input.
0 Software trigger selected.

1 Hardware trigger selected.
5 Compare Function Enable
ACFE
Enables the compare function.
0 Compare function disabled.

1 Compare function enabled.
4 Compare Function Greater Than Enable
ACFGT
Configures the compare function to trigger when the result of the conversion of the input being monitored
is greater than or equal to the compare value. The compare function defaults to triggering when the result
of the compare of the input being monitored is less than the compare value.
0 Compare triggers when input is less than compare level.

1 Compare triggers when input is greater than or equal to compare level.
3 Result FIFO empty
FEMPTY
0 Indicates that ADC result FIFO have at least one valid new data.
1 Indicates that ADC result FIFO have no valid new data.
2 Result FIFO full
FFULL
0 Indicates that ADC result FIFO is not full and next conversion data still can be stored into FIFO.
1 Indicates that ADC result FIFO is full and next conversion will override old data in case of no read
action.
REFSEL Voltage Reference Selection
Selects the voltage reference source used for conversions.
00 Default voltage reference pin pair (VREFH/VREFL).

01 Analog supply pin pair (VDDA/VSSA).
10 Reserved.
11 Reserved - Selects default voltage reference (VREFH/VREFL) pin pair.


ADC_SC3 selects the mode of operation, clock source, clock divide, and configure for
low power or long sample time.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0
ADLSMP
ADLPC
ADIV MODE ADICLK
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Field Description
7 Low-Power Configuration
ADLPC
ADLPC controls the speed and power configuration of the successive approximation converter. This
optimizes power consumption when higher sample rates are not required.
0 High speed configuration.

1 Low power configuration:The power is reduced at the expense of maximum clock speed.
6–5 Clock Divide Select
ADIV
ADIV selects the divide ratio used by the ADC to generate the internal clock ADCK.
00 Divide ration = 1, and clock rate = Input clock.

01 Divide ration = 2, and clock rate = Input clock ÷ 2.
4 Long Sample Time Configuration
ADLSMP
ADLSMP selects between long and short sample time. This adjusts the sample period to allow higher
impedance inputs to be accurately sampled or to maximize conversion speed for lower impedance inputs.
Longer sample times can also be used to lower overall power consumption when continuous conversions
are enabled if high conversion rates are not required.
0 Short sample time.

1 Long sample time.


Field Description
3–2 Conversion Mode Selection
MODE
MODE bits are used to select between 12-, 10-, or 8-bit operation.
00 8-bit conversion (N = 8)
11 Reserved
ADICLK Input Clock Select
ADICLK bits select the input clock source to generate the internal clock ADCK.
00 Bus clock
01 Bus clock divided by 2
10 Alternate clock (ALTCLK)
11 Asynchronous clock (ADACK)

This register controls the FIFO scan mode, FIFO compare function and FIFO depth
selection of the ADC module.
Address: 4003_B000h base + Ch offset = 4003_B00Ch
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 0 0
HTRGME
ASCANE
ACFSEL
AFDEP
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Field Description
8 Hardware Trigger Multiple Conversion Enable
HTRGME
This field enables hardware trigger multiple conversion.


Field Description
0 One hardware trigger pulse triggers one conversion.
1 One hardware trigger pulse triggers multiple conversions in fifo mode.
6 FIFO Scan Mode Enable
ASCANE
The FIFO always use the first dummied FIFO channels when it is enabled. When this bit is set and FIFO
function is enabled, ADC will repeat using the first FIFO channel as the conversion channel until the result
FIFO is fulfilled. In continuous mode (ADCO = 1), ADC will start next conversion with the same channel
when COCO is set.
0 FIFO scan mode disabled.

1 FIFO scan mode enabled.
5 Compare Function Selection
ACFSEL
Compare function select OR/AND when the FIFO function is enabled (AFDEP > 0). When this field is
cleared, ADC will OR all of compare triggers and set COCO after at least one of compare trigger occurs.
When this field is set, ADC will AND all of compare triggers and set COCO after all of compare triggers
occur.
0 OR all of compare trigger.

1 AND all of compare trigger.
AFDEP FIFO Depth
FIFO Depth enables the FIFO function and sets the depth of FIFO. When AFDEP is cleared, the FIFO is
disabled. When AFDEP is set to nonzero, the FIFO function is enabled and the depth is indicated by the
AFDEP bits. The ADC_SC1[ADCH] and ADC_R must be accessed by FIFO mode when FIFO function is
enabled. ADC starts conversion when the analog channel FIFO is upon the level indicated by AFDEP bits.
The COCO bit is set when the set of conversions are completed and the result FIFO is upon the level
indicated by AFDEP bits.
000 FIFO is disabled.

001 2-level FIFO is enabled.
010 3-level FIFO is enabled..
24.3.5 Conversion Result Register (ADC_R)

In 12-bit operation, ADC_R contains the 12 bits of the result of a 12-bit conversion.
In 10-bit mode, ADC_R contains the 10 bits of the result of a 10-bit conversion.
In 8-bit mode, ADC_R contains the 8 bits of the result of a 8-bit conversion.

ADC_R is updated each time a conversion completes except when automatic compare is
enabled and the compare condition is not met.
When FIFO is enabled, the result FIFO is read via ADC_R. The ADC conversion
completes when the input channel FIFO is fulfilled at the depth indicated by the AFDEP.
The AD result FIFO can be read via ADC_R continuously by the order set in analog
input channel ADCH.
If the MODE bits are changed, any data in ADC_R becomes invalid.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 ADR
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ADC_R field descriptions

Field Description
ADR Conversion Result
24.3.6 Compare Value Register (ADC_CV)
This register holds the compare value. Bits ADCV11:ADCV0 are compared to the 12 bits
of the result following a conversion in 12-bit mode.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 CV
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ADC_CV field descriptions

Field Description
CV Conversion Result[11:0]

24.3.7 Pin Control 1 Register (ADC_APCTL1)

The pin control registers disable the I/O port control of MCU pins used as analog inputs.
APCTL1 is used to control the pins associated with channels 0-31 of the ADC module.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 ADPC
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ADC_APCTL1 field descriptions

Field Description
ADPC ADC Pin Control
ADPCx controls the pin associated with channel ADx.
0 ADx pin I/O control enabled.

1 ADx pin I/O control disabled.

ADC_SC5 selects the hardware trigger mask.
Address: 4003_B000h base + 1Ch offset = 4003_B01Ch
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
HTRGMASKE
HTRGMASKS
R 0
EL
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


Field Description
1 Hardware Trigger Mask Enable
HTRGMASKE
This field enables hardware trigger mask when HTRGMASKSEL is low.
0 Hardware trigger mask disable.

1 Hardware trigger mask enable and hardware trigger cannot trigger ADC conversion..
0 Hardware Trigger Mask Mode Select
HTRGMASKSEL
This field selects hardware trigger mask mode.
0 Hardware trigger mask with HTRGMASKE.

1 Hardware trigger mask automatically when data fifo is not empty.

The ADC module is disabled during reset or when the ADC_SC1[ADCH] bits are all
high. The module is idle when a conversion has completed and another conversion has
not been initiated. When idle, the module is in its lowest power state.
The ADC can perform an analog-to-digital conversion on any of the software selectable
channels. In 12-bit mode, the selected channel voltage is converted by a successive
approximation algorithm into a 12-bit digital result. In 10-bit mode, the selected channel
voltage is converted by a successive approximation algorithm into a 10-bit digital result.
In 8-bit mode, the selected channel voltage is converted by a successive approximation
algorithm into a 8-bit digital result.
When the conversion is completed, the result is placed in the data registers (ADC_R). In
10-bit mode, the result is rounded to 10 bits and placed in the data registers (ADC_R). In
8-bit mode, the result is rounded to 8 bits and placed in ADC_R. The conversion
complete flag (ADC_SC1[COCO]) is then set and an interrupt is generated if the
conversion complete interrupt has been enabled (ADC_SC1[AIEN] = 1).
The ADC module has the capability of automatically comparing the result of a
conversion with the contents of its compare registers. The compare function is enabled by
setting the ADC_SC2[ACFE] bit and operates with any of the conversion modes and
configurations.

24.4.1 Clock select and divide control

One of four clock sources can be selected as the clock source for the ADC module. This
clock source is then divided by a configurable value to generate the input clock to the
converter (ADCK). The clock is selected from one of the following sources by means of
the ADC_SC3[ADICLK] bits.
• The bus clock divided by 2: For higher bus clock rates, this allows a maximum
divide by 16 of the bus clock.
• ALTCLK, that is, alternate clock which is OSC_OUT
• The asynchronous clock (ADACK): This clock is generated from a clock source
within the ADC module. When selected as the clock source, this clock remains active
while the MCU is in Wait or Stop mode and allows conversions in these modes for
lower noise operation.
Whichever clock is selected, its frequency must fall within the specified frequency range
for ADCK. If the available clocks are too slow, the ADC does not perform according to
specifications. If the available clocks are too fast, the clock must be divided to the
appropriate frequency. This divider is specified by the ADC_SC3[ADIV] bits and can be
divide-by 1, 2, 4, or 8.
24.4.2 Input select and pin control

The Pin Control register ( ADC_APCTL1) disables the I/O port control of the pins used
as analog inputs. When a pin control register bit is set, the following conditions are
forced for the associated MCU pin:
• The output buffer is forced to its high impedance state.
• The input buffer is disabled. A read of the I/O port returns a zero for any pin with its
input buffer disabled.
• The pullup is disabled.

24.4.3 Hardware trigger

The ADC module has a selectable asynchronous hardware conversion trigger, ADHWT,
that is enabled when the ADC_SC2[ADTRG] bit is set. This source is not available on all
MCUs. See the module introduction for information on the ADHWT source specific to
this MCU.
When ADHWT source is available and hardware trigger is enabled
( ADC_SC2[ADTRG] = 1), a conversion is initiated on the rising edge of ADHWT. If a
conversion is in progress when a rising edge occurs, the rising edge is ignored. In
continuous convert configuration, only the initial rising edge to launch continuous
conversions is observed. The hardware trigger function operates in conjunction with any
of the conversion modes and configurations.
24.4.4 Conversion control

Conversions can be performed in 12-bit mode, 10-bit mode, or 8-bit mode as determined
by the ADC_SC3[MODE] bits. Conversions can be initiated by a software or hardware
trigger. In addition, the ADC module can be configured for low power operation, long
sample time, continuous conversion, and an automatic compare of the conversion result
to a software determined compare value.
24.4.4.1 Initiating conversions

A conversion initiates under the following conditions:
• A write to ADC_SC1 or a set of write to ADC_SC1 in FIFO mode (with ADCH bits
not all 1s) if software triggered operation is selected.
• A hardware trigger (ADHWT) event if hardware triggered operation is selected.
• The transfer of the result to the data registers when continuous conversion is enabled.
If continuous conversions are enabled, a new conversion is automatically initiated after

the completion of the current conversion. In software triggered operation, continuous
conversions begin after ADC_SC1 is written and continue until aborted. In hardware
triggered operation, continuous conversions begin after a hardware trigger event and
continue until aborted.

24.4.4.2 Completing conversions

A conversion is completed when the result of the conversion is transferred into the data
result register, ADC_R. This is indicated by the setting of ADC_SC1[COCO]. An
interrupt is generated if ADC_SC1[AIEN] is high at the time that ADC_SC1[COCO] is
set.
24.4.4.3 Aborting conversions

Any conversion in progress is aborted in the following cases:
• A write to ADC_SC1 occurs.
• The current conversion will be aborted and a new conversion will be initiated, if
ADC_SC1[ADCH] are not all 1s and ADC_SC4[AFDEP] are all 0s.
• The current conversion and the rest of conversions will be aborted and no new
conversion will be initialed, if ADC_SC4[AFDEP] are not all 0s.
• A new conversion will be initiated when the FIFO is re-fulfilled upon the levels
indicated by the ADC_SC4[AFDEP] bits).
• A write to ADC_SC2, ADC_SC3, ADC_SC4, ADC_CV occurs. This indicates a
mode of operation change has occurred and the current and rest of conversions (when
ADC_SC4[AFDEP] are not all 0s) are therefore invalid.
• The MCU is reset.
• The MCU enters Stop mode with ADACK not enabled.
When a conversion is aborted, the contents of the data register, ADC_R, are not altered.
However, they continue to be the values transferred after the completion of the last
successful conversion. If the conversion was aborted by a reset, ADC_R returns to their
reset states.
24.4.4.4 Power control

The ADC module remains in its idle state until a conversion is initiated. If ADACK is
selected as the conversion clock source, the ADACK clock generator is also enabled.
Power consumption when active can be reduced by setting ADC_SC3[ADLPC]. This
results in a lower maximum value for fADCK (see the data sheet).

24.4.4.5 Sample time and total conversion time

The total conversion time depends on the sample time (as determined by
ADC_SC3[ADLSMP]), the MCU bus frequency, the conversion mode (8-bit, 10-bit or
12-bit), and the frequency of the conversion clock (fADCK). After the module becomes
active, sampling of the input begins.ADC_SC3[ADLSMP] selects between short (3.5
ADCK cycles) and long (23.5 ADCK cycles) sample times. When sampling is complete,
the converter is isolated from the input channel and a successive approximation algorithm
is performed to determine the digital value of the analog signal. The result of the
conversion is transferred to ADC_R upon completion of the conversion algorithm.
If the bus frequency is less than the fADCK frequency, precise sample time for continuous
conversions cannot be guaranteed when short sample is enabled (ADC_SC3[ADLSMP]
= 0). If the bus frequency is less than 1/11th of the fADCK frequency, precise sample time
for continuous conversions cannot be guaranteed when long sample is enabled
(ADC_SC3[ADLSMP] = 1).
The maximum total conversion time for different conditions is summarized in the table
below.
Table 24-11. Total conversion time vs. control conditions
Conversion type ADICLK ADLSMP Max total conversion time
Single or first continuous 8-bit 0x, 10 0 20 ADCK cycles + 5 bus clock cycles
Single or first continuous 10-bit or 12-bit 0x, 10 0 23 ADCK cycles + 5 bus clock cycles
Single or first continuous 8-bit 0x, 10 1 40 ADCK cycles + 5 bus clock cycles
Single or first continuous 10-bit or 12-bit 0x, 10 1 43 ADCK cycles + 5 bus clock cycles
Single or first continuous 8-bit 11 0 5 µs + 20 ADCK + 5 bus clock cycles
Single or first continuous 10-bit or 12-bit 11 0 5 µs + 23 ADCK + 5 bus clock cycles
Single or first continuous 8-bit 11 1 5 µs + 40 ADCK + 5 bus clock cycles
Single or first continuous 10-bit or 12-bit 11 1 5 µs + 43 ADCK + 5 bus clock cycles
Subsequent continuous 8-bit; xx 0 17 ADCK cycles
fBUS > fADCK
Subsequent continuous 10-bit or 12-bit; xx 0 20 ADCK cycles
fBUS > fADCK
Subsequent continuous 8-bit; xx 1 37 ADCK cycles
fBUS > fADCK/11
Subsequent continuous 10-bit or 12-bit; xx 1 40 ADCK cycles
fBUS > fADCK/11
The maximum total conversion time is determined by the selected clock source and the
divide ratio. The clock source is selectable by the ADC_SC3[ADICLK] bits, and the
divide ratio is specified by the ADC_SC3[ADIV] bits. For example, in 10-bit mode, with

the bus clock selected as the input clock source, the input clock divide-by-1 ratio
selected, and a bus frequency of 8 MHz, then the conversion time for a single conversion
as given below:
The number of bus cycles at 8 MHz is:
Note
The ADCK frequency must be between fADCK minimum and
fADCK maximum to meet ADC specifications.
24.4.5 Automatic compare function

The compare function can be configured to check for an upper or lower limit. After the
input is sampled and converted, the result is added to the complement of the compare
value (ADC_CV). When comparing to an upper limit (ADC_SC2[ACFGT] = 1), if the
result is greater-than or equal-to the compare value, ADC_SC1[COCO] is set. When
comparing to a lower limit (ADC_SC2[ACFGT] = 0), if the result is less than the
compare value, ADC_SC1[COCO] is set. The value generated by the addition of the
conversion result and the complement of the compare value is transferred to ADC_R.
On completion of a conversion while the compare function is enabled, if the compare
condition is not true, ADC_SC1[COCO] is not set and no data is transferred to the result
registers. An ADC interrupt is generated on the setting of ADC_SC1[COCO] if the ADC
interrupt is enabled (ADC_SC1[AIEN] = 1).
On completion of all conversions while the compare function is enabled and FIFO
enabled, if none of the compare conditions are not true when ADC_SC4[ACFSEL] is low
or if not all of compare conditions are true when ADC_SC4[ACFSEL] is high,
ADC_SC1[COCO] is not set. The compare data are transferred to the result registers
regardless of compare condition true or false when FIFO enabled.
Note
The compare function can monitor the voltage on a channel
while the MCU is in Wait or Stop mode. The ADC interrupt
wakes the MCU when the compare condition is met.

Note
The compare function can not work in continuous conversion
mode when FIFO enabled.
24.4.6 FIFO operation

The ADC module supports FIFO operation to minimize the interrupts to CPU in order to
reduce CPU loading in ADC interrupt service routines. This module contains two FIFOs
to buffer analog input channels and analog results respectively.
The FIFO function is enabled when the ADC_SC4[AFDEP] bits are set non-zero. The
FIFO depth is indicated by these bits. The FIFO supports up to eight level buffer.
The analog input channel FIFO is accessed by ADC_SC1[ADCH] bits, when FIFO
function is enabled. The analog channel must be written to this FIFO in order. The ADC
will not start the conversion if the channel FIFO is fulfilled below the level indicated by
the ADC_SC4[AFDEP] bits, no matter whether software or hardware trigger is set. Read
ADC_SC1[ADCH] will read the current active channel value. Write to
ADC_SC1[ADCH] will re-fill channel FIFO to initial new conversion. It will abort
current conversion and any other conversions that did not start. Write to the ADC_SC1
after all the conversions are completed or ADC is in idle state.
The result of the FIFO is accessed by ADC_R register, when FIFO function is enabled.
The result must be read via these two registers by the same order of analog input channel
FIFO to get the proper results. Don't read ADC_R until all of the conversions are
completed in FIFO mode. The ADC_SC1[COCO] bit will be set only when all
conversions indicated by the analog input channel FIFO complete whatever software or
hardware trigger is set. An interrupt request will be submitted to CPU if the
ADC_SC1[AIEN] is set when the FIFO conversion completes and the
ADC_SC1[COCO] bit is set.

AFDEP
ADC_R read
ADC_R
ADCH write 0 12-bit AD result
ADCH
1 12-bit AD result
5-bit ch 7
2 12-bit AD result
5-bit ch 6
AD CHANNEL FIFO
AD RESULT FIFO
3 12-bit AD result
5-bit ch 5
4 12-bit AD result
5-bit ch 4
5 12-bit AD result
5-bit ch 3
6 12-bit AD result
5-bit ch 2
7 12-bit AD result
5-bit ch 1
8 12-bit AD result
5-bit ch 0
9 12-bit AD result
10 12-bit AD result
FIFO Read/Write Logic reset
11 12-bit AD result
COMPARE Result FIFO Fulfilled COCO

D Q
LOGIC
Result FIFO read pointer CK
FIFO Read/Write Logic Channel FIFO write pointer

COMPARE Channel FIFO Fulfilled
Result FIFO write pointer LOGIC
D Q
CK
FIFO Work Logic Channel FIFO read pointer
FIFO conversion start
BUS CLK
Figure 24-10. FADC FIFO structure
If software trigger is enabled, the next analog channel is fetched from analog input
channel FIFO as soon as a conversion completes and its result is stored in the result
FIFO. When all conversions set in the analog input channel FIFO completes, the
ADC_SC1[COCO] bit is set and an interrupt request will be submitted to CPU if the
ADC_SC1[AIEN] bit is set.
If single hardware trigger mode is enabled(ADC_SC2[ADTRG]= 1 and
ADC_SC4[HTRGME]=0 ), the next analog is fetched from analog input channel FIFO
only when this conversion completes, its result is stored in the result FIFO, and the next
hardware trigger is fed to ADC module. If multi hardware tigger mode is
enabled(ADC_SC2[ADTRG]=1 and ADC_SC4[HTRGME]=1), the next analog is
fetched from analog input channel FIFO only when this conversion completes, its result
is stored in the result FIFO, and next conversion will start without waiting for next
hardware trigger. When all conversions set in the analog input channel FIFO completes,
the ADC_SC1[COCO] bit is set and an interrupt request will be submitted to CPU if the
ADC_SC1[AIEN] bit is set.
In single conversion in which ADC_SC1[ADCO] bit is clear, the ADC stops conversions
when ADC_SC1[COCO] bit is set until the channel FIFO is fulfilled again or new
hardware trigger occur.
The FIFO also provides scan mode to simplify the dummy work of input channel FIFO.
When the ADC_SC4[ASCANE] bit is set in FIFO mode, the FIFO will always use the
first dummied channel in spite of the value in the input channel FIFO. The ADC
conversion start to work in FIFO mode as soon as the first channel is dummied. The
following write operation to the input channel FIFO will cover the first channel element
in this FIFO. In scan FIFO mode, the ADC_SC1[COCO] bit is set when the result FIFO
is fulfilled according to the depth indicated by the ADC_SC4[AFDEP] bits.
In continuous conversion in which the ADC_SC1[ADCO] bit is set, the ADC starts next
conversion immediately when all conversions are completed. ADC module will fetch the
analog input channel from the beginning of analog input channel FIFO.

th
The n AD
channel fetch max = AFDEP
Channel FIFO fulfilled

Start FIFOed Conversion
0 n max
The nth AD COCO = 1

Conversions Completed Software Triggered Single Conversion
result store
The nth AD

0 n max 0 n max 0 n max
The nth AD ADC_SC1[COCO] = 1

Conversions Completed
Software Triggered Continuous Conversion
result store
The nth AD
channel fetch
when n hardware trigger occurs max = AFDEP
when last hardware trigger occurs
when 1st hardware trigger occurs
0 n max If new trigger occurs, the new set conversions will be generated
Hardware Triggered Single Conversion

result store
Conversions Completed ADC_SC4[HTRGME]=0
The nth
AD

when 1st hardware trigger occurs
0 n max If new trigger occurs, the new set conversions will be generated
Hardware Triggered Multiple Conversion

result store
Conversions Completed ADC_SC4[HTRGME]=1
The nth AD

when hardware trigger occurs
0 n max 0 n
Hardware Triggered Continuous Conversion

The nth AD COCO = 1 (Only need one hardware trigger)
Conversions Completed
result store
Figure 24-11. ADC FIFO conversion sequence

24.4.7 MCU wait mode operation

Wait mode is a low-power consumption standby mode from which recovery is fast
because the clock sources remain active. If a conversion is in progress when the MCU
enters wait mode, it continues until completion. Conversions can be initiated while the
MCU is in wait mode by means of the hardware trigger or if continuous conversions are
enabled.
The bus clock, bus clock divided by two, ALTCLK and ADACK are available as
conversion clock sources while in wait mode.
ADC_SC1[COCO] is set by a conversion complete event that generates an ADC interrupt
to wake the MCU from wait mode if the ADC interrupt is enabled (ADC_SC1[AIEN] =
1).
24.4.8 MCU Stop mode operation

Stop mode is a low-power consumption standby mode during which most or all clock
sources on the MCU are disabled.
24.4.8.1 Stop mode with ADACK disabled

If the asynchronous clock, ADACK, is not selected as the conversion clock, executing a
STOP instruction aborts the current conversion and places the ADC in its idle state. The
contents of ADC_R are unaffected by Stop mode. After exiting from Stop mode, a
software or hardware trigger is required to resume conversions.
24.4.8.2 Stop mode with ADACK enabled

If ADACK is selected as the conversion clock, the ADC continues operation during Stop
mode. For guaranteed ADC operation, the MCU's voltage regulator must remain active
during Stop mode. See the module introduction for configuration information for this
MCU.
If a conversion is in progress when the MCU enters Stop mode, it continues until
completion. Conversions can be initiated while the MCU is in Stop mode by means of the
hardware trigger or if continuous conversions are enabled.

A conversion complete event sets the ADC_SC1[COCO] and generates an ADC interrupt
to wake the MCU from Stop mode if the ADC interrupt is enabled (ADC_SC1[AIEN] =
1). In fifo mode, ADC cannot complete the conversion operation fully or wake the MCU
from Stop mode.
Note
The ADC module can wake the system from low-power stop
and cause the MCU to begin consuming run-level currents
without generating a system level interrupt. To prevent this
scenario, the data transfer blocking mechanism must be cleared
when entering Stop and continuing ADC conversions.
24.5 Initialization information

This section gives an example that provides some basic direction on how to initialize and
configure the ADC module. You can configure the module for 8-, 10-, or 12-bit
resolution, single or continuous conversion, and a polled or interrupt approach, among
many other options. Refer to ADC_SC3 register for information used in this example.
Note
Hexadecimal values prefixed by a 0x, binary values prefixed by
a %, and decimal values have no preceding character.
24.5.1 ADC module initialization example

Before the ADC module can be used to complete conversions, it must be initialized.
Given below is a method to initialize ADC module.
24.5.1.1 Initialization sequence

A typical initialization sequence is as follows:
1. Update the configuration register (ADC_SC3) to select the input clock source and the
divide ratio used to generate the internal clock, ADCK. This register is also used for
selecting sample time and low-power configuration.
2. Update status and control register 2 (ADC_SC2) to select the hardware or software
conversion trigger and compare function options, if enabled.

Initialization information
3. Update status and control register 1 (ADC_SC1) to select whether conversions will
be continuous or completed only once, and to enable or disable conversion complete
interrupts. The input channel on which conversions will be performed is also selected
here.
24.5.1.2 Pseudo-code example

In this example, the ADC module is set up with interrupts enabled to perform a single 10-
bit conversion at low power with a long sample time on input channel 1, where the
internal ADCK clock is derived from the bus clock divided by 1.
Example: 24.5.1.2.1 General ADC initialization routine

void ADC_init(void)
{
/* The following code segment demonstrates how to initialize ADC by low-power mode,
long
sample time, bus frequency, software triggered from AD1 external pin without FIFO
enabled
*/
ADC_APCTL1 = ADC_APCTL1_ADPC1_MASK;
ADC_SC3 = ADC_SC3_ADLPC_MASK | ADC_SC3_ADLSMP_MASK | ADC_SC3_MODE0_MASK;
ADC_SC2 = 0x00;
ADC_SC1 = ADC_SC1_AIEN_MASK | ADC_SC1_ADCH0_MASK;
}
24.5.2 ADC FIFO module initialization example

Before the ADC module can be used to start FIFOed conversions, an initialization
procedure must be performed. A typical sequence is as follows:
1. Update the configuration register (ADC_SC3) to select the input clock source and the
divide ratio used to generate the internal clock, ADCK. This register is also used to
select sample time and low-power configuration.
2. Update the configuration register (ADC_SC4) to select the FIFO scan mode, FIFO
compare function selection (OR or AND function) and FIFO depth.
3. Update status and control register 2 (ADC_SC2) to select the hardware or software
conversion trigger, compare function options if enabled.
4. Update status and control register 1 (ADC_SC1) to select whether conversions will
be continuous or completed only once, and to enable or disable conversion complete
interrupts. The input channel on which conversions will be performed is also selected
here.

24.5.2.1 Pseudo-code example

In this example, the ADC module is set up with interrupts enabled to perform a single
hardware triggered 10-bit 4-level-FIFO conversion at low power with a long sample time
on input channels of 1, 3, 5, and 7. Here the internal ADCK clock is derived from the bus
clock divided by 1.
Example: 24.5.2.1.1 FIFO ADC initialization routine

void ADC_init(void)
{
/* The following code segment demonstrates how to initialize ADC by low-power mode, long
sample time, bus frequency, hardware triggered from AD1, AD3, AD5, and AD7 external pins
with 4-level FIFO enabled */
ADC_APCTL1 = ADC_APCTL1_ADPC6_MASK | ADC_APCTL1_ADPC5_MASK | ADC_APCTL1_ADPC3_MASK |

ADC_APCTL1_ADPC1_MASK;
ADC_SC3 = ADC_SC3_ADLPC_MASK | ADC_SC3_ADLSMP_MASK | ADC_SC3_MODE1_MASK;
// setting hardware trigger

ADC_SC2 = ADC_SC2_ADTRG_MASK ;
//4-Level FIFO
ADC_SC4 = ADC_SC4_AFDEP1_MASK | ADC_SC4_AFDEP0_MASK;
// dummy the 1st channel

ADC_SC1 = ADC_SC1_ADCH0_MASK;
// dummy the 2nd channel

ADC_SC1 = ADC_SC1_ADCH1_MASK | ADC_SC1_ADCH0_MASK;
// dummy the 3rd channel

ADC_SC1 = ADC_SC1_ADCH2_MASK | ADC_SC1_ADCH0_MASK;
// dummy the 4th channel and ADC starts conversion

ADC_SC1 = ADC_SC1_AIEN_MASK | ADC_SC1_ADCH2_MASK | ADC_SC1_ADCH1_MASK | ADC_SC1_ADCH0_MASK;
Example: 24.5.2.1.2 FIFO ADC interrupt service routine

unsigned short buffer[4];
interrupt VectorNumber_Vadc void ADC_isr(void)
{
/* The following code segment demonstrates read AD result FIFO */
// read conversion result of channel 1 and COCO bit is cleared
buffer[0] = ADC_R;
// read conversion result of channel 3
buffer[1] = ADC_R;
buffer[2] = ADC_R;
buffer[3] = ADC_R;
}

NOTE
ADC_R is 16-bit ADC result register, combined from
ADC_RH and ADC_RL
24.6 Application information

This section contains information for using the ADC module in applications. The ADC
has been designed to be integrated into a microcontroller for use in embedded control
applications requiring an A/D converter.
24.6.1 External pins and routing

The following sections discuss the external pins associated with the ADC module and
how they are used for best results.
24.6.1.1 Analog supply pins

The ADC module has analog power and ground supplies (VDDA and VSSA) available as
separate pins on some devices. VSSA is shared on the same pin as the MCU digital VSS on
some devices. On other devices, VSSA and VDDA are shared with the MCU digital supply
pins. In these cases, there are separate pads for the analog supplies bonded to the same
pin as the corresponding digital supply so that some degree of isolation between the
supplies is maintained.
When available on a separate pin, both VDDA and VSSA must be connected to the same
voltage potential as their corresponding MCU digital supply (VDD and VSS) and must be
routed carefully for maximum noise immunity and bypass capacitors placed as near as
possible to the package.
If separate power supplies are used for analog and digital power, the ground connection
between these supplies must be at the VSSA pin. This should be the only ground
connection between these supplies if possible. The VSSA pin makes a good single point
ground location.

24.6.1.2 Analog reference pins

In addition to the analog supplies, the ADC module has connections for two reference
voltage inputs. The high reference is VREFH, which may be shared on the same pin as
VDDA on some devices. The low reference is VREFL, which may be shared on the same
pin as VSSA on some devices.
When available on a separate pin, VREFH may be connected to the same potential as
VDDA, or may be driven by an external source between the minimum VDDA spec and the
VDDA potential (VREFH must never exceed VDDA). When available on a separate pin,
VREFL must be connected to the same voltage potential as VSSA. VREFH and VREFL must
be routed carefully for maximum noise immunity and bypass capacitors placed as near as
possible to the package.
AC current in the form of current spikes required to supply charge to the capacitor array
at each successive approximation step is drawn through the VREFH and VREFL loop. The
best external component to meet this current demand is a 0.1 µF capacitor with good high
frequency characteristics. This capacitor is connected between VREFH and VREFL and
must be placed as near as possible to the package pins. Resistance in the path is not
recommended because the current causes a voltage drop that could result in conversion
errors. Inductance in this path must be minimum (parasitic only).
24.6.1.3 Analog input pins

The external analog inputs are typically shared with digital I/O pins on MCU devices.
The pin I/O control is disabled by setting the appropriate control bit in one of the pin
control registers. Conversions can be performed on inputs without the associated pin
control register bit set. It is recommended that the pin control register bit always be set
when using a pin as an analog input. This avoids problems with contention because the
output buffer is in its high impedance state and the pullup is disabled. Also, the input
buffer draws DC current when its input is not at VDD or VSS. Setting the pin control
register bits for all pins used as analog inputs should be done to achieve lowest operating
current.
Empirical data shows that capacitors on the analog inputs improve performance in the
presence of noise or when the source impedance is high. Use of 0.01 µF capacitors with
good high-frequency characteristics is sufficient. These capacitors are not necessary in all
cases, but when used they must be placed as near as possible to the package pins and be
referenced to VSSA.
For proper conversion, the input voltage must fall between VREFH and VREFL. If the input
is equal to or exceeds VREFH, the converter circuit converts the signal to 0xFFF (full scale
12-bit representation), 0x3FF (full scale 10-bit representation) or 0xFF (full scale 8-bit

representation). If the input is equal to or less than VREFL, the converter circuit converts it
to 0x000. Input voltages between VREFH and VREFL are straight-line linear conversions.
There is a brief current associated with VREFL when the sampling capacitor is charging.
The input is sampled for 3.5 cycles of the ADCK source when ADC_SC3[ADLSMP] is
low, or 23.5 cycles when ADC_SC3[ADLSMP] is high.
For minimal loss of accuracy due to current injection, pins adjacent to the analog input
pins should not be transitioning during conversions.
24.6.2 Sources of error

Several sources of error exist for A/D conversions. These are discussed in the following
sections.
24.6.2.1 Sampling error

For proper conversions, the input must be sampled long enough to achieve the proper
accuracy. Given the maximum input resistance of approximately 7 kΩ and input
capacitance of approximately 5.5 pF, sampling to within 1/4 LSB (at 12-bit resolution)
can be achieved within the minimum sample window (3.5 cycles at 8 MHz maximum
ADCK frequency) provided the resistance of the external analog source (RAS) is kept
below 2 kΩ.
Higher source resistances or higher-accuracy sampling is possible by setting
ADC_SC3[ADLSMP] (to increase the sample window to 23.5 cycles) or decreasing
ADCK frequency to increase sample time.
24.6.2.2 Pin leakage error

Leakage on the I/O pins can cause conversion error if the external analog source
resistance (RAS) is high. If this error cannot be tolerated by the application, keep RAS
lower than VDDA / (2N*ILEAK) for less than 1/4 LSB leakage error (N = 8 in 8-bit, 10 in
10-bit or 12 in 12-bit mode).
24.6.2.3 Noise-induced errors

System noise that occurs during the sample or conversion process can affect the accuracy
of the conversion. The ADC accuracy numbers are guaranteed as specified only if the
following conditions are met:

• There is a 0.1 µF low-ESR capacitor from VREFH to VREFL.

• There is a 0.1 µF low-ESR capacitor from VDDA to VSSA.
• If inductive isolation is used from the primary supply, an additional 1 µF capacitor is
placed from VDDA to VSSA.
• VSSA (and VREFL, if connected) is connected to VSS at a quiet point in the ground
plane.
• Operate the MCU in wait or Stop mode before initiating (hardware triggered
conversions) or immediately after initiating (hardware or software triggered
conversions) the ADC conversion.
• For software triggered conversions, immediately follow the write to ADC_SC1
with a stop instruction.
• For Stop mode operation, select ADACK as the clock source. Operation in Stop
reduces VDD noise but increases effective conversion time due to stop recovery.
• There is no I/O switching, input or output, on the MCU during the conversion.
There are some situations where external system activity causes radiated or conducted
noise emissions or excessive VDD noise is coupled into the ADC. In these situations, or
when the MCU cannot be placed in wait or Stop or I/O activity cannot be halted, these
recommended actions may reduce the effect of noise on the accuracy:
• Place a 0.01 µF capacitor (CAS) on the selected input channel to VREFL or VSSA (this
improves noise issues, but affects the sample rate based on the external analog source
resistance).
• Average the result by converting the analog input many times in succession and
dividing the sum of the results. Four samples are required to eliminate the effect of a
1LSB, one-time error.
• Reduce the effect of synchronous noise by operating off the asynchronous clock
(ADACK) and averaging. Noise that is synchronous to ADCK cannot be averaged
out.
24.6.2.4 Code width and quantization error

The ADC quantizes the ideal straight-line transfer function into 4096 steps (in 12-bit
mode). Each step ideally has the same height (1 code) and width. The width is defined as
the delta between the transition points to one code and the next. The ideal code width for
an N bit converter (in this case N can be 8, 10 or 12), defined as 1LSB, is:
There is an inherent quantization error due to the digitization of the result. For 8-bit or
10-bit conversions the code transitions when the voltage is at the midpoint between the
points where the straight line transfer function is exactly represented by the actual
transfer function. Therefore, the quantization error will be ± 1/2 lsb in 8- or 10-bit mode.
As a consequence, however, the code width of the first (0x000) conversion is only 1/2 lsb
and the code width of the last (0xFF or 0x3FF) is 1.5 lsb.
For 12-bit conversions the code transitions only after the full code width is present, so the
quantization error is -1 lsb to 0 lsb and the code width of each step is 1 lsb.
24.6.2.5 Linearity errors

The ADC may also exhibit non-linearity of several forms. Every effort has been made to
reduce these errors but the system must be aware of them because they affect overall
accuracy. These errors are:
• Zero-scale error (EZS) (sometimes called offset) — This error is defined as the
difference between the actual code width of the first conversion and the ideal code
width (1/2 lsb in 8-bit or 10-bit modes and 1 lsb in 12-bit mode). If the first
conversion is 0x001, the difference between the actual 0x001 code width and its ideal
(1 lsb) is used.
• Full-scale error (EFS) — This error is defined as the difference between the actual
code width of the last conversion and the ideal code width (1.5 lsb in 8-bit or 10-bit
modes and 1LSB in 12-bit mode). If the last conversion is 0x3FE, the difference
between the actual 0x3FE code width and its ideal (1 lsb) is used.
• Differential non-linearity (DNL) — This error is defined as the worst-case difference
between the actual code width and the ideal code width for all conversions.
• Integral non-linearity (INL) — This error is defined as the highest-value that the
absolute value of the running sum of DNL achieves. More simply, this is the worst-
case difference of the actual transition voltage to a given code and its corresponding
ideal transition voltage, for all codes.
• Total unadjusted error (TUE) — This error is defined as the difference between the
actual transfer function and the ideal straight-line transfer function and includes all
forms of error.

24.6.2.6 Code jitter, non-monotonicity, and missing codes

Analog-to-digital converters are susceptible to three special forms of error. These are
code jitter, non-monotonicity, and missing codes.
Code jitter occurs when, at certain points, a given input voltage converts to one of two
values when sampled repeatedly. Ideally, when the input voltage is infinitesimally
smaller than the transition voltage, the converter yields the lower code (and vice-versa).
However, even small amounts of system noise can cause the converter to be
indeterminate, between two codes, for a range of input voltages around the transition
voltage. This range is normally around ±1/2 lsb in 8-bit or 10-bit mode, or around 2 lsb in
12-bit mode, and increases with noise.
This error may be reduced by repeatedly sampling the input and averaging the result.
Additionally the techniques discussed in Noise-induced errors reduces this error.
Non-monotonicity is defined when, except for code jitter, the converter converts to a
lower code for a higher input voltage. Missing codes are those values that are never
converted for any input value.
In 8-bit or 10-bit mode, the ADC is guaranteed to be monotonic and have no missing
codes.


Chapter 25
Analog comparator (ACMP)
25.1 Introduction
The analog comparator module (ACMP) provides a circuit for comparing two analog
input voltages. The comparator circuit is designed to operate across the full range of the
supply voltage (rail-to-rail operation).
The analog mux provides a circuit for selecting an analog input signal from four
channels. One signal provided by the 6-bit DAC. The mux circuit is designed to operate
across the full range of the supply voltage. The 6-bit DAC is 64-tap resistor ladder
network which provides a selectable voltage reference for applications where voltage
reference is needed. The 64-tap resistor ladder network divides the supply reference Vin
into 64 voltage level. A 6-bit digital signal input selects output voltage level, which varies
from Vin to Vin/64. Vin can be selected from two voltage sources.
25.1.1 Features
ACMP features include:
• Operational over the whole supply range of 2.7 V to 5.5 V
• On-chip 6-bit resolution DAC with selectable reference voltage from VDD or internal
bandgap
• Configurable hysteresis
• Selectable interrupt on rising edge, falling edge, or both rising or falling edges of
comparator output
• Selectable inversion on comparator output
• Up to four selectable comparator inputs
• Operational in Stop mode

Introduction

This section defines the ACMP operation in Wait, Stop, and Background Debug modes.
25.1.2.1 Operation in Wait mode

The ACMP continues to operate in Wait mode, if enabled. The interrupt can wake the
MCU if enabled.
25.1.2.2 Operation in Stop mode

The ACMP (including DAC and CMP) continues to operate in Stop mode if enabled. If
ACMP_CS[ACIE] is set, a ACMP interrupt can be generated to wake the MCU up from
Stop mode.
If the Stop is exited by an interrupt, the ACMP setting remains before entering the Stop
mode. If Stop is exited with a reset, the ACMP goes into its reset.
The user must turn off the DAC if the output is not used as a reference input of ACMP to
save power, because the DAC consumes additional power.
25.1.2.3 Operation in Debug mode

When the MCU is in Debug mode, the ACMP continues operating normally.

The block diagram of the ACMP module is shown in the following figure.

Chapter 25 Analog comparator (ACMP)
DACREF
VDDA
MUX
Bandgap
ACPSEL
DACVAL
6-bit ACE ACOPE

DAC
MUX
DACEN ACNSEL
+
External Output
–
ACMP0
MUX
Edge Control Interrupt
ACMP1
ACMP2 HYST Logic
ACO ACMOD ACF ACIE
Figure 25-1. ACMP block diagram

The output of ACMP can also be mapped to an external pin. When the output is mapped
to an external pin, ACMP_CS[ACOPE] controls the pin to enable/disable the ACMP
output function.

ACMP memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4007_3000 ACMP Control and Status Register (ACMP0_CS) 8 R/W 00h 25.3.1/338
4007_3001 ACMP Control Register 0 (ACMP0_C0) 8 R/W 00h 25.3.2/339
4007_4000 ACMP Control and Status Register (ACMP1_CS) 8 R/W 00h 25.3.1/338

25.3.1 ACMP Control and Status Register (ACMPx_CS)

Address: Base address + 0h offset
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read ACO
ACE HYST ACF ACIE ACOPE ACMOD
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ACMPx_CS field descriptions

Field Description
7 Analog Comparator Enable
ACE
Enables the ACMP module.
0 The ACMP is disabled.

1 The ACMP is enabled.
6 Analog Comparator Hysterisis Selection
HYST
Selects ACMP hysterisis.
0 20 mV.
1 30 mV.
5 ACMP Interrupt Flag Bit
ACF
Synchronously set by hardware when ACMP output has a valid edge defined by ACMOD. The setting of
this bit lags the ACMPO to bus clocks. Clear ACF bit by writing a 0 to this bit. Writing a 1 to this bit has no
effect.
4 ACMP Interrupt Enable
ACIE
Enables an ACMP CPU interrupt.
0 Disable the ACMP Interrupt.

1 Enable the ACMP Interrupt.
3 ACMP Output
ACO
Reading ACO will return the current value of the analog comparator output. ACO is reset to a 0 and will
read as a 0 when the ACMP is disabled (ACE = 0)
2 ACMP Output Pin Enable
ACOPE
ACOPE enables the pad logic so that the output can be placed onto an external pin.
0 ACMP output cannot be placed onto external pin.

1 ACMP output can be placed onto external pin.
ACMOD ACMP MOD
Determines the sensitivity modes of the interrupt trigger.
00 ACMP interrupt on output falling edge.

01 ACMP interrupt on output rising edge.
10 ACMP interrupt on output falling edge.
11 ACMP interrupt on output falling or rising edge.

25.3.2 ACMP Control Register 0 (ACMPx_C0)

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 0
ACPSEL ACNSEL
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ACMPx_C0 field descriptions

Field Description
5–4 ACMP Positive Input Select
ACPSEL
00 External reference 0
11 DAC output
ACNSEL ACMP Negative Input Select
11 DAC output

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read DACEN DACREF DACVAL
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Field Description
7 DAC Enable
DACEN
Enables the output of 6-bit DAC.
0 The DAC is disabled.

1 The DAC is enabled.
6 DAC Reference Select
DACREF

ACMPx_C1 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 The DAC selects Bandgap as the reference.
1 The DAC selects VDDA as the reference.
DACVAL DAC Output Level Selection
Selects the output voltage using the given formula: Voutput= (Vin/64)x(DACVAL[5:0]+1) The Voutput range is
from Vin/64 to Vin, the step is Vin/64

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 ACIPE
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Field Description
ACIPE ACMP Input Pin Enable
This 3-bit field controls if the corresponding ACMP external pin can be driven by an analog input.
0 The corresponding external analog input is not allowed.

1 The corresponding external analog input is allowed.

The ACMP module is functionally composed of two parts: digital-to-analog (DAC) and
comparator (CMP).
The DAC includes a 64-level DAC (digital to analog converter) and relevant control
logic. DAC can select one of two reference inputs, VDD or on-chip bandgap, as the DAC
input Vin by setting ACMP_C1[DACREF]. After the DAC is enabled, it converts the data
set in ACMP_C1[DACVAL] to a stepped analog output, which is fed into ACMP as an
internal reference input. This stepped analog output is also mapped out of the module.
The output voltage range is from Vin/64 to Vin. The step size is Vin/64.
The ACMP can achieve the analog comparison between positive input and negative
input, and then give out a digital output and relevant interrupt. Both the positive and
negative input of ACMP can be selected from the four common inputs: three external

reference inputs and one internal reference input from the DAC output. The positive input
of ACMP is selected by ACMP_C0[ACPSEL] and the negative input is selected by
ACMP_C0[ACNSEL]. Any pair of the eight inputs can be compared by configuring the
ACMPC0 with the appropriate value.
After the ACMP is enabled by setting ACMP_CS[ACE], the comparison result appears
as a digital output. Whenever a valid edge defined in ACMP_CS[ACMOD] occurs,
ACMP_CS[ACF] is asserted. If ACMP_CS[ACIE] is set, a ACMP CPU interrupt occurs.
The valid edge is defined by ACMP_CS[ACMOD]. When ACMP_CS[ACMOD] = 00b
or 10b, only the falling-edge on ACMP output is valid. When ACMP_CS[ACMOD] =
01b, only rising-edge on ACMP output is valid. When ACMP_CS[ACMOD] = 11b, both
the rising-edge and falling-edge on the ACMP output are valid.
The ACMP output is synchronized by the bus clock to generate ACMP_CS[ACO] so that
the CPU can read the comparison. In stop3 mode, if the output of ACMP is changed,
ACMPO cannot be updated in time. The output can be synchronized and
ACMP_CS[ACO] can be updated upon the waking up of the CPU because of the
availability of the bus clock. ACMP_CS[ACO] changes following the comparison result,
so it can serve as a tracking flag that continuously indicates the voltage delta on the
inputs.
If a reference input external to the chip is selected as an input of ACMP, the
corresponding ACMP_C2[ACIPE] bit must be set to enable the input from pad interface.
If the output of the ACMP needs to be put onto the external pin, the ACMP_CS[ACOPE]
bit must enable the ACMP pin function of pad logic.
25.5 Setup and operation of ACMP

The two parts of ACMP (DAC and CMP) can be set up and operated independently. But
if the DAC works as an input of the CMP, the DAC must be configured before the
ACMP is enabled.
Because the input-switching can cause problems on the ACMP inputs, the user should
complete the input selection before enabling the ACMP and must not change the input
selection setting when the ACMP is enabled to avoid unexpected output. Similarly,
because the DAC experiences a setup delay after ACMP_C1[DACVAL] is changed, the
user should complete the setting of ACMP_C1[DACVAL] before DAC is enabled.

Resets
25.6 Resets
During a reset the ACMP is configured in the default mode. Both CMP and DAC are
disabled.
25.7 Interrupts
If the bus clock is available when a valid edge defined in ACMP_CS[ACMOD] occurs,
the ACMP_CS[ACF] is asserted. If ACMP_CS[ACIE] is set, a ACMP interrupt event
occurs. The ACMP_CS[ACF] bit remains asserted until the ACMP interrupt is cleared by
software. When in stop mode, a valid edge on ACMP output generates an asynchronous
interrupt that can wake the MCU from stop. The interrupt can be cleared by writing a 0 to
the ACMP_CS[ACF] bit.

Chapter 26
FlexTimer Module (FTM)
26.1 Introduction
NOTE
The FlexTimer module (FTM) is a two-to-eight channel timer that supports input capture,
output compare, and the generation of PWM signals to control electric motor and power
management applications. The FTM time reference is a 16-bit counter that can be used as
an unsigned or signed counter.
26.1.1 FlexTimer philosophy

The FlexTimer is built upon a simple timer, the HCS08 Timer PWM Module – TPM,
used for many years on Freescale's 8-bit microcontrollers. The FlexTimer extends the
functionality to meet the demands of motor control, digital lighting solutions, and power
conversion, while providing low cost and backwards compatibility with the TPM module.
Several key enhancements are made:
• Signed up counter
• Deadtime insertion hardware
• Fault control inputs
• Enhanced triggering functionality
• Initialization and polarity control
All of the features common with the TPM have fully backwards compatible register
assignments. The FlexTimer can also use code on the same core platform without change
to perform the same functions.

Introduction
Motor control and power conversion features have been added through a dedicated set of
registers and defaults turn off all new features. The new features, such as hardware
deadtime insertion, polarity, fault control, and output forcing and masking, greatly reduce
loading on the execution software and are usually each controlled by a group of registers.
FlexTimer input triggers can be from comparators, ADC, or other submodules to initiate
timer functions automatically. These triggers can be linked in a variety of ways during
integration of the sub modules so please note the options available for used FlexTimer
configuration.
Several FlexTimers may be synchronized to provide a larger timer with their counters
incrementing in unison, assuming the initialization, the input clocks, the initial and final
counting values are the same in each FlexTimer.
All main user access registers are buffered to ease the load on the executing software. A
number of trigger options exist to determine which registers are updated with this user
defined data.
26.1.2 Features
The FTM features include:
• FTM source clock is selectable
• Source clock can be the system clock, the fixed frequency clock, or an external
clock
• Fixed frequency clock is an additional clock input to allow the selection of an on
chip clock source other than the system clock
• Selecting external clock connects FTM clock to a chip level input pin therefore
allowing to synchronize the FTM counter with an off chip clock source
• Prescaler divide-by 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, or 128
• 16-bit counter
• It can be a free-running counter or a counter with initial and final value
• The counting can be up or up-down
• Each channel can be configured for input capture, output compare, or edge-aligned
PWM mode
• In Input Capture mode:

Chapter 26 FlexTimer Module (FTM)
• The capture can occur on rising edges, falling edges or both edges
• An input filter can be selected for some channels
• In Output Compare mode the output signal can be set, cleared, or toggled on match
• All channels can be configured for center-aligned PWM mode
• Each pair of channels can be combined to generate a PWM signal with independent
control of both edges of PWM signal
• The FTM channels can operate as pairs with equal outputs, pairs with
complementary outputs, or independent channels with independent outputs
• The deadtime insertion is available for each complementary pair
• Generation of match triggers
• Software control of PWM outputs
• Up to 4 fault inputs for global fault control
• The polarity of each channel is configurable
• The generation of an interrupt per channel
• The generation of an interrupt when the counter overflows
• The generation of an interrupt when the fault condition is detected
• Synchronized loading of write buffered FTM registers
• Write protection for critical registers
• Backwards compatible with TPM
• Testing of input captures for a stuck at zero and one conditions
• Dual edge capture for pulse and period width measurement

When the MCU is in an active Debug mode, the FTM temporarily suspends all counting
until the MCU returns to normal user operating mode. During Stop mode, all FTM input
clocks are stopped, so the FTM is effectively disabled until clocks resume. During Wait
mode, the FTM continues to operate normally. If the FTM does not need to produce a

Introduction
real time reference or provide the interrupt sources needed to wake the MCU from Wait
mode, the power can then be saved by disabling FTM functions before entering Wait
mode.

The FTM uses one input/output (I/O) pin per channel, CHn (FTM channel (n)) where n is
the channel number (0–7).
The following figure shows the FTM structure. The central component of the FTM is the
16-bit counter with programmable initial and final values and its counting can be up or
up-down.

CLKS
FTMEN
no clock selected
(FTM counter disable) PS
system clock
fixed frequency clock
external clock prescaler
synchronizer
(1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128)
CPWMS
CAPTEST INITTRIGEN initialization
CNTIN trigger
FAULTM[1:0]
FTM counter TOIE timer overflow
MOD TOF interrupt
FFVAL[3:0]
FAULTIE
FAULTIN
FAULTnEN*
FAULTF
FFLTRnEN*
FAULTFn*
fault control fault interrupt
fault input n* *where n = 3, 2, 1, 0
fault condition
DECAPEN pair channels 0 - channels 0 and 1

COMBINE0
CPWMS
MS0B:MS0A
ELS0B:ELS0A CH0IE channel 0 CH0TRIG channel 0
dual edge capture interrupt match trigger
CH0F
mode logic
channel 0
input input capture output modes logic
mode logic C0V (generation of channels 0 and 1 outputs signals in output channel 0
compare, EPWM, CPWM and combine modes according to output signal
initialization, complementary mode, inverting, software output channel 1
input capture C1V control, deadtime insertion, output mask, fault control output signal
channel 1 mode logic and polarity control)
input
DECAPEN
COMBINE0 CH1F channel 1
interrupt channel 1
CPWMS CH1IE CH1TRIG match trigger
MS1B:MS1A
ELS1B:ELS1A
DECAPEN pair channels 3 - channels 6 and 7

COMBINE3
CPWMS
MS6B:MS6A
ELS6B:ELS6A CH6IE channel 6 CH6TRIG channel 6
dual edge capture CH6F
interrupt match trigger
mode logic
channel 6
input input capture output modes logic
mode logic C6V channel 6
(generation of channels 6 and 7 outputs signals in output
compare, EPWM, CPWM and combine modes according to output signal
initialization, complementary mode, inverting, software output channel 7
input capture C7V control, deadtime insertion, output mask, fault control output signal
channel 7 mode logic and polarity control)
input
DECAPEN
COMBINE3 CH7F channel 7 channel 7
CPWMS CH7IE
interrupt CH7TRIG match trigger
MS7B:MS7A
ELS7B:ELS7A
Figure 26-1. FTM block diagram

FTM signal descriptions
26.2 FTM signal descriptions

Table 26-1 shows the user-accessible signals for the FTM.
Table 26-1. FTM signal descriptions
Signal Description I/O Function
EXTCLK External clock. FTM external I The external clock input signal is used as the FTM counter
clock can be selected to drive clock if selected by CLKS[1:0] bits in the SC register. This
the FTM counter. clock signal must not exceed 1/4 of system clock frequency.
The FTM counter prescaler selection and settings are also
used when an external clock is selected.
CHn FTM channel (n), where n can I/O Each FTM channel can be configured to operate either as
be 7-0 input or output. The direction associated with each channel,
input or output, is selected according to the mode assigned
for that channel.
FAULTj Fault input (j), where j can be I The fault input signals are used to control the CHn channel
3-0 output state. If a fault is detected, the FAULTj signal is
asserted and the channel output is put in a safe state. The
behavior of the fault logic is defined by the FAULTM[1:0]
control bits in the MODE register and FAULTEN bit in the
COMBINEm register. Note that each FAULTj input may affect
all channels selectively since FAULTM[1:0] and FAULTEN
control bits are defined for each pair of channels. Because
there are several FAULTj inputs, maximum of 4 for the FTM
module, each one of these inputs is activated by the
FAULTjEN bit in the FLTCTRL register.
26.3.1 Memory map

This section presents a high-level summary of the FTM registers and how they are
mapped.
The registers and bits of an unavailable function in the FTM remain in the memory map
and in the reset value, but they have no active function.
Note
Do not write in the region from the CNTIN register through the
PWMLOAD register when FTMEN = 0.

26.3.2 Register descriptions

Accesses to reserved addresses result in transfer errors. Registers for absent channels are
considered reserved.
FTM memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4003_8000 Status And Control (FTM0_SC) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.3/351
4003_8004 Counter (FTM0_CNT) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.4/353
4003_8008 Modulo (FTM0_MOD) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.5/353
4003_800C Channel (n) Status And Control (FTM0_C0SC) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.6/354
4003_8010 Channel (n) Value (FTM0_C0V) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.7/356
4003_8014 Channel (n) Status And Control (FTM0_C1SC) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.6/354
4003_804C Counter Initial Value (FTM0_CNTIN) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.8/357
4003_8050 Capture And Compare Status (FTM0_STATUS) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.9/358
4003_8054 Features Mode Selection (FTM0_MODE) 32 R/W 0000_0004h 26.3.10/360
4003_8058 Synchronization (FTM0_SYNC) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.11/361
4003_805C Initial State For Channels Output (FTM0_OUTINIT) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.12/364
4003_8060 Output Mask (FTM0_OUTMASK) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.13/365
4003_8064 Function For Linked Channels (FTM0_COMBINE) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.14/367
4003_8068 Deadtime Insertion Control (FTM0_DEADTIME) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.15/372
4003_806C FTM External Trigger (FTM0_EXTTRIG) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.16/373
4003_8070 Channels Polarity (FTM0_POL) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.17/375
4003_8074 Fault Mode Status (FTM0_FMS) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.18/377
4003_8078 Input Capture Filter Control (FTM0_FILTER) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.19/379
4003_807C Fault Control (FTM0_FLTCTRL) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.20/380
4003_8084 Configuration (FTM0_CONF) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.21/382
4003_8088 FTM Fault Input Polarity (FTM0_FLTPOL) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.22/383

FTM memory map (continued)

Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4003_808C Synchronization Configuration (FTM0_SYNCONF) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.23/385
4003_8090 FTM Inverting Control (FTM0_INVCTRL) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.24/387
4003_8094 FTM Software Output Control (FTM0_SWOCTRL) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.25/388
4003_8098 FTM PWM Load (FTM0_PWMLOAD) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.26/390
4003_A000 Status And Control (FTM2_SC) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.3/351
4003_A004 Counter (FTM2_CNT) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.4/353
4003_A008 Modulo (FTM2_MOD) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.5/353
4003_A00C Channel (n) Status And Control (FTM2_C0SC) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.6/354
4003_A010 Channel (n) Value (FTM2_C0V) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.7/356
4003_A014 Channel (n) Status And Control (FTM2_C1SC) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.6/354
4003_A04C Counter Initial Value (FTM2_CNTIN) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.8/357
4003_A050 Capture And Compare Status (FTM2_STATUS) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.9/358
4003_A054 Features Mode Selection (FTM2_MODE) 32 R/W 0000_0004h 26.3.10/360
4003_A058 Synchronization (FTM2_SYNC) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.11/361
4003_A05C Initial State For Channels Output (FTM2_OUTINIT) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.12/364
4003_A060 Output Mask (FTM2_OUTMASK) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.13/365
4003_A064 Function For Linked Channels (FTM2_COMBINE) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.14/367
4003_A068 Deadtime Insertion Control (FTM2_DEADTIME) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.15/372
4003_A06C FTM External Trigger (FTM2_EXTTRIG) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.16/373
4003_A070 Channels Polarity (FTM2_POL) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.17/375
4003_A074 Fault Mode Status (FTM2_FMS) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.18/377
4003_A078 Input Capture Filter Control (FTM2_FILTER) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.19/379
4003_A07C Fault Control (FTM2_FLTCTRL) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.20/380
4003_A084 Configuration (FTM2_CONF) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.21/382
4003_A088 FTM Fault Input Polarity (FTM2_FLTPOL) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.22/383

FTM memory map (continued)

Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4003_A08C Synchronization Configuration (FTM2_SYNCONF) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.23/385
4003_A090 FTM Inverting Control (FTM2_INVCTRL) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.24/387
4003_A094 FTM Software Output Control (FTM2_SWOCTRL) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.25/388
4003_A098 FTM PWM Load (FTM2_PWMLOAD) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 26.3.26/390
26.3.3 Status And Control (FTMx_SC)

SC contains the overflow status flag and control bits used to configure the interrupt
enable, FTM configuration, clock source, and prescaler factor. These controls relate to all
channels within this module.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TOF
R 0
CPWMS
TOIE CLKS PS
W 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

FTMx_SC field descriptions

Field Description
7 Timer Overflow Flag
TOF
Set by hardware when the FTM counter passes the value in the MOD register. The TOF bit is cleared by
reading the SC register while TOF is set and then writing a 0 to TOF bit. Writing a 1 to TOF has no effect.
If another FTM overflow occurs between the read and write operations, the write operation has no effect;
therefore, TOF remains set indicating an overflow has occurred. In this case, a TOF interrupt request is
not lost due to the clearing sequence for a previous TOF.
0 FTM counter has not overflowed.

1 FTM counter has overflowed.
6 Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable
TOIE
Enables FTM overflow interrupts.
0 Disable TOF interrupts. Use software polling.

1 Enable TOF interrupts. An interrupt is generated when TOF equals one.
5 Center-Aligned PWM Select
CPWMS
Selects CPWM mode. This mode configures the FTM to operate in Up-Down Counting mode.
This field is write protected. It can be written only when MODE[WPDIS] = 1.
0 FTM counter operates in Up Counting mode.

1 FTM counter operates in Up-Down Counting mode.
4–3 Clock Source Selection
CLKS
Selects one of the three FTM counter clock sources.
00 No clock selected. This in effect disables the FTM counter.

01 System clock
10 Fixed frequency clock
11 External clock
PS Prescale Factor Selection
Selects one of 8 division factors for the clock source selected by CLKS. The new prescaler factor affects
the clock source on the next system clock cycle after the new value is updated into the register bits.
000 Divide by 1
001 Divide by 2
010 Divide by 4
011 Divide by 8
100 Divide by 16
101 Divide by 32
110 Divide by 64
111 Divide by 128

26.3.4 Counter (FTMx_CNT)

The CNT register contains the FTM counter value.
Reset clears the CNT register. Writing any value to COUNT updates the counter with its
initial value, CNTIN.
When Debug is active, the FTM counter is frozen. This is the value that you may read.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 COUNT
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_CNT field descriptions

Field Description
COUNT Counter Value
26.3.5 Modulo (FTMx_MOD)

The Modulo register contains the modulo value for the FTM counter. After the FTM
counter reaches the modulo value, the overflow flag (TOF) becomes set at the next clock,
and the next value of FTM counter depends on the selected counting method; see
Counter.
Writing to the MOD register latches the value into a buffer. The MOD register is updated
with the value of its write buffer according to Registers updated from write buffers.
If FTMEN = 0, this write coherency mechanism may be manually reset by writing to the
SC register whether Debug is active or not.
Initialize the FTM counter, by writing to CNT, before writing to the MOD register to
avoid confusion about when the first counter overflow will occur.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
W
Reserved MOD
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

FTMx_MOD field descriptions

Field Description
Reserved
MOD Modulo Value
26.3.6 Channel (n) Status And Control (FTMx_CnSC)

CnSC contains the channel-interrupt-status flag and control bits used to configure the
interrupt enable, channel configuration, and pin function.
Table 26-69. Mode, edge, and level selection
DECAPEN COMBINE CPWMS MSnB:MSnA ELSnB:ELSnA Mode Configuration
X X X XX 0 Pin not used for FTM—revert the
channel pin to general purpose I/O
or other peripheral control
0 0 0 0 1 Input Capture Capture on
Rising Edge
Only
10 Capture on
Falling Edge
Only
11 Capture on
Rising or Falling
Edge
1 1 Output Compare Toggle Output
on match
10 Clear Output on
match
11 Set Output on
match
1X 10 Edge-Aligned High-true pulses
PWM (clear Output on
match)
X1 Low-true pulses
(set Output on
match)
1 XX 10 Center-Aligned High-true pulses
PWM (clear Output on
match-up)
X1 Low-true pulses
(set Output on
match-up)

Table 26-69. Mode, edge, and level selection (continued)

DECAPEN COMBINE CPWMS MSnB:MSnA ELSnB:ELSnA Mode Configuration
1 0 XX 10 Combine PWM High-true pulses
(set on channel
(n) match, and
clear on channel
(n+1) match)
X1 Low-true pulses
(clear on
channel (n)
match, and set
on channel (n
+1) match)
1 0 0 X0 See the Dual Edge One-Shot
following table Capture Capture mode
(Table 26-8).
X1 Continuous
Capture mode
Table 26-70. Dual Edge Capture mode — edge polarity selection

ELSnB ELSnA Channel Port Enable Detected Edges
0 0 Disabled No edge
0 1 Enabled Rising edge
1 0 Enabled Falling edge
1 1 Enabled Rising and falling edges
Address: Base address + Ch offset + (8d × i), where i=0d to 7d

Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 CHF 0 0
CHIE MSB MSA ELSB ELSA
W 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_CnSC field descriptions

Field Description
7 Channel Flag
CHF
Set by hardware when an event occurs on the channel. CHF is cleared by reading the CSC register while
CHnF is set and then writing a 0 to the CHF bit. Writing a 1 to CHF has no effect.

FTMx_CnSC field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
If another event occurs between the read and write operations, the write operation has no effect; therefore,
CHF remains set indicating an event has occurred. In this case a CHF interrupt request is not lost due to
the clearing sequence for a previous CHF.
0 No channel event has occurred.

1 A channel event has occurred.
6 Channel Interrupt Enable
CHIE
Enables channel interrupts.
0 Disable channel interrupts. Use software polling.

1 Enable channel interrupts.
5 Channel Mode Select
MSB
Used for further selections in the channel logic. Its functionality is dependent on the channel mode. See
Table 26-7.
4 Channel Mode Select
MSA
Used for further selections in the channel logic. Its functionality is dependent on the channel mode. See
Table 26-7.
3 Edge or Level Select
ELSB
The functionality of ELSB and ELSA depends on the channel mode. See Table 26-7.
2 Edge or Level Select
ELSA
The functionality of ELSB and ELSA depends on the channel mode. See Table 26-7.
26.3.7 Channel (n) Value (FTMx_CnV)

These registers contain the captured FTM counter value for the input modes or the match
value for the output modes.
In Input Capture, Capture Test, and Dual Edge Capture modes, any write to a CnV
register is ignored.
In output modes, writing to a CnV register latches the value into a buffer. A CnV register
is updated with the value of its write buffer according to Registers updated from write
buffers.

If FTMEN = 0, this write coherency mechanism may be manually reset by writing to the
CnSC register whether Debug mode is active or not.
Address: Base address + 10h offset + (8d × i), where i=0d to 7d
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 VAL
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_CnV field descriptions

Field Description
VAL Channel Value
Captured FTM counter value of the input modes or the match value for the output modes
26.3.8 Counter Initial Value (FTMx_CNTIN)

The Counter Initial Value register contains the initial value for the FTM counter.
Writing to the CNTIN register latches the value into a buffer. The CNTIN register is
updated with the value of its write buffer according to Registers updated from write
buffers.
When the FTM clock is initially selected, by writing a non-zero value to the CLKS bits,
the FTM counter starts with the value 0x0000. To avoid this behavior, before the first
write to select the FTM clock, write the new value to the the CNTIN register and then
initialize the FTM counter by writing any value to the CNT register.
Address: Base address + 4Ch offset
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
W
Reserved INIT
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_CNTIN field descriptions

Field Description
Reserved
INIT Initial Value Of The FTM Counter

26.3.9 Capture And Compare Status (FTMx_STATUS)

The STATUS register contains a copy of the status flag CHnF bit in CnSC for each FTM
channel for software convenience.
Each CHnF bit in STATUS is a mirror of CHnF bit in CnSC. All CHnF bits can be
checked using only one read of STATUS. All CHnF bits can be cleared by reading
STATUS followed by writing 0x00 to STATUS.
Hardware sets the individual channel flags when an event occurs on the channel. CHnF is
cleared by reading STATUS while CHnF is set and then writing a 0 to the CHnF bit.
Writing a 1 to CHnF has no effect.
If another event occurs between the read and write operations, the write operation has no
effect; therefore, CHnF remains set indicating an event has occurred. In this case, a CHnF
interrupt request is not lost due to the clearing sequence for a previous CHnF.
NOTE
The STATUS register should be used only in Combine mode.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CH7F
CH6F
CH5F
CH4F
CH3F
CH2F
CH1F
CH0F
R 0
W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

FTMx_STATUS field descriptions

Field Description
7 Channel 7 Flag
CH7F
See the register description.

6 Channel 6 Flag
CH6F

5 Channel 5 Flag
CH5F

4 Channel 4 Flag
CH4F

3 Channel 3 Flag
CH3F

2 Channel 2 Flag
CH2F

1 Channel 1 Flag
CH1F

0 Channel 0 Flag
CH0F


26.3.10 Features Mode Selection (FTMx_MODE)

This register contains the global enable bit for FTM-specific features and the control bits
used to configure:
• Fault control mode and interrupt
• Capture Test mode
• PWM synchronization
• Write protection
• Channel output initialization
These controls relate to all channels within this module.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PWMSYNC
0
CAPTEST
R
FAULTIE
FTMEN
WPDIS
FAULTM INIT
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
FTMx_MODE field descriptions

Field Description
7 Fault Interrupt Enable
FAULTIE
Enables the generation of an interrupt when a fault is detected by FTM and the FTM fault control is
enabled.
0 Fault control interrupt is disabled.

1 Fault control interrupt is enabled.
6–5 Fault Control Mode
FAULTM
Defines the FTM fault control mode.
00 Fault control is disabled for all channels.

01 Fault control is enabled for even channels only (channels 0, 2, 4, and 6), and the selected mode is
the manual fault clearing.

FTMx_MODE field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
10 Fault control is enabled for all channels, and the selected mode is the manual fault clearing.
11 Fault control is enabled for all channels, and the selected mode is the automatic fault clearing.
4 Capture Test Mode Enable
CAPTEST
Enables the capture test mode.
0 Capture test mode is disabled.

1 Capture test mode is enabled.
3 PWM Synchronization Mode
PWMSYNC
Selects which triggers can be used by MOD, CnV, OUTMASK, and FTM counter synchronization. See
PWM synchronization. The PWMSYNC bit configures the synchronization when SYNCMODE is 0.
0 No restrictions. Software and hardware triggers can be used by MOD, CnV, OUTMASK, and FTM
counter synchronization.
1 Software trigger can only be used by MOD and CnV synchronization, and hardware triggers can only
be used by OUTMASK and FTM counter synchronization.
2 Write Protection Disable
WPDIS
When write protection is enabled (WPDIS = 0), write protected bits cannot be written. When write
protection is disabled (WPDIS = 1), write protected bits can be written. The WPDIS bit is the negation of
the WPEN bit. WPDIS is cleared when 1 is written to WPEN. WPDIS is set when WPEN bit is read as a 1
and then 1 is written to WPDIS. Writing 0 to WPDIS has no effect.
0 Write protection is enabled.

1 Write protection is disabled.
1 Initialize The Channels Output
INIT
When a 1 is written to INIT bit the channels output is initialized according to the state of their
corresponding bit in the OUTINIT register. Writing a 0 to INIT bit has no effect.
The INIT bit is always read as 0.
0 FTM Enable
FTMEN
0 Only the TPM-compatible registers (first set of registers) can be used without any restriction. Do not
use the FTM-specific registers.
1 All registers including the FTM-specific registers (second set of registers) are available for use with no
restrictions.
26.3.11 Synchronization (FTMx_SYNC)
This register configures the PWM synchronization.

A synchronization event can perform the synchronized update of MOD, CV, and
OUTMASK registers with the value of their write buffer and the FTM counter
initialization.

NOTE
The software trigger, SWSYNC bit, and hardware triggers
TRIG0, TRIG1, and TRIG2 bits have a potential conflict if
used together when SYNCMODE = 0. Use only hardware or
software triggers but not both at the same time, otherwise
unpredictable behavior is likely to happen.
The selection of the loading point, CNTMAX and CNTMIN
bits, is intended to provide the update of MOD, CNTIN, and
CnV registers across all enabled channels simultaneously. The
use of the loading point selection together with SYNCMODE =
0 and hardware trigger selection, TRIG0, TRIG1, or TRIG2
bits, is likely to result in unpredictable behavior.
The synchronization event selection also depends on the
PWMSYNC (MODE register) and SYNCMODE (SYNCONF
register) bits. See PWM synchronization.

Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SYNCHOM
R 0
SWSYNC
CNTMAX
CNTMIN
REINIT
TRIG2
TRIG1
TRIG0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_SYNC field descriptions

Field Description
7 PWM Synchronization Software Trigger
SWSYNC
Selects the software trigger as the PWM synchronization trigger. The software trigger happens when a 1 is
written to SWSYNC bit.
0 Software trigger is not selected.

1 Software trigger is selected.
6 PWM Synchronization Hardware Trigger 2
TRIG2

FTMx_SYNC field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
Enables hardware trigger 2 to the PWM synchronization. Hardware trigger 2 happens when a rising edge
is detected at the trigger 2 input signal.
0 Trigger is disabled.
1 Trigger is enabled.
TRIG1
Enables hardware trigger 1 to the PWM synchronization. Hardware trigger 1 happens when a rising edge
is detected at the trigger 1 input signal.
TRIG0
Enables hardware trigger 0 to the PWM synchronization. Hardware trigger 0 occurs when a rising edge is
detected at the trigger 0 input signal.
3 Output Mask Synchronization
SYNCHOM
Selects when the OUTMASK register is updated with the value of its buffer.
0 OUTMASK register is updated with the value of its buffer in all rising edges of the system clock.
1 OUTMASK register is updated with the value of its buffer only by the PWM synchronization.
2 FTM Counter Reinitialization By Synchronization (FTM counter synchronization)
REINIT
Determines if the FTM counter is reinitialized when the selected trigger for the synchronization is detected.
The REINIT bit configures the synchronization when SYNCMODE is zero.
0 FTM counter continues to count normally.

1 FTM counter is updated with its initial value when the selected trigger is detected.
1 Maximum Loading Point Enable
CNTMAX
Selects the maximum loading point to PWM synchronization. See Boundary cycle and loading points. If
CNTMAX is 1, the selected loading point is when the FTM counter reaches its maximum value (MOD
register).
0 The maximum loading point is disabled.

1 The maximum loading point is enabled.
0 Minimum Loading Point Enable
CNTMIN
Selects the minimum loading point to PWM synchronization. See Boundary cycle and loading points. If
CNTMIN is one, the selected loading point is when the FTM counter reaches its minimum value (CNTIN
register).
0 The minimum loading point is disabled.

1 The minimum loading point is enabled.

26.3.12 Initial State For Channels Output (FTMx_OUTINIT)

Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0
CH7OI
CH6OI
CH5OI
CH4OI
CH3OI
CH2OI
CH1OI
CH0OI
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_OUTINIT field descriptions

Field Description
7 Channel 7 Output Initialization Value
CH7OI
Selects the value that is forced into the channel output when the initialization occurs.
0 The initialization value is 0.

CH6OI

CH5OI

CH4OI

CH3OI

FTMx_OUTINIT field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
CH2OI

CH1OI

CH0OI

26.3.13 Output Mask (FTMx_OUTMASK)

This register provides a mask for each FTM channel. The mask of a channel determines if
its output responds, that is, it is masked or not, when a match occurs. This feature is used
for BLDC control where the PWM signal is presented to an electric motor at specific
times to provide electronic commutation.
Any write to the OUTMASK register, stores the value in its write buffer. The register is
updated with the value of its write buffer according to PWM synchronization.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0
CH7OM
CH6OM
CH5OM
CH4OM
CH3OM
CH2OM
CH1OM
CH0OM
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

FTMx_OUTMASK field descriptions

Field Description
7 Channel 7 Output Mask
CH7OM
Defines if the channel output is masked or unmasked.
0 Channel output is not masked. It continues to operate normally.

1 Channel output is masked. It is forced to its inactive state.
CH6OM

CH5OM

CH4OM

CH3OM

CH2OM

CH1OM

CH0OM


26.3.14 Function For Linked Channels (FTMx_COMBINE)

This register contains the control bits used to configure the fault control, synchronization,
deadtime insertion, Dual Edge Capture mode, Complementary, and Combine mode for
each pair of channels (n) and (n+1), where n equals 0, 2, 4, and 6.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
DECAPEN3
DECAPEN2
0 0
COMBINE3
COMBINE2
FAULTEN3
FAULTEN2
R
SYNCEN3
SYNCEN2
DECAP3
DECAP2
COMP3
COMP2
DTEN3
DTEN2
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DECAPEN1
DECAPEN0
0 COMBINE1 0
COMBINE0
FAULTEN1
FAULTEN0
R
SYNCEN1
SYNCEN0
DECAP1
DECAP0
COMP1
COMP0
DTEN1
DTEN0
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_COMBINE field descriptions

Field Description
30 Fault Control Enable For n = 6
FAULTEN3
Enables the fault control in channels (n) and (n+1).
0 The fault control in this pair of channels is disabled.

1 The fault control in this pair of channels is enabled.
29 Synchronization Enable For n = 6
SYNCEN3
Enables PWM synchronization of registers C(n)V and C(n+1)V.
0 The PWM synchronization in this pair of channels is disabled.

1 The PWM synchronization in this pair of channels is enabled.
28 Deadtime Enable For n = 6
DTEN3
Enables the deadtime insertion in the channels (n) and (n+1).
0 The deadtime insertion in this pair of channels is disabled.

1 The deadtime insertion in this pair of channels is enabled.

FTMx_COMBINE field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
27 Dual Edge Capture Mode Captures For n = 6
DECAP3
Enables the capture of the FTM counter value according to the channel (n) input event and the
configuration of the dual edge capture bits.
This field applies only when FTMEN = 1 and DECAPEN = 1.
DECAP bit is cleared automatically by hardware if dual edge capture – one-shot mode is selected and
when the capture of channel (n+1) event is made.
0 The dual edge captures are inactive.

1 The dual edge captures are active.
26 Dual Edge Capture Mode Enable For n = 6
DECAPEN3
Enables the Dual Edge Capture mode in the channels (n) and (n+1). This bit reconfigures the function of
MSnA, ELSnB:ELSnA and ELS(n+1)B:ELS(n+1)A bits in Dual Edge Capture mode according to Table
26-7.
This field applies only when FTMEN = 1.
0 The Dual Edge Capture mode in this pair of channels is disabled.

1 The Dual Edge Capture mode in this pair of channels is enabled.
25 Complement Of Channel (n) for n = 6
COMP3
Enables Complementary mode for the combined channels. In Complementary mode the channel (n+1)
output is the inverse of the channel (n) output.
0 The channel (n+1) output is the same as the channel (n) output.
1 The channel (n+1) output is the complement of the channel (n) output.
24 Combine Channels For n = 6
COMBINE3
Enables the combine feature for channels (n) and (n+1).
0 Channels (n) and (n+1) are independent.

1 Channels (n) and (n+1) are combined.
FAULTEN2

SYNCEN2



Field Description
DTEN2

DECAP2

DECAPEN2
26-7.

17 Complement Of Channel (n) For n = 4
COMP2
COMBINE2

FAULTEN1


Field Description
SYNCEN1

DTEN1

DECAP1
DECAP bit is cleared automatically by hardware if Dual Edge Capture – One-Shot mode is selected and

DECAPEN1
26-7.

COMP1
COMBINE1



Field Description
FAULTEN0

SYNCEN0

DTEN0

DECAP0

DECAPEN0
26-7.

COMP0


Field Description
COMBINE0

26.3.15 Deadtime Insertion Control (FTMx_DEADTIME)

This register selects the deadtime prescaler factor and deadtime value. All FTM channels
use this clock prescaler and this deadtime value for the deadtime insertion.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 DTPS DTVAL
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_DEADTIME field descriptions

Field Description
7–6 Deadtime Prescaler Value
DTPS
Selects the division factor of the system clock. This prescaled clock is used by the deadtime counter.
0x Divide the system clock by 1.

10 Divide the system clock by 4.
11 Divide the system clock by 16.
DTVAL Deadtime Value
Selects the deadtime insertion value for the deadtime counter. The deadtime counter is clocked by a
scaled version of the system clock. See the description of DTPS.
Deadtime insert value = (DTPS × DTVAL).
DTVAL selects the number of deadtime counts inserted as follows:
When DTVAL is 0, no counts are inserted.
When DTVAL is 1, 1 count is inserted.
When DTVAL is 2, 2 counts are inserted.
This pattern continues up to a possible 63 counts.

26.3.16 FTM External Trigger (FTMx_EXTTRIG)

This register:
• Indicates when a channel trigger was generated
• Enables the generation of a trigger when the FTM counter is equal to its initial value
• Selects which channels are used in the generation of the channel triggers
Several channels can be selected to generate multiple triggers in one PWM period.
Channels 6 and 7 are not used to generate channel triggers.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Reserved
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TRIGF
R
INITTRIGEN
CH1TRIG
CH0TRIG
CH5TRIG
CH4TRIG
CH3TRIG
CH2TRIG
Reserved
W 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

FTMx_EXTTRIG field descriptions

Field Description
Reserved
7 Channel Trigger Flag
TRIGF
Set by hardware when a channel trigger is generated. Clear TRIGF by reading EXTTRIG while TRIGF is
set and then writing a 0 to TRIGF. Writing a 1 to TRIGF has no effect.
If another channel trigger is generated before the clearing sequence is completed, the sequence is reset
so TRIGF remains set after the clear sequence is completed for the earlier TRIGF.
0 No channel trigger was generated.

1 A channel trigger was generated.
6 Initialization Trigger Enable
INITTRIGEN
Enables the generation of the trigger when the FTM counter is equal to the CNTIN register.
0 The generation of initialization trigger is disabled.

1 The generation of initialization trigger is enabled.
5 Channel 1 Trigger Enable
CH1TRIG
Enables the generation of the channel trigger when the FTM counter is equal to the CnV register.
0 The generation of the channel trigger is disabled.

1 The generation of the channel trigger is enabled.
CH0TRIG

CH5TRIG

CH4TRIG

CH3TRIG

CH2TRIG

FTMx_EXTTRIG field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
26.3.17 Channels Polarity (FTMx_POL)

This register defines the output polarity of the FTM channels.
NOTE
The safe value that is driven in a channel output when the fault
control is enabled and a fault condition is detected is the
inactive state of the channel. That is, the safe value of a channel
is the value of its POL bit.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R
W
Reserved
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
W
Reserved POL7 POL6 POL5 POL4 POL3 POL2 POL1 POL0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_POL field descriptions

Field Description
Reserved
7 Channel 7 Polarity
POL7
Defines the polarity of the channel output.
0 The channel polarity is active high.

1 The channel polarity is active low.
POL6

POL5

FTMx_POL field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
POL4

POL3

POL2

POL1

POL0


26.3.18 Fault Mode Status (FTMx_FMS)

This register contains the fault detection flags, write protection enable bit, and the logic
OR of the enabled fault inputs.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FAULTF3
FAULTF2
FAULTF1
FAULTF0
FAULTIN
FAULTF
R 0 0
WPEN
W 0 0 0 0 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_FMS field descriptions

Field Description
7 Fault Detection Flag
FAULTF
Represents the logic OR of the individual FAULTFj bits where j = 3, 2, 1, 0. Clear FAULTF by reading the
FMS register while FAULTF is set and then writing a 0 to FAULTF while there is no existing fault condition
at the enabled fault inputs. Writing a 1 to FAULTF has no effect.
If another fault condition is detected in an enabled fault input before the clearing sequence is completed,
the sequence is reset so FAULTF remains set after the clearing sequence is completed for the earlier fault
condition. FAULTF is also cleared when FAULTFj bits are cleared individually.
0 No fault condition was detected.

1 A fault condition was detected.

FTMx_FMS field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
6 Write Protection Enable
WPEN
The WPEN bit is the negation of the WPDIS bit. WPEN is set when 1 is written to it. WPEN is cleared
when WPEN bit is read as a 1 and then 1 is written to WPDIS. Writing 0 to WPEN has no effect.
0 Write protection is disabled. Write protected bits can be written.

1 Write protection is enabled. Write protected bits cannot be written.
5 Fault Inputs
FAULTIN
Represents the logic OR of the enabled fault inputs after their filter (if their filter is enabled) when fault
control is enabled.
0 The logic OR of the enabled fault inputs is 0.

1 The logic OR of the enabled fault inputs is 1.
3 Fault Detection Flag 3
FAULTF3
Set by hardware when fault control is enabled, the corresponding fault input is enabled and a fault
condition is detected at the fault input.
Clear FAULTF3 by reading the FMS register while FAULTF3 is set and then writing a 0 to FAULTF3 while
there is no existing fault condition at the corresponding fault input. Writing a 1 to FAULTF3 has no effect.
FAULTF3 bit is also cleared when FAULTF bit is cleared.
If another fault condition is detected at the corresponding fault input before the clearing sequence is
completed, the sequence is reset so FAULTF3 remains set after the clearing sequence is completed for
the earlier fault condition.
0 No fault condition was detected at the fault input.

1 A fault condition was detected at the fault input.
FAULTF2

FAULTF1

FTMx_FMS field descriptions (continued)

Field Description

FAULTF0

26.3.19 Input Capture Filter Control (FTMx_FILTER)

This register selects the filter value for the inputs of channels.
Channels 4, 5, 6 and 7 do not have an input filter.
NOTE
Writing to the FILTER register has immediate effect and must
be done only when the channels 0, 1, 2, and 3 are not in input
modes. Failure to do this could result in a missing valid signal.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
W
Reserved CH3FVAL CH2FVAL CH1FVAL CH0FVAL
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_FILTER field descriptions

Field Description
Reserved
15–12 Channel 3 Input Filter
CH3FVAL
Selects the filter value for the channel input.
The filter is disabled when the value is zero.

FTMx_FILTER field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
CH2FVAL
CH1FVAL
CH0FVAL Channel 0 Input Filter

26.3.20 Fault Control (FTMx_FLTCTRL)
This register selects the filter value for the fault inputs, enables the fault inputs and the
fault inputs filter.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FAULT3EN
FAULT2EN
FAULT1EN
FAULT0EN
FFLTR3EN
FFLTR2EN
FFLTR1EN
FFLTR0EN
R 0
FFVAL
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_FLTCTRL field descriptions

Field Description
11–8 Fault Input Filter
FFVAL
Selects the filter value for the fault inputs.
The fault filter is disabled when the value is zero.

FTMx_FLTCTRL field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
NOTE: Writing to this field has immediate effect and must be done only when the fault control or all fault
inputs are disabled. Failure to do this could result in a missing fault detection.
7 Fault Input 3 Filter Enable
FFLTR3EN
Enables the filter for the fault input.
0 Fault input filter is disabled.

1 Fault input filter is enabled.
FFLTR2EN

FFLTR1EN

FFLTR0EN

3 Fault Input 3 Enable
FAULT3EN
Enables the fault input.
0 Fault input is disabled.

1 Fault input is enabled.
FAULT2EN

FAULT1EN

FTMx_FLTCTRL field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
FAULT0EN

26.3.21 Configuration (FTMx_CONF)
This register selects the number of times that the FTM counter overflow should occur
before the TOF bit to be set, the FTM behavior in Debug modes, the use of an external
global time base, and the global time base signal generation.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0
GTBEOUT
R
GTBEEN
BDMMODE NUMTOF
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_CONF field descriptions

Field Description
10 Global Time Base Output
GTBEOUT
Enables the global time base signal generation to other FTMs.
0 A global time base signal generation is disabled.

1
A global time base signal generation is enabled.

FTMx_CONF field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
9 Global Time Base Enable
GTBEEN
Configures the FTM to use an external global time base signal that is generated by another FTM.
0 Use of an external global time base is disabled.

1
Use of an external global time base is enabled.
7–6 Debug Mode
BDMMODE
Selects the FTM behavior in Debug mode. See Debug mode.
NUMTOF TOF Frequency
Selects the ratio between the number of counter overflows to the number of times the TOF bit is set.
NUMTOF = 0: The TOF bit is set for each counter overflow.
NUMTOF = 1: The TOF bit is set for the first counter overflow but not for the next overflow.
NUMTOF = 2: The TOF bit is set for the first counter overflow but not for the next 2 overflows.
NUMTOF = 3: The TOF bit is set for the first counter overflow but not for the next 3 overflows.
This pattern continues up to a maximum of 31.
26.3.22 FTM Fault Input Polarity (FTMx_FLTPOL)

This register defines the fault inputs polarity.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0
FLT3POL
FLT2POL
FLT1POL
FLT0POL
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

FTMx_FLTPOL field descriptions

Field Description
3 Fault Input 3 Polarity
FLT3POL
Defines the polarity of the fault input.
0 The fault input polarity is active high. A 1 at the fault input indicates a fault.
1 The fault input polarity is active low. A 0 at the fault input indicates a fault.
FLT2POL
FLT1POL
FLT0POL

26.3.23 Synchronization Configuration (FTMx_SYNCONF)

This register selects the PWM synchronization configuration, SWOCTRL, INVCTRL
and CNTIN registers synchronization, if FTM clears the TRIGj bit, where j = 0, 1, 2,
when the hardware trigger j is detected.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
HWRSTCNT
0
HWWRBUF
R
HWINVC
HWSOC
HWOM
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
HWTRIGMOD
SYNCMODE
0 SWRSTCNT 0 0 0
SWWRBUF
R
SWINVC
SWSOC
CNTINC
SWOM
SWOC
INVC
E
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_SYNCONF field descriptions

Field Description
20 Software output control synchronization is activated by a hardware trigger.
HWSOC
0 A hardware trigger does not activate the SWOCTRL register synchronization.
1 A hardware trigger activates the SWOCTRL register synchronization.
19 Inverting control synchronization is activated by a hardware trigger.
HWINVC
0 A hardware trigger does not activate the INVCTRL register synchronization.
1 A hardware trigger activates the INVCTRL register synchronization.
18 Output mask synchronization is activated by a hardware trigger.
HWOM
0 A hardware trigger does not activate the OUTMASK register synchronization.
1 A hardware trigger activates the OUTMASK register synchronization.
17 MOD, CNTIN, and CV registers synchronization is activated by a hardware trigger.
HWWRBUF
0 A hardware trigger does not activate MOD, CNTIN, and CV registers synchronization.
1 A hardware trigger activates MOD, CNTIN, and CV registers synchronization.
16 FTM counter synchronization is activated by a hardware trigger.
HWRSTCNT
0 A hardware trigger does not activate the FTM counter synchronization.
1 A hardware trigger activates the FTM counter synchronization.

FTMx_SYNCONF field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
12 Software output control synchronization is activated by the software trigger.
SWSOC
0 The software trigger does not activate the SWOCTRL register synchronization.
1 The software trigger activates the SWOCTRL register synchronization.
11 Inverting control synchronization is activated by the software trigger.
SWINVC
0 The software trigger does not activate the INVCTRL register synchronization.
1 The software trigger activates the INVCTRL register synchronization.
10 Output mask synchronization is activated by the software trigger.
SWOM
0 The software trigger does not activate the OUTMASK register synchronization.
1 The software trigger activates the OUTMASK register synchronization.
9 MOD, CNTIN, and CV registers synchronization is activated by the software trigger.
SWWRBUF
0 The software trigger does not activate MOD, CNTIN, and CV registers synchronization.
1 The software trigger activates MOD, CNTIN, and CV registers synchronization.
8 FTM counter synchronization is activated by the software trigger.
SWRSTCNT
0 The software trigger does not activate the FTM counter synchronization.
1 The software trigger activates the FTM counter synchronization.
7 Synchronization Mode
SYNCMODE
Selects the PWM Synchronization mode.
0 Legacy PWM synchronization is selected.

1 Enhanced PWM synchronization is selected.
5 SWOCTRL Register Synchronization
SWOC
0 SWOCTRL register is updated with its buffer value at all rising edges of system clock.
1 SWOCTRL register is updated with its buffer value by the PWM synchronization.
4 INVCTRL Register Synchronization
INVC
0 INVCTRL register is updated with its buffer value at all rising edges of system clock.
1 INVCTRL register is updated with its buffer value by the PWM synchronization.
2 CNTIN Register Synchronization
CNTINC
0 CNTIN register is updated with its buffer value at all rising edges of system clock.
1 CNTIN register is updated with its buffer value by the PWM synchronization.
0 Hardware Trigger Mode
HWTRIGMODE

FTMx_SYNCONF field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 FTM clears the TRIGj bit when the hardware trigger j is detected, where j = 0, 1,2.
1 FTM does not clear the TRIGj bit when the hardware trigger j is detected, where j = 0, 1,2.
26.3.24 FTM Inverting Control (FTMx_INVCTRL)

This register controls when the channel (n) output becomes the channel (n+1) output, and
channel (n+1) output becomes the channel (n) output. Each INVmEN bit enables the
inverting operation for the corresponding pair channels m.
This register has a write buffer. The INVmEN bit is updated by the INVCTRL register
synchronization.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0
INV3EN
INV2EN
INV1EN
INV0EN
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_INVCTRL field descriptions

Field Description
3 Pair Channels 3 Inverting Enable
INV3EN
0 Inverting is disabled.
1 Inverting is enabled.
INV2EN
INV1EN

FTMx_INVCTRL field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
INV0EN
26.3.25 FTM Software Output Control (FTMx_SWOCTRL)

This register enables software control of channel (n) output and defines the value forced
to the channel (n) output:
• The CHnOC bits enable the control of the corresponding channel (n) output by
software.
• The CHnOCV bits select the value that is forced at the corresponding channel (n)
output.
This register has a write buffer. The fields are updated by the SWOCTRL register
synchronization.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
CH7OCV
CH6OCV
CH5OCV
CH4OCV
CH3OCV
CH2OCV
CH1OCV
CH0OCV
CH7OC
CH6OC
CH5OC
CH4OC
CH3OC
CH2OC
CH1OC
CH0OC
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_SWOCTRL field descriptions

Field Description
15 Channel 7 Software Output Control Value
CH7OCV
0 The software output control forces 0 to the channel output.
CH6OCV

FTMx_SWOCTRL field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
CH5OCV
CH4OCV
CH3OCV
CH2OCV
CH1OCV
CH0OCV
7 Channel 7 Software Output Control Enable
CH7OC
0 The channel output is not affected by software output control.
1 The channel output is affected by software output control.
CH6OC
CH5OC
CH4OC
CH3OC
CH2OC

FTMx_SWOCTRL field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
CH1OC
CH0OC
26.3.26 FTM PWM Load (FTMx_PWMLOAD)

Enables the loading of the MOD, CNTIN, C(n)V, and C(n+1)V registers with the values
of their write buffers when the FTM counter changes from the MOD register value to its
next value or when a channel (j) match occurs. A match occurs for the channel (j) when
FTM counter = C(j)V.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 0
CH7SEL
CH6SEL
CH5SEL
CH4SEL
CH3SEL
CH2SEL
CH1SEL
CH0SEL
LDOK
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FTMx_PWMLOAD field descriptions

Field Description
9 Load Enable
LDOK
Enables the loading of the MOD, CNTIN, and CV registers with the values of their write buffers.
0 Loading updated values is disabled.

1 Loading updated values is enabled.

FTMx_PWMLOAD field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
7 Channel 7 Select
CH7SEL
0 Do not include the channel in the matching process.
1 Include the channel in the matching process.
6 Channel 6 Select
CH6SEL
5 Channel 5 Select
CH5SEL
4 Channel 4 Select
CH4SEL
3 Channel 3 Select
CH3SEL
2 Channel 2 Select
CH2SEL
1 Channel 1 Select
CH1SEL
0 Channel 0 Select
CH0SEL

The notation used in this document to represent the counters and the generation of the
signals is shown in the following figure.

FTM counting is up.

Channel (n) is in high-true EPWM mode.
PS[2:0] = 001
CNTIN = 0x0000
MOD = 0x0004
CnV = 0x0002
prescaler counter 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
FTM counter 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2
channel (n) output
counter channel (n) counter channel (n) counter channel (n)

overflow match overflow match overflow match
Figure 26-122. Notation used
26.4.1 Clock source

The FTM has only one clock domain: the system clock.
26.4.1.1 Counter clock source

The CLKS[1:0] bits in the SC register select one of three possible clock sources for the
FTM counter or disable the FTM counter. After any MCU reset, CLKS[1:0] = 0:0 so no
clock source is selected.
The CLKS[1:0] bits may be read or written at any time. Disabling the FTM counter by
writing 0:0 to the CLKS[1:0] bits does not affect the FTM counter value or other
registers.
The fixed frequency clock is an alternative clock source for the FTM counter that allows
the selection of a clock other than the system clock or an external clock. This clock input
is defined by chip integration. Refer to the chip specific documentation for further
information. Due to FTM hardware implementation limitations, the frequency of the
fixed frequency clock must not exceed 1/2 of the system clock frequency.

The external clock passes through a synchronizer clocked by the system clock to assure
that counter transitions are properly aligned to system clock transitions.Therefore, to
meet Nyquist criteria considering also jitter, the frequency of the external clock source
must not exceed 1/4 of the system clock frequency.
26.4.2 Prescaler
The selected counter clock source passes through a prescaler that is a 7-bit counter. The
value of the prescaler is selected by the PS[2:0] bits. The following figure shows an
example of the prescaler counter and FTM counter.
FTM counting is up.
PS[2:0] = 001
CNTIN = 0x0000
MOD = 0x0003
selected input clock
prescaler counter 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
FTM counter 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1
Figure 26-123. Example of the prescaler counter
26.4.3 Counter
The FTM has a 16-bit counter that is used by the channels either for input or output
modes. The FTM counter clock is the selected clock divided by the prescaler.
The FTM counter has these modes of operation:
• Up counting
• Up-down counting
26.4.3.1 Up counting
Up counting is selected when:
• CPWMS = 0

CNTIN defines the starting value of the count and MOD defines the final value of the
count, see the following figure. The value of CNTIN is loaded into the FTM counter, and
the counter increments until the value of MOD is reached, at which point the counter is
reloaded with the value of CNTIN.
The FTM period when using up counting is (MOD – CNTIN + 0x0001) × period of the
FTM counter clock.
The TOF bit is set when the FTM counter changes from MOD to CNTIN.
FTM counting is up.
CNTIN = 0xFFFC (in two's complement is equal to -4)
MOD = 0x0004
FTM counter (in decimal values) 4 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 -4 -3
TOF bit
set TOF bit set TOF bit set TOF bit
period of FTM counter clock
period of counting = (MOD - CNTIN + 0x0001) x period of FTM counter clock
Figure 26-124. Example of FTM up and signed counting
Table 26-179. FTM counting based on CNTIN value

When Then
CNTIN = 0x0000 The FTM counting is equivalent to TPM up counting, that is,
up and unsigned counting. See the following figure.
CNTIN[15] = 1 The initial value of the FTM counter is a negative number in
two's complement, so the FTM counting is up and signed.
CNTIN[15] = 0 and CNTIN ≠ 0x0000 The initial value of the FTM counter is a positive number, so
the FTM counting is up and unsigned.

FTM counting is up
CNTIN = 0x0000
MOD = 0x0004
FTM counter 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2
TOF bit
set TOF bit set TOF bit set TOF bit
period of counting = (MOD - CNTIN + 0x0001) x period of FTM counter clock

= (MOD + 0x0001) x period of FTM counter clock
Figure 26-125. Example of FTM up counting with CNTIN = 0x0000
Note
• FTM operation is only valid when the value of the CNTIN
register is less than the value of the MOD register, either in
the unsigned counting or signed counting. It is the
responsibility of the software to ensure that the values in
the CNTIN and MOD registers meet this requirement. Any
values of CNTIN and MOD that do not satisfy this criteria
can result in unpredictable behavior.
• MOD = CNTIN is a redundant condition. In this case, the
FTM counter is always equal to MOD and the TOF bit is
set in each rising edge of the FTM counter clock.
• When MOD = 0x0000, CNTIN = 0x0000, for example
after reset, and FTMEN = 1, the FTM counter remains
stopped at 0x0000 until a non-zero value is written into the
MOD or CNTIN registers.
• Setting CNTIN to be greater than the value of MOD is not
recommended as this unusual setting may make the FTM
operation difficult to comprehend. However, there is no
restriction on this configuration, and an example is shown
in the following figure.

FTM counting is up
MOD = 0x0005
CNTIN = 0x0015
load of CNTIN load of CNTIN
FTM counter 0x0005 0x0015 0x0016 ... 0xFFFE 0xFFFF 0x0000 0x0001 0x0002 0x0003 0x0004 0x0005 0x0015 0x0016 ...
...
TOF bit
set TOF bit set TOF bit
Figure 26-126. Example of up counting when the value of CNTIN is greater than the
value of MOD
26.4.3.2 Up-down counting

Up-down counting is selected when:
• CPWMS = 1
CNTIN defines the starting value of the count and MOD defines the final value of the
count. The value of CNTIN is loaded into the FTM counter, and the counter increments
until the value of MOD is reached, at which point the counter is decremented until it
returns to the value of CNTIN and the up-down counting restarts.
The FTM period when using up-down counting is 2 × (MOD – CNTIN) × period of the
FTM counter clock.
The TOF bit is set when the FTM counter changes from MOD to (MOD – 1).
If (CNTIN = 0x0000), the FTM counting is equivalent to TPM up-down counting, that is,
up-down and unsigned counting. See the following figure.

FTM counting is up-down
CNTIN = 0x0000
MOD = 0x0004
FTM counter 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
TOF bit
set TOF bit set TOF bit

period of counting = 2 x (MOD - CNTIN) x period of FTM counter clock
= 2 x MOD x period of FTM counter clock
Figure 26-127. Example of up-down counting when CNTIN = 0x0000
Note
It is expected that the up-down counting be used only with
CNTIN = 0x0000.
26.4.3.3 Free running counter

If (FTMEN = 0) and (MOD = 0x0000 or MOD = 0xFFFF), the FTM counter is a free
running counter. In this case, the FTM counter runs free from 0x0000 through 0xFFFF
and the TOF bit is set when the FTM counter changes from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. See the
following figure.
FTMEN = 0
MOD = 0x0000
FTM counter ... 0x0003 0x0004 ... 0xFFFE 0xFFFF 0x0000 0x0001 0x0002 0x0003 0x0004 0x0005 0x0006 ...
TOF bit
set TOF bit
Figure 26-128. Example when the FTM counter is free running
The FTM counter is also a free running counter when:

• FTMEN = 1
• CPWMS = 0
• CNTIN = 0x0000, and
• MOD = 0xFFFF

26.4.3.4 Counter reset

Any one of the following cases resets the FTM counter to the value in the CNTIN register
and the channels output to its initial value, except for channels in Output Compare mode.
• Any write to CNT.
• FTM counter synchronization.
26.4.3.5 When the TOF bit is set

The NUMTOF[4:0] bits define the number of times that the FTM counter overflow
should occur before the TOF bit to be set. If NUMTOF[4:0] = 0x00, then the TOF bit is
set at each FTM counter overflow.
Initialize the FTM counter, by writing to CNT, after writing to the NUMTOF[4:0] bits to
avoid confusion about when the first counter overflow will occur.
FTM counter
NUMTOF[4:0] 0x02
TOF counter 0x01 0x02 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x00 0x01 0x02
set TOF bit
Figure 26-129. Periodic TOF when NUMTOF = 0x02
FTM counter
NUMTOF[4:0] 0x00
TOF counter 0x00
set TOF bit
Figure 26-130. Periodic TOF when NUMTOF = 0x00

26.4.4 Input Capture mode

The Input Capture mode is selected when:
• DECAPEN = 0
• COMBINE = 0
• CPWMS = 0
• MSnB:MSnA = 0:0, and
• ELSnB:ELSnA ≠ 0:0
When a selected edge occurs on the channel input, the current value of the FTM counter
is captured into the CnV register, at the same time the CHnF bit is set and the channel
interrupt is generated if enabled by CHnIE = 1. See the following figure.
When a channel is configured for input capture, the FTMxCHn pin is an edge-sensitive
input. ELSnB:ELSnA control bits determine which edge, falling or rising, triggers input-
capture event. Note that the maximum frequency for the channel input signal to be
detected correctly is system clock divided by 4, which is required to meet Nyquist criteria
for signal sampling.
Writes to the CnV register is ignored in Input Capture mode.
While in Debug mode, the input capture function works as configured. When a selected
edge event occurs, the FTM counter value, which is frozen because of Debug, is captured
into the CnV register and the CHnF bit is set.
was rising
edge selected?
is filter
enabled? channel (n) interrupt
0 0 CHnIE
CHnF
synchronizer rising edge
0 1
channel (n) input DQ DQ edge
detector CnV
Filter* 1
system clock CLK CLK 1
falling edge
0 0
was falling
edge selected?
* Filtering function is only available in the inputs of channel 0, 1, 2, and 3 FTM counter
Figure 26-131. Input Capture mode
If the channel input does not have a filter enabled, then the input signal is always delayed
3 rising edges of the system clock, that is, two rising edges to the synchronizer plus one
more rising edge to the edge detector. In other words, the CHnF bit is set on the third
rising edge of the system clock after a valid edge occurs on the channel input.

Note
The Input Capture mode must be used only with CNTIN =
0x0000.
26.4.4.1 Filter for Input Capture mode

The filter function is only available on channels 0, 1, 2, and 3.
First, the input signal is synchronized by the system clock. Following synchronization,
the input signal enters the filter block. See the following figure.
CHnFVAL[3:0]
Logic to control
channel (n) input after the filter counter
the synchronizer filter output
S Q
filter counter Logic to define
C
the filter output
divided by 4
CLK
system clock
Figure 26-132. Channel input filter
When there is a state change in the input signal, the counter is reset and starts counting
up. As long as the new state is stable on the input, the counter continues to increment.
When the counter is equal to CHnFVAL[3:0], the state change of the input signal is
validated. It is then transmitted as a pulse edge to the edge detector.
If the opposite edge appears on the input signal before it can be validated, the counter is
reset. At the next input transition, the counter starts counting again. Any pulse that is
shorter than the minimum value selected by CHnFVAL[3:0] (× 4 system clocks) is
regarded as a glitch and is not passed on to the edge detector. A timing diagram of the
input filter is shown in the following figure.
The filter function is disabled when CHnFVAL[3:0] bits are zero. In this case, the input
signal is delayed 3 rising edges of the system clock. If (CHnFVAL[3:0] ≠ 0000), then the
input signal is delayed by the minimum pulse width (CHnFVAL[3:0] × 4 system clocks)
plus a further 4 rising edges of the system clock: two rising edges to the synchronizer,
one rising edge to the filter output, plus one more to the edge detector. In other words,
CHnF is set (4 + 4 × CHnFVAL[3:0]) system clock periods after a valid edge occurs on
the channel input.
The clock for the counter in the channel input filter is the system clock divided by 4.

system clock divided by 4
channel (n) input

after the synchronizer
counter
CHnFVAL[3:0] = 0010
(binary value)
Time
filter output
Figure 26-133. Channel input filter example
26.4.5 Output Compare mode

The Output Compare mode is selected when:
• DECAPEN = 0
• COMBINE = 0
• CPWMS = 0, and
• MSnB:MSnA = 0:1
In Output Compare mode, the FTM can generate timed pulses with programmable
position, polarity, duration, and frequency. When the counter matches the value in the
CnV register of an output compare channel, the channel (n) output can be set, cleared, or
toggled.
When a channel is initially configured to Toggle mode, the previous value of the channel
output is held until the first output compare event occurs.
The CHnF bit is set and the channel (n) interrupt is generated if CHnIE = 1 at the channel
(n) match (FTM counter = CnV).
MOD = 0x0005
CnV = 0x0003
counter channel (n) counter channel (n) counter
overflow match overflow match overflow
CNT ... 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 ...
channel (n) output previous value
CHnF bit previous value
TOF bit
Figure 26-134. Example of the Output Compare mode when the match toggles the
channel output

MOD = 0x0005
CnV = 0x0003
CNT ... 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 ...
TOF bit
Figure 26-135. Example of the Output Compare mode when the match clears the
channel output
MOD = 0x0005
CnV = 0x0003
CNT ... 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 ...
TOF bit
Figure 26-136. Example of the Output Compare mode when the match sets the channel
output
If (ELSnB:ELSnA = 0:0) when the counter reaches the value in the CnV register, the
CHnF bit is set and the channel (n) interrupt is generated if CHnIE = 1, however the
channel (n) output is not modified and controlled by FTM.
Note
The Output Compare mode must be used only with CNTIN =
0x0000.
26.4.6 Edge-Aligned PWM (EPWM) mode

The Edge-Aligned mode is selected when:
• DECAPEN = 0
• COMBINE = 0
• CPWMS = 0, and
• MSnB = 1
The EPWM period is determined by (MOD − CNTIN + 0x0001) and the pulse width
(duty cycle) is determined by (CnV − CNTIN).

The CHnF bit is set and the channel (n) interrupt is generated if CHnIE = 1 at the channel
(n) match (FTM counter = CnV), that is, at the end of the pulse width.
This type of PWM signal is called edge-aligned because the leading edges of all PWM
signals are aligned with the beginning of the period, which is the same for all channels
within an FTM.
counter overflow counter overflow counter overflow
period
pulse
width
channel (n) output
channel (n) match channel (n) match channel (n) match
Figure 26-137. EPWM period and pulse width with ELSnB:ELSnA = 1:0
If (ELSnB:ELSnA = 0:0) when the counter reaches the value in the CnV register, the
CHnF bit is set and the channel (n) interrupt is generated if CHnIE = 1, however the
channel (n) output is not controlled by FTM.
If (ELSnB:ELSnA = 1:0), then the channel (n) output is forced high at the counter
overflow when the CNTIN register value is loaded into the FTM counter, and it is forced
low at the channel (n) match (FTM counter = CnV). See the following figure.
MOD = 0x0008
CnV = 0x0005
counter channel (n) counter
overflow match overflow
CNT ... 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 ...
channel (n) output
TOF bit
Figure 26-138. EPWM signal with ELSnB:ELSnA = 1:0
If (ELSnB:ELSnA = X:1), then the channel (n) output is forced low at the counter
overflow when the CNTIN register value is loaded into the FTM counter, and it is forced
high at the channel (n) match (FTM counter = CnV). See the following figure.

MOD = 0x0008
CnV = 0x0005 counter channel (n) counter
overflow match overflow
CNT ... 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 ...
channel (n) output
TOF bit
Figure 26-139. EPWM signal with ELSnB:ELSnA = X:1
If (CnV = 0x0000), then the channel (n) output is a 0% duty cycle EPWM signal and
CHnF bit is not set even when there is the channel (n) match. If (CnV > MOD), then the
channel (n) output is a 100% duty cycle EPWM signal and CHnF bit is not set even when
there is the channel (n) match. Therefore, MOD must be less than 0xFFFF in order to get
a 100% duty cycle EPWM signal.
Note
The EPWM mode must be used only with CNTIN = 0x0000.
26.4.7 Center-Aligned PWM (CPWM) mode

The Center-Aligned mode is selected when:
• DECAPEN = 0
• COMBINE = 0, and
• CPWMS = 1
The CPWM pulse width (duty cycle) is determined by 2 × (CnV − CNTIN) and the
period is determined by 2 × (MOD − CNTIN). See the following figure. MOD must be
kept in the range of 0x0001 to 0x7FFF because values outside this range can produce
ambiguous results.
In the CPWM mode, the FTM counter counts up until it reaches MOD and then counts
down until it reaches CNTIN.
The CHnF bit is set and channel (n) interrupt is generated (if CHnIE = 1) at the channel
(n) match (FTM counter = CnV) when the FTM counting is down (at the begin of the
pulse width) and when the FTM counting is up (at the end of the pulse width).
This type of PWM signal is called center-aligned because the pulse width centers for all
channels are aligned with the value of CNTIN.
The other channel modes are not compatible with the up-down counter (CPWMS = 1).
Therefore, all FTM channels must be used in CPWM mode when (CPWMS = 1).
FTM counter = CNTIN
counter overflow channel (n) match channel (n) match counter overflow
FTM counter = (FTM counting (FTM counting FTM counter =
MOD is down) is up) MOD
channel (n) output

pulse width
2 x (CnV - CNTIN)
period
2 x (MOD - CNTINCNTIN)
Figure 26-140. CPWM period and pulse width with ELSnB:ELSnA = 1:0
If (ELSnB:ELSnA = 0:0) when the FTM counter reaches the value in the CnV register,
the CHnF bit is set and the channel (n) interrupt is generated (if CHnIE = 1), however the
channel (n) output is not controlled by FTM.
If (ELSnB:ELSnA = 1:0), then the channel (n) output is forced high at the channel (n)
match (FTM counter = CnV) when counting down, and it is forced low at the channel (n)
match when counting up. See the following figure.
MOD = 0x0008 counter counter
CnV = 0x0005 overflow overflow
channel (n) match in channel (n) match in channel (n) match in
down counting up counting down counting
CNT ... 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 ...
channel (n) output
TOF bit
Figure 26-141. CPWM signal with ELSnB:ELSnA = 1:0
If (ELSnB:ELSnA = X:1), then the channel (n) output is forced low at the channel (n)
match (FTM counter = CnV) when counting down, and it is forced high at the channel (n)
match when counting up. See the following figure.
MOD = 0x0008 counter counter
overflow overflow
CnV = 0x0005
channel (n) match in channel (n) match in channel (n) match in
down counting up counting down counting
CNT ... 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 ...
channel (n) output
TOF bit
Figure 26-142. CPWM signal with ELSnB:ELSnA = X:1

If (CnV = 0x0000) or CnV is a negative value, that is (CnV[15] = 1), then the channel (n)
output is a 0% duty cycle CPWM signal and CHnF bit is not set even when there is the
channel (n) match.
If CnV is a positive value, that is (CnV[15] = 0), (CnV ≥ MOD), and (MOD ≠ 0x0000),
then the channel (n) output is a 100% duty cycle CPWM signal and CHnF bit is not set
even when there is the channel (n) match. This implies that the usable range of periods
set by MOD is 0x0001 through 0x7FFE, 0x7FFF if you do not need to generate a 100%
duty cycle CPWM signal. This is not a significant limitation because the resulting period
is much longer than required for normal applications.
The CPWM mode must not be used when the FTM counter is a free running counter.
Note
The CPWM mode must be used only with CNTIN = 0x0000.
26.4.8 Combine mode

The Combine mode is selected when:
• FTMEN = 1
• DECAPEN = 0
• COMBINE = 1, and
• CPWMS = 0
In Combine mode, an even channel (n) and adjacent odd channel (n+1) are combined to
generate a PWM signal in the channel (n) output.
In the Combine mode, the PWM period is determined by (MOD − CNTIN + 0x0001) and
the PWM pulse width (duty cycle) is determined by (|C(n+1)V − C(n)V|).
The CHnF bit is set and the channel (n) interrupt is generated (if CHnIE = 1) at the
channel (n) match (FTM counter = C(n)V). The CH(n+1)F bit is set and the channel (n
+1) interrupt is generated, if CH(n+1)IE = 1, at the channel (n+1) match (FTM counter =
C(n+1)V).
If (ELSnB:ELSnA = 1:0), then the channel (n) output is forced low at the beginning of
the period (FTM counter = CNTIN) and at the channel (n+1) match (FTM counter = C(n
+1)V). It is forced high at the channel (n) match (FTM counter = C(n)V). See the
following figure.

If (ELSnB:ELSnA = X:1), then the channel (n) output is forced high at the beginning of
the period (FTM counter = CNTIN) and at the channel (n+1) match (FTM counter = C(n
+1)V). It is forced low at the channel (n) match (FTM counter = C(n)V). See the
following figure.
In Combine mode, the ELS(n+1)B and ELS(n+1)A bits are not used in the generation of
the channels (n) and (n+1) output. However, if (ELSnB:ELSnA = 0:0) then the channel
(n) output is not controlled by FTM, and if (ELS(n+1)B:ELS(n+1)A = 0:0) then the
channel (n+1) output is not controlled by FTM.
channel (n+1) match
FTM counter
channel (n) match
channel (n) output

with ELSnB:ELSnA = 1:0
channel (n) output

with ELSnB:ELSnA = X:1
Figure 26-143. Combine mode
The following figures illustrate the PWM signals generation using Combine mode.
FTM counter
MOD
C(n+1)V
C(n)V
CNTIN
channel (n) output

channel (n) output

Figure 26-144. Channel (n) output if (CNTIN < C(n)V < MOD) and (CNTIN < C(n+1)V <
MOD) and (C(n)V < C(n+1)V)

FTM counter
MOD = C(n+1)V
C(n)V
CNTIN
channel (n) output

channel (n) output

Figure 26-145. Channel (n) output if (CNTIN < C(n)V < MOD) and (C(n+1)V = MOD)
FTM counter
MOD
C(n+1)V
C(n)V = CNTIN
channel (n) output

channel (n) output
Figure 26-146. Channel (n) output if (C(n)V = CNTIN) and (CNTIN < C(n+1)V < MOD)
FTM counter
MOD = C(n+1)V
C(n)V
CNTIN
not fully 100% duty cycle

channel (n) output
channel (n) output not fully 0% duty cycle

Figure 26-147. Channel (n) output if (CNTIN < C(n)V < MOD) and (C(n)V is Almost Equal
to CNTIN) and (C(n+1)V = MOD)

FTM counter
MOD
C(n+1)V
C(n)V = CNTIN

channel (n) output
channel (n) output not fully 0% duty cycle

Figure 26-148. Channel (n) output if (C(n)V = CNTIN) and (CNTIN < C(n+1)V < MOD) and
(C(n+1)V is Almost Equal to MOD)
FTM counter
C(n+1)V
MOD
CNTIN
C(n)V
channel (n) output 0% duty cycle

channel (n) output

with ELSnB:ELSnA = X:1 100% duty cycle
Figure 26-149. Channel (n) output if C(n)V and C(n+1)V are not between CNTIN and MOD

FTM counter
MOD
C(n+1)V = C(n)V
CNTIN


MOD) and (C(n)V = C(n+1)V)
FTM counter
MOD
C(n)V =
C(n+1)V = CNTIN

channel (n) output
100% duty cycle
Figure 26-151. Channel (n) output if (C(n)V = C(n+1)V = CNTIN)

MOD = FTM counter
C(n+1)V =
C(n)V
CNTIN
channel (n) output

0% duty cycle
channel (n) output

100% duty cycle
Figure 26-152. Channel (n) output if (C(n)V = C(n+1)V = MOD)

FTM counter
MOD
C(n)V
C(n+1)V
CNTIN
channel (n) match

is ignored

MOD) and (C(n)V > C(n+1)V)
FTM counter
MOD
C(n+1)V
CNTIN
C(n)V


Figure 26-154. Channel (n) output if (C(n)V < CNTIN) and (CNTIN < C(n+1)V < MOD)

FTM counter
MOD
C(n)V
CNTIN
C(n+1)V
channel (n) output

channel (n) output

Figure 26-155. Channel (n) output if (C(n+1)V < CNTIN) and (CNTIN < C(n)V < MOD)
FTM counter
C(n)V
MOD
C(n+1)V
CNTIN


Figure 26-156. Channel (n) output if (C(n)V > MOD) and (CNTIN < C(n+1)V < MOD)

FTM counter
C(n+1)V
MOD
C(n)V
CNTIN
channel (n) output

channel (n) output

Figure 26-157. Channel (n) output if (C(n+1)V > MOD) and (CNTIN < C(n)V < MOD)
FTM counter
C(n+1)V
MOD = C(n)V
CNTIN
channel (n) output

channel (n) output

Figure 26-158. Channel (n) output if (C(n+1)V > MOD) and (CNTIN < C(n)V = MOD)
26.4.8.1 Asymmetrical PWM

In Combine mode, the control of the PWM signal first edge, when the channel (n) match
occurs, that is, FTM counter = C(n)V, is independent of the control of the PWM signal
second edge, when the channel (n+1) match occurs, that is, FTM counter = C(n+1)V. So,
Combine mode allows the generation of asymmetrical PWM signals.
26.4.9 Complementary mode

The Complementary mode is selected when:

• FTMEN = 1
• DECAPEN = 0
• COMBINE = 1
• CPWMS = 0, and
• COMP = 1
In Complementary mode, the channel (n+1) output is the inverse of the channel (n)
output.
So, the channel (n+1) output is the same as the channel (n) output when:
• FTMEN = 1
• DECAPEN = 0
• COMBINE = 1
• CPWMS = 0, and
• COMP = 0
channel (n+1) match
FTM counter
channel (n) match
channel (n) output

channel (n+1) output

with COMP = 0

with COMP = 1
Figure 26-159. Channel (n+1) output in Complementary mode with (ELSnB:ELSnA = 1:0)
channel (n+1) match
FTM counter
channel (n) match
channel (n) output


with COMP = 0

with COMP = 1
Figure 26-160. Channel (n+1) output in Complementary mode with (ELSnB:ELSnA = X:1)
26.4.10 Registers updated from write buffers

26.4.10.1 CNTIN register update

The following table describes when CNTIN register is updated:
Table 26-180. CNTIN register update
When Then CNTIN register is updated
CLKS[1:0] = 0:0 When CNTIN register is written, independent of FTMEN bit.
• FTMEN = 0, or At the next system clock after CNTIN was written.
• CNTINC = 0
• FTMEN = 1, By the CNTIN register synchronization.
• SYNCMODE = 1, and
• CNTINC = 1
26.4.10.2 MOD register update

The following table describes when MOD register is updated:
Table 26-181. MOD register update
When Then MOD register is updated
CLKS[1:0] = 0:0 When MOD register is written, independent of FTMEN bit.
• CLKS[1:0] ≠ 0:0, and According to the CPWMS bit, that is:
• FTMEN = 0
• If the selected mode is not CPWM then MOD register is updated after MOD
register was written and the FTM counter changes from MOD to CNTIN. If
the FTM counter is at free-running counter mode then this update occurs
when the FTM counter changes from 0xFFFF to 0x0000.
• If the selected mode is CPWM then MOD register is updated after MOD
register was written and the FTM counter changes from MOD to (MOD –
0x0001).
• CLKS[1:0] ≠ 0:0, and By the MOD register synchronization.

• FTMEN = 1
26.4.10.3 CnV register update

The following table describes when CnV register is updated:
Table 26-182. CnV register update
When Then CnV register is updated
CLKS[1:0] = 0:0 When CnV register is written, independent of FTMEN bit.
• CLKS[1:0] ≠ 0:0, and According to the selected mode, that is:
• FTMEN = 0

Table 26-182. CnV register update (continued)

When Then CnV register is updated
• If the selected mode is Output Compare, then CnV register is updated on the
next FTM counter change, end of the prescaler counting, after CnV register
was written.
• If the selected mode is EPWM, then CnV register is updated after CnV
register was written and the FTM counter changes from MOD to CNTIN. If
the FTM counter is at free-running counter mode then this update occurs
when the FTM counter changes from 0xFFFF to 0x0000.
• If the selected mode is CPWM, then CnV register is updated after CnV
register was written and the FTM counter changes from MOD to (MOD –
0x0001).
• CLKS[1:0] ≠ 0:0, and According to the selected mode, that is:
• FTMEN = 1
• If the selected mode is output compare then CnV register is updated
according to the SYNCEN bit. If (SYNCEN = 0) then CnV register is updated
after CnV register was written at the next change of the FTM counter, the
end of the prescaler counting. If (SYNCEN = 1) then CnV register is updated
by the C(n)V and C(n+1)V register synchronization.
• If the selected mode is not output compare and (SYNCEN = 1) then CnV
register is updated by the C(n)V and C(n+1)V register synchronization.
26.4.11 PWM synchronization

The PWM synchronization provides an opportunity to update the MOD, CNTIN, CnV,
OUTMASK, INVCTRL and SWOCTRL registers with their buffered value and force the
FTM counter to the CNTIN register value.
Note
• The PWM synchronization must be used only in Combine
mode.
• The legacy PWM synchronization (SYNCMODE = 0) is a
subset of the enhanced PWM synchronization
(SYNCMODE = 1). Thus, only the enhanced PWM
synchronization must be used.
26.4.11.1 Hardware trigger

Three hardware trigger signal inputs of the FTM module are enabled when TRIGn = 1,
where n = 0, 1 or 2 corresponding to each one of the input signals, respectively. The
hardware trigger input n is synchronized by the system clock. The PWM synchronization
with hardware trigger is initiated when a rising edge is detected at the enabled hardware
trigger inputs.

If (HWTRIGMODE = 0) then the TRIGn bit is cleared when 0 is written to it or when the
trigger n event is detected.
In this case, if two or more hardware triggers are enabled (for example, TRIG0 and
TRIG1 = 1) and only trigger 1 event occurs, then only TRIG1 bit is cleared. If a trigger n
event occurs together with a write setting TRIGn bit, then the synchronization is initiated,
but TRIGn bit remains set due to the write operation.
system clock
write 1 to TRIG0 bit
TRIG0 bit
trigger_0 input
synchronized trigger_0
by system clock
trigger 0 event
Note
All hardware trigger inputs have the same behavior.
Figure 26-161. Hardware trigger event with HWTRIGMODE = 0
If HWTRIGMODE = 1, then the TRIGn bit is only cleared when 0 is written to it.
NOTE
The HWTRIGMODE bit must be 1 only with enhanced PWM
synchronization (SYNCMODE = 1).
26.4.11.2 Software trigger

A software trigger event occurs when 1 is written to the SYNC[SWSYNC] bit. The
SWSYNC bit is cleared when 0 is written to it or when the PWM synchronization,
initiated by the software event, is completed.
If another software trigger event occurs (by writing another 1 to the SWSYNC bit) at the
same time the PWM synchronization initiated by the previous software trigger event is
ending, a new PWM synchronization is started and the SWSYNC bit remains equal to 1.
If SYNCMODE = 0 then the SWSYNC bit is also cleared by FTM according to
PWMSYNC and REINIT bits. In this case if (PWMSYNC = 1) or (PWMSYNC = 0 and
REINIT = 0) then SWSYNC bit is cleared at the next selected loading point after that the

software trigger event occurred; see Boundary cycle and loading points and the following
figure. If (PWMSYNC = 0) and (REINIT = 1) then SWSYNC bit is cleared when the
software trigger event occurs.
If SYNCMODE = 1 then the SWSYNC bit is also cleared by FTM according to the
SWRSTCNT bit. If SWRSTCNT = 0 then SWSYNC bit is cleared at the next selected
loading point after that the software trigger event occurred; see the following figure. If
SWRSTCNT = 1 then SWSYNC bit is cleared when the software trigger event occurs.
system clock
write 1 to SWSYNC bit
SWSYNC bit
software trigger event
PWM synchronization
selected loading point
Figure 26-162. Software trigger event
26.4.11.3 Boundary cycle and loading points

The boundary cycle definition is important for the loading points for the registers MOD,
CNTIN, and C(n)V.
In Up counting mode, the boundary cycle is defined as when the counter wraps to its
initial value (CNTIN). If in Up-down counting mode, then the boundary cycle is defined
as when the counter turns from down to up counting and when from up to down counting.
The following figure shows the boundary cycles and the loading points for the registers.
In the Up Counting mode, the loading points are enabled if one of CNTMIN or CTMAX
bits are 1. In the Up-Down Counting mode, the loading points are selected by CNTMIN
and CNTMAX bits, as indicated in the figure. These loading points are safe places for
register updates thus allowing a smooth transitions in PWM waveform generation.
For both counting modes, if neither CNTMIN nor CNTMAX are 1, then the boundary
cycles are not used as loading points for registers updates. See the register
synchronization descriptions in the following sections for details.

loading points if CNTMAX = 1 or CNTMIN = 1
CNT = MOD -> CNTIN
up counting mode
loading points if CNTMAX = 1
CNT = (MOD - 0x0001) -> MOD
up-down counting mode
CNT = (CNTIN + 0x0001) -> CNTIN
loading points if CNTMIN = 1
Figure 26-163. Boundary cycles and loading points
26.4.11.4 MOD register synchronization

The MOD register synchronization updates the MOD register with its buffer value. This
synchronization is enabled if (FTMEN = 1).
The MOD register synchronization can be done by either the enhanced PWM
synchronization (SYNCMODE = 1) or the legacy PWM synchronization (SYNCMODE
= 0). However, it is expected that the MOD register be synchronized only by the
enhanced PWM synchronization.
In the case of enhanced PWM synchronization, the MOD register synchronization
depends on SWWRBUF, SWRSTCNT, HWWRBUF, and HWRSTCNT bits according to
this flowchart:

begin
legacy =0
PWM synchronization SYNCMODE
bit ?
=1
enhanced PWM synchronization
MOD register is MOD register is

updated by software trigger updated by hardware trigger
SWWRBUF = 0 HWWRBUF = 0
bit ? bit ?
=1 =1
end end
software hardware
trigger trigger
0= TRIGn
=0
SWSYNC
bit ? bit ?
=1
=1
FTM counter is reset by
software trigger
=0
=1 wait hardware trigger n
SWRSTCNT
bit ?
wait the next selected HWTRIGMODE

=1
loading point bit ?
=0
update MOD with update MOD with

its buffer value its buffer value clear TRIGn bit
clear SWSYNC bit clear SWSYNC bit FTM counter is reset by

hardware trigger
0= =1
HWRSTCNT
end end bit ?
wait the next selected

loading point
update MOD with update MOD with

its buffer value its buffer value
end end
Figure 26-164. MOD register synchronization flowchart
In the case of legacy PWM synchronization, the MOD register synchronization depends
on PWMSYNC and REINIT bits according to the following description.
If (SYNCMODE = 0), (PWMSYNC = 0), and (REINIT = 0), then this synchronization is
made on the next selected loading point after an enabled trigger event takes place. If the
trigger event was a software trigger, then the SWSYNC bit is cleared on the next selected

loading point. If the trigger event was a hardware trigger, then the trigger enable bit
(TRIGn) is cleared according to Hardware trigger. Examples with software and hardware
triggers follow.
system clock
SWSYNC bit
MOD register is updated
Figure 26-165. MOD synchronization with (SYNCMODE = 0), (PWMSYNC = 0), (REINIT =
0), and software trigger was used
system clock
TRIG0 bit
trigger 0 event
Figure 26-166. MOD synchronization with (SYNCMODE = 0), (HWTRIGMODE = 0),

(PWMSYNC = 0), (REINIT = 0), and a hardware trigger was used
If (SYNCMODE = 0), (PWMSYNC = 0), and (REINIT = 1), then this synchronization is
made on the next enabled trigger event. If the trigger event was a software trigger, then
the SWSYNC bit is cleared according to the following example. If the trigger event was a
hardware trigger, then the TRIGn bit is cleared according to Hardware trigger. Examples
with software and hardware triggers follow.

system clock
SWSYNC bit
Figure 26-167. MOD synchronization with (SYNCMODE = 0), (PWMSYNC = 0), (REINIT =
1), and software trigger was used
system clock
TRIG0 bit
trigger 0 event
Figure 26-168. MOD synchronization with (SYNCMODE = 0), (HWTRIGMODE = 0),

(PWMSYNC = 0), (REINIT = 1), and a hardware trigger was used
If (SYNCMODE = 0) and (PWMSYNC = 1), then this synchronization is made on the

next selected loading point after the software trigger event takes place. The SWSYNC bit
is cleared on the next selected loading point:
system clock
SWSYNC bit
Figure 26-169. MOD synchronization with (SYNCMODE = 0) and (PWMSYNC = 1)

26.4.11.5 CNTIN register synchronization

The CNTIN register synchronization updates the CNTIN register with its buffer value.
This synchronization is enabled if (FTMEN = 1), (SYNCMODE = 1), and (CNTINC =
1). The CNTIN register synchronization can be done only by the enhanced PWM
synchronization (SYNCMODE = 1). The synchronization mechanism is the same as the
MOD register synchronization done by the enhanced PWM synchronization; see MOD
register synchronization.
26.4.11.6 C(n)V and C(n+1)V register synchronization

The C(n)V and C(n+1)V registers synchronization updates the C(n)V and C(n+1)V
registers with their buffer values.
This synchronization is enabled if (FTMEN = 1) and (SYNCEN = 1). The
synchronization mechanism is the same as the MOD register synchronization. However,
it is expected that the C(n)V and C(n+1)V registers be synchronized only by the
enhanced PWM synchronization (SYNCMODE = 1).
26.4.11.7 OUTMASK register synchronization

The OUTMASK register synchronization updates the OUTMASK register with its buffer
value.
The OUTMASK register can be updated at each rising edge of system clock
(SYNCHOM = 0), by the enhanced PWM synchronization (SYNCHOM = 1 and
SYNCMODE = 1) or by the legacy PWM synchronization (SYNCHOM = 1 and
SYNCMODE = 0). However, it is expected that the OUTMASK register be synchronized
only by the enhanced PWM synchronization.
In the case of enhanced PWM synchronization, the OUTMASK register synchronization
depends on SWOM and HWOM bits. See the following flowchart:

begin
update OUTMASK register at

each rising edge of system clock update OUTMASK register by
0= =1 PWM synchronization
SYNCHOM
bit ?
1= =0
SYNCMODE
no = rising edge
of system bit ?
clock ?
legacy
= yes PWM synchronization
update OUTMASK
with its buffer value
end
OUTMASK is updated OUTMASK is updated

by software trigger by hardware trigger
1= SWOM =0 0= HWOM =1
bit ? bit ?
software end end hardware

0=
SWSYNC trigger TRIGn =0
trigger
bit ? bit ?
=1
=1
wait hardware trigger n

update OUTMASK
update OUTMASK
end with its buffer value
=1
HWTRIGMODE
bit ?
=0
clear TRIGn bit
end
Figure 26-170. OUTMASK register synchronization flowchart
In the case of legacy PWM synchronization, the OUTMASK register synchronization

depends on PWMSYNC bit according to the following description.

If (SYNCMODE = 0), (SYNCHOM = 1), and (PWMSYNC = 0), then this

synchronization is done on the next enabled trigger event. If the trigger event was a
software trigger, then the SWSYNC bit is cleared on the next selected loading point. If
the trigger event was a hardware trigger, then the TRIGn bit is cleared according to
Hardware trigger. Examples with software and hardware triggers follow.
system clock
SWSYNC bit
OUTMASK register is updated SWSYNC bit is cleared
Figure 26-171. OUTMASK synchronization with (SYNCMODE = 0), (SYNCHOM = 1),

(PWMSYNC = 0) and software trigger was used
system clock
TRIG0 bit
trigger 0 event
OUTMASK register is updated and

TRIG0 bit is cleared
Figure 26-172. OUTMASK synchronization with (SYNCMODE = 0), (HWTRIGMODE = 0),

(SYNCHOM = 1), (PWMSYNC = 0), and a hardware trigger was used
If (SYNCMODE = 0), (SYNCHOM = 1), and (PWMSYNC = 1), then this

synchronization is made on the next enabled hardware trigger. The TRIGn bit is cleared
according to Hardware trigger. An example with a hardware trigger follows.

system clock
TRIG0 bit
trigger 0 event
OUTMASK register is updated and

TRIG0 bit is cleared
Figure 26-173. OUTMASK synchronization with (SYNCMODE = 0), (HWTRIGMODE = 0),

(SYNCHOM = 1), (PWMSYNC = 1), and a hardware trigger was used
26.4.11.8 INVCTRL register synchronization

The INVCTRL register synchronization updates the INVCTRL register with its buffer
value.
The INVCTRL register can be updated at each rising edge of system clock (INVC = 0) or
by the enhanced PWM synchronization (INVC = 1 and SYNCMODE = 1) according to
the following flowchart.
In the case of enhanced PWM synchronization, the INVCTRL register synchronization
depends on SWINVC and HWINVC bits.

begin
update INVCTRL register at
each rising edge of system clock update INVCTRL register by
PWM synchronization
0= INVC =1
bit ?
1= =0
SYNCMODE
bit ?
no = rising edge
of system end
clock ?
= yes
update INVCTRL
end
INVCTRL is updated INVCTRL is updated

1= SWINVC =0 0= HWINVC =1
bit ? bit ?

0=
trigger
bit ? bit ?
=1
=1
update INVCTRL
update INVCTRL
=1
HWTRIGMODE
bit ?
=0
clear TRIGn bit
end
Figure 26-174. INVCTRL register synchronization flowchart
26.4.11.9 SWOCTRL register synchronization

The SWOCTRL register synchronization updates the SWOCTRL register with its buffer
value.

The SWOCTRL register can be updated at each rising edge of system clock (SWOC = 0)
or by the enhanced PWM synchronization (SWOC = 1 and SYNCMODE = 1) according
to the following flowchart.
In the case of enhanced PWM synchronization, the SWOCTRL register synchronization
depends on SWSOC and HWSOC bits.
begin
update SWOCTRL register at
each rising edge of system clock update SWOCTRL register by
0= =1 PWM synchronization
SWOC
bit ?
1= =0
SYNCMODE
bit ?
no = rising edge
of system end
clock ?
= yes
update SWOCTRL
end
SWOCTRL is updated SWOCTRL is updated

1= SWSOC =0 0= HWSOC =1
bit ? bit ?

0=
trigger
bit ? bit ?
=1
=1
update SWOCTRL
update SWOCTRL
=1
HWTRIGMODE
bit ?
=0
clear TRIGn bit
end
Figure 26-175. SWOCTRL register synchronization flowchart

26.4.11.10 FTM counter synchronization

The FTM counter synchronization is a mechanism that allows the FTM to restart the
PWM generation at a certain point in the PWM period. The channels outputs are forced
to their initial value, except for channels in Output Compare mode, and the FTM counter
is forced to its initial counting value defined by CNTIN register.
The following figure shows the FTM counter synchronization. Note that after the
synchronization event occurs, the channel (n) is set to its initial value and the channel (n
+1) is not set to its initial value due to a specific timing of this figure in which the
deadtime insertion prevents this channel output from transitioning to 1. If no deadtime
insertion is selected, then the channel (n+1) transitions to logical value 1 immediately
after the synchronization event occurs.
channel (n+1) match
FTM counter
channel (n) match
channel (n) output

(after deadtime
insertion)

(after deadtime
insertion)
synchronization event
Figure 26-176. FTM counter synchronization
The FTM counter synchronization can be done by either the enhanced PWM
synchronization (SYNCMODE = 1) or the legacy PWM synchronization (SYNCMODE
= 0). However, the FTM counter must be synchronized only by the enhanced PWM
synchronization.
In the case of enhanced PWM synchronization, the FTM counter synchronization
depends on SWRSTCNT and HWRSTCNT bits according to the following flowchart.

begin
legacy =0
PWM synchronization SYNCMODE
bit ?
=1
FTM counter is reset by FTM counter is reset by

software trigger hardware trigger
=0
1= =0 =1
SWRSTCNT HWRSTCNT
bit ? bit ?
end end hardware

TRIGn =0
=0 software
SWSYNC trigger
bit ?
trigger
bit ?
=1
=1
update FTM counter with wait hardware trigger n

CNTIN register value
update FTM counter with

update the channels outputs CNTIN register value
with their initial value
update the channels outputs

clear SWSYNC bit with their initial value
end
=1
HWTRIGMODE
bit ?
=0
clear TRIGn bit
end
Figure 26-177. FTM counter synchronization flowchart
In the case of legacy PWM synchronization, the FTM counter synchronization depends
on REINIT and PWMSYNC bits according to the following description.
If (SYNCMODE = 0), (REINIT = 1), and (PWMSYNC = 0) then this synchronization is
made on the next enabled trigger event. If the trigger event was a software trigger then
the SWSYNC bit is cleared according to the following example. If the trigger event was a
hardware trigger then the TRIGn bit is cleared according to Hardware trigger. Examples
with software and hardware triggers follow.

system clock
SWSYNC bit
FTM counter is updated with the CNTIN register value

and channel outputs are forced to their initial value
Figure 26-178. FTM counter synchronization with (SYNCMODE = 0), (REINIT = 1),
(PWMSYNC = 0), and software trigger was used
system clock
TRIG0 bit
trigger 0 event

Figure 26-179. FTM counter synchronization with (SYNCMODE = 0), (HWTRIGMODE = 0),
(REINIT = 1), (PWMSYNC = 0), and a hardware trigger was used
If (SYNCMODE = 0), (REINIT = 1), and (PWMSYNC = 1) then this synchronization is

made on the next enabled hardware trigger. The TRIGn bit is cleared according to
Hardware trigger.
system clock
TRIG0 bit
trigger 0 event

Figure 26-180. FTM counter synchronization with (SYNCMODE = 0), (HWTRIGMODE = 0),
(REINIT = 1), (PWMSYNC = 1), and a hardware trigger was used

26.4.12 Inverting
The invert functionality swaps the signals between channel (n) and channel (n+1)
outputs. The inverting operation is selected when:
• FTMEN = 1
• DECAPEN = 0
• COMBINE = 1
• COMP = 1
• CPWMS = 0, and
• INVm = 1 (where m represents a channel pair)
The INVm bit in INVCTRL register is updated with its buffer value according to
INVCTRL register synchronization
In High-True (ELSnB:ELSnA = 1:0) Combine mode, the channel (n) output is forced low
at the beginning of the period (FTM counter = CNTIN), forced high at the channel (n)
match and forced low at the channel (n+1) match. If the inverting is selected, the channel
(n) output behavior is changed to force high at the beginning of the PWM period, force
low at the channel (n) match and force high at the channel (n+1) match. See the following
figure.

channel (n+1) match
FTM counter
channel (n) match
channel (n) output

before the inverting

write 1 to INV(m) bit
INV(m) bit buffer
INVCTRL register
synchronization
INV(m) bit
channel (n) output

after the inverting

after the inverting
NOTE
INV(m) bit selects the inverting to the pair channels (n) and (n+1).
Figure 26-181. Channels (n) and (n+1) outputs after the inverting in High-True
(ELSnB:ELSnA = 1:0) Combine mode
Note that the ELSnB:ELSnA bits value should be considered because they define the
active state of the channels outputs. In Low-True (ELSnB:ELSnA = X:1) Combine mode,
the channel (n) output is forced high at the beginning of the period, forced low at the
channel (n) match and forced high at the channel (n+1) match. When inverting is
selected, the channels (n) and (n+1) present waveforms as shown in the following figure.

channel (n+1) match
FTM counter
channel (n) match
channel (n) output


write 1 to INV(m) bit
INV(m) bit buffer
INVCTRL register
synchronization
INV(m) bit
channel (n) output

after the inverting

after the inverting
NOTE
INV(m) bit selects the inverting to the pair channels (n) and (n+1).
Figure 26-182. Channels (n) and (n+1) outputs after the inverting in Low-True
(ELSnB:ELSnA = X:1) Combine mode
Note
The inverting feature must be used only in Combine mode.
26.4.13 Software output control

The software output control forces the channel output according to software defined
values at a specific time in the PWM generation.
The software output control is selected when:
• FTMEN = 1
• DECAPEN = 0
• COMBINE = 1
• CPWMS = 0, and
• CHnOC = 1
The CHnOC bit enables the software output control for a specific channel output and the
CHnOCV selects the value that is forced to this channel output.
Both CHnOC and CHnOCV bits in SWOCTRL register are buffered and updated with
their buffer value according to SWOCTRL register synchronization.
The following figure shows the channels (n) and (n+1) outputs signals when the software
output control is used. In this case the channels (n) and (n+1) are set to Combine and
Complementary mode.
channel (n+1) match
FTM counter
channel (n) match
channel (n) output

after the software
output control

after the software
output control
CH(n)OC buffer
CH(n+1)OC buffer
write to SWOCTRL register write to SWOCTRL register
CH(n)OC bit
CH(n+1)OC bit
SWOCTRL register synchronization SWOCTRL register synchronization
NOTE
CH(n)OCV = 1 and CH(n+1)OCV = 0.
Figure 26-183. Example of software output control in Combine and Complementary

mode
Software output control forces the following values on channels (n) and (n+1) when the
COMP bit is zero.
Table 26-183. Software ouput control behavior when (COMP = 0)
CH(n)OC CH(n+1)OC CH(n)OCV CH(n+1)OCV Channel (n) Output Channel (n+1) Output
0 0 X X is not modified by SWOC is not modified by SWOC
1 1 0 0 is forced to zero is forced to zero
1 1 0 1 is forced to zero is forced to one
1 1 1 0 is forced to one is forced to zero
1 1 1 1 is forced to one is forced to one
Software output control forces the following values on channels (n) and (n+1) when the
COMP bit is one.
Table 26-184. Software ouput control behavior when (COMP = 1)
0 0 X X is not modified by SWOC is not modified by SWOC
1 1 0 0 is forced to zero is forced to zero
1 1 0 1 is forced to zero is forced to one

Table 26-184. Software ouput control behavior when (COMP = 1) (continued)

Note
• The software output control feature must be used only in
Combine mode.
• The CH(n)OC and CH(n+1)OC bits should be equal.
• The COMP bit must not be modified when software output
control is enabled, that is, CH(n)OC = 1 and/or CH(n
+1)OC = 1.
• Software output control has the same behavior with
disabled or enabled FTM counter (see the CLKS field
description in the Status and Control register).
26.4.14 Deadtime insertion

The deadtime insertion is enabled when (DTEN = 1) and (DTVAL[5:0] is nonzero).
DEADTIME register defines the deadtime delay that can be used for all FTM channels.
The DTPS[1:0] bits define the prescaler for the system clock and the DTVAL[5:0] bits
define the deadtime modulo, that is, the number of the deadtime prescaler clocks.
The deadtime delay insertion ensures that no two complementary signals (channels (n)
and (n+1)) drive the active state at the same time.
If POL(n) = 0, POL(n+1) = 0, and the deadtime is enabled, then when the channel (n)
match (FTM counter = C(n)V) occurs, the channel (n) output remains at the low value
until the end of the deadtime delay when the channel (n) output is set. Similarly, when the
channel (n+1) match (FTM counter = C(n+1)V) occurs, the channel (n+1) output remains
at the low value until the end of the deadtime delay when the channel (n+1) output is set.
See the following figures.
If POL(n) = 1, POL(n+1) = 1, and the deadtime is enabled, then when the channel (n)
match (FTM counter = C(n)V) occurs, the channel (n) output remains at the high value
until the end of the deadtime delay when the channel (n) output is cleared. Similarly,

when the channel (n+1) match (FTM counter = C(n+1)V) occurs, the channel (n+1)
output remains at the high value until the end of the deadtime delay when the channel (n
+1) output is cleared.
channel (n+1) match
FTM counter
channel (n) match
channel (n) output

(before deadtime
insertion)

(before deadtime
insertion)
channel (n) output

(after deadtime
insertion)

(after deadtime
insertion)
Figure 26-184. Deadtime insertion with ELSnB:ELSnA = 1:0, POL(n) = 0, and POL(n+1) =
0
channel (n+1) match
FTM counter
channel (n) match
channel (n) output

(before deadtime
insertion)

(before deadtime
insertion)
channel (n) output

(after deadtime
insertion)

(after deadtime
insertion)
Figure 26-185. Deadtime insertion with ELSnB:ELSnA = X:1, POL(n) = 0, and POL(n+1) =
0
NOTE
The deadtime feature must be used only in Combine and
Complementary modes.
26.4.14.1 Deadtime insertion corner cases

If (PS[2:0] is cleared), (DTPS[1:0] = 0:0 or DTPS[1:0] = 0:1):

• and the deadtime delay is greater than or equal to the channel (n) duty cycle ((C(n
+1)V – C(n)V) × system clock), then the channel (n) output is always the inactive
value (POL(n) bit value).
• and the deadtime delay is greater than or equal to the channel (n+1) duty cycle
((MOD – CNTIN + 1 – (C(n+1)V – C(n)V) ) × system clock), then the channel (n+1)
output is always the inactive value (POL(n+1) bit value).
Although, in most cases the deadtime delay is not comparable to channels (n) and (n+1)
duty cycle, the following figures show examples where the deadtime delay is comparable
to the duty cycle.
channel (n+1) match
FTM counter
channel (n) match
channel (n) output

(before deadtime
insertion)

(before deadtime
insertion)
channel (n) output

(after deadtime
insertion)

(after deadtime
insertion)
Figure 26-186. Example of the deadtime insertion (ELSnB:ELSnA = 1:0, POL(n) = 0, and
POL(n+1) = 0) when the deadtime delay is comparable to channel (n+1) duty cycle
channel (n+1) match
FTM counter
channel (n) match
channel (n) output

(before deadtime
insertion)

(before deadtime
insertion)
channel (n) output

(after deadtime
insertion)

(after deadtime
insertion)
Figure 26-187. Example of the deadtime insertion (ELSnB:ELSnA = 1:0, POL(n) = 0, and
POL(n+1) = 0) when the deadtime delay is comparable to channels (n) and (n+1) duty
cycle

26.4.15 Output mask

The output mask can be used to force channels output to their inactive state through
software. For example: to control a BLDC motor.
Any write to the OUTMASK register updates its write buffer. The OUTMASK register is
updated with its buffer value by PWM synchronization; see OUTMASK register
synchronization.
If CHnOM = 1, then the channel (n) output is forced to its inactive state (POLn bit value).
If CHnOM = 0, then the channel (n) output is unaffected by the output mask. See the
following figure.
the beginning of new PWM cycles
FTM counter
channel (n) output

(before output mask)
CHnOM bit
channel (n) output

(after output mask)
channel (n) output is disabled

configured PWM signal starts
to be available in the channel (n) output
Figure 26-188. Output mask with POLn = 0
The following table shows the output mask result before the polarity control.
Table 26-185. Output mask result for channel (n) before the polarity
control
CHnOM Output Mask Input Output Mask Result
0 inactive state inactive state
active state active state
1 inactive state inactive state
active state

Note
The output mask feature must be used only in Combine mode.
26.4.16 Fault control

The fault control is enabled if (FTMEN = 1) and (FAULTM[1:0] ≠ 0:0).
FTM can have up to four fault inputs. FAULTnEN bit (where n = 0, 1, 2, 3) enables the
fault input n and FFLTRnEN bit enables the fault input n filter. FFVAL[3:0] bits select
the value of the enabled filter in each enabled fault input.
First, each fault input signal is synchronized by the system clock; see the synchronizer
block in the following figure. Following synchronization, the fault input n signal enters
the filter block. When there is a state change in the fault input n signal, the 5-bit counter
is reset and starts counting up. As long as the new state is stable on the fault input n, the
counter continues to increment. If the 5-bit counter overflows, that is, the counter exceeds
the value of the FFVAL[3:0] bits, the new fault input n value is validated. It is then
transmitted as a pulse edge to the edge detector.
If the opposite edge appears on the fault input n signal before validation (counter
overflow), the counter is reset. At the next input transition, the counter starts counting
again. Any pulse that is shorter than the minimum value selected by FFVAL[3:0] bits (×
system clock) is regarded as a glitch and is not passed on to the edge detector.
The fault input n filter is disabled when the FFVAL[3:0] bits are zero or when
FAULTnEN = 0. In this case, the fault input n signal is delayed 2 rising edges of the
system clock and the FAULTFn bit is set on 3th rising edge of the system clock after a
rising edge occurs on the fault input n.
If FFVAL[3:0] ≠ 0000 and FAULTnEN = 1, then the fault input n signal is delayed (3 +
FFVAL[3:0]) rising edges of the system clock, that is, the FAULTFn bit is set (4 +
FFVAL[3:0]) rising edges of the system clock after a rising edge occurs on the fault input
n.

(FFVAL[3:0] 0000)
and (FFLTRnEN*)
FLTnPOL
synchronizer fault input n* value
0
fault input n* D Q D Q fault input
polarity rising edge
control FAULTFn*
Fault filter detector
(5-bit counter) 1
system clock CLK CLK
* where n = 3, 2, 1, 0
Figure 26-189. Fault input n control block diagram
If the fault control and fault input n are enabled and a rising edge at the fault input n
signal is detected, a fault condition has occurred and the FAULTFn bit is set. The
FAULTF bit is the logic OR of FAULTFn[3:0] bits. See the following figure.
fault input 0 value
fault input 1 value
FAULTIN
fault input 2 value
fault input 3 value
FAULTIE fault interrupt

FAULTF0
FAULTF1
FAULTF
FAULTF2
FAULTF3
Figure 26-190. FAULTF and FAULTIN bits and fault interrupt
If the fault control is enabled (FAULTM[1:0] ≠ 0:0), a fault condition has occurred and
(FAULTEN = 1), then outputs are forced to their safe values:
• Channel (n) output takes the value of POL(n)
• Channel (n+1) takes the value of POL(n+1)
The fault interrupt is generated when (FAULTF = 1) and (FAULTIE = 1). This interrupt
request remains set until:
• Software clears the FAULTF bit by reading FAULTF bit as 1 and writing 0 to it
• Software clears the FAULTIE bit
• A reset occurs
Note
The fault control must be used only in Combine mode.

26.4.16.1 Automatic fault clearing

If the automatic fault clearing is selected (FAULTM[1:0] = 1:1), then the channels output
disabled by fault control is again enabled when the fault input signal (FAULTIN) returns
to zero and a new PWM cycle begins. See the following figure.
FTM counter
channel (n) output

(before fault control)
FAULTIN bit
channel (n) output
FAULTF bit
FAULTF bit is cleared

NOTE
The channel (n) output is after the fault control with automatic fault clearing and POLn = 0.
Figure 26-191. Fault control with automatic fault clearing
26.4.16.2 Manual fault clearing

If the manual fault clearing is selected (FAULTM[1:0] = 0:1 or 1:0), then the channels
output disabled by fault control is again enabled when the FAULTF bit is cleared and a
new PWM cycle begins. See the following figure.

FTM counter
channel (n) output

(before fault control)
FAULTIN bit
channel (n) output
FAULTF bit
FAULTF bit is cleared

NOTE
The channel (n) output is after the fault control with manual fault clearing and POLn = 0.
Figure 26-192. Fault control with manual fault clearing
26.4.16.3 Fault inputs polarity control

The FLTjPOL bit selects the fault input j polarity, where j = 0, 1, 2, 3:
• If FLTjPOL = 0, the fault j input polarity is high, so the logical one at the fault input j
indicates a fault.
• If FLTjPOL = 1, the fault j input polarity is low, so the logical zero at the fault input j
indicates a fault.
26.4.17 Polarity control

The POLn bit selects the channel (n) output polarity:
• If POLn = 0, the channel (n) output polarity is high, so the logical one is the active
state and the logical zero is the inactive state.
• If POLn = 1, the channel (n) output polarity is low, so the logical zero is the active
state and the logical one is the inactive state.

Note
The polarity control must be used only in Combine mode.
26.4.18 Initialization
The initialization forces the CHnOI bit value to the channel (n) output when a one is
written to the INIT bit.
The initialization depends on COMP and DTEN bits. The following table shows the
values that channels (n) and (n+1) are forced by initialization when the COMP and
DTEN bits are zero.
Table 26-186. Initialization behavior when (COMP = 0 and DTEN = 0)
CH(n)OI CH(n+1)OI Channel (n) Output Channel (n+1) Output
0 0 is forced to zero is forced to zero
0 1 is forced to zero is forced to one
1 0 is forced to one is forced to zero
1 1 is forced to one is forced to one
The following table shows the values that channels (n) and (n+1) are forced by
initialization when (COMP = 1) or (DTEN = 1).
Table 26-187. Initialization behavior when (COMP = 1 or DTEN = 1)
CH(n)OI CH(n+1)OI Channel (n) Output Channel (n+1) Output
0 X is forced to zero is forced to one
1 X is forced to one is forced to zero
Note
The initialization feature must be used only in Combine mode
and with disabled FTM counter. See the description of the
CLKS field in the Status and Control register.
26.4.19 Features priority

The following figure shows the priority of the features used at the generation of channels
(n) and (n+1) outputs signals.

pair channels (m) - channels (n) and (n+1)
FTM counter
DECAPEN
COMBINE(m)
CPWMS
C(n)V
MS(n)B CH(n)OC
MS(n)A CH(n)OCV POL(n)

ELS(n)B CH(n+1)OC POL(n+1)
CH(n)OI CH(n)OM
ELS(n)A CH(n+1)OI COMP(m) INV(m)EN CH(n+1)OCV DTEN(m) CH(n+1)OM FAULTEN(m)
generation of channel
channel (n) (n)
output
output signal signal
software deadtime polarity
complementary output fault
initialization inverting output insertion control
mode mask control
control
generation of channel
(n+1)
channel (n+1)
output
output signal signal
C(n+1)V
MS(n+1)B
MS(n+1)A
ELS(n+1)B
ELS(n+1)A
NOTE
The channels (n) and (n+1) are in output compare, EPWM, CPWM or combine modes.
Figure 26-193. Priority of the features used at the generation of channels (n) and (n+1)
outputs signals
Note
The Initialization feature must not be used with Inverting and
Software output control features.
26.4.20 Channel trigger output

If CHjTRIG = 1, where j = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, then the FTM generates a trigger when the
channel (j) match occurs (FTM counter = C(j)V).
The channel trigger output provides a trigger signal that is used for on-chip modules.

The FTM is able to generate multiple triggers in one PWM period. Because each trigger
is generated for a specific channel, several channels are required to implement this
functionality. This behavior is described in the following figure.
MOD
FTM counter = C5V

FTM counter = C4V
FTM counter = C3V
FTM counter = C2V
FTM counter = C1V

FTM counter = C0V
CNTIN
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
NOTE
(a) CH0TRIG = 0, CH1TRIG = 0, CH2TRIG = 0, CH3TRIG = 0, CH4TRIG = 0, CH5TRIG = 0
(b) CH0TRIG = 1, CH1TRIG = 0, CH2TRIG = 0, CH3TRIG = 0, CH4TRIG = 0, CH5TRIG = 0
(c) CH0TRIG = 0, CH1TRIG = 0, CH2TRIG = 0, CH3TRIG = 1, CH4TRIG = 1, CH5TRIG = 1
(d) CH0TRIG = 1, CH1TRIG = 1, CH2TRIG = 1, CH3TRIG = 1, CH4TRIG = 1, CH5TRIG = 1
Figure 26-194. Channel match trigger
Note
The channel match trigger must be used only in Combine mode.
26.4.21 Initialization trigger

If INITTRIGEN = 1, then the FTM generates a trigger when the FTM counter is updated
with the CNTIN register value in the following cases.
• The FTM counter is automatically updated with the CNTIN register value by the
selected counting mode.
• When there is a write to CNT register.

• When there is the FTM counter synchronization.

• If (CNT = CNTIN), (CLKS[1:0] = 0:0), and a value different from zero is written to
CLKS[1:0] bits.
The following figures show these cases.

CNTIN = 0x0000
MOD = 0x000F
CPWMS = 0
system clock
FTM counter 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05
initialization trigger
Figure 26-195. Initialization trigger is generated when the FTM counting achieves the
CNTIN register value
CNTIN = 0x0000
MOD = 0x000F
CPWMS = 0
system clock
FTM counter 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06
write to CNT
Figure 26-196. Initialization trigger is generated when there is a write to CNT register
CNTIN = 0x0000
MOD = 0x000F
CPWMS = 0
system clock
FTM counter 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05
FTM counter
synchronization
Figure 26-197. Initialization trigger is generated when there is the FTM counter
synchronization

CNTIN = 0x0000
MOD = 0x000F
CPWMS = 0
system clock
FTM counter 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05
CLKS[1:0] bits 00 01
Figure 26-198. Initialization trigger is generated if (CNT = CNTIN), (CLKS[1:0] = 0:0), and
a value different from zero is written to CLKS[1:0] bits
The initialization trigger output provides a trigger signal that is used for on-chip modules.
Note
The initialization trigger must be used only in Combine mode.
26.4.22 Capture Test mode

The Capture Test mode allows to test the CnV registers, the FTM counter and the
interconnection logic between the FTM counter and CnV registers.
In this test mode, all channels must be configured for Input Capture mode and FTM
counter must be configured to the Up counting.
When the Capture Test mode is enabled (CAPTEST = 1), the FTM counter is frozen and
any write to CNT register updates directly the FTM counter; see the following figure.
After it was written, all CnV registers are updated with the written value to CNT register
and CHnF bits are set. Therefore, the FTM counter is updated with its next value
according to its configuration. Its next value depends on CNTIN, MOD, and the written
value to FTM counter.
The next reads of CnV registers return the written value to the FTM counter and the next
reads of CNT register return FTM counter next value.

FTM counter clock

set CAPTEST
clear CAPTEST
write to MODE
CAPTEST bit
FTM counter 0x1053 0x1054 0x1055 0x1056 0x78AC 0x78AD 0x78AE 0x78AF 0x78B0
write 0x78AC
write to CNT
CHnF bit
0x0300 0x78AC
CnV
NOTE
- FTM counter configuration: (FTMEN = 1), (CAPTEST = 1), (CPWMS = 0), (CNTIN = 0x0000), and (MOD = 0xFFFF)
- FTM channel n configuration: input capture mode - (DECAPEN = 0), (COMBINE = 0), and (MSnB:MSnA = 0:0)
Figure 26-199. Capture Test mode
26.4.23 Dual Edge Capture mode

The Dual Edge Capture mode is selected if FTMEN = 1 and DECAPEN = 1. This mode
allows to measure a pulse width or period of the signal on the input of channel (n) of a
channel pair. The channel (n) filter can be active in this mode when n is 0 or 2.
FTMEN
DECAPEN
is filter DECAP
enabled? channel (n)
MS(n)A CH(n)IE interrupt
ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A
CH(n)F
synchronizer ELS(n+1)B:ELS(n+1)A
0 C(n)V[15:0]
channel (n) input D Q D Q Dual edge capture
mode logic
channel (n+1)
Filter* 1 CH(n+1)IE interrupt
system clock CLK CLK
CH(n+1)F
C(n+1)V[15:0]
FTM counter
* Filtering function for dual edge capture mode is only available in the channels 0 and 2
Figure 26-200. Dual Edge Capture mode block diagram
The MS(n)A bit defines if the Dual Edge Capture mode is one-shot or continuous.

The ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A bits select the edge that is captured by channel (n), and ELS(n
+1)B:ELS(n+1)A bits select the edge that is captured by channel (n+1). If both
ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A and ELS(n+1)B:ELS(n+1)A bits select the same edge, then it is the
period measurement. If these bits select different edges, then it is a pulse width
measurement.
In the Dual Edge Capture mode, only channel (n) input is used and channel (n+1) input is
ignored.
If the selected edge by channel (n) bits is detected at channel (n) input, then CH(n)F bit is
set and the channel (n) interrupt is generated (if CH(n)IE = 1). If the selected edge by
channel (n+1) bits is detected at channel (n) input and (CH(n)F = 1), then CH(n+1)F bit is
set and the channel (n+1) interrupt is generated (if CH(n+1)IE = 1).
The C(n)V register stores the value of FTM counter when the selected edge by channel
(n) is detected at channel (n) input. The C(n+1)V register stores the value of FTM
counter when the selected edge by channel (n+1) is detected at channel (n) input.
In this mode, a coherency mechanism ensures coherent data when the C(n)V and C(n
+1)V registers are read. The only requirement is that C(n)V must be read before C(n
+1)V.
Note
• The CH(n)F, CH(n)IE, MS(n)A, ELS(n)B, and ELS(n)A
bits are channel (n) bits.
• The CH(n+1)F, CH(n+1)IE, MS(n+1)A, ELS(n+1)B, and
ELS(n+1)A bits are channel (n+1) bits.
• The Dual Edge Capture mode must be used with
ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A = 0:1 or 1:0, ELS(n+1)B:ELS(n+1)A =
0:1 or 1:0 and the FTM counter in Free running counter.
26.4.23.1 One-Shot Capture mode

The One-Shot Capture mode is selected when (FTMEN = 1), (DECAPEN = 1), and
(MS(n)A = 0). In this capture mode, only one pair of edges at the channel (n) input is
captured. The ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A bits select the first edge to be captured, and ELS(n
+1)B:ELS(n+1)A bits select the second edge to be captured.
The edge captures are enabled while DECAP bit is set. For each new measurement in
One-Shot Capture mode, first the CH(n)F and CH(n+1) bits must be cleared, and then the
DECAP bit must be set.

In this mode, the DECAP bit is automatically cleared by FTM when the edge selected by
channel (n+1) is captured. Therefore, while DECAP bit is set, the one-shot capture is in
process. When this bit is cleared, both edges were captured and the captured values are
ready for reading in the C(n)V and C(n+1)V registers.
Similarly, when the CH(n+1)F bit is set, both edges were captured and the captured
values are ready for reading in the C(n)V and C(n+1)V registers.
26.4.23.2 Continuous Capture mode

The Continuous Capture mode is selected when (FTMEN = 1), (DECAPEN = 1), and
(MS(n)A = 1). In this capture mode, the edges at the channel (n) input are captured
continuously. The ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A bits select the initial edge to be captured, and
ELS(n+1)B:ELS(n+1)A bits select the final edge to be captured.
The edge captures are enabled while DECAP bit is set. For the initial use, first the
CH(n)F and CH(n+1)F bits must be cleared, and then DECAP bit must be set to start the
continuous measurements.
When the CH(n+1)F bit is set, both edges were captured and the captured values are
ready for reading in the C(n)V and C(n+1)V registers. The latest captured values are
always available in these registers even after the DECAP bit is cleared.
In this mode, it is possible to clear only the CH(n+1)F bit. Therefore, when the CH(n+1)F
bit is set again, the latest captured values are available in C(n)V and C(n+1)V registers.
For a new sequence of the measurements in the Dual Edge Capture – Continuous mode,
clear the CH(n)F and CH(n+1)F bits to start new measurements.
26.4.23.3 Pulse width measurement

If the channel (n) is configured to capture rising edges (ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A = 0:1) and the
channel (n+1) to capture falling edges (ELS(n+1)B:ELS(n+1)A = 1:0), then the positive
polarity pulse width is measured. If the channel (n) is configured to capture falling edges
(ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A = 1:0) and the channel (n+1) to capture rising edges (ELS(n
+1)B:ELS(n+1)A = 0:1), then the negative polarity pulse width is measured.
The pulse width measurement can be made in One-Shot Capture mode or Continuous
Capture mode.
The following figure shows an example of the Dual Edge Capture – One-Shot mode used
to measure the positive polarity pulse width. The DECAPEN bit selects the Dual Edge
Capture mode, so it remains set. The DECAP bit is set to enable the measurement of next

positive polarity pulse width. The CH(n)F bit is set when the first edge of this pulse is
detected, that is, the edge selected by ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A bits. The CH(n+1)F bit is set
and DECAP bit is cleared when the second edge of this pulse is detected, that is, the edge
selected by ELS(n+1)B:ELS(n+1)A bits. Both DECAP and CH(n+1)F bits indicate when
two edges of the pulse were captured and the C(n)V and C(n+1)V registers are ready for
reading.
4 8 12 16 20 24
3 28
7 11 15 19
FTM counter 23 27
2 6 10 14 18 22 26
1 5 9 13 17 21 25
channel (n) input

(after the filter
channel input)
DECAPEN bit
set DECAPEN
DECAP bit
set DECAP
C(n)V 1 3 5 7 9 15 19
CH(n)F bit
clear CH(n)F
C(n+1)V 2 4 6 8 10 16 20 22 24
CH(n+1)F bit
clear CH(n+1)F
problem 1 problem 2
Note
- The commands set DECAPEN, set DECAP, clear CH(n)F, and clear CH(n+1)F are made by the user.
- Problem 1: channel (n) input = 1, set DECAP, not clear CH(n)F, and clear CH(n+1)F.
- Problem 2: channel (n) input = 1, set DECAP, not clear CH(n)F, and not clear CH(n+1)F.
Figure 26-201. Dual Edge Capture – One-Shot mode for positive polarity pulse width
measurement
The following figure shows an example of the Dual Edge Capture – Continuous mode
used to measure the positive polarity pulse width. The DECAPEN bit selects the Dual
Edge Capture mode, so it remains set. While the DECAP bit is set the configured
measurements are made. The CH(n)F bit is set when the first edge of the positive polarity
pulse is detected, that is, the edge selected by ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A bits. The CH(n+1)F bit

is set when the second edge of this pulse is detected, that is, the edge selected by ELS(n
+1)B:ELS(n+1)A bits. The CH(n+1)F bit indicates when two edges of the pulse were
captured and the C(n)V and C(n+1)V registers are ready for reading.
4 8 12 16 20 24 28
3 7 11 15 19
FTM counter 23 27
2 6 10 14 18 22 26
1 5 9 13 17 21 25
channel (n) input

(after the filter
channel input)
DECAPEN bit
set DECAPEN
DECAP bit
set DECAP
C(n)V 1 3 5 7 9 11 15 19 21 23
CH(n)F bit
clear CH(n)F
C(n+1)V 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 22 24
CH(n+1)F bit
clear CH(n+1)F
Note
Figure 26-202. Dual Edge Capture – Continuous mode for positive polarity pulse width
measurement
26.4.23.4 Period measurement

If the channels (n) and (n+1) are configured to capture consecutive edges of the same
polarity, then the period of the channel (n) input signal is measured. If both channels (n)
and (n+1) are configured to capture rising edges (ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A = 0:1 and ELS(n
+1)B:ELS(n+1)A = 0:1), then the period between two consecutive rising edges is
measured. If both channels (n) and (n+1) are configured to capture falling edges
(ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A = 1:0 and ELS(n+1)B:ELS(n+1)A = 1:0), then the period between
two consecutive falling edges is measured.

The period measurement can be made in One-Shot Capture mode or Continuous Capture
mode.
The following figure shows an example of the Dual Edge Capture – One-Shot mode used
to measure the period between two consecutive rising edges. The DECAPEN bit selects
the Dual Edge Capture mode, so it remains set. The DECAP bit is set to enable the
measurement of next period. The CH(n)F bit is set when the first rising edge is detected,
that is, the edge selected by ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A bits. The CH(n+1)F bit is set and DECAP
bit is cleared when the second rising edge is detected, that is, the edge selected by ELS(n
+1)B:ELS(n+1)A bits. Both DECAP and CH(n+1)F bits indicate when two selected
edges were captured and the C(n)V and C(n+1)V registers are ready for reading.
4 8 12 16 20 24
3 28
7 11 15 19 23
FTM counter 2 6 27
10 14 18
1 22 26
5 9 13 17 21 25
channel (n) input

(after the filter
channel input)
DECAPEN bit
set DECAPEN
DECAP bit
set DECAP
C(n)V 1 3 5 6 7 14 17 18 20 27
CH(n)F bit
clear CH(n)F
C(n+1)V 2 4 6 7 9 15 18 20 23 26
CH(n+1)F bit
clear CH(n+1)F
problem 1 problem 2 problem 3
Note
- Problem 2: channel (n) input = 1, set DECAP, not clear CH(n)F, and clear CH(n+1)F.
Figure 26-203. Dual Edge Capture – One-Shot mode to measure of the period between
two consecutive rising edges

The following figure shows an example of the Dual Edge Capture – Continuous mode
used to measure the period between two consecutive rising edges. The DECAPEN bit
selects the Dual Edge Capture mode, so it remains set. While the DECAP bit is set the
configured measurements are made. The CH(n)F bit is set when the first rising edge is
detected, that is, the edge selected by ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A bits. The CH(n+1)F bit is set
when the second rising edge is detected, that is, the edge selected by ELS(n+1)B:ELS(n
+1)A bits. The CH(n+1)F bit indicates when two edges of the period were captured and
the C(n)V and C(n+1)V registers are ready for reading.
4 8 12 16 20 24 28
3 7 11 15 19 23
FTM counter 2 6 10 14
27
18 22 26
1 5 9 13 17 21 25
channel (n) input

(after the filter
channel input)
DECAPEN bit
set DECAPEN
DECAP bit
set DECAP
C(n)V 1 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26
CH(n)F bit
clear CH(n)F
C(n+1)V 2 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 27
CH(n+1)F bit
clear CH(n+1)F
Note
Figure 26-204. Dual Edge Capture – Continuous mode to measure of the period between
two consecutive rising edges
26.4.23.5 Read coherency mechanism

The Dual Edge Capture mode implements a read coherency mechanism between the
FTM counter value captured in C(n)V and C(n+1)V registers. The read coherency
mechanism is illustrated in the following figure. In this example, the channels (n) and (n

+1) are in Dual Edge Capture – Continuous mode for positive polarity pulse width
measurement. Thus, the channel (n) is configured to capture the FTM counter value when
there is a rising edge at channel (n) input signal, and channel (n+1) to capture the FTM
counter value when there is a falling edge at channel (n) input signal.
When a rising edge occurs in the channel (n) input signal, the FTM counter value is
captured into channel (n) capture buffer. The channel (n) capture buffer value is
transferred to C(n)V register when a falling edge occurs in the channel (n) input signal.
C(n)V register has the FTM counter value when the previous rising edge occurred, and
the channel (n) capture buffer has the FTM counter value when the last rising edge
occurred.
When a falling edge occurs in the channel (n) input signal, the FTM counter value is
captured into channel (n+1) capture buffer. The channel (n+1) capture buffer value is
transferred to C(n+1)V register when the C(n)V register is read.
In the following figure, the read of C(n)V returns the FTM counter value when the event
1 occurred and the read of C(n+1)V returns the FTM counter value when the event 2
occurred.
event 1 event 2 event 3 event 4 event 5 event 6 event 7 event 8 event 9
FTM counter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
channel (n) input

(after the filter
channel input)
channel (n) 1 3 5 7 9
capture buffer
C(n)V 1 3 5 7
channel (n+1) 2 4 6 8
capture buffer
C(n+1)V 2
read C(n)V read C(n+1)V
Figure 26-205. Dual Edge Capture mode read coherency mechanism
C(n)V register must be read prior to C(n+1)V register in dual edge capture one-shot and
continuous modes for the read coherency mechanism works properly.
26.4.24 Debug mode

When the chip is in Debug mode, the BDMMODE[1:0] bits select the behavior of the
FTM counter, the CH(n)F bit, the channels output, and the writes to the MOD, CNTIN,
and C(n)V registers according to the following table.
Table 26-188. FTM behavior when the chip Is in Debug mode

FTM
BDMMODE CH(n)F Bit FTM Channels Output Writes to MOD, CNTIN, and C(n)V Registers
Counter
00 Stopped can be set Functional mode Writes to these registers bypass the registers
buffers
01 Stopped is not set The channels outputs are forced Writes to these registers bypass the registers
to their safe value according to buffers
POLn bit
10 Stopped is not set The channels outputs are frozen Writes to these registers bypass the registers
when the chip enters in Debug buffers
mode
11 Functional can be set Functional mode Functional mode
mode
Note that if BDMMODE[1:0] = 2’b00 then the channels outputs remain at the value
when the chip enters in Debug mode, because the FTM counter is stopped. However, the
following situations modify the channels outputs in this Debug mode.
• Write any value to CNT register; see Counter reset. In this case, the FTM counter is
updated with the CNTIN register value and the channels outputs are updated to the
initial value – except for those channels set to Output Compare mode.
• FTM counter is reset by PWM Synchronization mode; see FTM counter
synchronization. In this case, the FTM counter is updated with the CNTIN register
value and the channels outputs are updated to the initial value – except for channels
in Output Compare mode.
• In the channels outputs initialization, the channel (n) output is forced to the CH(n)OI
bit value when the value 1 is written to INIT bit. See Initialization.
Note
The BDMMODE[1:0] = 2’b00 must not be used with the Fault
control. Even if the fault control is enabled and a fault condition
exists, the channels outputs values are updated as above.
26.4.25 Intermediate load

The PWMLOAD register allows to update the MOD, CNTIN, and C(n)V registers with
the content of the register buffer at a defined load point. In this case, it is not required to
use the PWM synchronization.
There are multiple possible loading points for intermediate load:

Table 26-189. When possible loading points are enabled

Loading point Enabled
When the FTM counter wraps from MOD value to CNTIN Always
value
At the channel (j) match (FTM counter = C(j)V) When CHjSEL = 1
The following figure shows some examples of enabled loading points.

FTM counter = MOD
FTM counter = C7V
FTM counter = C6V
FTM counter = C5V
FTM counter = C4V
FTM counter = C3V
FTM counter = C2V
FTM counter = C1V
FTM counter = C0V
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
NOTE
(a) LDOK = 0, CH0SEL = 0, CH1SEL = 0, CH2SEL = 0, CH3SEL = 0, CH4SEL = 0, CH5SEL = 0, CH6SEL = 0, CH7SEL = 0
(b) LDOK = 1, CH0SEL = 0, CH1SEL = 0, CH2SEL = 0, CH3SEL = 0, CH4SEL = 0, CH5SEL = 0, CH6SEL = 0, CH7SEL = 0
(c) LDOK = 0, CH0SEL = 0, CH1SEL = 0, CH2SEL = 0, CH3SEL = 1, CH4SEL = 0, CH5SEL = 0, CH6SEL = 0, CH7SEL = 0
(d) LDOK = 1, CH0SEL = 0, CH1SEL = 0, CH2SEL = 0, CH3SEL = 0, CH4SEL = 0, CH5SEL = 0, CH6SEL = 1, CH7SEL = 0
(e) LDOK = 1, CH0SEL = 1, CH1SEL = 0, CH2SEL = 1, CH3SEL = 0, CH4SEL = 1, CH5SEL = 0, CH6SEL = 1, CH7SEL = 0
(f) LDOK = 1, CH0SEL = 1, CH1SEL = 1, CH2SEL = 1, CH3SEL = 1, CH4SEL = 1, CH5SEL = 1, CH6SEL = 1, CH7SEL = 1
Figure 26-206. Loading points for intermediate load
After enabling the loading points, the LDOK bit must be set for the load to occur. In this
case, the load occurs at the next enabled loading point according to the following
conditions:
Table 26-190. Conditions for loads occurring at the next enabled loading point
When a new value was written Then
To the MOD register The MOD register is updated with its write buffer value.

Table 26-190. Conditions for loads occurring at the next enabled loading point (continued)
When a new value was written Then
To the CNTIN register and CNTINC = 1 The CNTIN register is updated with its write buffer value.
To the C(n)V register and SYNCENm = 1 – where m indicates The C(n)V register is updated with its write buffer value.
the pair channels (n) and (n+1)
To the C(n+1)V register and SYNCENm = 1 – where m The C(n+1)V register is updated with its write buffer value.
indicates the pair channels (n) and (n+1)
NOTE
• If ELSjB and ELSjA bits are different from zero, then the
channel (j) output signal is generated according to the
configured output mode. If ELSjB and ELSjA bits are zero,
then the generated signal is not available on channel (j)
output.
• If CHjIE = 1, then the channel (j) interrupt is generated
when the channel (j) match occurs.
• At the intermediate load neither the channels outputs nor
the FTM counter are changed. Software must set the
intermediate load at a safe point in time.
• The intermediate load feature must be used only in
Combine mode.
26.4.26 Global time base (GTB)

The global time base (GTB) is a FTM function that allows the synchronization of
multiple FTM modules on a chip. The following figure shows an example of the GTB
feature used to synchronize two FTM modules. In this case, the FTM A and B channels
can behave as if just one FTM module was used, that is, a global time base.
FTM module A FTM module B
GTBEEN bit FTM counter

FTM counter enable
enable logic
gtb_in
gtb_in
example glue logic
gtb_out
GTBEOUT bit gtb_out
Figure 26-207. Global time base (GTB) block diagram

The GTB functionality is implemented by the GTBEEN and GTBEOUT bits in the
CONF register, the input signal gtb_in, and the output signal gtb_out. The GTBEEN bit
enables gtb_in to control the FTM counter enable signal:
• If GTBEEN = 0, each one of FTM modules works independently according to their
configured mode.
• If GTBEEN = 1, the FTM counter update is enabled only when gtb_in is 1.
In the configuration described in the preceding figure, FTM modules A and B have their
FTM counters enabled if at least one of the gtb_out signals from one of the FTM modules
is 1. There are several possible configurations for the interconnection of the gtb_in and
gtb_out signals, represented by the example glue logic shown in the figure. Note that
these configurations are chip-dependent and implemented outside of the FTM modules.
See the chip configuration details for the chip's specific implementation.
NOTE
• In order to use the GTB signals to synchronize the FTM
counter of different FTM modules, the configuration of
each FTM module should guarantee that its FTM counter
starts counting as soon as the gtb_in signal is 1.
• The GTB feature does not provide continuous
synchronization of FTM counters, meaning that the FTM
counters may lose synchronization during FTM operation.
The GTB feature only allows the FTM counters to start
their operation synchronously.
26.4.26.1 Enabling the global time base (GTB)

To enable the GTB feature, follow these steps for each participating FTM module:
1. Stop the FTM counter: Write 00b to SC[CLKS].
2. Program the FTM to the intended configuration. The FTM counter mode needs to be
consistent across all participating modules.
3. Write 1 to CONF[GTBEEN] and write 0 to CONF[GTBEOUT] at the same time.
4. Select the intended FTM counter clock source in SC[CLKS]. The clock source needs
to be consistent across all participating modules.
5. Reset the FTM counter: Write any value to the CNT register.
To initiate the GTB feature in the configuration described in the preceding figure, write 1
to CONF[GTBEOUT] in the FTM module used as the time base.

26.5 Reset overview

The FTM is reset whenever any chip reset occurs.
When the FTM exits from reset:
• the FTM counter and the prescaler counter are zero and are stopped (CLKS[1:0] =
00b);
• the timer overflow interrupt is zero, see Timer Overflow Interrupt;
• the channels interrupts are zero, see Channel (n) Interrupt;
• the fault interrupt is zero, see Fault Interrupt;
• the channels are in input capture mode, see Input Capture mode;
• the channels outputs are zero;
• the channels pins are not controlled by FTM (ELS(n)B:ELS(n)A = 0:0) (See the table
in the description of CnSC register).
The following figure shows the FTM behavior after the reset. At the reset (item 1), the
FTM counter is disabled (see the description of the CLKS field in the Status and Control
register), its value is updated to zero and the pins are not controlled by FTM (See the
table in the description of CnSC register).
After the reset, the FTM should be configurated (item 2). It is necessary to define the
FTM counter mode, the FTM counting limits (MOD and CNTIN registers value), the
channels mode and CnV registers value according to the channels mode.
Thus, it is recommended to write any value to CNT register (item 3). This write updates
the FTM counter with the CNTIN register value and the channels output with its initial
value (except for channels in output compare mode) (Counter reset).
The next step is to select the FTM counter clock by the CLKS[1:0] bits (item 4). It is
important to highlight that the pins are only controlled by FTM when CLKS[1:0] bits are
different from zero (See the table in the description of CnSC register).

FTM Interrupts
(3) write any value
(1) FTM reset to CNT register (4) write 1 to SC[CLKS]
FTM counter XXXX 0x0000 0x0010 0x0011 0x0012 0x0013 0x0014 0x0015 0x0016 0x0017 0x0018 . . .
CLKS[1:0] XX 00 01
channel (n) output
(2) FTM configuration channel (n) pin is controlled by FTM
NOTES:
– CNTIN = 0x0010
– Channel (n) is in low-true combine mode with CNTIN < C(n)V < C(n+1)V < MOD
– C(n)V = 0x0015
Figure 26-208. FTM behavior after reset when the channel (n) is in Combine mode
The following figure shows an example when the channel (n) is in Output Compare mode
and the channel (n) output is toggled when there is a match. In the Output Compare
mode, the channel output is not updated to its initial value when there is a write to CNT
register (item 3). In this case, use the software output control (Software output control) or
the initialization (Initialization) to update the channel output to the selected value (item
4).
(4) use of software output control or initialization
to update the channel output to the zero
(3) write any value
(1) FTM reset to CNT register (5) write 1 to SC[CLKS]
FTM counter XXXX 0x0000 0x0010 0x0011 0x0012 0x0013 0x0014 0x0015 0x0016 0x0017 . . .
CLKS[1:0] XX 00 01
channel (n) output
(2) FTM configuration channel (n) pin is controlled by FTM
NOTES:
– CNTIN = 0x0010
– Channel (n) is in output compare and the channel (n) output is toggled when there is a match
– C(n)V = 0x0014
Figure 26-209. FTM behavior after reset when the channel (n) is in Output Compare
mode
26.6 FTM Interrupts

26.6.1 Timer Overflow Interrupt

The timer overflow interrupt is generated when (TOIE = 1) and (TOF = 1).
26.6.2 Channel (n) Interrupt

The channel (n) interrupt is generated when (CHnIE = 1) and (CHnF = 1).
26.6.3 Fault Interrupt

The fault interrupt is generated when (FAULTIE = 1) and (FAULTF = 1).

FTM Interrupts

Chapter 27
Pulse Width Timer (PWT)
27.1 Introduction
27.1.1 Features
The pulse width timer (PWT) includes the following features:
• Automatic measurement of pulse width with 16-bit resolution
• Separate positive and negative pulse width measurements
• Programmable triggering edge for starting measurement
• Programmable measuring time between successive alternating edges, rising edges or
falling edges
• Programmable prescaler from clock input as 16-bit counter time base
• Two selectable clock sources—bus clock and alternative clock
• Four selectable pulse inputs
• Programmable interrupt generation upon pulse width value updated and counter
overflow

The following table describes the operation of the PWT module in various modes.
Modes Description
Run When enabled, the pulse width timer module is active.
Wait When enabled, the pulse width timer module is active and can perform the waking up function if the
corresponding interrupt is enabled.
Stop The pulse width timer module is halted when entering stop and the register contents and operating
status is preserved. If stop exits with reset then the module resets. If stop exits with another source,
the module resumes operation based on module status upon exit.
Active background Upon entering Debug mode, the PWT suspends all counting and pulse edge detection until the
microcontroller returns to normal user operating mode. Counting and edge detection resume from
the suspended value when normal user operating mode returns as long as the PWTSR bit (PWT
software reset) is not written to 1 and the PWT module is still enabled.

Introduction

The following is the block diagram of the pulse width timer module (PWT).
PWT_CLK Clock Pre-scaler(CLKPRE)
/2 /2 /2 /2 /2 /2 /2
SYNC
ALT_CLK
PRE[2:0]
PCLKS PWTCLK
PWTSR
PWTEN 16 bit free running counter
PWTOV
16
PWT_R2[NPW] PWT_R1[PPW]
PWTIN0 Overflow
PWTIN1 Edge Detect and Capture Control Logic Interrupt
PWTIN2
PWTIN3 PWTIN
PWTRDY
POVIE
PINSEL[1:0] EDGE[1:0]
PWTIE Data
PINEN0
Interrupt
PINEN1
Decode
PRDYIE
PINEN2
PINEN3
Figure 27-1. Pulse width timer (PWT) block diagram
NOTE
The PWT_CLK depends on the Chip input clock. For this chip
it is TIMER_CLK.

Chapter 27 Pulse Width Timer (PWT)
27.2 PWT signal description

Table 27-2. PWT signal description
Signal I/O Pullup Description
PWTIN[3:0] I No Pulse Inputs
ALTCLK I No Alternative clock source for the counter
27.2.1 PWTIN[3:0] - Pulse Width Timer Capture Inputs

The input signals are pulse capture inputs which can come from internal or external
sources. The PWT input is selected by PINSEL[1:0] to be routed to the pulse width timer.
If the input comes from external source and is selected as the PWT input, the input port is
enabled for PWT function by PINSEL[1:0] automatically. The minimum pulse width to
be measured is 1 PWTCLK cycle, any pulse narrower than this value is ignored by PWT
module. The PWTCLK cycle time depends on the PWT clock source selection and
prescaler rate setting.
27.2.2 ALTCLK- Alternative Clock Source for Counter

The PWT has an alternative clock input ALTCLK which can be selected as the clock
source of the counter when R1[PCLKS] is set. The ALTCLK input must be synchronized
by the bus clock. Variations in duty cycle and clock jitter must also be accommodated so
that the ALTCLK signal must not exceed one-fourth of the bus frequency. The ALTCLK
pin can be shared with a general-purpose port pin. See the Pins and Connections chapter
for the pin location and priority of this function.
27.3 Memory Map and Register Descriptions

PWT memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4003_3000 Pulse Width Timer Register 1 (PWT_R1) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 27.3.1/468
4003_3004 Pulse Width Timer Register 2 (PWT_R2) 32 R 0000_0000h 27.3.2/470

Memory Map and Register Descriptions
27.3.1 Pulse Width Timer Register 1 (PWT_R1)

This register defines the general control and status bits for the PWT. It also contains the
Positive Pulse Width contents.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R PPW
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 0
PWTRDY
PRDYIE
PWTOV
PWTEN
PCLKS
PWTIE
POVIE
PINSEL EDGE PRE
PWTSR
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PWT_R1 field descriptions

Field Description
31–16 Positive Pulse Width
PPW
Captured positive pulse width value. It is suggested to use half-word (16-bit) or word (32-bit) to read out
this value.
15 PWT Clock Source Selection
PCLKS
Controls the selection of clock source for the PWT counter.
0 TIMER_CLK is selected as the clock source of PWT counter.

1 Alternative clock is selected as the clock source of PWT counter.
14–13 PWT Pulse Inputs Selection
PINSEL
Enables the corresponding PWT input port, if this PWT input comes from an external source.
00 PWTIN[0] is enabled.
01 PWTIN[1] is enabled.

PWT_R1 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
10 PWTIN[2] enabled.
11 PWTIN[3] enabled.
12–11 PWT Input Edge Sensitivity
EDGE
Selects which edge triggers the pulse width measurement and which edges trigger the capture. If user
needs to change the trigger and capture mode by changing the value of EDGE[1:0], a PWT software reset
is required after changing the EDGE[1:0] value. Clearing PWTEN and then setting it has the same effect.
00 The first falling-edge starts the pulse width measurement, and on all the subsequent falling edges,
the pulse width is captured.
01 The first rising edge starts the pulse width measurement, and on all the subsequent rising and falling
edges, the pulse width is captured.
10 The first falling edge starts the pulse width measurement, and on all the subsequent rising and falling
edges, the pulse width is captured.
11 The first-rising edge starts the pulse width measurement, and on all the subsequent rising edges, the
pulse width is captured.
10–8 PWT Clock Prescaler (CLKPRE) Setting
PRE
Selects the value by which the clock is divided to clock the PWT counter.
000 Clock divided by 1.

7 PWT Module Enable
PWTEN
Enables/disables the PWT module. To avoid unexpected behavior, do not change any PWT configurations
as long as PWTEN is set.
0 The PWT is disabled.

1 The PWT is enabled.
6 PWT Module Interrupt Enable
PWTIE
Enables the PWT module to generate an interrupt.
0 Disables the PWT to generate interrupt.

1 Enables the PWT to generate interrupt.
5 PWT Pulse Width Data Ready Interrupt Enable
PRDYIE
Enables/disables the PWT to generate an interrupt when PWTRDY is set as long as PWTIE is set.
0 Disable PWT to generate interrupt when PWTRDY is set.

1 Enable PWT to generate interrupt when PWTRDY is set.
4 PWT Counter Overflow Interrupt Enable
POVIE
Enables/disables the PWT to generate an interrupt when PWTOV is set due to PWT counter overflow.

Memory Map and Register Descriptions
PWT_R1 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 Disable PWT to generate interrupt when PWTOV is set.
1 Enable PWT to generate interrupt when PWTOV is set.
3 PWT Soft Reset
PWTSR
Performs a soft reset to the PWT. This field always reads as 0.
0 No action taken.
1 Writing 1 to this field will perform soft reset to PWT.
1 PWT Pulse Width Valid
PWTRDY
Indicates that the PWT Pulse Width register(s) has been updated and is ready to be read. This field is
cleared by reading PWTRDY and then writing 0 to PWTRDY bit when PWTRDY is set. Writing 1 to this
field has no effect. PWTRDY setting is associated with the EDGE[1:0] bits.
0 PWT pulse width register(s) is not up-to-date.

1 PWT pulse width register(s) has been updated.
0 PWT Counter Overflow
PWTOV
Indicates that the PWT counter has run from 0x0000_0xFFFF to 0x0000_0x0000. This field is cleared by
writing 0 to PWTOV when PWTOV is set. Writing 1 to this field has no effect. If another overflow occurs
when this field is being cleared, the clearing fails.
0 PWT counter no overflow.

1 PWT counter runs from 0xFFFF to 0x0000.
27.3.2 Pulse Width Timer Register 2 (PWT_R2)

This register contains the Negative Pulse Width contents and the 16-bit free running
counter contents.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R PWTC NPW
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PWT_R2 field descriptions

Field Description
31–16 PWT Counter. It is suggested to use half-word (16-bit) or word (32-bit) to read out this value.
PWTC
NPW Negative Pulse Width. It is suggested to use half-word (16-bit) or word (32-bit) to read out this value.

27.4 Functional Description
27.4.1 PWT Counter and PWT Clock Prescaler

The pulse width timer (PWT) measures duration of a pulse or the period of a signal input
to the PWTIN by a 16-bit free running counter (PWT_R2[PWTC]). There is a clock
prescaler (CLKPRE) in PWT module that provides the frequency divided clock to
PWT_R2[PWTC]. The clock prescaler can select clock input from bus clock and
alternative clock by PWT_R1[PCKLS].
The PWT counter uses the frequency divided clock from CLKPRE for counter
advancing. The frequency of prescaler is programmable as the clock frequency divided
by 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 (depending on the setting of PRE[2:0]).
As soon as the PWT counter is enabled, it starts counting using the selected and divided
clock source; the counter is cleared without loading to the registers when the first valid
edge (trigger edge) is detected. If no valid trigger edge is detected for a long time, it is
possible for the counter to overflow. When 16-bit free running counter is running, any
edge to be measured after the trigger edge causes the value of PWT_R2[PWTC] to be
uploaded to the appropriate pulse width registers. At the same time, PWT_R2[PWTC]
will be reset to 0x0000 and the clock prescaler output will also be reset together.
PWT_R2[PWTC] will then start advancing again with the input clock. If the
PWT_R2[PWTC] runs from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the PWTOV bit is set.
27.4.2 Edge detection and capture control

The edge detection and capture control part detects measurement trigger edges and
controls when and which pulse width register(s) will be updated.
Based on the setting of EDGE[1:0], the edge detection logic determines the starting and
ending edge of the pulse width to be measured on PWTIN, and the registers fields to be
updated. See Edge detection and capture control for details.
The PWTIN can be selected from one of four sources by configuring PINSEL[1:0].
It must be noted that inside the edge detection and capture logic, the system slave clock is
used for PWT to sample and synchronize the PWTIN pulse, therefore the minimal
PWTIN pulse width is determined by this slave clock frequency. For example, if this
clock frequency is 50 MHz, the minimal PWTIN pulse width must be longer than 20
ns(the period of 50 MHz), otherwise, PWT won't be able to capture this pulse and the

Functional Description
counter would overflow. See the chip configuration chapters to check the slave clock
frequency to PWT. Also, if there isn't any valid edge of the PWTIN width for a long
time, the PWT counter would overflow as well.
When EDGE[1:0] is 00, the first falling edge is the trigger edge from which the pulse
width begins to be measured. The counter value is uploaded to PWT_R1[PPW] upon
each of the subsequent falling edges. When EDGE[1:0] is 11, the first rising edge is the
trigger edge from which the pulse width begins to be measured. The counter value is
uploaded to PWT_R2[NPW] upon each successive rising-edge. In these two cases, the
period of PWTIN is measured.
When EDGE[1:0] is 01, the first rising edge is the trigger edge. The pulse width begins to
be measured from this edge. PWT_R1[PPW] is uploaded upon each of the subsequent
falling edges. PWT_R2[NPW] is uploaded upon each successive rising edge. When
EDGE[1:0] is 10, the first falling edge is the trigger edge from which the pulse width is
measured. PWT_R2[NPW] is uploaded on each successive rising edge and
PWT_R1[PPW] is uploaded on each successive falling edge. In these two cases, the
positive pulse and negative pulse are measured separately and the positive pulse width is
uploaded into PWT_R1[PPW]. The negative pulse width is uploaded into
PWT_R2[NPW].
The following figure illustrates the trigger edge detection and pulse width registers
update of PWT.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Reset
PWTEN
Counter starts to count up

as soon as PWTR1[PWTEN] is set
PWTIN
Clear the pre-counter. Upload counter to PWTR1[PPW]

Trigger to measure and start counting up from 0.
EDGE=00
Clear the pre-counter. Upload counter

Trigger to measure and start counting up from 0. to PWTR1[PPW]
EDGE=01
Upload counter
to PWTR2[NPW]
Trigger to measure and start counting up from 0. to PWTR1[PPW]
EDGE=10
Upload counter
to PWTR2[NPW]
EDGE=11

Trigger to measure and start counting up from 0. to PWTR2[NPW]
Figure 27-4. Trigger edge detection and pulse width registers update
PWT_R1[PWTRDY] indicates that the data can be read in PWT_R1[PPW] and/or

PWT_R2[NPW], based on the setting of EDGE[1:0].
• When EDGE[1:0] is 00, PWT_R1[PWTRDY] is set whenever PWT_R1[PPW] is
updated.
• When EDGE[1:0] is 11, PWT_R1[PWTRDY] is set whenever PWT_R2[NPW] is
updated.
• When EDGE[1:0] is 01, PWT_R1[PWTRDY] is set whenever PWTxPPH:L is
updated, followed by PWT_R2[NPW]'s update.
• When EDGE[1:0] is 10, PWT_R1[PWTRDY] is set whenever PWT_R2[NPW] is
updated, followed by PWT_R1[PPW]'s update.
When PWT_R1[PWTRDY] is set, the updated pulse width register(s) transfers the data
to corresponding 16-bit read buffer(s). The read value of pulse width registers actually
comes from the corresponding read buffers, whenever the chip is in normal run mode or
Debug mode. Reading followed by writing 0 to PWT_R1[PWTRDY] flag clears this
field. Until PWT_R1[PWTRDY] is cleared, the 16-bit read buffer(s) cannot be updated.
But this does not affect the upload of pulse width registers from the PWT counter.

If another pulse measurement is completed and the pulse width registers are updated, the
clearing of the PWT_R1[PWTRDY] flag fails, that is, PWT_R1[PWTRDY] will still be
set, but the 16-bit read buffer(s) will be updated again as long as the action is cleared..
The user should complete the pulse width data reading before clearing
PWT_R1[PWTRDY] to avoid missing data. This mechanism assures that the second
pulse measurement will not be lost in case the MCU does not have enough time to read
the first one ready for read. The mechanism is automatically restarted by an MCU reset ,
writing 1 to PWT_R1[PWTSR] or writing a 0 to PWT_R1[PWTEN] followed by writing
a 1 to it.
The following figure illustrates the buffering mechanism of pulse width register:
PWTIN CPU BUS
PWTRDY
Clear PWTRDY Read/write

Logic
Buffer of PPW
PPW
Read buffer upload control
edge detect and capture logic
Read Data
16-bit Counter
NPW
Buffer of NPW
EDGE[1:0]
Figure 27-5. Buffering mechanism of Pulse Width register

When PWT completes any pulse width measurement, a signal is generated to reset
PWT_R2[CNTC] and the clock prescaler output after the data has been uploaded to the
pulse width registers. To assure that there is no missing count, PWT_R2[CNTC] and the
clock prescaler output are reset in a bus clock cycle after the completion of a pulse width
measurement.
27.5 Reset
27.5.1 General
27.5.2 Description of reset operation

PWT soft reset is built into PWT as a mechanism used to reset/restart the pulse width
timer. The PWT soft reset is triggered by writing 1 to PWT_R1[PWTSR]. (This field
always reads 0). Unlike reset by the CPU, the PWT reset does not restore everything in
the PWT to its reset state. The following steps can be used to describe the reset operation.
1. The PWT counter is set to 0x0000.
2. The 16-bit buffer of PWT counter is reset.
3. The PWT clock prescaler output is reset.
4. The edge detection logic is reset.
5. The capture logic is reset and the latching mechanism of pulse width registers is also
restarted.
6. PWT_R1[PPW] and PWT_R2[NPW] are set to 0x0000.
7. PWT_R1[PWTOV] and PWT_R1[PWTRDY] are set to 0.
8. All other PWT register settings are not changed.
Writing a 0 to PWT_R1[PWTEN] also has the above effects except that the reset state
will be held until PWT_R1[PWTEN] is set to 1.
27.6 Interrupts
27.6.1 Description of interrupt operation

The other major component of the PWT is the interrupts control logic. When
PWT_R1[PWTOV] and PWT_R1[POVIE] are set, a PWT overflow interrupt can be
generated. When PWT_R1[PWTRDY] bit and PWT_R1[PRDYIE] are set, a pulse width

Interrupts
data ready interrupt can be generated. PWT_R1[PWTIE] controls the interrupt generation
of the PWT module. The functionality of the PWT is not affected while the interrupt is
being generated.
27.6.2 Application examples
BUSCLK
PWTCLK
PWTCNT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 0
counter read result: 23 pwtclk counter read result: 22 pwtclk

PWTIN
actual pulse width: 23 pwtclk + err actual pulse width: 22 pwtclk + err
(err < 1 pwtclk + 1 bus clock)
Figure 27-6. Example at PWTCLK is Bus Clock divided by 1
BUSCLK
PWTCLK
PWTCNT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 0
PWTIN counter read result: 11 pwtclk counter read result: 11 pwtclk


BUSCLK
PWTCLK
PWTCNT 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0
PWTIN
counter read result: 5 pwtclk counter read result: 5 pwtclk
BUSCLK
PWTCLK
PWTCNT 0 1 2 0 1 2
PWTIN counter read result: 2 pwtclk counter read result: 2 pwtclk


Interrupts

Chapter 28
Periodic Interrupt Timer (PIT)
28.1 Introduction
NOTE
The PIT module is an array of timers that can be used to raise interrupts and triggers.

The following figure shows the block diagram of the PIT module.

Signal description
PIT
Peripheral bus
PIT
registers
load_value
Timer 1
Interrupts
Triggers
Timer n
Peripheral
bus clock
Figure 28-1. Block diagram of the PIT
NOTE
See the chip configuration details for the number of PIT
channels used in this MCU.
28.1.2 Features
The main features of this block are:
• Ability of timers to generate trigger pulses
• Ability of timers to generate interrupts
• Maskable interrupts
• Independent timeout periods for each timer
28.2 Signal description

The PIT module has no external pins.

Chapter 28 Periodic Interrupt Timer (PIT)
28.3 Memory map/register description

This section provides a detailed description of all registers accessible in the PIT module.
• Reserved registers will read as 0, writes will have no effect.
• See the chip configuration details for the number of PIT channels used in this MCU.
PIT memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4003_7000 PIT Module Control Register (PIT_MCR) 32 R/W 0000_0006h 28.3.1/481
4003_7100 Timer Load Value Register (PIT_LDVAL0) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 28.3.2/482
4003_7104 Current Timer Value Register (PIT_CVAL0) 32 R 0000_0000h 28.3.3/483
4003_7108 Timer Control Register (PIT_TCTRL0) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 28.3.4/483
4003_710C Timer Flag Register (PIT_TFLG0) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 28.3.5/484
4003_7110 Timer Load Value Register (PIT_LDVAL1) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 28.3.2/482
4003_7114 Current Timer Value Register (PIT_CVAL1) 32 R 0000_0000h 28.3.3/483
4003_7118 Timer Control Register (PIT_TCTRL1) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 28.3.4/483
4003_711C Timer Flag Register (PIT_TFLG1) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 28.3.5/484
28.3.1 PIT Module Control Register (PIT_MCR)

This register enables or disables the PIT timer clocks and controls the timers when the
PIT enters the Debug mode.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Memory map/register description
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved
R 0
MDIS FRZ
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
PIT_MCR field descriptions

Field Description
Reserved
1 Module Disable - (PIT section)
MDIS
Disables the standard timers. This field must be enabled before any other setup is done.
0 Clock for standard PIT timers is enabled.

1 Clock for standard PIT timers is disabled.
0 Freeze
FRZ
Allows the timers to be stopped when the device enters the Debug mode.
0 Timers continue to run in Debug mode.

1 Timers are stopped in Debug mode.
28.3.2 Timer Load Value Register (PIT_LDVALn)

These registers select the timeout period for the timer interrupts.
Address: 4003_7000h base + 100h offset + (16d × i), where i=0d to 1d
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
W
TSV
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PIT_LDVALn field descriptions

Field Description
TSV Timer Start Value

PIT_LDVALn field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
Sets the timer start value. The timer will count down until it reaches 0, then it will generate an interrupt and
load this register value again. Writing a new value to this register will not restart the timer; instead the
value will be loaded after the timer expires. To abort the current cycle and start a timer period with the new
value, the timer must be disabled and enabled again.
28.3.3 Current Timer Value Register (PIT_CVALn)

These registers indicate the current timer position.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R TVL
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PIT_CVALn field descriptions

Field Description
TVL Current Timer Value
Represents the current timer value, if the timer is enabled.
NOTE: • If the timer is disabled, do not use this field as its value is unreliable.
• The timer uses a downcounter. The timer values are frozen in Debug mode if MCR[FRZ] is
set.
28.3.4 Timer Control Register (PIT_TCTRLn)

These registers contain the control bits for each timer.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 CHN TIE TEN
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Memory map/register description
PIT_TCTRLn field descriptions

Field Description
2 Chain Mode
CHN
When activated, Timer n-1 needs to expire before timer n can decrement by 1.
Timer 0 cannot be chained.
0 Timer is not chained.

1 Timer is chained to previous timer. For example, for Channel 2, if this field is set, Timer 2 is chained to
Timer 1.
1 Timer Interrupt Enable
TIE
When an interrupt is pending, or, TFLGn[TIF] is set, enabling the interrupt will immediately cause an
interrupt event. To avoid this, the associated TFLGn[TIF] must be cleared first.
0 Interrupt requests from Timer n are disabled.

1 Interrupt will be requested whenever TIF is set.
0 Timer Enable
TEN
Enables or disables the timer.
0 Timer n is disabled.
1 Timer n is enabled.
28.3.5 Timer Flag Register (PIT_TFLGn)

These registers hold the PIT interrupt flags.
Address: 4003_7000h base + 10Ch offset + (16d × i), where i=0d to 1d
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 TIF
W w1c
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PIT_TFLGn field descriptions

Field Description

PIT_TFLGn field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 Timer Interrupt Flag
TIF
Sets to 1 at the end of the timer period. Writing 1 to this flag clears it. Writing 0 has no effect. If enabled,
or, when TCTRLn[TIE] = 1, TIF causes an interrupt request.
0 Timeout has not yet occurred.

1 Timeout has occurred.

This section provides the functional description of the module.
28.4.1 General operation

This section gives detailed information on the internal operation of the module. Each
timer can be used to generate trigger pulses and interrupts. Each interrupt is available on
a separate interrupt line.
28.4.1.1 Timers
The timers generate triggers at periodic intervals, when enabled. The timers load the start
values as specified in their LDVAL registers, count down to 0 and then load the
respective start value again. Each time a timer reaches 0, it will generate a trigger pulse
and set the interrupt flag.
All interrupts can be enabled or masked by setting TCTRLn[TIE]. A new interrupt can be
generated only after the previous one is cleared.
If desired, the current counter value of the timer can be read via the CVAL registers.
The counter period can be restarted, by first disabling, and then enabling the timer with
TCTRLn[TEN]. See the following figure.

Timer enabled Disable Re-enable

Start value = p1 timer timer
Trigger
event
p1 p1 p1 p1
Figure 28-15. Stopping and starting a timer
The counter period of a running timer can be modified, by first disabling the timer,
setting a new load value, and then enabling the timer again. See the following figure.
Timer enabled Disable timer, Re-enable
Start value = p1 Set new load value timer
Trigger
event p2 p2 p2
p1
p1
Figure 28-16. Modifying running timer period
It is also possible to change the counter period without restarting the timer by writing
LDVAL with the new load value. This value will then be loaded after the next trigger
event. See the following figure.
Timer enabled New start
Start value = p1 Value p2 set
Trigger
event
p1 p1 p1 p2 p2
Figure 28-17. Dynamically setting a new load value
28.4.1.2 Debug mode

In Debug mode, the timers will be frozen based on MCR[FRZ]. This is intended to aid
software development, allowing the developer to halt the processor, investigate the
current state of the system, for example, the timer values, and then continue the
operation.

28.4.2 Interrupts
All the timers support interrupt generation. See the MCU specification for related vector
addresses and priorities.
Timer interrupts can be enabled by setting TCTRLn[TIE]. TFLGn[TIF] are set to 1 when
a timeout occurs on the associated timer, and are cleared to 0 by writing a 1 to the
corresponding TFLGn[TIF].
28.4.3 Chained timers

When a timer has chain mode enabled, it will only count after the previous timer has
expired. So if timer n-1 has counted down to 0, counter n will decrement the value by
one. This allows to chain some of the timers together to form a longer timer. The first
timer (timer 0) cannot be chained to any other timer.
28.5 Initialization and application information

In the example configuration:
• The PIT clock has a frequency of 50 MHz.
• Timer 1 creates an interrupt every 5.12 ms.
• Timer 3 creates a trigger event every 30 ms.
The PIT module must be activated by writing a 0 to MCR[MDIS].

The 50 MHz clock frequency equates to a clock period of 20 ns. Timer 1 needs to trigger
every 5.12 ms/20 ns = 256,000 cycles and Timer 3 every 30 ms/20 ns = 1,500,000 cycles.
The value for the LDVAL register trigger is calculated as:
LDVAL trigger = (period / clock period) -1
This means LDVAL1 and LDVAL3 must be written with 0x0003E7FF and 0x0016E35F
respectively.
The interrupt for Timer 1 is enabled by setting TCTRL1[TIE]. The timer is started by
writing 1 to TCTRL1[TEN].
Timer 3 shall be used only for triggering. Therefore, Timer 3 is started by writing a 1 to
TCTRL3[TEN]. TCTRL3[TIE] stays at 0.
The following example code matches the described setup:

Example configuration for chained timers
// turn on PIT
PIT_MCR = 0x00;
// Timer 1
PIT_LDVAL1 = 0x0003E7FF; // setup timer 1 for 256000 cycles
PIT_TCTRL1 = TIE; // enable Timer 1 interrupts
PIT_TCTRL1 |= TEN; // start Timer 1
// Timer 3
PIT_LDVAL3 = 0x0016E35F; // setup timer 3 for 1500000 cycles
28.6 Example configuration for chained timers

In the example configuration:
• The PIT clock has a frequency of 100 MHz.
• Timers 1 and 2 are available.
• An interrupt shall be raised every 1 hour.
The PIT module needs to be activated by writing a 0 to MCR[MDIS].

The 100 MHz clock frequency equates to a clock period of 10 ns, so the PIT needs to
count for 6000 million cycles, which is more than a single timer can do. So, Timer 1 is
set up to trigger every 6 s (600 million cycles). Timer 2 is chained to Timer 1 and
programmed to trigger 10 times.
The value for the LDVAL register trigger is calculated as number of cycles-1, so
LDVAL1 receives the value 0x23C345FF and LDVAL2 receives the value 0x00000009.
The interrupt for Timer 2 is enabled by setting TCTRL2[TIE], the Chain mode is
activated by setting TCTRL2[CHN], and the timer is started by writing a 1 to
TCTRL2[TEN]. TCTRL1[TEN] needs to be set, and TCTRL1[CHN] and TCTRL1[TIE]
are cleared.
The following example code matches the described setup:
// turn on PIT
PIT_MCR = 0x00;
// Timer 2
PIT_LDVAL2 = 0x00000009; // setup Timer 2 for 10 counts
PIT_TCTRL2 = TIE; // enable Timer 2 interrupt
PIT_TCTRL2 |= CHN; // chain Timer 2 to Timer 1

// Timer 1
PIT_LDVAL1 = 0x23C345FF; // setup Timer 1 for 600 000 000 cycles
PIT_TCTRL1 = TEN; // start Timer 1

Example configuration for chained timers

Chapter 29
Real-Time Counter (RTC)
29.1 Introduction
The real-time counter (RTC) consists of one 16-bit counter, one 16-bit comparator,
several binary-based and decimal-based prescaler dividers, three clock sources, one
programmable periodic interrupt, and one programmable external toggle pulse output.
This module can be used for time-of-day, calendar or any task scheduling functions. It
can also serve as a cyclic wake-up from low-power modes, Stop and Wait without the
need of external components.
29.2 Features
Features of the RTC module include:
• 16-bit up-counter
• 16-bit modulo match limit
• Software controllable periodic interrupt on match
• Software selectable clock sources for input to prescaler with programmable 16 bit
prescaler
• OSC 32.768KHz nominal.
• LPO (~1 kHz)
• Bus clock
• Internal reference clock (32 kHz)

This section defines the RTC operation in Stop, Wait, and Background Debug modes.

29.2.1.1 Wait mode

The RTC continues to run in Wait mode if enabled before executing the WAIT
instruction. Therefore, the RTC can be used to bring the MCU out of Wait mode if the
real-time interrupt is enabled. For lowest possible current consumption, the RTC must be
stopped by software if not needed as an interrupt source during Wait mode.
29.2.1.2 Stop modes

The RTC continues to run in Stop mode if the RTC is enabled before executing the STOP
instruction. Therefore, the RTC can be used to bring the MCU out of stop modes with no
external components, if the real-time interrupt is enabled.

The block diagram for the RTC module is shown in the following figure.
RTCMOD
16-bit modulo
16-bit latch
16-bit modulo
1
D Q RTIF
16-bit comparator RTC
EXT CLK R
INTERRUPT
LPO CLK CLOCK REQUEST
16-bit counter
BUS CLK DIVIDER
IRC CLK
RTIE
D Q
OUTPUT
Q
TOGLE
RTCLKS RTCPS RTCCNT RTCO

Write 1 to RTIF
Figure 29-1. Real-time counter (RTC) block diagram

RTCO is the output of RTC. After MCU reset, the RTC_SC[RTCO] is set to high. When
the counter overflows, the output is toggled.

Chapter 29 Real-Time Counter (RTC)

The RTC includes a status and control register, a 16-bit counter register, and a 16-bit
modulo register.
RTC memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4003_D000 RTC Status and Control Register (RTC_SC) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 29.4.1/493
4003_D004 RTC Modulo Register (RTC_MOD) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 29.4.2/495
4003_D008 RTC Counter Register (RTC_CNT) 32 R 0000_0000h 29.4.3/495
29.4.1 RTC Status and Control Register (RTC_SC)
RTC_SC contains the real-time interrupt status flag (RTIF), and the toggle output enable
bit (RTCO).
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
R 0
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 0 0
RTCO
RTCLKS RTCPS RTIF RTIE

W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RTC_SC field descriptions

Field Description
15–14 Real-Time Clock Source Select
RTCLKS
This read/write field selects the clock source input to the RTC prescaler. Changing the clock source clears
the prescaler and RTCCNT counters. Reset clears RTCLKS to 00.

Register definition
RTC_SC field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
00 External clock source.
01 Real-time clock source is 1 kHz (LPOCLK).
10 Internal reference clock (ICSIRCLK).
11 Bus clock.
10–8 Real-Time Clock Prescaler Select
RTCPS
This read/write field selects binary-based or decimal-based divide-by values for the clock source.
Changing the prescaler value clears the prescaler and RTCCNT counters. Reset clears RTCPS to 000.
000 Off
001 If RTCLKS = x0, it is 1; if RTCLKS = x1, it is 128.
7 Real-Time Interrupt Flag
RTIF
This status bit indicates the RTC counter register reached the value in the RTC modulo register. Writing a
logic 0 has no effect. Writing a logic 1 clears the bit and the real-time interrupt request. Reset clears RTIF
to 0.
0 RTC counter has not reached the value in the RTC modulo register.
1 RTC counter has reached the value in the RTC modulo register.
6 Real-Time Interrupt Enable
RTIE
This read/write bit enables real-time interrupts. If RTIE is set, then an interrupt is generated when RTIF is
set. Reset clears RTIE to 0.
0 Real-time interrupt requests are disabled. Use software polling.

1 Real-time interrupt requests are enabled.
4 Real-Time Counter Output
RTCO
The read/write bit enables real-time to toggle output on pinout. If this bit is set, the RTCO pinout will be
toggled when RTC counter overflows.
0 Real-time counter output disabled.

1 Real-time counter output enabled.

29.4.2 RTC Modulo Register (RTC_MOD)

RTC_MOD indicates the value of the 16-bit modulo value.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 MOD
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RTC_MOD field descriptions

Field Description
MOD RTC Modulo
This read/write field contains the modulo value used to reset the count to 0x0000 upon a compare match
and set SC[RTIF] status field. A value of 0x0000 sets SC[RTIF] on each rising-edge of the prescaler
output. Reset sets the modulo to 0x0000.
29.4.3 RTC Counter Register (RTC_CNT)

RTC_CNT indicates the read-only value of the current RTC count of the 16-bit counter.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0 CNT
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RTC_CNT field descriptions

Field Description
CNT RTC Count
This read-only field contains the current value of the 16-bit counter, read CNT[7:0] first and, then
CNT[15:8]. Writes have no effect to this register. Reset or writing different values to SC[RTCLKS] and
SC[RTCPS] clear the count to 0x0000.


The RTC is composed of a main 16-bit up-counter with a 16-bit modulo register, a clock
source selector, and a prescaler block with binary-based and decimal-based selectable
values. The module also contains software selectable interrupt logic and toggle logic for
pinout.
After any MCU reset, the counter is stopped and reset to 0x0000, the modulus register is
set to 0x0000, and the prescaler is off. The external oscillator clock is selected as the
default clock source. To start the prescaler, write any value other than 0 to the Prescaler
Select field (RTC_SC[RTCPS]).
The clock sources are software selectable: the external oscillator (OSC), on-chip low
power oscillator (LPO), 32-kHz internal reference clock, and bus clock. The RTC Clock
Select field (RTC_SC[RTCLKS]) is used to select the desired clock source to the
prescaler dividers. If a different value is written to RTC_SC[RTCLKS], the prescaler and
CNT counters are reset to 0x00.
RTC_SC[RTCPS] and RTC_SC[RTCLKS] select the desired divide-by value. If a
different value is written to RTC_SC[RTCPS], the prescaler and RTCCNT counters are
reset to 0x00. The following table shows different prescaler period values.
Table 29-5. Prescaler period
RTCPS 32768Hz OSC clock LPO clock (1 kHz) Internal reference Bus clock (8 MHz)
source prescaler source prescaler clock (32.768 kHz) source prescaler
period (RTCLKS = 00) period (RTCLKS = 01) source prescaler period (RTCLKS = 11)
period (RTCLKS = 10)
000 Off Off Off Off
001 30.5176 µs 128 ms 30.5176 µs 16 µs
010 61.0351 µs 256 ms 61.0351 µs 32 µs
011 122.0703 µs 512 ms 122.0703 µs 64 µs
100 244.1406 µs 1024 ms 244.1406 µs 128 µs
101 488.28125 µs 2048 ms 488.28125 µs 256 µs
110 976.5625 µs 100 ms 976.5625 µs 12.5 µs
111 1.9531 ms 1s 1.9531 ms 125 µs
The RTC Modulo register (RTC_MOD) allows the compare value to be set to any value
from 0x0000 to 0xFFFF. When the counter is active, the counter increments at the
selected rate until the count matches the modulo value. When these values match, the
counter resets to 0x0000 and continues counting. The Real-Time Interrupt Flag

(RTC_SC[RTIF]) is set whenever a match occurs. The flag sets on the transition from the
modulo value to 0x0000. The modulo value written to RTC_MOD is latched until the
RTC counter overflows or RTC_SC[RTCPS] is selected nonzero.
The RTC allows for an interrupt to be generated whenever RTC_SC[RTIF] is set. To
enable the real-time interrupt, set the Real-Time Interrupt Enable field (RTC_SC[RTIE]).
RTC_SC[RTIF] is cleared by writing a 1 to RTC_SC[RTIF].
The RTC also allows an output to external pinout by toggling the level. RTC_SC[RTCO]
must be set to enable toggling external pinout. The level depends on the previous state of
the pinout when the counter overflows if this function is active.
29.5.1 RTC operation example

This section shows an example of the RTC operation as the counter reaches a matching
value from the modulo register.
OSC (32768Hz)
RTCLKS = 00b
RTC Clock
RTCPS = 001b
RTCCNT
RTCPS = 001b 32765 32766 32767 0 1 2 3 4
RTIF
16-bit modulo 32767 32767 32767 32766 32766 32766 32766 32766
RTCMOD 32766 32766 32766
RTCO
Figure 29-5. RTC counter overflow example
In the above example, the external clock source is selected. The prescaler is set to
RTC_SC[RTCPS] = 001b or passthrough. The actual modulo value used by 16-bit
comparator is 32767, when the modulo value in the RTC_MOD register is set to 32766.
When the counter, RTC_CNT, reaches the modulo value of 32767, the counter overflows
to 0x00 and continues counting. The modulo value is updated by fetching from
RTC_MOD register. The real-time interrupt flag, RTC_SC[RTIF], sets when the counter
value changes from 0x7FFF to 0x0000. The RTC_SC[RTCO] toggles as well when the
RTC_SC[RTIF] is set.


This section provides example code to give some basic direction to a user on how to
initialize and configure the RTC module. The example software is implemented in C
language.
The example below shows how to implement time of day with the RTC using the OSC
clock source to achieve the lowest possible power consumption.
Example: 29.6.1 Software calendar implementation in RTC ISR

/* Initialize the elapsed time counters */
Seconds = 0;
Minutes = 0;
Hours = 0;
Days=0;
/* Configure RTC to interrupt every 1 second from OSC (32.768KHz) clock source */
RTC_MOD = 511; // overflow every 32 times
RTC_SC = RTC_SC_RTCPS_MASK; // external 32768 clock selected with 1/64 predivider.
RTC_SC = RTC_SC_RTIF_MASK | RTC_SC_RTIE_MASK; // interrupt cleared and enabled
/**********************************************************************
Function Name : RTC_ISR
Notes : Interrupt service routine for RTC module.
**********************************************************************/
void RTC_ISR(void)
{
/* Clears the interrupt flag, RTIF, and interrupt request */
RTC_SC |= RTC_SC_RTIF_MASK;
/* RTC interrupts every 1 Second */

Seconds++;
/* 60 seconds in a minute */
if (Seconds > 59)
{
Minutes++;
Seconds = 0;
}
/* 60 minutes in an hour */
if (Minutes > 59)
{
Hours++;
Minutes = 0;
}
/* 24 hours in a day */
if (Hours > 23)
{
Days ++;
Hours = 0;
}
}

Chapter 30
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
30.1 Introduction
NOTE
The serial peripheral interface (SPI) module provides for full-duplex, synchronous, serial
communication between the MCU and peripheral devices. These peripheral devices can
include other microcontrollers, analog-to-digital converters, shift registers, sensors, and
memories, among others.
The SPI runs at a baud rate up to the bus clock divided by two in master mode and up to
the bus clock divided by four in slave mode. Software can poll the status flags, or SPI
operation can be interrupt driven.
NOTE
For the actual maximum SPI baud rate, refer to the Chip
Configuration details and to the device’s Data Sheet.
SPI pad cannot be configured as high drive pad.
The SPI also includes a hardware match feature for the receive data buffer.
30.1.1 Features
The SPI includes these distinctive features:
• Master mode or slave mode operation
• Full-duplex or single-wire bidirectional mode

Introduction
• Programmable transmit bit rate

• Double-buffered transmit and receive data register
• Serial clock phase and polarity options
• Slave select output
• Mode fault error flag with CPU interrupt capability
• Control of SPI operation during wait mode
• Selectable MSB-first or LSB-first shifting
• Receive data buffer hardware match feature

The SPI functions in the following three modes.
• Run mode
This is the basic mode of operation.
• Wait mode
SPI operation in Wait mode is a configurable low power mode, controlled by the
SPISWAI bit located in the SPIx_C2 register. In Wait mode, if C2[SPISWAI] is
clear, the SPI operates like in Run mode. If C2[SPISWAI] is set, the SPI goes into a
power conservative state, with the SPI clock generation turned off. If the SPI is
configured as a master, any transmission in progress stops, but is resumed after CPU
enters Run mode. If the SPI is configured as a slave, reception and transmission of a
byte continues, so that the slave stays synchronized to the master.
• Stop mode
To reduce power consumption, the SPI is inactive in stop modes where the peripheral
bus clock is stopped but internal logic states are retained. If the SPI is configured as a
master, any transmission in progress stops, but is resumed after the CPU enters run
mode. If the SPI is configured as a slave, reception and transmission of a data
continues, so that the slave stays synchronized to the master.
The SPI is completely disabled in Stop modes where the peripheral bus clock is
stopped and internal logic states are not retained. When the CPU wakes from these
Stop modes, all SPI register content is reset.

Chapter 30 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
Detailed descriptions of operating modes appear in Low-power mode options.
30.1.3 Block diagrams

This section includes block diagrams showing SPI system connections, the internal
organization of the SPI module, and the SPI clock dividers that control the master mode
bit rate.
30.1.3.1 SPI system block diagram

The following figure shows the SPI modules of two MCUs connected in a master-slave
arrangement. The master device initiates all SPI data transfers. During a transfer, the
master shifts data out (on the MOSI pin) to the slave while simultaneously shifting data
in (on the MISO pin) from the slave. The transfer effectively exchanges the data that was
in the SPI shift registers of the two SPI systems. The SPSCK signal is a clock output
from the master and an input to the slave. The slave device must be selected by a low
level on the slave select input (SS pin). In this system, the master device has configured
its SS pin as an optional slave select output.
MASTER SLAVE
MOSI MOSI
SPI SHIFTER SPI SHIFTER
MISO MISO
8 BITS 8 BITS
SPSCK SPSCK
CLOCK
GENERATOR
SS SS
Figure 30-1. SPI system connections
30.1.3.2 SPI module block diagram

The following is a block diagram of the SPI module. The central element of the SPI is the
SPI shift register. Data is written to the double-buffered transmitter (write to SPIx_D) and
gets transferred to the SPI Shift Register at the start of a data transfer. After shifting in 8

Introduction
bits of data, the data is transferred into the double-buffered receiver where it can be read
from SPIx_D. Pin multiplexing logic controls connections between MCU pins and the
SPI module.
When the SPI is configured as a master, the clock output is routed to the SPSCK pin, the
shifter output is routed to MOSI, and the shifter input is routed from the MISO pin.
When the SPI is configured as a slave, the SPSCK pin is routed to the clock input of the
SPI, the shifter output is routed to MISO, and the shifter input is routed from the MOSI
pin.
In the external SPI system, simply connect all SPSCK pins to each other, all MISO pins
together, and all MOSI pins together. Peripheral devices often use slightly different
names for these pins.

PIN CONTROL
M
MOSI
SPE S (MOMI)
Tx BUFFER (WRITE SPIxD)

ENABLE
SPI SYSTEM M MISO
SHIFT SPI SHIFT REGISTER SHIFT (SISO)
S
OUT IN
Rx BUFFER (READ SPIxD)

SPC0
BIDIROE
SHIFT SHIFT Rx BUFFER Tx BUFFER
LSBFE
DIRECTION CLOCK FULL EMPTY
MASTER CLOCK
M
BUS RATE SPIBR CLOCK
CLOCK SPSCK
CLOCK GENERATOR LOGIC SLAVE CLOCK
S
MASTER/SLAVE MASTER/
MSTR
MODE SELECT SLAVE
MOD-
SSOE
MODE FAULT
SS
DETECTION
SPRF
8-BIT COMPARATOR
SPMF
SPIxM SPMIE
SPTEF
SPTIE
INTERRUPT
MODF
REQUEST
SPIE
Figure 30-2. SPI module block diagram without FIFO

The SPI optionally shares four port pins. The function of these pins depends on the
settings of SPI control bits. When the SPI is disabled (SPE = 0), these four pins revert to
other functions that are not controlled by the SPI (based on chip configuration).

30.2.1 SPSCK — SPI Serial Clock

When the SPI is enabled as a slave, this pin is the serial clock input. When the SPI is
enabled as a master, this pin is the serial clock output.
30.2.2 MOSI — Master Data Out, Slave Data In

When the SPI is enabled as a master and SPI pin control zero (SPC0) is 0 (not
bidirectional mode), this pin is the serial data output. When the SPI is enabled as a slave
and SPC0 is 0, this pin is the serial data input. If SPC0 is 1 to select single-wire
bidirectional mode, and master mode is selected, this pin becomes the bidirectional data
I/O pin (MOMI). Also, the bidirectional mode output enable bit determines whether the
pin acts as an input (BIDIROE is 0) or an output (BIDIROE is 1). If SPC0 is 1 and slave
mode is selected, this pin is not used by the SPI and reverts to other functions (based on
chip configuration).
30.2.3 MISO — Master Data In, Slave Data Out

When the SPI is enabled as a master and SPI pin control zero (SPC0) is 0 (not
bidirectional mode), this pin is the serial data input. When the SPI is enabled as a slave
and SPC0 is 0, this pin is the serial data output. If SPC0 is 1 to select single-wire
bidirectional mode, and slave mode is selected, this pin becomes the bidirectional data I/
O pin (SISO), and the bidirectional mode output enable bit determines whether the pin
acts as an input (BIDIROE is 0) or an output (BIDIROE is 1). If SPC0 is 1 and master
mode is selected, this pin is not used by the SPI and reverts to other functions (based on
chip configuration).
30.2.4 SS — Slave Select

When the SPI is enabled as a slave, this pin is the low-true slave select input. When the
SPI is enabled as a master and mode fault enable is off (MODFEN is 0), this pin is not
used by the SPI and reverts to other functions (based on chip configuration). When the
SPI is enabled as a master and MODFEN is 1, the slave select output enable bit
determines whether this pin acts as the mode fault input (SSOE is 0) or as the slave select
output (SSOE is 1).

30.3 Memory map/register definition
The SPI has 8-bit registers to select SPI options, to control baud rate, to report SPI status,
to hold an SPI data match value, and for transmit/receive data.
SPI memory map
Absolute
Address Width Section/
offset (hex) (in bits) page
(hex)
0 4007_6000 SPI Control Register 1 (SPI0_C1) 8 R/W 04h 30.3.1/505
1 4007_6001 SPI Control Register 2 (SPI0_C2) 8 R/W 00h 30.3.2/507
2 4007_6002 SPI Baud Rate Register (SPI0_BR) 8 R/W 00h 30.3.3/508
3 4007_6003 SPI Status Register (SPI0_S) 8 R 20h 30.3.4/509
5 4007_6005 SPI Data Register (SPI0_D) 8 R/W 00h 30.3.5/510
7 4007_6007 SPI Match Register (SPI0_M) 8 R/W 00h 30.3.6/511
30.3.1 SPI Control Register 1 (SPIx_C1)
This read/write register includes the SPI enable control, interrupt enables, and
configuration options.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read SPIE SPE SPTIE MSTR CPOL CPHA SSOE LSBFE
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
SPI0_C1 field descriptions

Field Description
7 SPI Interrupt Enable: for SPRF and MODF
SPIE
Enables the interrupt for SPI receive buffer full (SPRF) and mode fault (MODF) events.
0 Interrupts from SPRF and MODF are inhibited—use polling

1
Request a hardware interrupt when SPRF or MODF is 1
6 SPI System Enable
SPE
Enables the SPI system and dedicates the SPI port pins to SPI system functions. If SPE is cleared, the
SPI is disabled and forced into an idle state, and all status bits in the S register are reset.

Memory map/register definition
SPI0_C1 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 SPI system inactive
1 SPI system enabled
5 SPI Transmit Interrupt Enable
SPTIE
This is the interrupt enable bit for SPI transmit buffer empty (SPTEF). An interrupt occurs when the SPI
transmit buffer is empty (SPTEF is set).
0 Interrupts from SPTEF inhibited (use polling)

1 When SPTEF is 1, hardware interrupt requested
4 Master/Slave Mode Select
MSTR
Selects master or slave mode operation.
0 SPI module configured as a slave SPI device

1 SPI module configured as a master SPI device
3 Clock Polarity
CPOL
Selects an inverted or non-inverted SPI clock. To transmit data between SPI modules, the SPI modules
must have identical CPOL values.
This bit effectively places an inverter in series with the clock signal either from a master SPI device or to a
slave SPI device. Refer to the description of “SPI Clock Formats” for details.
0 Active-high SPI clock (idles low)

1 Active-low SPI clock (idles high)
2 Clock Phase
CPHA
Selects one of two clock formats for different kinds of synchronous serial peripheral devices. Refer to the
description of “SPI Clock Formats” for details.
0 First edge on SPSCK occurs at the middle of the first cycle of a data transfer.
1 First edge on SPSCK occurs at the start of the first cycle of a data transfer.
1 Slave Select Output Enable
SSOE
This bit is used in combination with the Mode Fault Enable (MODFEN) field in the C2 register and the
Master/Slave (MSTR) control bit to determine the function of the SS pin.
0 When C2[MODFEN] is 0: In master mode, SS pin function is general-purpose I/O (not SPI). In slave
mode, SS pin function is slave select input.
When C2[MODFEN] is 1: In master mode, SS pin function is SS input for mode fault. In slave mode,
SS pin function is slave select input.
1 When C2[MODFEN] is 0: In master mode, SS pin function is general-purpose I/O (not SPI). In slave
mode, SS pin function is slave select input.
When C2[MODFEN] is 1: In master mode, SS pin function is automatic SS output. In slave mode: SS
pin function is slave select input.
0 LSB First (shifter direction)
LSBFE
This bit does not affect the position of the MSB and LSB in the data register. Reads and writes of the data
register always have the MSB in bit 7.
0 SPI serial data transfers start with the most significant bit.
1 SPI serial data transfers start with the least significant bit.

30.3.2 SPI Control Register 2 (SPIx_C2)
This read/write register is used to control optional features of the SPI system. Bit 6 is not
implemented and always reads 0.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read SPMIE Reserved Reserved MODFEN BIDIROE Reserved SPISWAI SPC0
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SPI0_C2 field descriptions

Field Description
7 SPI Match Interrupt Enable
SPMIE
This is the interrupt enable bit for the SPI receive data buffer hardware match (SPMF) function.
0 Interrupts from SPMF inhibited (use polling)

1 When SPMF is 1, requests a hardware interrupt
Reserved Do not write to this reserved bit.
4 Master Mode-Fault Function Enable
MODFEN
When the SPI is configured for slave mode, this bit has no meaning or effect. (The SS pin is the slave
select input.) In master mode, this bit determines how the SS pin is used. For details, refer to the
description of the SSOE bit in the C1 register.
0 Mode fault function disabled, master SS pin reverts to general-purpose I/O not controlled by SPI
1 Mode fault function enabled, master SS pin acts as the mode fault input or the slave select output
3 Bidirectional Mode Output Enable
BIDIROE
When bidirectional mode is enabled because SPI pin control 0 (SPC0) is set to 1, BIDIROE determines
whether the SPI data output driver is enabled to the single bidirectional SPI I/O pin. Depending on whether
the SPI is configured as a master or a slave, it uses the MOSI (MOMI) or MISO (SISO) pin, respectively,
as the single SPI data I/O pin. When SPC0 is 0, BIDIROE has no meaning or effect.
0 Output driver disabled so SPI data I/O pin acts as an input

1 SPI I/O pin enabled as an output
1 SPI Stop in Wait Mode
SPISWAI
This bit is used for power conservation while the device is in Wait mode.
0 SPI clocks continue to operate in Wait mode.

1 SPI clocks stop when the MCU enters Wait mode.

SPI0_C2 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 SPI Pin Control 0
SPC0
Enables bidirectional pin configurations.
0 SPI uses separate pins for data input and data output (pin mode is normal).
In master mode of operation: MISO is master in and MOSI is master out.
In slave mode of operation: MISO is slave out and MOSI is slave in.
1 SPI configured for single-wire bidirectional operation (pin mode is bidirectional).
In master mode of operation: MISO is not used by SPI; MOSI is master in when BIDIROE is 0 or
master I/O when BIDIROE is 1.
In slave mode of operation: MISO is slave in when BIDIROE is 0 or slave I/O when BIDIROE is 1;
MOSI is not used by SPI.
30.3.3 SPI Baud Rate Register (SPIx_BR)
Use this register to set the prescaler and bit rate divisor for an SPI master. This register
may be read or written at any time.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 SPPR[2:0] SPR[3:0]

Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SPI0_BR field descriptions

Field Description
6–4 SPI Baud Rate Prescale Divisor
SPPR[2:0]
This 3-bit field selects one of eight divisors for the SPI baud rate prescaler. The input to this prescaler is
the bus rate clock (BUSCLK). The output of this prescaler drives the input of the SPI baud rate divider.
Refer to the description of “SPI Baud Rate Generation” for details.
000 Baud rate prescaler divisor is 1.


SPI0_BR field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
SPR[3:0] SPI Baud Rate Divisor
This 4-bit field selects one of nine divisors for the SPI baud rate divider. The input to this divider comes
from the SPI baud rate prescaler. Refer to the description of “SPI Baud Rate Generation” for details.
0000 Baud rate divisor is 2.

All others Reserved
30.3.4 SPI Status Register (SPIx_S)

This register contains read-only status bits. Writes have no meaning or effect.
NOTE
Bits 3 through 0 are not implemented and always read 0.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read SPRF SPMF SPTEF MODF 0
Write
Reset 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
SPI0_S field descriptions

Field Description
7 SPI Read Buffer Full Flag
SPRF
SPRF is set at the completion of an SPI transfer to indicate that received data may be read from the SPI
data (D) register. SPRF is cleared by reading SPRF while it is set and then reading the SPI data register.
0 No data available in the receive data buffer

1
Data available in the receive data buffer
6 SPI Match Flag
SPMF
SPMF is set after SPRF is 1 when the value in the receive data buffer matches the value in the M register.
To clear the flag, read SPMF when it is set and then write a 1 to it.
0 Value in the receive data buffer does not match the value in the M register
1 Value in the receive data buffer matches the value in the M register

SPI0_S field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
5 SPI Transmit Buffer Empty Flag
SPTEF
This bit is set when the transmit data buffer is empty. SPTEF is cleared by reading the S register with
SPTEF set and then writing a data value to the transmit buffer at D. The S register must be read with
SPTEF set to 1 before writing data to the D register; otherwise, the D write is ignored. SPTEF is
automatically set when all data from the transmit buffer transfers into the transmit shift register. For an idle
SPI, data written to D is transferred to the shifter almost immediately so that SPTEF is set within two bus
cycles, allowing a second set of data to be queued into the transmit buffer. After completion of the transfer
of the data in the shift register, the queued data from the transmit buffer automatically moves to the shifter,
and SPTEF is set to indicate that room exists for new data in the transmit buffer. If no new data is waiting
in the transmit buffer, SPTEF simply remains set and no data moves from the buffer to the shifter.
If a transfer does not stop, the last data that was transmitted is sent out again.
0 SPI transmit buffer not empty

1
SPI transmit buffer empty
4 Master Mode Fault Flag
MODF
MODF is set if the SPI is configured as a master and the slave select input goes low, indicating some
other SPI device is also configured as a master. The SS pin acts as a mode fault error input only when
C1[MSTR] is 1, C2[MODFEN] is 1, and C1[SSOE] is 0; otherwise, MODF will never be set. MODF is
cleared by reading MODF while it is 1 and then writing to the SPI Control Register 1 (C1).
0 No mode fault error

1 Mode fault error detected
30.3.5 SPI Data Register (SPIx_D)

This register is both the input and output register for SPI data. A write to the register
writes to the transmit data buffer, allowing data to be queued and transmitted.
When the SPI is configured as a master, data queued in the transmit data buffer is
transmitted immediately after the previous transmission has completed.
The SPTEF bit in the S register indicates when the transmit data buffer is ready to accept
new data. The S register must be read when S[SPTEF] is set before writing to the SPI
data register; otherwise, the write is ignored.
Data may be read from the SPI data register any time after S[SPRF] is set and before
another transfer is finished. Failure to read the data out of the receive data buffer before a
new transfer ends causes a receive overrun condition, and the data from the new transfer
is lost. The new data is lost because the receive buffer still held the previous character
and was not ready to accept the new data. There is no indication for a receive overrun
condition, so the application system designer must ensure that previous data has been
read from the receive buffer before a new transfer is initiated.

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read Bits[7:0]
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SPI0_D field descriptions

Field Description
Bits[7:0] Data (low byte)
30.3.6 SPI Match Register (SPIx_M)
This register contains the hardware compare value. When the value received in the SPI
receive data buffer equals this hardware compare value, the SPI Match Flag in the S
register (S[SPMF]) sets.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read Bits[7:0]
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SPI0_M field descriptions

Field Description
Bits[7:0] Hardware compare value (low byte)

This section provides the functional description of the module.
30.4.1 General
The SPI system is enabled by setting the SPI enable (SPE) bit in SPI Control Register 1.
While C1[SPE] is set, the four associated SPI port pins are dedicated to the SPI function
as:
• Slave select (SS)
• Serial clock (SPSCK)

• Master out/slave in (MOSI)

• Master in/slave out (MISO)
An SPI transfer is initiated in the master SPI device by reading the SPI status register
(SPIx_S) when S[SPTEF] = 1 and then writing data to the transmit data buffer (write to
SPIxD ). When a transfer is complete, received data is moved into the receive data buffer.
The SPIxD register acts as the SPI receive data buffer for reads and as the SPI transmit
data buffer for writes.
The Clock Phase Control (CPHA) and Clock Polarity Control (CPOL) bits in the SPI
Control Register 1 (SPIx_C1) select one of four possible clock formats to be used by the
SPI system. The CPOL bit simply selects a non-inverted or inverted clock. C1[CPHA] is
used to accommodate two fundamentally different protocols by sampling data on odd
numbered SPSCK edges or on even numbered SPSCK edges.
The SPI can be configured to operate as a master or as a slave. When the MSTR bit in
SPI Control Register 1 is set, master mode is selected; when C1[MSTR] is clear, slave
mode is selected.
30.4.2 Master mode

The SPI operates in master mode when C1[MSTR] is set. Only a master SPI module can
initiate transmissions. A transmission begins by reading the SPIx_S register while
S[SPTEF] = 1 and writing to the master SPI data registers. If the shift register is empty,
the byte immediately transfers to the shift register. The data begins shifting out on the
MOSI pin under the control of the serial clock.
• SPSCK
• The SPR3, SPR2, SPR1, and SPR0 baud rate selection bits in conjunction with
the SPPR2, SPPR1, and SPPR0 baud rate preselection bits in the SPI Baud Rate
register control the baud rate generator and determine the speed of the
transmission. The SPSCK pin is the SPI clock output. Through the SPSCK pin,
the baud rate generator of the master controls the shift register of the slave
peripheral.
• MOSI, MISO pin
• In master mode, the function of the serial data output pin (MOSI) and the serial
data input pin (MISO) is determined by the SPC0 and BIDIROE control bits.
• SS pin

• If C2[MODFEN] and C1[SSOE] are set, the SS pin is configured as slave select
output. The SS output becomes low during each transmission and is high when
the SPI is in idle state. If C2[MODFEN] is set and C1[SSOE] is cleared, the SS
pin is configured as input for detecting mode fault error. If the SS input becomes
low this indicates a mode fault error where another master tries to drive the
MOSI and SPSCK lines. In this case, the SPI immediately switches to slave
mode by clearing C1[MSTR] and also disables the slave output buffer MISO (or
SISO in bidirectional mode). As a result, all outputs are disabled, and SPSCK,
MOSI and MISO are inputs. If a transmission is in progress when the mode fault
occurs, the transmission is aborted and the SPI is forced into idle state. This
mode fault error also sets the Mode Fault (MODF) flag in the SPI Status Register
(SPIx_S). If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit (SPIE) is set when S[ MODF] gets set,
then an SPI interrupt sequence is also requested. When a write to the SPI Data
Register in the master occurs, there is a half SPSCK-cycle delay. After the delay,
SPSCK is started within the master. The rest of the transfer operation differs
slightly, depending on the clock format specified by the SPI clock phase bit,
CPHA, in SPI Control Register 1 (see SPI clock formats).
Note
A change of C1[CPOL], C1[CPHA], C1[SSOE], C1[LSBFE],
C2[MODFEN], C2[SPC0], C2[BIDIROE] with C2[SPC0] set,
SPPR2-SPPR0 and SPR3-SPR0 in master mode abort a
transmission in progress and force the SPI into idle state. The
remote slave cannot detect this, therefore the master has to
ensure that the remote slave is set back to idle state.
30.4.3 Slave mode

The SPI operates in slave mode when the MSTR bit in SPI Control Register 1 is clear.
• SPSCK
In slave mode, SPSCK is the SPI clock input from the master.
• MISO, MOSI pin
In slave mode, the function of the serial data output pin (MISO) and serial data input
pin (MOSI) is determined by the SPC0 bit and BIDIROE bit in SPI Control Register
2.
• SS pin

The SS pin is the slave select input. Before a data transmission occurs, the SS pin of
the slave SPI must be low. SS must remain low until the transmission is complete. If
SS goes high, the SPI is forced into an idle state.
The SS input also controls the serial data output pin. If SS is high (not selected), the
serial data output pin is high impedance. If SS is low, the first bit in the SPI Data
Register is driven out of the serial data output pin. Also, if the slave is not selected
(SS is high), then the SPSCK input is ignored and no internal shifting of the SPI shift
register occurs.
Although the SPI is capable of duplex operation, some SPI peripherals are capable of
only receiving SPI data in a slave mode. For these simpler devices, there is no serial
data out pin.
Note
When peripherals with duplex capability are used, take care not
to simultaneously enable two receivers whose serial outputs
drive the same system slave's serial data output line.
As long as no more than one slave device drives the system slave's serial data output line,
it is possible for several slaves to receive the same transmission from a master, although
the master would not receive return information from all of the receiving slaves.
If the CPHA bit in SPI Control Register 1 is clear, odd numbered edges on the SPSCK
input cause the data at the serial data input pin to be latched. Even numbered edges cause
the value previously latched from the serial data input pin to shift into the LSB or MSB
of the SPI shift register, depending on the LSBFE bit.
If C1[CPHA] is set, even numbered edges on the SPSCK input cause the data at the serial
data input pin to be latched. Odd numbered edges cause the value previously latched
from the serial data input pin to shift into the LSB or MSB of the SPI shift register,
depending on C1[LSBFE].
When C1[CPHA] is set, the first edge is used to get the first data bit onto the serial data
output pin. When C1[CPHA] is clear and the SS input is low (slave selected), the first bit
of the SPI data is driven out of the serial data output pin. After the eighth shift, the
transfer is considered complete and the received data is transferred into the SPI Data
register. To indicate transfer is complete, the SPRF flag in the SPI Status Register is set.

Note
A change of the bits C2[BIDIROE] with C2[SPC0] set,
C1[CPOL], C1[CPHA], C1[SSOE], C1[LSBFE],
C2[MODFEN], and C2[SPC0] in slave mode will corrupt a
transmission in progress and must be avoided.
30.4.4 SPI clock formats

To accommodate a wide variety of synchronous serial peripherals from different
manufacturers, the SPI system has a Clock Polarity (CPOL) bit and a Clock Phase
(CPHA) control bit in the Control Register 1 to select one of four clock formats for data
transfers. C1[CPOL] selectively inserts an inverter in series with the clock. C1[CPHA]
chooses between two different clock phase relationships between the clock and data.
The following figure shows the clock formats when CPHA = 1. At the top of the figure,
the eight bit times are shown for reference with bit 1 starting at the first SPSCK edge and
bit 8 ending one-half SPSCK cycle after the eighth SPSCK edge. The MSB first and LSB
first lines show the order of SPI data bits depending on the setting in LSBFE. Both
variations of SPSCK polarity are shown, but only one of these waveforms applies for a
specific transfer, depending on the value in C1[CPOL]. The SAMPLE IN waveform
applies to the MOSI input of a slave or the MISO input of a master. The MOSI waveform
applies to the MOSI output pin from a master and the MISO waveform applies to the
MISO output from a slave. The SS OUT waveform applies to the slave select output from
a master (provided C2[MODFEN] and C1[SSOE] = 1). The master SS output goes to
active low one-half SPSCK cycle before the start of the transfer and goes back high at the
end of the eighth bit time of the transfer. The SS IN waveform applies to the slave select
input of a slave.

BIT TIME #
(REFERENCE) 1 2 ... 6 7 8
SPSCK
(CPOL = 0)
SPSCK
(CPOL = 1)
SAMPLE IN
(MISO OR MOSI)
MOSI
(MASTER OUT)
MSB FIRST BIT 7 BIT 6 ... BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0

LSB FIRST BIT 0 BIT 1 ... BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7
MISO
(SLAVE OUT)
SS OUT
(MASTER)
SS IN
(SLAVE)
Figure 30-15. SPI clock formats (CPHA = 1)
When C1[CPHA] = 1, the slave begins to drive its MISO output when SS goes to active
low, but the data is not defined until the first SPSCK edge. The first SPSCK edge shifts
the first bit of data from the shifter onto the MOSI output of the master and the MISO
output of the slave. The next SPSCK edge causes both the master and the slave to sample
the data bit values on their MISO and MOSI inputs, respectively. At the third SPSCK
edge, the SPI shifter shifts one bit position which shifts in the bit value that was just
sampled, and shifts the second data bit value out the other end of the shifter to the MOSI
and MISO outputs of the master and slave, respectively.
When C1[CPHA] = 1, the slave's SS input is not required to go to its inactive high level
between transfers. In this clock format, a back-to-back transmission can occur, as
follows:
1. A transmission is in progress.
2. A new data byte is written to the transmit buffer before the in-progress transmission
is complete.
3. When the in-progress transmission is complete, the new, ready data byte is
transmitted immediately.

Between these two successive transmissions, no pause is inserted; the SS pin remains
low.
The following figure shows the clock formats when C1[CPHA] = 0. At the top of the
figure, the eight bit times are shown for reference with bit 1 starting as the slave is
selected (SS IN goes low), and bit 8 ends at the last SPSCK edge. The MSB first and
LSB first lines show the order of SPI data bits depending on the setting in LSBFE. Both
variations of SPSCK polarity are shown, but only one of these waveforms applies for a
specific transfer, depending on the value in CPOL. The SAMPLE IN waveform applies
to the MOSI input of a slave or the MISO input of a master. The MOSI waveform applies
to the MOSI output pin from a master and the MISO waveform applies to the MISO
output from a slave. The SS OUT waveform applies to the slave select output from a
master (provided C2[MODFEN] and C1[SSOE] = 1). The master SS output goes to
active low at the start of the first bit time of the transfer and goes back high one-half
SPSCK cycle after the end of the eighth bit time of the transfer. The SS IN waveform
applies to the slave select input of a slave.
BIT TIME #
(REFERENCE) 1 2 ... 6 7 8
SPSCK
(CPOL = 0)
SPSCK
(CPOL = 1)
SAMPLE IN
(MISO OR MOSI)
MOSI
(MASTER OUT)
MSB FIRST BIT 7 BIT 6 ... BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0
LSB FIRST BIT 0 BIT 1 ... BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7
MISO
(SLAVE OUT)
SS OUT
(MASTER)
SS IN
(SLAVE)
Figure 30-16. SPI clock formats (CPHA = 0)

When C1[CPHA] = 0, the slave begins to drive its MISO output with the first data bit
value (MSB or LSB depending on LSBFE) when SS goes to active low. The first SPSCK
edge causes both the master and the slave to sample the data bit values on their MISO
and MOSI inputs, respectively. At the second SPSCK edge, the SPI shifter shifts one bit
position which shifts in the bit value that was just sampled and shifts the second data bit
value out the other end of the shifter to the MOSI and MISO outputs of the master and
slave, respectively. When C1[CPHA] = 0, the slave's SS input must go to its inactive high
level between transfers.
30.4.5 SPI baud rate generation

As shown in the following figure, the clock source for the SPI baud rate generator is the
bus clock. The three prescale bits (SPPR2:SPPR1:SPPR0) choose a prescale divisor of 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8. The three rate select bits (SPR3:SPR2:SPR1:SPR0) divide the output
of the prescaler stage by 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 512 to get the internal SPI master
mode bit-rate clock.
The baud rate generator is activated only when the SPI is in the master mode and a serial
transfer is taking place. In the other cases, the divider is disabled to decrease IDD current.
The baud rate divisor equation is as follows (except those reserved combinations in the
SPI Baud Rate Divisor table).
BaudRateDivisor = (SPPR + 1) × 2(SPR + 1)
The baud rate can be calculated with the following equation:

BaudRate = BusClock / BaudRateDivisor
PRESCALER BAUD RATE DIVIDER

DIVIDE BY MASTER
BUS DIVIDE BY
2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, SPI
CLOCK 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 BIT RATE
256, or 512
SPPR2:SPPR1:SPPR0 SPR3:SPR2:SPR1:SPR0
Figure 30-17. SPI baud rate generation
30.4.6 Special features

The following section describes the special features of SPI module.

30.4.6.1 SS Output
The SS output feature automatically drives the SS pin low during transmission to select
external devices and drives the SS pin high during idle to deselect external devices. When
the SS output is selected, the SS output pin is connected to the SS input pin of the
external device.
The SS output is available only in master mode during normal SPI operation by asserting
C1[SSOE] and C2[MODFEN] as shown in the description of C1[SSOE].
The mode fault feature is disabled while SS output is enabled.
Note
Be careful when using the SS output feature in a multimaster
system because the mode fault feature is not available for
detecting system errors between masters.
30.4.6.2 Bidirectional mode (MOMI or SISO)

The bidirectional mode is selected when the SPC0 bit is set in SPI Control Register 2 (see
the following table). In this mode, the SPI uses only one serial data pin for the interface
with one or more external devices. C1[MSTR] decides which pin to use. The MOSI pin
becomes the serial data I/O (MOMI) pin for the master mode, and the MISO pin becomes
serial data I/O (SISO) pin for the slave mode. The MISO pin in master mode and MOSI
pin in slave mode are not used by the SPI.
Table 30-15. Normal Mode and Bidirectional Mode
When SPE = 1 Master Mode MSTR = 1 Slave Mode MSTR = 0
Serial Out MOSI Serial In MOSI

Normal Mode
SPI SPI
SPC0 = 0
Serial In MISO Serial Out MISO
Serial Out MOMI Serial In

Bidirectional Mode BIDIROE
SPI SPI
SPC0 = 1 BIDIROE
Serial In Serial Out SISO
The direction of each serial I/O pin depends on C2[BIDIROE]. If the pin is configured as
an output, serial data from the shift register is driven out on the pin. The same pin is also
the serial input to the shift register.
The SPSCK is an output for the master mode and an input for the slave mode.

SS is the input or output for the master mode, and it is always the input for the slave
mode.
The bidirectional mode does not affect SPSCK and SS functions.
Note
In bidirectional master mode, with the mode fault feature
enabled, both data pins MISO and MOSI can be occupied by
the SPI, though MOSI is normally used for transmissions in
bidirectional mode and MISO is not used by the SPI. If a mode
fault occurs, the SPI is automatically switched to slave mode. In
this case, MISO becomes occupied by the SPI and MOSI is not
used. Consider this scenario if the MISO pin is used for another
purpose.
30.4.7 Error conditions

The SPI module has one error condition: the mode fault error.
30.4.7.1 Mode fault error

If the SS input becomes low while the SPI is configured as a master, it indicates a system
error where more than one master may be trying to drive the MOSI and SPSCK lines
simultaneously. This condition is not permitted in normal operation, and it sets the
MODF bit in the SPI status register automatically provided that C2[MODFEN] is set.
In the special case where the SPI is in master mode and C2[MODFEN] is cleared, the SS
pin is not used by the SPI. In this special case, the mode fault error function is inhibited
and MODF remains cleared. If the SPI system is configured as a slave, the SS pin is a
dedicated input pin. A mode fault error does not occur in slave mode.
If a mode fault error occurs, the SPI is switched to slave mode, with the exception that
the slave output buffer is disabled. So the SPSCK, MISO and MOSI pins are forced to be
high impedance inputs to avoid any possibility of conflict with another output driver. A
transmission in progress is aborted and the SPI is forced into idle state.
If the mode fault error occurs in the bidirectional mode for an SPI system configured in
master mode, the output enable of MOMI (MOSI in bidirectional mode) is cleared if it
was set. No mode fault error occurs in the bidirectional mode for the SPI system
configured in slave mode.

The mode fault flag is cleared automatically by a read of the SPI Status Register (with
MODF set) followed by a write to SPI Control Register 1. If the mode fault flag is
cleared, the SPI becomes a normal master or slave again.
30.4.8 Low-power mode options

This section describes the low-power mode options.
30.4.8.1 SPI in Run mode

In Run mode, with the SPI system enable (SPE) bit in the SPI Control Register 1 clear,
the SPI system is in a low-power, disabled state. SPI registers can still be accessed, but
clocks to the core of this module are disabled.
30.4.8.2 SPI in Wait mode

SPI operation in Wait mode depends upon the state of the SPISWAI bit in SPI Control
Register 2.
• If C2[SPISWAI] is clear, the SPI operates normally when the CPU is in Wait mode.
• If C2[SPISWAI] is set, SPI clock generation ceases and the SPI module enters a
power conservation state when the CPU is in wait mode.
• If C2[SPISWAI] is set and the SPI is configured for master, any transmission
and reception in progress stops at Wait mode entry. The transmission and
reception resumes when the SPI exits Wait mode.
• If C2[SPISWAI] is set and the SPI is configured as a slave, any transmission and
reception in progress continues if the SPSCK continues to be driven from the
master. This keeps the slave synchronized to the master and the SPSCK.
If the master transmits data while the slave is in wait mode, the slave continues
to send data consistent with the operation mode at the start of wait mode (that is,
if the slave is currently sending its SPIx_D to the master, it continues to send the
same byte. Otherwise, if the slave is currently sending the last data received byte
from the master, it continues to send each previously received data from the
master byte).

Note
Care must be taken when expecting data from a master while
the slave is in a Wait mode or a Stop mode where the peripheral
bus clock is stopped but internal logic states are retained. Even
though the shift register continues to operate, the rest of the SPI
is shut down (that is, an SPRF interrupt is not generated until an
exit from Stop or Wait mode). Also, the data from the shift
register is not copied into the SPIx_D registers until after the
slave SPI has exited Wait or Stop mode. An SPRF flag and
SPIx_D copy is only generated if Wait mode is entered or
exited during a transmission. If the slave enters Wait mode in
idle mode and exits Wait mode in idle mode, neither an SPRF
nor a SPIx_D copy occurs.
30.4.8.3 SPI in Stop mode

Operation in a Stop mode where the peripheral bus clock is stopped but internal logic
states are retained depends on the SPI system. The Stop mode does not depend on
C2[SPISWAI]. Upon entry to this type of stop mode, the SPI module clock is disabled
(held high or low).
• If the SPI is in master mode and exchanging data when the CPU enters the Stop
mode, the transmission is frozen until the CPU exits stop mode. After the exit from
stop mode, data to and from the external SPI is exchanged correctly.
• In slave mode, the SPI remains synchronized with the master.
The SPI is completely disabled in a stop mode where the peripheral bus clock is stopped
and internal logic states are not retained. After an exit from this type of stop mode, all
registers are reset to their default values, and the SPI module must be reinitialized.
30.4.9 Reset
The reset values of registers and signals are described in the Memory Map and Register
Descriptions content, which details the registers and their bitfields.
• If a data transmission occurs in slave mode after a reset without a write to SPIx_D,
the transmission consists of "garbage" or the data last received from the master
before the reset.
• Reading from SPIx_D after reset always returns zeros.

30.4.10 Interrupts
The SPI originates interrupt requests only when the SPI is enabled (the SPE bit in the
SPIx_C1 register is set). The following is a description of how the SPI makes a request
and how the MCU should acknowledge that request. The interrupt vector offset and
interrupt priority are chip dependent.
Four flag bits, three interrupt mask bits, and one interrupt vector are associated with the
SPI system. The SPI interrupt enable mask (SPIE) enables interrupts from the SPI
receiver full flag (SPRF) and mode fault flag (MODF). The SPI transmit interrupt enable
mask (SPTIE) enables interrupts from the SPI transmit buffer empty flag (SPTEF). The
SPI match interrupt enable mask bit (SPIMIE) enables interrupts from the SPI match flag
(SPMF). When one of the flag bits is set, and the associated interrupt mask bit is set, a
hardware interrupt request is sent to the CPU. If the interrupt mask bits are cleared,
software can poll the associated flag bits instead of using interrupts. The SPI interrupt
service routine (ISR) should check the flag bits to determine which event caused the
interrupt. The service routine should also clear the flag bit(s) before returning from the
ISR (usually near the beginning of the ISR).
30.4.10.1 MODF
MODF occurs when the master detects an error on the SS pin. The master SPI must be
configured for the MODF feature (see the description of the C1[SSOE] bit). Once MODF
is set, the current transfer is aborted and the master (MSTR) bit in the SPIx_C1 register
resets to 0.
The MODF interrupt is reflected in the status register's MODF flag. Clearing the flag also
clears the interrupt. This interrupt stays active while the MODF flag is set. MODF has an
automatic clearing process that is described in the SPI Status Register.
30.4.10.2 SPRF
SPRF occurs when new data has been received and copied to the SPI receive data buffer.
After SPRF is set, it does not clear until it is serviced. SPRF has an automatic clearing
process that is described in the SPI Status Register details. If the SPRF is not serviced
before the end of the next transfer (that is, SPRF remains active throughout another
transfer), the subsequent transfers are ignored and no new data is copied into the Data
register.

30.4.10.3 SPTEF
SPTEF occurs when the SPI transmit buffer is ready to accept new data.
After SPTEF is set, it does not clear until it is serviced. SPTEF has an automatic clearing
process that is described in the SPI Status Register details.
30.4.10.4 SPMF
SPMF occurs when the data in the receive data buffer is equal to the data in the SPI
Match Register.
30.4.10.5 Asynchronous interrupt in low-power modes

When the CPU is in Wait mode or Stop mode and the SPI module receives a
transmission, the SPI module can generate an asynchronous interrupt to wake the CPU
from the low power mode. The module generates the asynchronous interrupt only when
all of the following conditions apply:
1. C1[SPIE] is set to 1.
2. The CPU is in Wait mode—in which case C2[SPISWAI] must be 1—or in Stop
mode where the peripheral bus clock is stopped but internal logic states are retained.
3. The SPI module is in slave mode.
4. The received transmission ends.
After the interrupt wakes the CPU and the peripheral bus clock is active again, the SPI
module copies the received data from the shifter into the Data register and generates flags
signals. During the wakeup phase, a continuous transmission from a master would
destroy the first received data.

This section discusses an example of how to initialize and use the SPI.
30.5.1 Initialization sequence

Before the SPI module can be used for communication, an initialization procedure must
be carried out, as follows:

1. Update the Control Register 1 (SPIx_C1) to enable the SPI and to control interrupt
enables. This register also sets the SPI as master or slave, determines clock phase and
polarity, and configures the main SPI options.
2. Update the Control Register 2 (SPIx_C2) to enable additional SPI functions such as
the SPI match interrupt feature, the master mode-fault function, and bidirectional
mode output as well as to control and other optional features.
3. Update the Baud Rate Register (SPIx_BR) to set the prescaler and bit rate divisor for
an SPI master.
4. Update the Hardware Match Register (SPIx_M) with the value to be compared to the
receive data register for triggering an interrupt if hardware match interrupts are
enabled.
5. In the master, read SPIx_S while S[SPTEF] = 1, and then write to the transmit data
register (SPIx_D) to begin transfer.
30.5.2 Pseudo-Code Example

In this example, the SPI module is set up for master mode with only hardware match
interrupts enabled. The SPI runs at a maximum baud rate of bus clock divided by 2.
Clock phase and polarity are set for an active-high SPI clock where the first edge on
SPSCK occurs at the start of the first cycle of a data transfer.
SPIx_C1=0x54(%01010100)
Bit 7 SPIE = 0 Disables receive and mode fault interrupts
Bit 6 SPE = 1 Enables the SPI system
Bit 5 SPTIE = 0 Disables SPI transmit interrupts
Bit 4 MSTR = 1 Sets the SPI module as a master SPI device
Bit 3 CPOL = 0 Configures SPI clock as active-high
Bit 2 CPHA = 1 First edge on SPSCK at start of first data transfer cycle
Bit 1 SSOE = 0 Determines SS pin function when mode fault enabled
Bit 0 LSBFE = 0 SPI serial data transfers start with most significant bit
SPIx_C2 = 0x80(%10000000)
Bit 7 SPMIE = 1 SPI hardware match interrupt enabled
Bit 6 = 0 Unimplemented
Bit 5 = 0 Reserved
Bit 4 MODFEN = 0 Disables mode fault function
Bit 3 BIDIROE = 0 SPI data I/O pin acts as input

SPIx_C2 = 0x80(%10000000)
Bit 2 = 0 Reserved
Bit 1 SPISWAI = 0 SPI clocks operate in wait mode
Bit 0 SPC0 = 0 uses separate pins for data input and output
SPIx_BR = 0x00(%00000000)
Bit 7 = 0 Reserved
Bit 6:4 = 000 Sets prescale divisor to 1
Bit 3:0 = 0000 Sets baud rate divisor to 2
SPIx_S = 0x00(%00000000)
Bit 7 SPRF = 0 Flag is set when receive data buffer is full
Bit 6 SPMF = 0 Flag is set when SPIx_M = receive data buffer
Bit 5 SPTEF = 0 Flag is set when transmit data buffer is empty
Bit 4 MODF = 0 Mode fault flag for master mode
Bit 3:0 = 0 Reserved
SPIx_M = 0xXX
Holds bits 0–7 of the hardware match buffer.
SPIx_D = 0xxx
Holds bits 0–7 of the data to be transmitted by the transmit buffer and received by the receive buffer.

RESET
INITIALIZE SPI
SPIxC1 = 0x54
SPIxC2 = 0x80
SPIxBR = 0x00
YES
SPTEF = 1 NO
?
YES
WRITE TO
SPIxD
SPRF = 1 NO
?
YES
READ
SPIxD
SPMF = 1 NO
?
YES
READ SPMF WHILE SET
TO CLEAR FLAG,
THEN WRITE A 1 TO IT
CONTINUE
Figure 30-18. Initialization Flowchart Example for SPI Master Device


Chapter 31
Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
31.1 Introduction
NOTE
The inter-integrated circuit (I2C, I2C, or IIC) module provides a method of
communication between a number of devices.
The interface is designed to operate up to 100 kbit/s with maximum bus loading and
timing. The I2C device is capable of operating at higher baud rates, up to a maximum of
clock/20, with reduced bus loading. The maximum communication length and the
number of devices that can be connected are limited by a maximum bus capacitance of
400 pF. The I2C module also complies with the System Management Bus (SMBus)
Specification, version 2.
31.1.1 Features
The I2C module has the following features:
• Compatible with The I2C-Bus Specification
• Multimaster operation
• Software programmable for one of 64 different serial clock frequencies
• Software-selectable acknowledge bit
• Interrupt-driven byte-by-byte data transfer
• Arbitration-lost interrupt with automatic mode switching from master to slave
• Calling address identification interrupt
• START and STOP signal generation and detection
• Repeated START signal generation and detection
• Acknowledge bit generation and detection

Introduction
• Bus busy detection

• General call recognition
• 10-bit address extension
• Support for System Management Bus (SMBus) Specification, version 2
• Programmable glitch input filter
• Low power mode wakeup on slave address match
• Range slave address support

The I2C module's operation in various low power modes is as follows:
• Run mode: This is the basic mode of operation. To conserve power in this mode,
disable the module.
• Wait mode: The module continues to operate when the core is in Wait mode and can
provide a wakeup interrupt.
• Stop mode: The module is inactive in Stop mode for reduced power consumption,
except that address matching is enabled in Stop mode. The STOP instruction does
not affect the I2C module's register states.

The following figure is a functional block diagram of the I2C module.

Chapter 31 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
Module Enable Address Write/Read

Interrupt
ADDR_DECODE DATA_MUX
CTRL_REG FREQ_REG ADDR_REG STATUS_REG DATA_REG
Input
Sync
In/Out
START Data
STOP Shift
Arbitration Register
Control
Clock
Control Address
Compare
SCL SDA
Figure 31-1. I2C Functional block diagram
31.2 I2C signal descriptions

The signal properties of I2C are shown in the table found here.
Table 31-1. I2C signal descriptions
SCL Bidirectional serial clock line of the I2C system. I/O
SDA Bidirectional serial data line of the I2C system. I/O

31.3 Memory map/register definition
This section describes in detail all I2C registers accessible to the end user.
I2C memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4006_6000 I2C Address Register 1 (I2C0_A1) 8 R/W 00h 31.3.1/532
4006_6001 I2C Frequency Divider register (I2C0_F) 8 R/W 00h 31.3.2/533
4006_6002 I2C Control Register 1 (I2C0_C1) 8 R/W 00h 31.3.3/534
4006_6003 I2C Status register (I2C0_S) 8 R/W 80h 31.3.4/535
4006_6004 I2C Data I/O register (I2C0_D) 8 R/W 00h 31.3.5/537
4006_6005 I2C Control Register 2 (I2C0_C2) 8 R/W 00h 31.3.6/538
4006_6006 I2C Programmable Input Glitch Filter register (I2C0_FLT) 8 R/W 00h 31.3.7/539
4006_6007 I2C Range Address register (I2C0_RA) 8 R/W 00h 31.3.8/540
4006_6008 I2C SMBus Control and Status register (I2C0_SMB) 8 R/W 00h 31.3.9/541
31.3.10/
4006_6009 I2C Address Register 2 (I2C0_A2) 8 R/W C2h
542
31.3.11/
4006_600A I2C SCL Low Timeout Register High (I2C0_SLTH) 8 R/W 00h
543
31.3.12/
4006_600B I2C SCL Low Timeout Register Low (I2C0_SLTL) 8 R/W 00h
543
31.3.1 I2C Address Register 1 (I2Cx_A1)

This register contains the slave address to be used by the I2C module.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0
AD[7:1]
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I2Cx_A1 field descriptions

Field Description
7–1 Address
AD[7:1]
Contains the primary slave address used by the I2C module when it is addressed as a slave. This field is
used in the 7-bit address scheme and the lower seven bits in the 10-bit address scheme.

I2Cx_A1 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
31.3.2 I2C Frequency Divider register (I2Cx_F)

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read MULT ICR
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I2Cx_F field descriptions

Field Description
7–6 Multiplier Factor
MULT
Defines the multiplier factor (mul). This factor is used along with the SCL divider to generate the I2C baud
rate.
00 mul = 1
01 mul = 2
10 mul = 4
11 Reserved
ICR ClockRate
Prescales the I2C module clock for bit rate selection. This field and the MULT field determine the I2C baud
rate, the SDA hold time, the SCL start hold time, and the SCL stop hold time. For a list of values
corresponding to each ICR setting, see I2C divider and hold values.
The SCL divider multiplied by multiplier factor (mul) determines the I2C baud rate.
I2C baud rate = I2C module clock speed (Hz)/(mul × SCL divider)
The SDA hold time is the delay from the falling edge of SCL (I2C clock) to the changing of SDA (I2C data).
SDA hold time = I2C module clock period (s) × mul × SDA hold value
The SCL start hold time is the delay from the falling edge of SDA (I2C data) while SCL is high (start
condition) to the falling edge of SCL (I2C clock).
SCL start hold time = I2C module clock period (s) × mul × SCL start hold value
The SCL stop hold time is the delay from the rising edge of SCL (I2C clock) to the rising edge of SDA (I2C
data) while SCL is high (stop condition).
SCL stop hold time = I2C module clock period (s) × mul × SCL stop hold value
For example, if the I2C module clock speed is 8 MHz, the following table shows the possible hold time
values with different ICR and MULT selections to achieve an I2C baud rate of 100 kbit/s.

I2Cx_F field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
Hold times (μs)
MULT ICR
SDA SCL Start SCL Stop
2h 00h 3.500 3.000 5.500
1h 07h 2.500 4.000 5.250
1h 0Bh 2.250 4.000 5.250
0h 14h 2.125 4.250 5.125
0h 18h 1.125 4.750 5.125
31.3.3 I2C Control Register 1 (I2Cx_C1)

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 0
IICEN IICIE MST TX TXAK WUEN
Write RSTA
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I2Cx_C1 field descriptions

Field Description
7 I2C Enable
IICEN
Enables I2C module operation.
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
6 I2C Interrupt Enable
IICIE
Enables I2C interrupt requests.
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
5 Master Mode Select
MST
When MST is changed from 0 to 1, a START signal is generated on the bus and master mode is selected.
When this bit changes from 1 to 0, a STOP signal is generated and the mode of operation changes from
master to slave.
0 Slave mode
1 Master mode
4 Transmit Mode Select
TX

I2Cx_C1 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
Selects the direction of master and slave transfers. In master mode this bit must be set according to the
type of transfer required. Therefore, for address cycles, this bit is always set. When addressed as a slave
this bit must be set by software according to the SRW bit in the status register.
0 Receive
1 Transmit
3 Transmit Acknowledge Enable
TXAK
Specifies the value driven onto the SDA during data acknowledge cycles for both master and slave
receivers. The value of SMB[FACK] affects NACK/ACK generation.
NOTE: SCL is held low until TXAK is written.
0 An acknowledge signal is sent to the bus on the following receiving byte (if FACK is cleared) or the
current receiving byte (if FACK is set).
1 No acknowledge signal is sent to the bus on the following receiving data byte (if FACK is cleared) or
the current receiving data byte (if FACK is set).
2 Repeat START
RSTA
Writing 1 to this bit generates a repeated START condition provided it is the current master. This bit will
always be read as 0. Attempting a repeat at the wrong time results in loss of arbitration.
1 Wakeup Enable
WUEN
The I2C module can wake the MCU from low power mode with no peripheral bus running when slave
address matching occurs.
0 Normal operation. No interrupt generated when address matching in low power mode.
1 Enables the wakeup function in low power mode.
31.3.4 I2C Status register (I2Cx_S)

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read TCF BUSY ARBL SRW IICIF RXAK

IAAS RAM
Write w1c w1c
Reset 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I2Cx_S field descriptions

Field Description
7 Transfer Complete Flag
TCF
Acknowledges a byte transfer; TCF sets on the completion of a byte transfer. This bit is valid only during
or immediately following a transfer to or from the I2C module. TCF is cleared by reading the I2C data
register in receive mode or by writing to the I2C data register in transmit mode.

I2Cx_S field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 Transfer in progress
1 Transfer complete
6 Addressed As A Slave
IAAS
This bit is set by one of the following conditions:
• The calling address matches the programmed primary slave address in the A1 register, or matches
the range address in the RA register (which must be set to a nonzero value and under the condition
I2C_C2[RMEN] = 1).
• C2[GCAEN] is set and a general call is received.
• SMB[SIICAEN] is set and the calling address matches the second programmed slave address.
• ALERTEN is set and an SMBus alert response address is received
• RMEN is set and an address is received that is within the range between the values of the A1 and
RA registers.
IAAS sets before the ACK bit. The CPU must check the SRW bit and set TX/RX accordingly. Writing the
C1 register with any value clears this bit.
0 Not addressed
1 Addressed as a slave
5 Bus Busy
BUSY
Indicates the status of the bus regardless of slave or master mode. This bit is set when a START signal is
detected and cleared when a STOP signal is detected.
0 Bus is idle
1 Bus is busy
4 Arbitration Lost
ARBL
This bit is set by hardware when the arbitration procedure is lost. The ARBL bit must be cleared by
software, by writing 1 to it.
0 Standard bus operation.

1 Loss of arbitration.
3 Range Address Match
RAM
This bit is set to 1 by any of the following conditions, if I2C_C2[RMEN] = 1:
• Any nonzero calling address is received that matches the address in the RA register.
• The calling address is within the range of values of the A1 and RA registers.
Writing the C1 register with any value clears this bit to 0.
0 Not addressed
1 Addressed as a slave
2 Slave Read/Write
SRW
When addressed as a slave, SRW indicates the value of the R/W command bit of the calling address sent
to the master.
0 Slave receive, master writing to slave

1 Slave transmit, master reading from slave
1 Interrupt Flag
IICIF

I2Cx_S field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
This bit sets when an interrupt is pending. This bit must be cleared by software by writing 1 to it, such as in
the interrupt routine. One of the following events can set this bit:
• One byte transfer, including ACK/NACK bit, completes if FACK is 0. An ACK or NACK is sent on the
bus by writing 0 or 1 to TXAK after this bit is set in receive mode.
• One byte transfer, excluding ACK/NACK bit, completes if FACK is 1.
• Match of slave address to calling address including primary slave address, range slave address,
alert response address, second slave address, or general call address.
• Arbitration lost
• In SMBus mode, any timeouts except SCL and SDA high timeouts
• I2C bus stop or start detection if the SSIE bit in the Input Glitch Filter register is 1
NOTE: To clear the I2C bus stop or start detection interrupt: In the interrupt service
routine, first clear the STOPF or STARTF bit in the Input Glitch Filter register by
writing 1 to it, and then clear the IICIF bit. If this sequence is reversed, the IICIF
bit is asserted again.
0 No interrupt pending
1 Interrupt pending
0 Receive Acknowledge
RXAK
0 Acknowledge signal was received after the completion of one byte of data transmission on the bus
1 No acknowledge signal detected
31.3.5 I2C Data I/O register (I2Cx_D)

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read DATA
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I2Cx_D field descriptions

Field Description
DATA Data
In master transmit mode, when data is written to this register, a data transfer is initiated. The most
significant bit is sent first. In master receive mode, reading this register initiates receiving of the next byte
of data.
NOTE: When making the transition out of master receive mode, switch the I2C mode before reading the
Data register to prevent an inadvertent initiation of a master receive data transfer.
In slave mode, the same functions are available after an address match occurs.
The C1[TX] bit must correctly reflect the desired direction of transfer in master and slave modes for the
transmission to begin. For example, if the I2C module is configured for master transmit but a master
receive is desired, reading the Data register does not initiate the receive.
Reading the Data register returns the last byte received while the I2C module is configured in master
receive or slave receive mode. The Data register does not reflect every byte that is transmitted on the I2C
bus, and neither can software verify that a byte has been written to the Data register correctly by reading it
back.

I2Cx_D field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
In master transmit mode, the first byte of data written to the Data register following assertion of MST (start
bit) or assertion of RSTA (repeated start bit) is used for the address transfer and must consist of the
calling address (in bits 7-1) concatenated with the required R/W bit (in position bit 0).
31.3.6 I2C Control Register 2 (I2Cx_C2)

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0
GCAEN ADEXT SBRC RMEN AD[10:8]
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I2Cx_C2 field descriptions

Field Description
7 General Call Address Enable
GCAEN
Enables general call address.
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
6 Address Extension
ADEXT
Controls the number of bits used for the slave address.
0 7-bit address scheme

1 10-bit address scheme
4 Slave Baud Rate Control
SBRC
Enables independent slave mode baud rate at maximum frequency, which forces clock stretching on SCL
in very fast I2C modes. To a slave, an example of a "very fast" mode is when the master transfers at 40
kbit/s but the slave can capture the master's data at only 10 kbit/s.
0 The slave baud rate follows the master baud rate and clock stretching may occur
1 Slave baud rate is independent of the master baud rate
3 Range Address Matching Enable
RMEN
This bit controls the slave address matching for addresses between the values of the A1 and RA registers.
When this bit is set, a slave address matching occurs for any address greater than the value of the A1
register and less than or equal to the value of the RA register.
0 Range mode disabled. No address matching occurs for an address within the range of values of the
A1 and RA registers.
1 Range mode enabled. Address matching occurs when a slave receives an address within the range of
values of the A1 and RA registers.
AD[10:8] Slave Address

I2Cx_C2 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
Contains the upper three bits of the slave address in the 10-bit address scheme. This field is valid only
while the ADEXT bit is set.
31.3.7 I2C Programmable Input Glitch Filter register (I2Cx_FLT)

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read STOPF STARTF

SHEN SSIE FLT
Write w1c w1c
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I2Cx_FLT field descriptions

Field Description
7 Stop Hold Enable
SHEN
Set this bit to hold off entry to stop mode when any data transmission or reception is occurring.
The following scenario explains the holdoff functionality:
1. The I2C module is configured for a basic transfer, and the SHEN bit is set to 1.
2. A transfer begins.
3. The MCU signals the I2C module to enter stop mode.
4. The byte currently being transferred, including both address and data, completes its transfer.
5. The I2C slave or master acknowledges that the in-transfer byte completed its transfer and
acknowledges the request to enter stop mode.
6. After receiving the I2C module's acknowledgment of the request to enter stop mode, the MCU
determines whether to shut off the I2C module's clock.
If the SHEN bit is set to 1 and the I2C module is in an idle or disabled state when the MCU signals to enter
stop mode, the module immediately acknowledges the request to enter stop mode.
If SHEN is cleared to 0 and the overall data transmission or reception that was suspended by stop mode
entry was incomplete: To resume the overall transmission or reception after the MCU exits stop mode,
software must reinitialize the transfer by resending the address of the slave.
If the I2C Control Register 1's IICIE bit was set to 1 before the MCU entered stop mode, system software
will receive the interrupt triggered by the I2C Status Register's TCF bit after the MCU wakes from the stop
mode.
0 Stop holdoff is disabled. The MCU's entry to stop mode is not gated.
1 Stop holdoff is enabled.
6 I2C Bus Stop Detect Flag
STOPF
Hardware sets this bit when the I2C bus's stop status is detected. The STOPF bit must be cleared by
writing 1 to it.
0 No stop happens on I2C bus

1 Stop detected on I2C bus
5 I2C Bus Stop or Start Interrupt Enable
SSIE
This bit enables the interrupt for I2C bus stop or start detection.

I2Cx_FLT field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
NOTE: To clear the I2C bus stop or start detection interrupt: In the interrupt service routine, first clear the
STOPF or STARTF bit by writing 1 to it, and then clear the IICIF bit in the status register. If this
sequence is reversed, the IICIF bit is asserted again.
0 Stop or start detection interrupt is disabled

1 Stop or start detection interrupt is enabled
4 I2C Bus Start Detect Flag
STARTF
Hardware sets this bit when the I2C bus's start status is detected. The STARTF bit must be cleared by
writing 1 to it.
0 No start happens on I2C bus

1 Start detected on I2C bus
FLT I2C Programmable Filter Factor
Controls the width of the glitch, in terms of I2C module clock cycles, that the filter must absorb. For any
glitch whose size is less than or equal to this width setting, the filter does not allow the glitch to pass.
0h No filter/bypass
1-Fh Filter glitches up to width of n I2C module clock cycles, where n=1-15d
31.3.8 I2C Range Address register (I2Cx_RA)

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0
RAD
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I2Cx_RA field descriptions

Field Description
7–1 Range Slave Address
RAD
This field contains the slave address to be used by the I2C module. The field is used in the 7-bit address
scheme. If I2C_C2[RMEN] is set to 1, any nonzero value write enables this register. This register value
can be considered as a maximum boundary in the range matching mode.

31.3.9 I2C SMBus Control and Status register (I2Cx_SMB)

NOTE
When the SCL and SDA signals are held high for a length of
time greater than the high timeout period, the SHTF1 flag sets.
Before reaching this threshold, while the system is detecting
how long these signals are being held high, a master assumes
that the bus is free. However, the SHTF1 bit is set to 1 in the
bus transmission process with the idle bus state.
NOTE
When the TCKSEL bit is set, there is no need to monitor the
SHTF1 bit because the bus speed is too high to match the
protocol of SMBus.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read SLTF SHTF1 SHTF2

FACK ALERTEN SIICAEN TCKSEL SHTF2IE
Write w1c w1c
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I2Cx_SMB field descriptions

Field Description
7 Fast NACK/ACK Enable
FACK
For SMBus packet error checking, the CPU must be able to issue an ACK or NACK according to the result
of receiving data byte.
0 An ACK or NACK is sent on the following receiving data byte

1 Writing 0 to TXAK after receiving a data byte generates an ACK. Writing 1 to TXAK after receiving a
data byte generates a NACK.
6 SMBus Alert Response Address Enable
ALERTEN
Enables or disables SMBus alert response address matching.
NOTE: After the host responds to a device that used the alert response address, you must use software
to put the device's address on the bus. The alert protocol is described in the SMBus specification.
0 SMBus alert response address matching is disabled

1 SMBus alert response address matching is enabled
5 Second I2C Address Enable
SIICAEN
Enables or disables SMBus device default address.
0 I2C address register 2 matching is disabled

1 I2C address register 2 matching is enabled

I2Cx_SMB field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
4 Timeout Counter Clock Select
TCKSEL
Selects the clock source of the timeout counter.
0 Timeout counter counts at the frequency of the I2C module clock / 64

1 Timeout counter counts at the frequency of the I2C module clock
3 SCL Low Timeout Flag
SLTF
This bit is set when the SLT register (consisting of the SLTH and SLTL registers) is loaded with a non-zero
value (LoValue) and an SCL low timeout occurs. Software clears this bit by writing a logic 1 to it.
NOTE: The low timeout function is disabled when the SLT register's value is 0.
0 No low timeout occurs

1 Low timeout occurs
2 SCL High Timeout Flag 1
SHTF1
This read-only bit sets when SCL and SDA are held high more than clock × LoValue / 512, which indicates
the bus is free. This bit is cleared automatically.
0 No SCL high and SDA high timeout occurs

1 SCL high and SDA high timeout occurs
1 SCL High Timeout Flag 2
SHTF2
This bit sets when SCL is held high and SDA is held low more than clock × LoValue / 512. Software clears
this bit by writing 1 to it.
0 No SCL high and SDA low timeout occurs

1 SCL high and SDA low timeout occurs
0 SHTF2 Interrupt Enable
SHTF2IE
Enables SCL high and SDA low timeout interrupt.
0 SHTF2 interrupt is disabled

1 SHTF2 interrupt is enabled
31.3.10 I2C Address Register 2 (I2Cx_A2)

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0
SAD
Write
Reset 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
I2Cx_A2 field descriptions

Field Description
7–1 SMBus Address
SAD

I2Cx_A2 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
Contains the slave address used by the SMBus. This field is used on the device default address or other
related addresses.
31.3.11 I2C SCL Low Timeout Register High (I2Cx_SLTH)

Address: 4006_6000h base + Ah offset = 4006_600Ah
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read
SSLT[15:8]
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I2Cx_SLTH field descriptions

Field Description
SSLT[15:8] Most significant byte of SCL low timeout value that determines the timeout period of SCL low.
31.3.12 I2C SCL Low Timeout Register Low (I2Cx_SLTL)

Address: 4006_6000h base + Bh offset = 4006_600Bh
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read SSLT[7:0]
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I2Cx_SLTL field descriptions

Field Description
SSLT[7:0] Least significant byte of SCL low timeout value that determines the timeout period of SCL low.

This section provides a comprehensive functional description of the I2C module.
31.4.1 I2C protocol

The I2C bus system uses a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL) for data
transfers.
All devices connected to it must have open drain or open collector outputs. A logic AND
function is exercised on both lines with external pull-up resistors. The value of these
resistors depends on the system.
Normally, a standard instance of communication is composed of four parts:
1. START signal
2. Slave address transmission
3. Data transfer
4. STOP signal
The STOP signal should not be confused with the CPU STOP instruction. The following
figure illustrates I2C bus system communication.
MSB LSB MSB LSB

SCL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SDA AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 R/W XXX D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Start Calling Address Read/ Ack Data Byte No Stop

Signal Write Bit Ack Signal
Bit
MSB LSB MSB LSB

SCL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9
8 8
SDA AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 R/W XX AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 R/W
Start Calling Address Read/ Ack Repeated New Calling Address No Stop
Read/
Signal Bit Start Ack Signal
Write Write
Signal Bit
Figure 31-26. I2C bus transmission signals
31.4.1.1 START signal

The bus is free when no master device is engaging the bus (both SCL and SDA are high).
When the bus is free, a master may initiate communication by sending a START signal.
A START signal is defined as a high-to-low transition of SDA while SCL is high. This
signal denotes the beginning of a new data transfer—each data transfer might contain
several bytes of data—and brings all slaves out of their idle states.

31.4.1.2 Slave address transmission

Immediately after the START signal, the first byte of a data transfer is the slave address
transmitted by the master. This address is a 7-bit calling address followed by an R/W bit.
The R/W bit tells the slave the desired direction of data transfer.
• 1 = Read transfer: The slave transmits data to the master
• 0 = Write transfer: The master transmits data to the slave
Only the slave with a calling address that matches the one transmitted by the master
responds by sending an acknowledge bit. The slave sends the acknowledge bit by pulling
SDA low at the ninth clock.
No two slaves in the system can have the same address. If the I2C module is the master, it
must not transmit an address that is equal to its own slave address. The I2C module
cannot be master and slave at the same time. However, if arbitration is lost during an
address cycle, the I2C module reverts to slave mode and operates correctly even if it is
being addressed by another master.
31.4.1.3 Data transfers

When successful slave addressing is achieved, data transfer can proceed on a byte-by-
byte basis in the direction specified by the R/W bit sent by the calling master.
All transfers that follow an address cycle are referred to as data transfers, even if they
carry subaddress information for the slave device.
Each data byte is 8 bits long. Data may be changed only while SCL is low. Data must be
held stable while SCL is high. There is one clock pulse on SCL for each data bit, and the
MSB is transferred first. Each data byte is followed by a ninth (acknowledge) bit, which
is signaled from the receiving device by pulling SDA low at the ninth clock. In summary,
one complete data transfer needs nine clock pulses.
If the slave receiver does not acknowledge the master in the ninth bit, the slave must
leave SDA high. The master interprets the failed acknowledgement as an unsuccessful
data transfer.
If the master receiver does not acknowledge the slave transmitter after a data byte
transmission, the slave interprets it as an end to data transfer and releases the SDA line.
In the case of a failed acknowledgement by either the slave or master, the data transfer is
aborted and the master does one of two things:

• Relinquishes the bus by generating a STOP signal.

• Commences a new call by generating a repeated START signal.
31.4.1.4 STOP signal

The master can terminate the communication by generating a STOP signal to free the
bus. A STOP signal is defined as a low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is asserted.
The master can generate a STOP signal even if the slave has generated an
acknowledgement, at which point the slave must release the bus.
31.4.1.5 Repeated START signal

The master may generate a START signal followed by a calling command without
generating a STOP signal first. This action is called a repeated START. The master uses
a repeated START to communicate with another slave or with the same slave in a
different mode (transmit/receive mode) without releasing the bus.
31.4.1.6 Arbitration procedure

The I2C bus is a true multimaster bus that allows more than one master to be connected
on it.
If two or more masters try to control the bus at the same time, a clock synchronization
procedure determines the bus clock. The bus clock's low period is equal to the longest
clock low period, and the high period is equal to the shortest one among the masters.
The relative priority of the contending masters is determined by a data arbitration
procedure. A bus master loses arbitration if it transmits logic level 1 while another master
transmits logic level 0. The losing masters immediately switch to slave receive mode and
stop driving SDA output. In this case, the transition from master to slave mode does not
generate a STOP condition. Meanwhile, hardware sets a status bit to indicate the loss of
arbitration.

31.4.1.7 Clock synchronization

Because wire AND logic is performed on SCL, a high-to-low transition on SCL affects
all devices connected on the bus. The devices start counting their low period and, after a
device's clock has gone low, that device holds SCL low until the clock reaches its high
state. However, the change of low to high in this device clock might not change the state
of SCL if another device clock is still within its low period. Therefore, the synchronized
clock SCL is held low by the device with the longest low period. Devices with shorter
low periods enter a high wait state during this time; see the following diagram. When all
applicable devices have counted off their low period, the synchronized clock SCL is
released and pulled high. Afterward there is no difference between the device clocks and
the state of SCL, and all devices start counting their high periods. The first device to
complete its high period pulls SCL low again.
Start Counting High Period
Delay
SCL2
SCL1
SCL
Internal Counter Reset
Figure 31-27. I2C clock synchronization
31.4.1.8 Handshaking
The clock synchronization mechanism can be used as a handshake in data transfers. A
slave device may hold SCL low after completing a single byte transfer (9 bits). In this
case, it halts the bus clock and forces the master clock into wait states until the slave
releases SCL.
31.4.1.9 Clock stretching

The clock synchronization mechanism can be used by slaves to slow down the bit rate of
a transfer. After the master drives SCL low, a slave can drive SCL low for the required
period and then release it. If the slave's SCL low period is greater than the master's SCL

low period, the resulting SCL bus signal's low period is stretched. In other words, the
SCL bus signal's low period is increased to be the same length as the slave's SCL low
period.
31.4.1.10 I2C divider and hold values

NOTE
For some cases on some devices, the SCL divider value may
vary by ±2 or ±4 when ICR's value ranges from 00h to 0Fh.
These potentially varying SCL divider values are highlighted in
the following table. For the actual SCL divider values for your
device, see the chip-specific details about the I2C module.
Table 31-28. I2C divider and hold values
ICR SCL SDA hold SCL hold SCL hold ICR SCL SDA hold SCL hold SCL hold
divider value (start) (stop) divider (clocks) (start) (stop)
(hex) (hex)
value value (clocks) value value
00 20 7 6 11 20 160 17 78 81
01 22 7 7 12 21 192 17 94 97
02 24 8 8 13 22 224 33 110 113
03 26 8 9 14 23 256 33 126 129
04 28 9 10 15 24 288 49 142 145
05 30 9 11 16 25 320 49 158 161
06 34 10 13 18 26 384 65 190 193
07 40 10 16 21 27 480 65 238 241
08 28 7 10 15 28 320 33 158 161
09 32 7 12 17 29 384 33 190 193
0A 36 9 14 19 2A 448 65 222 225
0B 40 9 16 21 2B 512 65 254 257
0C 44 11 18 23 2C 576 97 286 289
0D 48 11 20 25 2D 640 97 318 321
0E 56 13 24 29 2E 768 129 382 385
0F 68 13 30 35 2F 960 129 478 481
10 48 9 18 25 30 640 65 318 321
11 56 9 22 29 31 768 65 382 385
12 64 13 26 33 32 896 129 446 449
13 72 13 30 37 33 1024 129 510 513
14 80 17 34 41 34 1152 193 574 577
15 88 17 38 45 35 1280 193 638 641
16 104 21 46 53 36 1536 257 766 769
17 128 21 58 65 37 1920 257 958 961

Table 31-28. I2C divider and hold values (continued)

ICR SCL SDA hold SCL hold SCL hold ICR SCL SDA hold SCL hold SCL hold
divider value (start) (stop) divider (clocks) (start) (stop)
(hex) (hex)
value value (clocks) value value
18 80 9 38 41 38 1280 129 638 641
19 96 9 46 49 39 1536 129 766 769
1A 112 17 54 57 3A 1792 257 894 897
1B 128 17 62 65 3B 2048 257 1022 1025
1C 144 25 70 73 3C 2304 385 1150 1153
1D 160 25 78 81 3D 2560 385 1278 1281
1E 192 33 94 97 3E 3072 513 1534 1537
1F 240 33 118 121 3F 3840 513 1918 1921
31.4.2 10-bit address

For 10-bit addressing, 0x11110 is used for the first 5 bits of the first address byte.
Various combinations of read/write formats are possible within a transfer that includes
10-bit addressing.
31.4.2.1 Master-transmitter addresses a slave-receiver

The transfer direction is not changed. When a 10-bit address follows a START condition,
each slave compares the first 7 bits of the first byte of the slave address (11110XX) with
its own address and tests whether the eighth bit (R/W direction bit) is 0. It is possible that
more than one device finds a match and generates an acknowledge (A1). Each slave that
finds a match compares the 8 bits of the second byte of the slave address with its own
address, but only one slave finds a match and generates an acknowledge (A2). The
matching slave remains addressed by the master until it receives a STOP condition (P) or
a repeated START condition (Sr) followed by a different slave address.
Table 31-29. Master-transmitter addresses slave-receiver with a 10-bit
address
S Slave R/W A1 Slave A2 Data A ... Data A/A P
address 0 address
first 7 bits second
11110 + byte
AD10 + AD[8:1]
AD9

After the master-transmitter has sent the first byte of the 10-bit address, the slave-receiver
sees an I2C interrupt. User software must ensure that for this interrupt, the contents of the
Data register are ignored and not treated as valid data.
31.4.2.2 Master-receiver addresses a slave-transmitter

The transfer direction is changed after the second R/W bit. Up to and including
acknowledge bit A2, the procedure is the same as that described for a master-transmitter
addressing a slave-receiver. After the repeated START condition (Sr), a matching slave
remembers that it was addressed before. This slave then checks whether the first seven
bits of the first byte of the slave address following Sr are the same as they were after the
START condition (S), and it tests whether the eighth (R/W) bit is 1. If there is a match,
the slave considers that it has been addressed as a transmitter and generates acknowledge
A3. The slave-transmitter remains addressed until it receives a STOP condition (P) or a
repeated START condition (Sr) followed by a different slave address.
After a repeated START condition (Sr), all other slave devices also compare the first
seven bits of the first byte of the slave address with their own addresses and test the
eighth (R/W) bit. However, none of them are addressed because R/W = 1 (for 10-bit
devices), or the 11110XX slave address (for 7-bit devices) does not match.
Table 31-30. Master-receiver addresses a slave-transmitter with a 10-bit
address
S Slave R/W A1 Slave A2 Sr Slave R/W A3 Data A ... Data A P
address 0 address address 1
first 7 second first 7
bits byte bits
11110 + AD[8:1] 11110 +
AD10 + AD10 +
AD9 AD9
After the master-receiver has sent the first byte of the 10-bit address, the slave-transmitter
sees an I2C interrupt. User software must ensure that for this interrupt, the contents of the
Data register are ignored and not treated as valid data.
31.4.3 Address matching

All received addresses can be requested in 7-bit or 10-bit address format.

• AD[7:1] in Address Register 1, which contains the I2C primary slave address, always
participates in the address matching process. It provides a 7-bit address.
• If the ADEXT bit is set, AD[10:8] in Control Register 2 participates in the address
matching process. It extends the I2C primary slave address to a 10-bit address.
Additional conditions that affect address matching include:
• If the GCAEN bit is set, general call participates the address matching process.
• If the ALERTEN bit is set, alert response participates the address matching process.
• If the SIICAEN bit is set, Address Register 2 participates in the address matching
process.
• If the RMEN bit is set, when the Range Address register is programmed to a nonzero
value, any address within the range of values of Address Register 1 (excluded) and
the Range Address register (included) participates in the address matching process.
The Range Address register must be programmed to a value greater than the value of
Address Register 1.
When the I2C module responds to one of these addresses, it acts as a slave-receiver and
the IAAS bit is set after the address cycle. Software must read the Data register after the
first byte transfer to determine that the address is matched.
31.4.4 System management bus specification

SMBus provides a control bus for system and power management related tasks. A system
can use SMBus to pass messages to and from devices instead of tripping individual
control lines.
Removing the individual control lines reduces pin count. Accepting messages ensures
future expandability. With the system management bus, a device can provide
manufacturer information, tell the system what its model/part number is, save its state for
a suspend event, report different types of errors, accept control parameters, and return its
status.
31.4.4.1 Timeouts
The TTIMEOUT,MIN parameter allows a master or slave to conclude that a defective device
is holding the clock low indefinitely or a master is intentionally trying to drive devices
off the bus. The slave device must release the bus (stop driving the bus and let SCL and
SDA float high) when it detects any single clock held low longer than TTIMEOUT,MIN.
Devices that have detected this condition must reset their communication and be able to
receive a new START condition within the timeframe of TTIMEOUT,MAX.

SMBus defines a clock low timeout, TTIMEOUT, of 35 ms, specifies TLOW:SEXT as the
cumulative clock low extend time for a slave device, and specifies TLOW:MEXT as the
cumulative clock low extend time for a master device.
31.4.4.1.1 SCL low timeout

If the SCL line is held low by a slave device on the bus, no further communication is
possible. Furthermore, the master cannot force the SCL line high to correct the error
condition. To solve this problem, the SMBus protocol specifies that devices participating
in a transfer must detect any clock cycle held low longer than a timeout value condition.
Devices that have detected the timeout condition must reset the communication. When
the I2C module is an active master, if it detects that SMBCLK low has exceeded the
value of TTIMEOUT,MIN, it must generate a stop condition within or after the current data
byte in the transfer process. When the I2C module is a slave, if it detects the
TTIMEOUT,MIN condition, it resets its communication and is then able to receive a new
START condition.
31.4.4.1.2 SCL high timeout

When the I2C module has determined that the SMBCLK and SMBDAT signals have
been high for at least THIGH:MAX, it assumes that the bus is idle.
A HIGH timeout occurs after a START condition appears on the bus but before a STOP
condition appears on the bus. Any master detecting this scenario can assume the bus is
free when either of the following occurs:
• SHTF1 rises.
• The BUSY bit is high and SHTF1 is high.
When the SMBDAT signal is low and the SMBCLK signal is high for a period of time,
another kind of timeout occurs. The time period must be defined in software. SHTF2 is
used as the flag when the time limit is reached. This flag is also an interrupt resource, so
it triggers IICIF.
31.4.4.1.3 CSMBCLK TIMEOUT MEXT and CSMBCLK TIMEOUT SEXT

The following figure illustrates the definition of the timeout intervals TLOW:SEXT and
TLOW:MEXT. When in master mode, the I2C module must not cumulatively extend its
clock cycles for a period greater than TLOW:MEXT within a byte, where each byte is
defined as START-to-ACK, ACK-to-ACK, or ACK-to-STOP. When CSMBCLK
TIMEOUT MEXT occurs, SMBus MEXT rises and also triggers the SLTF.

Start T LOW:SEXT Stop
ClkAck ClkAck
T LOW:MEXT T LOW:MEXT T LOW:MEXT
SCL
SDA
Figure 31-28. Timeout measurement intervals
A master is allowed to abort the transaction in progress to any slave that violates the
TLOW:SEXT or TTIMEOUT,MIN specifications. To abort the transaction, the master issues a
STOP condition at the conclusion of the byte transfer in progress. When a slave, the I2C
module must not cumulatively extend its clock cycles for a period greater than
TLOW:SEXT during any message from the initial START to the STOP. When CSMBCLK
TIMEOUT SEXT occurs, SEXT rises and also triggers SLTF.
NOTE
CSMBCLK TIMEOUT SEXT and CSMBCLK TIMEOUT
MEXT are optional functions that are implemented in the
second step.
31.4.4.2 FAST ACK and NACK

To improve reliability and communication robustness, implementation of packet error
checking (PEC) by SMBus devices is optional for SMBus devices but required for
devices participating in and only during the address resolution protocol (ARP) process.
The PEC is a CRC-8 error checking byte, calculated on all the message bytes. The PEC is
appended to the message by the device that supplied the last data byte. If the PEC is
present but not correct, a NACK is issued by the receiver. Otherwise an ACK is issued.
To calculate the CRC-8 by software, this module can hold the SCL line low after
receiving the eighth SCL (8th bit) if this byte is a data byte. So software can determine
whether an ACK or NACK should be sent to the bus by setting or clearing the TXAK bit
if the FACK (fast ACK/NACK enable) bit is enabled.
SMBus requires a device always to acknowledge its own address, as a mechanism to
detect the presence of a removable device (such as a battery or docking station) on the
bus. In addition to indicating a slave device busy condition, SMBus uses the NACK
mechanism to indicate the reception of an invalid command or invalid data. Because such
a condition may occur on the last byte of the transfer, SMBus devices are required to

have the ability to generate the not acknowledge after the transfer of each byte and before
the completion of the transaction. This requirement is important because SMBus does not
provide any other resend signaling. This difference in the use of the NACK signaling has
implications on the specific implementation of the SMBus port, especially in devices that
handle critical system data such as the SMBus host and the SBS components.
NOTE
In the last byte of master receive slave transmit mode, the
master must send a NACK to the bus, so FACK must be
switched off before the last byte transmits.
31.4.5 Resets
The I2C module is disabled after a reset. The I2C module cannot cause a core reset.
31.4.6 Interrupts
The I2C module generates an interrupt when any of the events in the table found here
occur, provided that the IICIE bit is set.
The interrupt is driven by the IICIF bit (of the I2C Status Register) and masked with the
IICIE bit (of the I2C Control Register 1). The IICIF bit must be cleared (by software) by
writing 1 to it in the interrupt routine. The SMBus timeouts interrupt is driven by SLTF
and masked with the IICIE bit. The SLTF bit must be cleared by software by writing 1 to
it in the interrupt routine. You can determine the interrupt type by reading the Status
Register.
NOTE
In master receive mode, the FACK bit must be set to zero
before the last byte transfer.
Table 31-31. Interrupt summary
Interrupt source Status Flag Local enable
Complete 1-byte transfer TCF IICIF IICIE
Match of received calling address IAAS IICIF IICIE
Arbitration lost ARBL IICIF IICIE
I2C bus stop detection STOPF IICIF IICIE & SSIE
I2C bus start detection STARTF IICIF IICIE & SSIE
SMBus SCL low timeout SLTF IICIF IICIE
SMBus SCL high SDA low timeout SHTF2 IICIF IICIE & SHTF2IE
Wakeup from stop or wait mode IAAS IICIF IICIE & WUEN

31.4.6.1 Byte transfer interrupt

The Transfer Complete Flag (TCF) bit is set at the falling edge of the ninth clock to
indicate the completion of a byte and acknowledgement transfer. When FACK is enabled,
TCF is then set at the falling edge of eighth clock to indicate the completion of byte.
31.4.6.2 Address detect interrupt

When the calling address matches the programmed slave address (I2C Address Register)
or when the GCAEN bit is set and a general call is received, the IAAS bit in the Status
Register is set. The CPU is interrupted, provided the IICIE bit is set. The CPU must
check the SRW bit and set its Tx mode accordingly.
31.4.6.3 Stop Detect Interrupt

When the stop status is detected on the I2C bus, the STOPF bit is set to 1. The CPU is
interrupted, provided the IICIE and STOPIE bits are both set to 1.
31.4.6.4 Exit from low-power/stop modes

The slave receive input detect circuit and address matching feature are still active on low
power modes (wait and stop). An asynchronous input matching slave address or general
call address brings the CPU out of low power/stop mode if the interrupt is not masked.
Therefore, TCF and IAAS both can trigger this interrupt.
31.4.6.5 Arbitration lost interrupt

The I2C is a true multimaster bus that allows more than one master to be connected on it.
If two or more masters try to control the bus at the same time, the relative priority of the
contending masters is determined by a data arbitration procedure. The I2C module asserts
the arbitration-lost interrupt when it loses the data arbitration process and the ARBL bit
in the Status Register is set.
Arbitration is lost in the following circumstances:
1. SDA is sampled as low when the master drives high during an address or data
transmit cycle.

2. SDA is sampled as low when the master drives high during the acknowledge bit of a
data receive cycle.
3. A START cycle is attempted when the bus is busy.
4. A repeated START cycle is requested in slave mode.
5. A STOP condition is detected when the master did not request it.
The ARBL bit must be cleared (by software) by writing 1 to it.
31.4.6.6 Timeout interrupt in SMBus

When the IICIE bit is set, the I2C module asserts a timeout interrupt (outputs SLTF and
SHTF2) upon detection of any of the mentioned timeout conditions, with one exception.
The SCL high and SDA high TIMEOUT mechanism must not be used to influence the
timeout interrupt output, because this timeout indicates an idle condition on the bus.
SHTF1 rises when it matches the SCL high and SDA high TIMEOUT and falls
automatically just to indicate the bus status. The SHTF2's timeout period is the same as
that of SHTF1, which is short compared to that of SLTF, so another control bit,
SHTF2IE, is added to enable or disable it.
31.4.7 Programmable input glitch filter

An I2C glitch filter has been added outside legacy I2C modules but within the I2C
package. This filter can absorb glitches on the I2C clock and data lines for the I2C
module.
The width of the glitch to absorb can be specified in terms of the number of (half) I2C
module clock cycles. A single Programmable Input Glitch Filter control register is
provided. Effectively, any down-up-down or up-down-up transition on the data line that
occurs within the number of clock cycles programmed in this register is ignored by the
I2C module. The programmer must specify the size of the glitch (in terms of I2C module
clock cycles) for the filter to absorb and not pass.
SCL, SDA
Noise internal signals
suppress
circuits
SCL, SDA
external signals
DFF DFF DFF DFF
Figure 31-29. Programmable input glitch filter diagram

31.4.8 Address matching wake-up

When a primary, range, or general call address match occurs when the I2C module is in
slave receive mode, the MCU wakes from a low power mode where no peripheral bus is
running.
After the address matching IAAS bit is set, an interrupt is sent at the end of address
matching to wake the core.
NOTE
During the wake-up process, if an external master continues to
send data to the slave, the baud rate under Stop mode must be
less than 50 kbit/s. To avoid the slower baud rate under Stop
mode, the master can add a short delay in firmware to wait until
the wake-up process is complete and then send data.
NOTE
Wake-up caused by an address match is not supported for
SMBus mode.
Module Initialization (Slave)

1. Write: Control Register 2
• to enable or disable general call
• to select 10-bit or 7-bit addressing mode
2. Write: Address Register 1 to set the slave address
3. Write: Control Register 1 to enable the I2C module and interrupts
4. Initialize RAM variables (IICEN = 1 and IICIE = 1) for transmit data
5. Initialize RAM variables used to achieve the routine shown in the following figure
Module Initialization (Master)
1. Write: Frequency Divider register to set the I2C baud rate (see example in
description of ICR)
2. Write: Control Register 1 to enable the I2C module and interrupts
3. Initialize RAM variables (IICEN = 1 and IICIE = 1) for transmit data
4. Initialize RAM variables used to achieve the routine shown in the following figure
5. Write: Control Register 1 to enable TX

6. Write: Control Register 1 to enable MST (master mode)

7. Write: Data register with the address of the target slave (the LSB of this byte
determines whether the communication is master receive or transmit)
The routine shown in the following figure encompasses both master and slave I2C
operations. For slave operation, an incoming I2C message that contains the proper
address begins I2C communication. For master operation, communication must be
initiated by writing the Data register. An example of an I2C driver which implements
many of the steps described here is available in AN4342: Using the Inter-Integrated
Circuit on ColdFire+ and Kinetis .

Clear IICIF
Y N
Master
mode?
Tx Rx Y Arbitration
Tx/Rx?
lost?
Last byte Y
Clear ARBL N
transmitted?
N Y N Y
Last byte
RXAK=0? IIAAS=1? IIAAS=1?
to be read?
Y N Y N Data transfer
Address transfer see note 2
Y see note 1
Y End of Y 2nd to Rx
(read)
address cycle last byte to be SRW=1? Tx/Rx?
(master Rx)? read?
N N N (write) Tx
Y
Write next Generate stop ACK from
byte to Data reg Set TXACK signal (MST=0) Set TX mode
receiver?
Read data from

Write data Transmit
Data reg
to Data reg next byte
and store
Switch to Switch to
Set Rx mode
Rx mode Rx mode
Generate stop Read data from

Dummy read Dummy read Dummy read
signal (MST=0) Data reg
from Data reg from Data reg from Data reg
and store
RTI
Notes:
1. If general call is enabled, check to determine if the received address is a general call address (0x00).
If the received address is a general call address, the general call must be handled by user software.
2. When 10-bit addressing addresses a slave, the slave sees an interrupt following the first byte of the extended address.
Ensure that for this interrupt, the contents of the Data register are ignored and not treated as a valid data transfer.
Figure 31-30. Typical I2C interrupt routine

Entry of ISR
Y SLTF=1 or
SHTF2=1?
N See typical I2C

FACK=1? interrupt routine
flow chart
Clear IICIF Y
Y N
Master
mode?
Tx Rx Y Arbitration
Tx/Rx?
lost?
Y Y
Last byte Last byte N
Clear ARBL
transmitted? to be read?
N N
Y 2nd to
N last byte to be N Y
RXAK=0? read? IAAS=1? IAAS=1?
N
Y Y N
Read data from Address transfer
Data reg (see note 1)
and soft CRC Y
Y End of (read)
address cycle Read data and SRW=1? Tx/Rx?
(master Rx)? Rx
Soft CRC
N N (write) Tx
Set TXAK to
proper value
Delay (note 2) Read data from Y

Generate stop ACK from
Clear IICIF signal (MST=0) Data reg
and soft CRC receiver?
Set TXACK=1, Clear IICIF
Clear FACK=0 N
Set TXAK to
proper value,
Write next Set TXAK to Clear IICIF Read data from Transmit
Data reg
byte to Data reg proper value and soft CRC next byte
Delay (note 2)
Clear IICIF Set TXAK to

Switch to proper value, Switch to
Set Tx mode Clear IICIF
Rx mode Rx mode
Delay (note 2)
Delay (note 2)
Generate stop Read data from Read data from

Dummy read Write data Dummy read
signal (MST=0) Data reg Data reg
from Data reg to Data reg from Data reg
and store and store (note 3)
RTI
Notes:
1. If general call or SIICAEN is enabled, check to determine if the received address is a general call address (0x00) or an SMBus
device default address. In either case, they must be handled by user software.
2. In receive mode, one bit time delay may be needed before the first and second data reading, to wait for the possible longest time
period (in worst case) of the 9th SCL cycle.
3. This read is a dummy read in order to reset the SMBus receiver state machine.
Figure 31-31. Typical I2C SMBus interrupt routine

Chapter 32
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
(UART)
32.1 Introduction
32.1.1 Features
Features of UART module include:
• Full-duplex, standard non-return-to-zero (NRZ) format
• Double-buffered transmitter and receiver with separate enables
• Programmable baud rates (13-bit modulo divider)
• Interrupt-driven or polled operation:
• Transmit data register empty and transmission complete
• Receive data register full
• Receive overrun, parity error, framing error, and noise error
• Idle receiver detect
• Active edge on receive pin
• Break detect supporting LIN
• Hardware parity generation and checking
• Programmable 8-bit or 9-bit character length
• Programmable 1-bit or 2-bit stop bits
• Receiver wakeup by idle-line or address-mark
• Optional 13-bit break character generation / 11-bit break character detection
• Selectable transmitter output polarity

See Section Functional description for details concerning UART operation in these
modes:

Introduction
• 8- and 9-bit data modes

• Stop mode operation
• Loop mode
• Single-wire mode

The following figure shows the transmitter portion of the UART.
Internal Bus
(Write-Only)
LOOPS
UART_D – Tx Buffer RSRC
Loop
To Receive
11-BIT Transmit Shift Register Control
M Data In
Start
Stop
H 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 L To TxD Pin
1  Baud
Rate Clock
lsb
SHIFT DIRECTION
TXINV
Load From UARTx_D
Preamble (All 1s)

Shift Enable
Break (All 0s)
T8
PE Parity
Generation
PT
UART Controls TxD

TE
SBK TO TxD
Transmit Control
TxD Direction Pin Logic
TXDIR
BRK13
TDRE
TIE
Tx Interrupt
TC
Request
TCIE
Figure 32-1. UART transmitter block diagram
The following figure shows the receiver portion of the UART.

Chapter 32 Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
Internal Bus
(Read-only)
16 x Baud
Divide
Rate Clock UART_D – Rx Buffer
By 16
From
Transmitter
11-Bit Receive Shift Register
LOOPS
Start
Single-Wire
Stop
M
lsb
Loop Control
RSRC
LBKDE H 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 L
From RxD Pin
All 1s
msb
RXINV Data Recovery Shift Direction
WAKE Wakeup
RWU RWUID
ILT Logic
RDRF
RIE
IDLE
ILIE
Rx Interrupt
Request
LBKDIF
LBKDIE
From RxD Pin
Active Edge
RXEDGIF
Detect
RXEDGIE
OR
ORIE
FE
FEIE
Error Interrupt
Request
NF
NEIE
PE Parity
PF
PT
Checking
PEIE
Figure 32-2. UART receiver block diagram

UART signal descriptions
32.2 UART signal descriptions

The UART signals are shown in the table found here.
Table 32-1. UART signal descriptions
RxD Receive data I
TxD Transmit data I/O
32.2.1 Detailed signal descriptions

The detailed signal descriptions of the UART are shown in the following table.
Table 32-2. UART—Detailed signal descriptions
Signal I/O Description
RxD I Receive data. Serial data input to receiver.
State meaning Whether RxD is interpreted as a 1 or 0 depends on the bit encoding
method along with other configuration settings.
Timing Sampled at a frequency determined by the module clock divided by
the baud rate.
TxD I/O Transmit data. Serial data output from transmitter.
State meaning Whether TxD is interpreted as a 1 or 0 depends on the bit encoding
method along with other configuration settings.
Timing Driven at the beginning or within a bit time according to the bit
encoding method along with other configuration settings.
Otherwise, transmissions are independent of reception timing.

The UART has 8-bit registers to control baud rate, select UART options, report UART
status, and for transmit/receive data.
Refer to the direct-page register summary in the memory chapter of this document or the
absolute address assignments for all UART registers. This section refers to registers and
control bits only by their names. A Freescale-provided equate or header file is used to
translate these names into the appropriate absolute addresses.

UART memory map

Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4006_A000 UART Baud Rate Register: High (UART0_BDH) 8 R/W 00h 32.3.1/565
4006_A001 UART Baud Rate Register: Low (UART0_BDL) 8 R/W 04h 32.3.2/566
4006_A002 UART Control Register 1 (UART0_C1) 8 R/W 00h 32.3.3/566
4006_A004 UART Status Register 1 (UART0_S1) 8 R C0h 32.3.5/569
4006_A005 UART Status Register 2 (UART0_S2) 8 R/W 00h 32.3.6/571
4006_A007 UART Data Register (UART0_D) 8 R/W 00h 32.3.8/574
32.3.1 UART Baud Rate Register: High (UARTx_BDH)
This register, along with UART_BDL, controls the prescale divisor for UART baud rate
generation. To update the 13-bit baud rate setting SBR[12:0], first write to UART_BDH
to buffer the high half of the new value and then write to UART_BDL. The working
value in UART_BDH does not change until UART_BDL is written.
Address: 4006_A000h base + 0h offset = 4006_A000h
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read LBKDIE RXEDGIE SBNS SBR
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
UARTx_BDH field descriptions

Field Description
7 LIN Break Detect Interrupt Enable (for LBKDIF)
LBKDIE
0 Hardware interrupts from UART_S2[LBKDIF] disabled (use polling).
1 Hardware interrupt requested when UART_S2[LBKDIF] flag is 1.
6 RxD Input Active Edge Interrupt Enable (for RXEDGIF)
RXEDGIE
0 Hardware interrupts from UART_S2[RXEDGIF] disabled (use polling).
1 Hardware interrupt requested when UART_S2[RXEDGIF] flag is 1.
5 Stop Bit Number Select
SBNS
SBNS determines whether data characters are one or two stop bits.
0 One stop bit.

1 Two stop bit.
SBR Baud Rate Modulo Divisor.

Register definition
UARTx_BDH field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
The 13 bits in SBR[12:0] are referred to collectively as BR, and they set the modulo divide rate for the
UART baud rate generator. When BR is cleared, the UART baud rate generator is disabled to reduce
supply current. When BR is 1 - 8191, the UART baud rate equals BUSCLK/(16×BR).
32.3.2 UART Baud Rate Register: Low (UARTx_BDL)

This register, along with UART_BDH, control the prescale divisor for UART baud rate
generation. To update the 13-bit baud rate setting [SBR12:SBR0], first write to
UART_BDH to buffer the high half of the new value and then write to UART_BDL. The
working value in UART_BDH does not change until UART_BDL is written.
UART_BDL is reset to a non-zero value, so after reset, the baud rate generator remains
disabled until the first time the receiver or transmitter is enabled; that is, 1 is written to
UART_C2[RE] or UART_C2[TE].
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read SBR
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
UARTx_BDL field descriptions

Field Description
SBR Baud Rate Modulo Divisor
These 13 bits in SBR[12:0] are referred to collectively as BR, which set the modulo divide rate for the
UART baud rate generator. When BR is cleared, the UART baud rate generator is disabled to reduce
supply current. When BR is 1 - 8191, the UART baud rate equals BUSCLK/(16×BR).
32.3.3 UART Control Register 1 (UARTx_C1)
This read/write register controls various optional features of the UART system.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read LOOPS UARTSWAI RSRC M WAKE ILT PE PT
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

UARTx_C1 field descriptions

Field Description
7 Loop Mode Select
LOOPS
Selects between loop mode and normal 2-pin full-duplex modes. When LOOPS is set, the transmitter
output is internally connected to the receiver input.
0 Normal operation - RxD and TxD use separate pins.

1 Loop mode or single-wire mode where transmitter outputs are internally connected to receiver input.
(See RSRC bit.) RxD pin is not used by UART.
6 UART Stops in Wait Mode
UARTSWAI
0 UART clocks continue to run in Wait mode so the UART can be the source of an interrupt that wakes
up the CPU.
1 UART clocks freeze while CPU is in Wait mode.
5 Receiver Source Select
RSRC
This field has no meaning or effect unless LOOPS is set to 1. When LOOPS is set, the receiver input is
internally connected to the TxD pin and RSRC determines whether this connection is also connected to
the transmitter output.
0 Provided LOOPS is set, RSRC is cleared, selects internal loop back mode and the UART does not
use the RxD pins.
1 Single-wire UART mode where the TxD pin is connected to the transmitter output and receiver input.
4 9-Bit or 8-Bit Mode Select
M
This field configures the UART to be operated in 9-bit or 8-bit data mode.
0 Normal - start + 8 data bits (lsb first) + stop.

1 Receiver and transmitter use 9-bit data characters start + 8 data bits (lsb first) + 9th data bit + stop.
3 Receiver Wakeup Method Select
WAKE
This field selects the receiver wakeup method.
0 Idle-line wake-up.
1 Address-mark wake-up.
2 Idle Line Type Select
ILT
Setting this field to 1 ensures that the stop bits and logic 1 bits at the end of a character do not count
toward the 10 or 11 bit times of logic high level needed by the idle line detection logic.
0 Idle character bit count starts after start bit.

1 Idle character bit count starts after stop bit.
1 Parity Enable
PE
Enables hardware parity generation and checking. When parity is enabled, the most significant bit (msb) of
the data character, eighth or ninth data bit, is treated as the parity bit.
0 No hardware parity generation or checking.

1 Parity enabled.
0 Parity Type
PT

Register definition
UARTx_C1 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
Provided parity is enabled (PE = 1), this field selects even or odd parity. Odd parity means the total
number of 1s in the data character, including the parity bit, is odd. Even parity means the total number of
1s in the data character, including the parity bit, is even.
0 Even parity.
1 Odd parity.

This register can be read or written at any time.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read TIE TCIE RIE ILIE TE RE RWU SBK
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Field Description
7 Transmit Interrupt Enable for TDRE
TIE
0 Hardware interrupts from TDRE disabled; use polling.
1 Hardware interrupt requested when TDRE flag is 1.
6 Transmission Complete Interrupt Enable for TC
TCIE
0 Hardware interrupts from TC disabled; use polling.
1 Hardware interrupt requested when TC flag is 1.
5 Receiver Interrupt Enable for RDRF
RIE
0 Hardware interrupts from S1[RDRF] disabled; use polling.
1 Hardware interrupt requested when S1[RDRF] flag is 1.
4 Idle Line Interrupt Enable for IDLE
ILIE
0 Hardware interrupts from S1[IDLE] disabled; use polling.
1 Hardware interrupt requested when S1[IDLE] flag is 1.
3 Transmitter Enable
TE
TE must be 1 to use the UART transmitter. When TE is set, the UART forces the TxD pin to act as an
output for the UART system.
When the UART is configured for single-wire operation (LOOPS = RSRC = 1), TXDIR controls the
direction of traffic on the single UART communication line (TxD pin).
TE can also queue an idle character by clearing TE and then setting TE while a transmission is in
progress.
When 0 is written to TE, the transmitter keeps control of the port TxD pin until any data, queued idle, or
queued break character finishes transmitting before allowing the pin to revert to a general-purpose I/O pin.


Field Description
0 Transmitter off.
1 Transmitter on.
2 Receiver Enable
RE
When the UART receiver is off, the RxD pin reverts to being a general-purpose port I/O pin. If C1[LOOPS]
is set, the RxD pin reverts to being a general-purpose I/O pin even if RE is set.
0 Receiver off.
1 Receiver on.
1 Receiver Wakeup Control
RWU
A 1 can be written to this field to place the UART receiver in a standby state where it waits for automatic
hardware detection of a selected wake-up condition. The wake-up condition is an idle line between
messages, WAKE = 0, idle-line wake-up, or a logic 1 in the most significant data bit in a character, WAKE
= 1, address-mark wake-up. Application software sets RWU and, normally, a selected hardware condition
automatically clears RWU.
0 Normal UART receiver operation.

1 UART receiver in standby waiting for wake-up condition.
0 Send Break
SBK
Writing a 1 and then a 0 to SBK queues a break character in the transmit data stream. Additional break
characters of 10 or 11 or 12, 13 or 14 or 15 if BRK13 = 1, bit times of logic 0 are queued as long as SBK is
set. Depending on the timing of the set and clear of SBK relative to the information currently being
transmitted, a second break character may be queued before software clears SBK.
0 Normal transmitter operation.

1 Queue break character(s) to be sent.
32.3.5 UART Status Register 1 (UARTx_S1)

This register has eight read-only status flags. Writes have no effect. Special software
sequences, which do not involve writing to this register, clear these status flags.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read TDRE TC RDRF IDLE OR NF FE PF
Write
Reset 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
UARTx_S1 field descriptions

Field Description
7 Transmit Data Register Empty Flag
TDRE
TDRE is set out of reset and when a transmit data value transfers from the transmit data buffer to the
transmit shifter, leaving room for a new character in the buffer. To clear TDRE, read UART_S1 with TDRE
set and then write to the UART data register (UART_D).
Register definition
UARTx_S1 field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
0 Transmit data register (buffer) full.
1 Transmit data register (buffer) empty.
6 Transmission Complete Flag
TC TC is set out of reset and when TDRE is set and no data, preamble, or break character is being
transmitted.
TC is cleared automatically by reading UART_S1 with TC set and then executing one of the following
operations:
• Write to the UART data register (UART_D) to transmit new data
• Queue a preamble by changing TE from 0 to 1
• Queue a break character by writing 1 to UART_C2[SBK]
0 Transmitter active (sending data, a preamble, or a break).

1 Transmitter idle (transmission activity complete).
5 Receive Data Register Full Flag
RDRF
RDRF becomes set when a character transfers from the receive shifter into the receive data register
(UART_D). To clear RDRF, read UART_S1 with RDRF set and then read the UART data register
(UART_D).
0 Receive data register empty.

1 Receive data register full.
4 Idle Line Flag
IDLE
IDLE is set when the UART receive line becomes idle for a full character time after a period of activity.
When C1[ILT] is cleared, the receiver starts counting idle bit times after the start bit. If the receive
character is all 1s, these bit times and the stop bits time count toward the full character time of logic high,
10 or 11 bit times depending on the M control bit, needed for the receiver to detect an idle line. When ILT
is set, the receiver doesn't start counting idle bit times until the stop bits. The stop bits and any logic high
bit times at the end of the previous character do not count toward the full character time of logic high
needed for the receiver to detect an idle line.
To clear IDLE, read UART_S1 with IDLE set and then read the UART data register (UART_D). After IDLE
has been cleared, it cannot become set again until after a new character has been received and RDRF
has been set. IDLE is set only once even if the receive line remains idle for an extended period.
0 No idle line detected.

1 Idle line was detected.
3 Receiver Overrun Flag
OR
OR is set when a new serial character is ready to be transferred to the receive data register (buffer), but
the previously received character has not been read from UART_D yet. In this case, the new character,
and all associated error information, is lost because there is no room to move it into UART_D. To clear
OR, read UART_S1 with OR set and then read the UART data register (UART_D).
0 No overrun.
1 Receive overrun (new UART data lost).
2 Noise Flag
NF
The advanced sampling technique used in the receiver takes seven samples during the start bit and three
samples in each data bit and the stop bits. If any of these samples disagrees with the rest of the samples
within any bit time in the frame, the flag NF is set at the same time as RDRF is set for the character. To
clear NF, read UART_S1 and then read the UART data register (UART_D).


Field Description
0 No noise detected.
1 Noise detected in the received character in UART_D.
1 Framing Error Flag
FE
FE is set at the same time as RDRF when the receiver detects a logic 0 where the stop bits were
expected. This suggests the receiver was not properly aligned to a character frame. To clear FE, read
UART_S1 with FE set and then read the UART data register (UART_D).
0 No framing error detected. This does not guarantee the framing is correct.
1 Framing error.
0 Parity Error Flag
PF
PF is set at the same time as RDRF when parity is enabled (PE = 1) and the parity bit in the received
character does not agree with the expected parity value. To clear PF, read UART_S1 and then read the
UART data register (UART_D).
0 No parity error.
1 Parity error.
32.3.6 UART Status Register 2 (UARTx_S2)

This register contains one read-only status flag.
When using an internal oscillator in a LIN system, it is necessary to raise the break
detection threshold one bit time. Under the worst case timing conditions allowed in LIN,
it is possible that a 0x00 data character can appear to be 10.26 bit times long at a slave
running 14% faster than the master. This would trigger normal break detection circuitry
designed to detect a 10-bit break symbol. When the LBKDE bit is set, framing errors are
inhibited and the break detection threshold changes from 10 bits to 11 bits, preventing
false detection of a 0x00 data character as a LIN break symbol.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 RAF
LBKDIF RXEDGIF RXINV RWUID BRK13 LBKDE
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
UARTx_S2 field descriptions

Field Description
7 LIN Break Detect Interrupt Flag
LBKDIF
LBKDIF is set when the LIN break detect circuitry is enabled and a LIN break character is detected.
LBKDIF is cleared by writing a 1 to it.

Register definition

Field Description
0 No LIN break character has been detected.
1 LIN break character has been detected.
6 RxD Pin Active Edge Interrupt Flag
RXEDGIF
RXEDGIF is set when an active edge, falling if RXINV = 0, rising if RXINV=1, on the RxD pin occurs.
RXEDGIF is cleared by writing a 1 to it.
0 No active edge on the receive pin has occurred.

1 An active edge on the receive pin has occurred.
4 Receive Data Inversion
RXINV
Setting this field reverses the polarity of the received data input.
NOTE: Setting RXINV inverts the RxD input for all cases: data bits, start and stop bits, break, and idle.
0 Receive data not inverted.

1 Receive data inverted.
3 Receive Wake Up Idle Detect
RWUID
RWUID controls whether the idle character that wakes up the receiver sets S1[IDLE].
0 During receive standby state (RWU = 1), S1[IDLE] does not get set upon detection of an idle
character.
1 During receive standby state (RWU = 1), S1[IDLE] gets set upon detection of an idle character.
2 Break Character Generation Length
BRK13
BRK13 selects a longer transmitted break character length. Detection of a framing error is not affected by
the state of this field.
0 Break character is transmitted with length of 10 bit times (if M = 0, SBNS = 0) or 11 (if M = 1, SBNS =
0 or M = 0, SBNS = 1) or 12 (if M = 1, SBNS = 1).
1 Break character is transmitted with length of 13 bit times (if M = 0, SBNS = 0) or 14 (if M = 1, SBNS =
0 or M = 0, SBNS = 1) or 15 (if M = 1, SBNS = 1).
1 LIN Break Detection Enable
LBKDE
LBKDE enables the break detection. While LBKDE is set, S1[FE] and S1[RDRF] flags are prevented from
setting.
0 Break detection is disabled.

1 Break detection is enabled (Break character is detected at length 11 bit times (if C1[M] = 0,
BDH[SBNS] = 0) or 12 (if C1[M] = 1, BDH[SBNS] = 0 or C1[M] = 0, BDH[SBNS] = 1) or 13 (if C1[M] =
1, BDH[SBNS] = 1)).
0 Receiver Active Flag
RAF
RAF is set when the UART receiver detects the beginning of a valid start bit, and RAF is cleared
automatically when the receiver detects an idle line. This status flag can be used to check whether an
UART character is being received before instructing the MCU to go to stop mode.
0 UART receiver idle waiting for a start bit.

1 UART receiver active (RxD input not idle).


Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read R8
T8 TXDIR TXINV ORIE NEIE FEIE PEIE
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Field Description
7 Ninth Data Bit for Receiver
R8
When the UART is configured for 9-bit data (C1[M] = 1), R8 can be thought of as a ninth receive data bit to
the left of the msb of the buffered data in the UART_D register. When reading 9-bit data, read R8 before
reading UART_D because reading UART_D completes automatic flag clearing sequences that could allow
R8 and UART_D to be overwritten with new data.
6 Ninth Data Bit for Transmitter
T8
When the UART is configured for 9-bit data (C1[M] = 1), T8 may be thought of as a ninth transmit data bit
to the left of the msb of the data in the UART_D register. When writing 9-bit data, the entire 9-bit value is
transferred to the UART shift register after UART_D is written so T8 should be written, if it needs to
change from its previous value, before UART_D is written. If T8 does not need to change in the new value,
such as when it is used to generate mark or space parity, it need not be written each time UART_D is
written.
5 TxD Pin Direction in Single-Wire Mode
TXDIR
When the UART is configured for single-wire half-duplex operation (LOOPS = RSRC = 1), this field
determines the direction of data at the TxD pin.
0 TxD pin is an input in single-wire mode.

1 TxD pin is an output in single-wire mode.
4 Transmit Data Inversion
TXINV
Setting this field reverses the polarity of the transmitted data output.
NOTE: Setting TXINV inverts the TxD output for all cases: data bits, start and stop bits, break, and idle.
0 Transmit data not inverted.

1 Transmit data inverted.
3 Overrun Interrupt Enable
ORIE
Enables the overrun flag (OR) to generate hardware interrupt requests.
0 OR interrupts disabled; use polling.

1 Hardware interrupt requested when OR is set.
2 Noise Error Interrupt Enable
NEIE
Enables the noise flag (NF) to generate hardware interrupt requests.

Register definition

Field Description
0 NF interrupts disabled; use polling).
1 Hardware interrupt requested when NF is set.
1 Framing Error Interrupt Enable
FEIE
Enables the framing error flag (FE) to generate hardware interrupt requests.
0 FE interrupts disabled; use polling).

1 Hardware interrupt requested when FE is set.
0 Parity Error Interrupt Enable
PEIE
Enables the parity error flag (PF) to generate hardware interrupt requests.
0 PF interrupts disabled; use polling).

1 Hardware interrupt requested when PF is set.
32.3.8 UART Data Register (UARTx_D)
This register is actually two separate registers. Reads return the contents of the read-only
receive data buffer and writes go to the write-only transmit data buffer. Reads and writes
of this register are also involved in the automatic flag clearing mechanisms for the UART
status flags.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read R7T7 R6T6 R5T5 R4T4 R3T3 R2T2 R1T1 R0T0
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
UARTx_D field descriptions

Field Description
7 Read receive data buffer 7 or write transmit data buffer 7.
R7T7
R6T6
R5T5
R4T4
R3T3
R2T2

UARTx_D field descriptions (continued)

Field Description
R1T1
R0T0

The UART allows full-duplex, asynchronous, NRZ serial communication among the
MCU and remote devices, including other MCUs.
The UART comprises a baud rate generator, transmitter, and receiver block. The
transmitter and receiver operate independently, although they use the same baud rate
generator. During normal operation, the MCU monitors the status of the UART, writes
the data to be transmitted, and processes received data. The following describes each of
the blocks of the UART.
32.4.1 Baud rate generation

As shown in the figure found here, the clock source for the UART baud rate generator is
the bus-rate clock.
Modulo Divide By
(1 through 8191)
Divide By
16 Tx Baud Rate
UART Module Clock SBR[12:0]
Baud Rate Generator Rx Sampling Clock

Off If [SBR12:SBR0] =0 (16 × Baud Rate)
UART Module Clock

Baud Rate =
SBR[12:0] × 16
Figure 32-19. UART baud rate generation
UART communications require the transmitter and receiver, which typically derive baud
rates from independent clock sources, to use the same baud rate. Allowed tolerance on
this baud frequency depends on the details of how the receiver synchronizes to the
leading edge of the start bit and how bit sampling is performed.
The MCU resynchronizes to bit boundaries on every high-to-low transition. In the worst
case, there are no such transitions in the full 10- or 11-bit or 12-bittime character frame
so any mismatch in baud rate is accumulated for the whole character time. For a

Freescale UART system whose bus frequency is driven by a crystal, the allowed baud
rate mismatch is about ±4.5 percent for 8-bit data format and about ±4 percent for 9-bit
data format. Although baud rate modulo divider settings do not always produce baud
rates that exactly match standard rates, it is normally possible to get within a few percent,
which is acceptable for reliable communications.
32.4.2 Transmitter functional description

This section describes the overall block diagram for the UART transmitter, as well as
specialized functions for sending break and idle characters.
The transmitter output (TxD) idle state defaults to logic high, UART_C3[TXINV] is
cleared following reset. The transmitter output is inverted by setting UART_C3[TXINV].
The transmitter is enabled by setting the TE bit in UART_C2. This queues a preamble
character that is one full character frame of the idle state. The transmitter then remains
idle until data is available in the transmit data buffer. Programs store data into the
transmit data buffer by writing to the UART data register (UART_D).
The central element of the UART transmitter is the transmit shift register that is 10 or 11
or 12 bits long depending on the setting in the UART_C1[M] control bit and
UART_BDH[SBNS] bit. For the remainder of this section, assume UART_C1[M] is
cleared, UART_BDH[SBNS] is also cleared, selecting the normal 8-bit data mode. In 8-
bit data mode, the shift register holds a start bit, eight data bits, and a stop bit. When the
transmit shift register is available for a new UART character, the value waiting in the
transmit data register is transferred to the shift register, synchronized with the baud rate
clock, and the transmit data register empty (UART_S1[TDRE]) status flag is set to
indicate another character may be written to the transmit data buffer at UART_D.
NOTE
Always read UART_S1 before writing to UART_D to allow
data to be transmitted.
If no new character is waiting in the transmit data buffer after a stop bit is shifted out the
TxD pin, the transmitter sets the transmit complete flag and enters an idle mode, with
TxD high, waiting for more characters to transmit.
Writing 0 to UART_C2[TE] does not immediately release the pin to be a general-purpose
I/O pin. Any transmit activity in progress must first be completed. This includes data
characters in progress, queued idle characters, and queued break characters.

32.4.2.1 Send break and queued idle

UART_C2[SBK] sends break characters originally used to gain the attention of old
teletype receivers. Break characters are a full character time of logic 0, 10 bit times
including the start and stop bits. A longer break of 13 bit times can be enabled by setting
UART_S2[BRK13]. Normally, a program would wait for UART_S1[TDRE] to become
set to indicate the last character of a message has moved to the transmit shifter, write 1,
and then write 0 to UART_C2[SBK]. This action queues a break character to be sent as
soon as the shifter is available. If UART_C2[SBK] remains 1 when the queued break
moves into the shifter, synchronized to the baud rate clock, an additional break character
is queued. If the receiving device is another Freescale Semiconductor UART, the break
characters are received as 0s in all eight data bits and a framing error (UART_S1[FE] =
1) occurs.
When idle-line wake-up is used, a full character time of idle (logic 1) is needed between
messages to wake up any sleeping receivers. Normally, a program would wait for
UART_S1[TDRE] to become set to indicate the last character of a message has moved to
the transmit shifter, then write 0 and then write 1 to the UART_C2[TE] bit. This action
queues an idle character to be sent as soon as the shifter is available. As long as the
character in the shifter does not finish while UART_C2[TE] is cleared, the UART
transmitter never actually releases control of the TxD pin. If there is a possibility of the
shifter finishing while UART_C2[TE] is cleared, set the general-purpose I/O controls so
the pin shared with TxD is an output driving a logic 1. This ensures that the TxD line
looks like a normal idle line even if the UART loses control of the port pin between
writing 0 and then 1 to UART_C2[TE].
The length of the break character is affected by the UART_S2[BRK13] and
UART_C1[M] as shown below.
Table 32-21. Break character length
BRK13 M SBNS Break character length
0 0 0 10 bit times
0 0 1 11 bit times
0 1 0 11 bit times
0 1 1 12 bit times
1 0 0 13 bit times
1 0 1 14 bit times
1 1 0 14 bit times
1 1 1 15 bit times

32.4.3 Receiver functional description

In this section, the receiver block diagram is a guide for the overall receiver functional
description.
Next, the data sampling technique used to reconstruct receiver data is described in more
detail. Finally, two variations of the receiver wakeup function are explained.
The receiver input is inverted by setting UART_S2[RXINV]. The receiver is enabled by
setting the UART_C2[RE] bit. Character frames consist of a start bit of logic 0, eight (or
nine) data bits (lsb first), and one (or two) stop bits of logic 1. For information about 9-bit
data mode, refer to 8- and 9-bit data modes. For the remainder of this discussion, assume
the UART is configured for normal 8-bit data mode.
After receiving the stop bit into the receive shifter, and provided the receive data register
is not already full, the data character is transferred to the receive data register and the
receive data register full (UART_S1[RDRF]) status flag is set. If UART_S1[RDRF] was
already set indicating the receive data register (buffer) was already full, the overrun (OR)
status flag is set and the new data is lost. Because the UART receiver is double-buffered,
the program has one full character time after UART_S1[RDRF] is set before the data in
the receive data buffer must be read to avoid a receiver overrun.
When a program detects that the receive data register is full (UART_S1[RDRF] = 1), it
gets the data from the receive data register by reading UART_D. The UART_S1[RDRF]
flag is cleared automatically by a two-step sequence normally satisfied in the course of
the user's program that manages receive data. Refer to Interrupts and status flags for more
details about flag clearing.
32.4.3.1 Data sampling technique

The UART receiver uses a 16× baud rate clock for sampling. The oversampling ratio is
fixed at 16. The receiver starts by taking logic level samples at 16 times the baud rate to
search for a falling edge on the RxD serial data input pin. A falling edge is defined as a
logic 0 sample after three consecutive logic 1 samples. The 16× baud rate clock divides
the bit time into 16 segments labeled UART_D[RT1] through UART_D[RT16]. When a
falling edge is located, three more samples are taken at UART_D[RT3], UART_D[RT5],
and UART_D[RT7] to make sure this was a real start bit and not merely noise. If at least
two of these three samples are 0, the receiver assumes it is synchronized to a receive
character.
The receiver then samples each bit time, including the start and stop bits, at
UART_D[RT8], UART_D[RT9], and UART_D[RT10] to determine the logic level for
that bit. The logic level is interpreted to be that of the majority of the samples taken

during the bit time. In the case of the start bit, the bit is assumed to be 0 if at least two of
the samples at UART_D[RT3], UART_D[RT5], and UART_D[RT7] are 0 even if one or
all of the samples taken at UART_D[RT8], UART_D[RT9], and UART_D[RT10] are 1s.
If any sample in any bit time, including the start and stop bits, in a character frame fails to
agree with the logic level for that bit, the noise flag (UART_S1[NF]) is set when the
received character is transferred to the receive data buffer.
The falling edge detection logic continuously looks for falling edges. If an edge is
detected, the sample clock is resynchronized to bit times. This improves the reliability of
the receiver in the presence of noise or mismatched baud rates. It does not improve worst
case analysis because some characters do not have any extra falling edges anywhere in
the character frame.
In the case of a framing error, provided the received character was not a break character,
the sampling logic that searches for a falling edge is filled with three logic 1 samples so
that a new start bit can be detected almost immediately.
In the case of a framing error, the receiver is inhibited from receiving any new characters
until the framing error flag is cleared. The receive shift register continues to function, but
a complete character cannot transfer to the receive data buffer if UART_S1[FE] remains
set.
32.4.3.2 Receiver wake-up operation

Receiver wake-up is a hardware mechanism that allows an UART receiver to ignore the
characters in a message intended for a different UART receiver. In such a system, all
receivers evaluate the first character(s) of each message, and as soon as they determine
the message is intended for a different receiver, they write logic 1 to the receiver wake up
control field (UART_C2[RWU]). When UART_C2[RWU] is set, the status flags
associated with the receiver, (with the exception of the idle bit, IDLE, when
UART_S2[RWUID] is set), are inhibited from setting, thus eliminating the software
overhead for handling the unimportant message characters. At the end of a message, or at
the beginning of the next message, all receivers automatically force UART_C2[RWU] to
0, so all receivers wake up in time to look at the first character(s) of the next message.
32.4.3.2.1 Idle-line wakeup

When wake is cleared, the receiver is configured for idle-line wakeup. In this mode,
UART_C2[RWU] is cleared automatically when the receiver detects a full character time
of the idle-line level. The UART_C1[M] control field selects 8-bit or 9-bit data mode and

UART_BDH[SBNS] selects 1-bit or 2-bit stop bit number that determines how many bit
times of idle are needed to constitute a full character time, 10 or 11 or 12 bit times
because of the start and stop bits.
When UARTI_C2[RWU] is 1 and UART_S2[RWUID] is 0, the idle condition that wakes
up the receiver does not set UART_S1[IDLE]. The receiver wakes up and waits for the
first data character of the next message that sets UART_S1[RDRF] and generates an
interrupt, if enabled. When UART_S2[RWUID] is 1, any idle condition sets
UART_S1[IDLE] flag and generates an interrupt if enabled, regardless of whether
UART_C2[RWU] is 0 or 1.
The idle-line type (UART_C1[ILT]) control bit selects one of two ways to detect an idle
line. When UART_C1[ILT] is cleared, the idle bit counter starts after the start bit so the
stop bit and any logic 1s at the end of a character count toward the full character time of
idle. When UART_C1[ILT] is set, the idle bit counter does not start until after a stop bit
time, so the idle detection is not affected by the data in the last character of the previous
message.
32.4.3.2.2 Address-mark wakeup

When wake is set, the receiver is configured for address-mark wakeup. In this mode,
UART_C2[RWU] is cleared automatically when the receiver detects a, or two, if
UART_BDH[SBNS] = 1, logic 1 in the most significant bits of a received character,
eighth bit when UART_C1[M] is cleared and ninth bit when UART_C1[M] is set.
Address-mark wakeup allows messages to contain idle characters, but requires the msb
be reserved for use in address frames. The one, or two, if UART_BDH[SBNS] = 1, logic
1s msb of an address frame clears the UART_C2[RWU] bit before the stop bits are
received and sets the UART_S1[RDRF] flag. In this case, the character with the msb set
is received even though the receiver was sleeping during most of this character time.
32.4.4 Interrupts and status flags

The UART system has one interrupt vector which has three separate interrupt types. One
interrupt type is associated with the transmitter for UART_S1[TDRE] and
UART_S1[TC] events. Another interrupt type is associated with the receiver for RDRF,
IDLE, RXEDGIF, and LBKDIF events. A third type is used for OR, NF, FE, and PF
error conditions. Each of these ten interrupt sources can be separately masked by local
interrupt enable masks. The flags can be polled by software when the local masks are
cleared to disable generation of hardware interrupt requests.

The UART transmitter has two status flags that can optionally generate hardware
interrupt requests. Transmit data register empty (UART_S1[TDRE]) indicates when there
is room in the transmit data buffer to write another transmit character to UART_D. If the
transmit interrupt enable (UART_C2[TIE]) bit is set, a hardware interrupt is requested
when UART_S1[TDRE] is set. Transmit complete (UART_S1[TC]) indicates that the
transmitter is finished transmitting all data, preamble, and break characters and is idle
with TxD at the inactive level. This flag is often used in systems with modems to
determine when it is safe to turn off the modem. If the transmit complete interrupt enable
(UART_C2[TCIE]) bit is set, a hardware interrupt is requested when UART_S1[TC] is
set. Instead of hardware interrupts, software polling may be used to monitor the
UART_S1[TDRE] and UART_S1[TC] status flags if the corresponding UART_C2[TIE]
or UART_C2[TCIE] local interrupt masks are cleared.
When a program detects that the receive data register is full (UART_S1[RDRF] = 1), it
gets the data from the receive data register by reading UART_D. The UART_S1[RDRF]
flag is cleared by reading UART_S1 while UART_S1[RDRF] is set and then reading
UART_D.
When polling is used, this sequence is naturally satisfied in the normal course of the user
program. If hardware interrupts are used, UART_S1 must be read in the interrupt service
routine (ISR). Normally, this is done in the ISR anyway to check for receive errors, so the
sequence is automatically satisfied.
The IDLE status flag includes logic that prevents it from getting set repeatedly when the
RxD line remains idle for an extended period of time. IDLE is cleared by reading
UART_S1 while UART_S1[IDLE] is set and then reading UART_D. After
UART_S1[IDLE] has been cleared, it cannot become set again until the receiver has
received at least one new character and has set UART_S1[RDRF].
If the associated error was detected in the received character that caused
UART_S1[RDRF] to be set, the error flags - noise flag (UART_S1[NF]), framing error
(UART_S1[FE]), and parity error flag (UART_S1[PF]) - are set at the same time as
UART_S1[RDRF]. These flags are not set in overrun cases.
If UART_S1[RDRF] was already set when a new character is ready to be transferred
from the receive shifter to the receive data buffer, the overrun (UART_S1[OR]) flag is
set instead of the data along with any associated NF, FE, or PF condition is lost.
At any time, an active edge on the RxD serial data input pin causes the
UART_S2[RXEDGIF] flag to set. The UART_S2[RXEDGIF] flag is cleared by writing a
1 to it. This function depends on the receiver being enabled (UART_C2[RE] = 1).

32.4.5 Baud rate tolerance

A transmitting device may operate at a baud rate below or above that of the receiver.
Accumulated bit time misalignment can cause one of the three stop bit data samples
(RT8, RT9, and RT10) to fall outside the actual stop bit. A noise error will occur if the
RT8, RT9, and RT10 samples are not all the same logical values. A framing error will
occur if the receiver clock is misaligned in such a way that the majority of the RT8, RT9,
and RT10 stop bit samples are a logic zero.
As the receiver samples an incoming frame, it re-synchronizes the RT clock on any valid
falling edge within the frame. Resynchronization within frames will correct a
misalignment between transmitter bit times and receiver bit times.
32.4.5.1 Slow data tolerance

Figure 32-20 shows how much a slow received frame can be misaligned without causing
a noise error or a framing error. The slow stop bit begins at RT8 instead of RT1 but
arrives in time for the stop bit data samples at RT8, RT9, and RT10.
MSB STOP
RECEIVER
RT CLOCK
RT1
RT2
RT3
RT4
RT5
RT6
RT7
RT8
RT9
RT10
RT11
RT12
RT13
RT14
RT15
RT16
DATA
SAMPLES
Figure 32-20. Slow data
For an 8-bit data and 1 stop bit character, data sampling of the stop bit takes the receiver
9 bit times x 16 RT cycles +10 RT cycles =154 RT cycles.
With the misaligned character shown in Figure 32-20, the receiver counts 154 RT cycles
at the point when the count of the transmitting device is 9 bit times x 16 RT cycles + 3
RT cycles = 147 RT cycles.
The maximum percent difference between the receiver count and the transmitter count of
a slow 8-bit data and 1 stop bit character with no errors is:
((154 - 147) / 154) x 100 = 4.54%
For a 9-bit data or 2 stop bits character, data sampling of the stop bit takes the receiver 10
bit times x 16 RT cycles + 10 RT cycles = 170 RT cycles.

a slow 9-bit or 2 stop bits character with no errors is:
((170 - 163) / 170) X 100 = 4.12%
For a 9-bit data and 2 stop bit character, data sampling of the stop bit takes the receiver
11 bit times x 16 RT cycles + 10 RT cycles = 186 RT cycles.
a slow 9-bit and 2 stop bits character with no errors is: ((186 - 179) / 186) X 100 = 3.76%
32.4.5.2 Fast data tolerance

Figure 32-21 shows how much a fast received frame can be misaligned. The fast stop bit
ends at RT10 instead of RT16 but is still sampled at RT8, RT9, and RT10.
STOP IDLE OR NEXT FRAME
RECEIVER
RT CLOCK
RT1
RT2
RT3
RT4
RT5
RT6
RT7
RT8
RT9
RT10
RT11
RT12
RT13
RT14
RT15
RT16
DATA
SAMPLES
Figure 32-21. Fast data
For an 8-bit data and 1 stop bit character, data sampling of the stop bit takes the receiver
at the point when the count of the transmitting device is 10 bit times x 16 RT cycles =
160 RT cycles.
a fast 8-bit and 1 stop bit character with no errors is:
((154 - 160) / 154) x 100 = 3.90%
For a 9-bit data or 2 stop bits character, data sampling of the stop bit takes the receiver 10
bit times x 16 RT cycles + 10 RT cycles = 170 RT cycles.
With the misaligned character shown in, the receiver counts 170 RT cycles at the point
when the count of the transmitting device is 11 bit times x 16 RT cycles = 176 RT cycles.
a fast 9-bit or 2 stop bits character with no errors is:
((170 - 176) / 170) x 100 = 3.53%
For a 9-bit data and 2 stop bits character, data sampling of the stop bit takes the receiver
With the misaligned character shown in, the receiver counts 186 RT cycles at the point
when the count of the transmitting device is 12 bit times x 16 RT cycles = 192 RT cycles.
a fast 9-bit and 2 stop bits character with no errors is:
((186 - 192) / 186) x 100 = 3.23%
32.4.6 Additional UART functions

The following sections describe additional UART functions.
32.4.6.1 8- and 9-bit data modes

The UART system, transmitter and receiver, can be configured to operate in 9-bit data
mode by setting UART_C1[M]. In 9-bit mode, there is a ninth data bit to the left of the
most significant bit of the UART data register. For the transmit data buffer, this bit is
stored in T8 in UART_C3. For the receiver, the ninth bit is held in UART_C3[R8].
For coherent writes to the transmit data buffer, write to UART_C3[T8] before writing to
UART_D.
If the bit value to be transmitted as the ninth bit of a new character is the same as for the
previous character, it is not necessary to write to UART_C3[T8] again. When data is
transferred from the transmit data buffer to the transmit shifter, the value in
UART_C3[T8] is copied at the same time data is transferred from UART_D to the
shifter.
The 9-bit data mode is typically used with parity to allow eight bits of data plus the parity
in the ninth bit, or it is used with address-mark wake-up so the ninth data bit can serve as
the wakeup bit. In custom protocols, the ninth bit can also serve as a software-controlled
marker.

32.4.6.2 Stop mode operation

During all stop modes, clocks to the UART module are halted.
No UART module registers are affected in Stop mode.
The receive input active edge detect circuit remains active in Stop mode. An active edge
on the receive input brings the CPU out of Stop mode if the interrupt is not masked
(UART_BDH[RXEDGIE] = 1).
Because the clocks are halted, the UART module resumes operation upon exit from stop,
only in Stop mode. Software must ensure stop mode is not entered while there is a
character (including preamble, break and normal data) being transmitted out of or
received into the UART module, that means UART_S1[TC] =1, UART_S1[TDRE] = 1,
and UART_S2[RAF] = 0 must all meet before entering stop mode.
32.4.6.3 Loop mode

When UART_C1[LOOPS] is set, the UART_C1[RSRC] bit in the same register chooses
between loop mode (UART_C1[RSRC] = 0) or single-wire mode (UART_C1[RSRC] =
1). Loop mode is sometimes used to check software, independent of connections in the
external system, to help isolate system problems. In this mode, the internal loop back
connection from the transmitter to the receiver causes the receiver to receive characters
that are sent out by the transmitter.
32.4.6.4 Single-wire operation

When UART_C1[LOOPS] is set, UART_C1[RSRC] chooses between loop mode
(UART_C1[RSRC] = 0) or single-wire mode (UART_C1[RSRC] = 1). Single-wire mode
implements a half-duplex serial connection. The receiver is internally connected to the
transmitter output and to the TxD pin. The RxD pin is not used and reverts to a general-
purpose port I/O pin.
In single-wire mode, the UART_C3[TXDIR] bit controls the direction of serial data on
the TxD pin. When UART_C3[TXDIR] is cleared, the TxD pin is an input to the UART
receiver and the transmitter is temporarily disconnected from the TxD pin so an external
device can send serial data to the receiver. When UART_C3[TXDIR] is set, the TxD pin
is an output driven by the transmitter. In single-wire mode, the transmitter output is
internally connected to the receiver input and the RxD pin is not used by the UART, so it
reverts to a general-purpose port I/O pin.


Chapter 33
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)
33.1 Introduction
NOTE
The general-purpose input and output (GPIO) module is accessible via the peripheral bus
and also communicates to the processor core via a zero wait state interface (IOPORT) for
maximum pin performance. The GPIO registers support 8-bit, 16-bit or 32-bit accesses.
The GPIO data direction and output data registers control the direction and output data of
each pin when the pin is configured for the GPIO function. The GPIO input data register
displays the logic value on each pin when the pin is configured for any digital function,
provided the corresponding Port Control and Interrupt module for that pin is enabled.
Efficient bit manipulation of the general-purpose outputs is supported through the
addition of set, clear, and toggle write-only registers for each port output data register.
33.1.1 Features
• Features of the GPIO module include:
• Port Data Input register visible in all digital pin-multiplexing modes
• Port Data Input register with corresponding set/clear/toggle registers
• Port Data Direction register
• Zero wait state access to GPIO registers through IOPORT
NOTE
The GPIO module is clocked by system clock.

Introduction

The following table depicts different modes of operation and the behavior of the GPIO
module in these modes.
Table 33-1. Modes of operation
Modes of operation Description
Run The GPIO module operates normally.
Wait The GPIO module operates normally.
Stop The GPIO module is disabled.
Debug The GPIO module operates normally.
33.1.3 GPIO signal descriptions

Table 33-2. GPIO signal descriptions
GPIO signal descriptions Description I/O
PTA7–PTA0 General-purpose input/output I/O
PTB7–PTB0 General-purpose input/output I/O
PTC7–PTC0 General-purpose input/output I/O
NOTE
Not all pins within each port are implemented on each device.
See the chapter on signal multiplexing for the number of GPIO
ports available in the device.
33.1.3.1 Detailed signal description

Table 33-3. GPIO interface-detailed signal descriptions
PTA7–PTA0 I/O General-purpose input/output
PTB7–PTB0 State meaning Asserted: The pin is logic 1.
PTC7–PTC0 Deasserted: The pin is logic 0.
Timing Assertion: When output, this
signal occurs on the rising-
edge of the system clock. For
input, it may occur at any time
and input may be asserted
asynchronously to the system
clock.

Chapter 33 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)
Table 33-3. GPIO interface-detailed signal descriptions

Deassertion: When output,
this signal occurs on the
rising-edge of the system
clock. For input, it may occur
at any time and input may be
asserted asynchronously to
the system clock.

The GPIO module has two address slots on AIPS-Lite peripheral bridge to keep software
compatibility between Freescale product portfolios. All of the GPIO registers could be
accessed either by using base address of 0x400F_F000 or 0x4000_F000. It is
recommended to use 0x400F_F000 as the base address of GPIO module, and the register
memory map of this chapter is also based on the base address of 0x400F_F000.
Any read or write access to the GPIO memory space that is outside the valid memory
map results in a bus error.
33.2.1 GPIO/FGPIO register bits assignment

In this device, each 8-bit port pin is mapped to the 32-bit GPIO/FGPIO registers as
described in the table.
Table 33-4. GPIOA/FGPIOA register bits assignment
Register bit
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PTB7
PTB6
PTB5
PTB4
PTB3
PTB2
PTB1
PTB0
PTD7
PTD6
PTD5
PTD4
PTD3
PTD2
PTD1
PTD0
PTC7
PTC6
PTC5
PTC4
PTC3
PTC2
PTC1
PTC0
PTA7
PTA6
PTA5
PTA4
PTA3
PTA2
PTA1
PTA0
Port pin
GPIO memory map

Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
400F_F000 Port Data Output Register (GPIOA_PDOR) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 33.2.2/590

GPIO memory map (continued)

Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
W
400F_F004 Port Set Output Register (GPIOA_PSOR) 32 (always 0000_0000h 33.2.3/591
reads 0)
W
400F_F008 Port Clear Output Register (GPIOA_PCOR) 32 (always 0000_0000h 33.2.4/591
reads 0)
W
400F_F00C Port Toggle Output Register (GPIOA_PTOR) 32 (always 0000_0000h 33.2.5/592
reads 0)
400F_F010 Port Data Input Register (GPIOA_PDIR) 32 R 0000_0000h 33.2.6/592
400F_F014 Port Data Direction Register (GPIOA_PDDR) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 33.2.7/593
400F_F018 Port Input Disable Register (GPIOA_PIDR) 32 R/W FFFF_FFFFh 33.2.8/593
33.2.2 Port Data Output Register (GPIOx_PDOR)

This register configures the logic levels that are driven on each general-purpose output
pins.
NOTE
Do not modify pin configuration registers associated with pins
not available in your selected package. All unbonded pins not
available in your package will default to DISABLE state for
lowest power consumption.
Address: 400F_F000h base + 0h offset = 400F_F000h
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
W
PDO
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
GPIOx_PDOR field descriptions

Field Description
PDO Port Data Output
Register bits for unbonded pins return a undefined value when read.
0 Logic level 0 is driven on pin, provided pin is configured for general-purpose output.

33.2.3 Port Set Output Register (GPIOx_PSOR)

This register configures whether to set the fields of the PDOR.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0
W PTSO
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
GPIOx_PSOR field descriptions

Field Description
PTSO Port Set Output
Writing to this register will update the contents of the corresponding bit in the PDOR as follows:
0 Corresponding bit in PDORn does not change.

1 Corresponding bit in PDORn is set to logic 1.
33.2.4 Port Clear Output Register (GPIOx_PCOR)

This register configures whether to clear the fields of PDOR.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0
W PTCO
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
GPIOx_PCOR field descriptions

Field Description
PTCO Port Clear Output
Writing to this register will update the contents of the corresponding bit in the Port Data Output Register
(PDOR) as follows:

1 Corresponding bit in PDORn is cleared to logic 0.

33.2.5 Port Toggle Output Register (GPIOx_PTOR)

Address: 400F_F000h base + Ch offset = 400F_F00Ch
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0
W PTTO
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
GPIOx_PTOR field descriptions

Field Description
PTTO Port Toggle Output

1 Corresponding bit in PDORn is set to the inverse of its existing logic state.
33.2.6 Port Data Input Register (GPIOx_PDIR)
NOTE
Do not modify pin configuration registers associated with pins
not available in your selected package. All unbonded pins not
available in your package will default to DISABLE state for
lowest power consumption.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R PDI
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
GPIOx_PDIR field descriptions

Field Description
PDI Port Data Input
Reads 0 at the unimplemented pins for a particular device. Pins that are not configured for a digital
function read 0. If the Port Control and Interrupt module is disabled, then the corresponding bit in PDIR
does not update.
0 Pin logic level is logic 0, or is not configured for use by digital function.
1 Pin logic level is logic 1.

33.2.7 Port Data Direction Register (GPIOx_PDDR)

The PDDR configures the individual port pins for input or output.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
W
PDD
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
GPIOx_PDDR field descriptions

Field Description
PDD Port Data Direction
Configures individual port pins for input or output.
0 Pin is configured as general-purpose input, for the GPIO function. The pin will be high-Z if the port
input is disabled in GPIOx_PIDR register.
1 Pin is configured as general-purpose output, for the GPIO function.
33.2.8 Port Input Disable Register (GPIOx_PIDR)

Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
W
PID
Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GPIOx_PIDR field descriptions

Field Description
PID Port Input Disable
0 Pin is configured for General Purpose Input, provided the pin is configured for any digital function.
1 Pin is not configured as General Purpose Input.Corresponding Port Data Input Register bit will read
zero.
33.3 FGPIO memory map and register definition

The GPIO registers are also aliased to the IOPORT interface on the Cortex-M0+ from
address 0xF800_0000.

FGPIO memory map and register definition
Accesses via the IOPORT interface occur in parallel with any instruction fetches and will
therefore complete in a single cycle. This aliased Fast GPIO memory map is called
FGPIO.
Any read or write access to the FGPIO memory space that is outside the valid memory
map results in a bus error. All register accesses complete with zero wait states, except
error accesses which complete with one wait state.
33.3.1 GPIO/FGPIO register bits assignment

In this device, each 8-bit port pin is mapped to the 32-bit GPIO/FGPIO registers as
described in the table.
Table 33-21. GPIOA/FGPIOA register bits assignment
Register bit
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5
PTB7 4 3 2 1 0
PTB6
PTB5
PTB4
PTB3
PTB2
PTB1
PTB0
PTD7
PTD6
PTD5
PTD4
PTD3
PTD2
PTD1
PTD0
PTC7
PTC6
PTC5
PTC4
PTC3
PTC2
PTC1
PTC0
PTA7
PTA6
PTA5
PTA4
PTA3
PTA2
PTA1
PTA0
Port pin
FGPIO memory map

Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
F800_0000 Port Data Output Register (FGPIOA_PDOR) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 33.3.2/595
W
F800_0004 Port Set Output Register (FGPIOA_PSOR) 32 (always 0000_0000h 33.3.3/595
reads 0)
W
F800_0008 Port Clear Output Register (FGPIOA_PCOR) 32 (always 0000_0000h 33.3.4/596
reads 0)
W
F800_000C Port Toggle Output Register (FGPIOA_PTOR) 32 (always 0000_0000h 33.3.5/596
reads 0)
F800_0010 Port Data Input Register (FGPIOA_PDIR) 32 R 0000_0000h 33.3.6/597
F800_0014 Port Data Direction Register (FGPIOA_PDDR) 32 R/W 0000_0000h 33.3.7/597
F800_0018 Port Input Disable Register (FGPIOA_PIDR) 32 R/W FFFF_FFFFh 33.3.8/598

33.3.2 Port Data Output Register (FGPIOx_PDOR)

This register configures the logic levels that are driven on each general-purpose output
pins.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
W
PDO
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FGPIOx_PDOR field descriptions

Field Description
PDO Port Data Output
Unimplemented pins for a particular device read as zero.
33.3.3 Port Set Output Register (FGPIOx_PSOR)

This register configures whether to set the fields of the PDOR.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0
W PTSO
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FGPIOx_PSOR field descriptions

Field Description
PTSO Port Set Output

1 Corresponding bit in PDORn is set to logic 1.

FGPIO memory map and register definition
33.3.4 Port Clear Output Register (FGPIOx_PCOR)

This register configures whether to clear the fields of PDOR.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0
W PTCO
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FGPIOx_PCOR field descriptions

Field Description
PTCO Port Clear Output
Writing to this register will update the contents of the corresponding bit in the Port Data Output Register
(PDOR) as follows:

1 Corresponding bit in PDORn is cleared to logic 0.
33.3.5 Port Toggle Output Register (FGPIOx_PTOR)

Address: F800_0000h base + Ch offset = F800_000Ch
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R 0
W PTTO
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FGPIOx_PTOR field descriptions

Field Description
PTTO Port Toggle Output

1 Corresponding bit in PDORn is set to the inverse of its existing logic state.

33.3.6 Port Data Input Register (FGPIOx_PDIR)

Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R PDI
W
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FGPIOx_PDIR field descriptions

Field Description
PDI Port Data Input
Reads 0 at the unimplemented pins for a particular device. Pins that are not configured for a digital
function read 0. If the Port Control and Interrupt module is disabled, then the corresponding bit in PDIR
does not update.
0 Pin logic level is logic 0, or is not configured for use by digital function.
1 Pin logic level is logic 1.
33.3.7 Port Data Direction Register (FGPIOx_PDDR)

The PDDR configures the individual port pins for input or output.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
W
PDD
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FGPIOx_PDDR field descriptions

Field Description
PDD Port Data Direction
Configures individual port pins for input or output.
0 Pin is configured as general-purpose input, for the GPIO function. The pin will be high-Z if the port
input is disabled in FPIOx_PIDR register.
1 Pin is configured as general-purpose output, for the GPIO function.

33.3.8 Port Input Disable Register (FGPIOx_PIDR)

Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R
W
PID
Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
FGPIOx_PIDR field descriptions

Field Description
PID Port Input Disable
0 Pin is configured for General Purpose Input, provided the pin is configured for any digital function.
1 Pin is not configured as General Purpose Input. Corresponding Port Data Input Register bit will read
zero.
33.4.1 General-purpose input

The logic state of each pin is available via the Port Data Input registers, provided the pin
is configured for a digital function and the corresponding Port Control and Interrupt
module is enabled.
33.4.2 General-purpose output

The logic state of each pin can be controlled via the port data output registers and port
data direction registers, provided the pin is configured for the GPIO function. The
following table depicts the conditions for a pin to be configured as input/output.
If Then
A pin is configured for the GPIO function and the The pin is configured as an input.
corresponding port data direction register bit is clear.
A pin is configured for the GPIO function and the The pin is configured as an output and and the logic state of
corresponding port data direction register bit is set. the pin is equal to the corresponding port data output register.
To facilitate efficient bit manipulation on the general-purpose outputs, pin data set, pin
data clear, and pin data toggle registers exist to allow one or more outputs within one port
to be set, cleared, or toggled from a single register write.

The corresponding Port Control and Interrupt module does not need to be enabled to
update the state of the port data direction registers and port data output registers including
the set/clear/toggle registers.
33.4.3 IOPORT
The GPIO registers are also aliased to the IOPORT interface on the Cortex-M0+ from
address 0xF800_0000. Accesses via the IOPORT interface occur in parallel with any
instruction fetches and will therefore complete in a single cycle.


Chapter 34
Keyboard Interrupts (KBI)
34.1 Introduction
34.1.1 Features
The KBI features include:
• Up to eight keyboard interrupt pins with individual pin enable bits
• Each keyboard interrupt pin is programmable as:
• falling-edge sensitivity only
• rising-edge sensitivity only
• both falling-edge and low-level sensitivity
• both rising-edge and high-level sensitivity
• One software-enabled keyboard interrupt
• Exit from low-power modes
34.1.2 Modes of Operation

This section defines the KBI operation in:
• Wait mode
• Stop mode
• Background debug mode

External signals description
34.1.2.1 KBI in Wait mode

Executing the Wait instruction places the MCU into Wait mode. The KBI interrupt
should be enabled (KBI_SC[KBIE] = 1), if desired, before executing the Wait
instruction, allowing the KBI to continue to operate while the MCU is in Wait mode. An
enabled KBI pin (KBI_PE[KBIPEn] = 1) can be used to bring the MCU out of Wait
mode if the KBI interrupt is enabled (KBI_SC[KBIE] = 1).
34.1.2.2 KBI in Stop modes

Executing the Stop instruction places the MCU into Stop mode (when Stop is selected),
where the KBI can operate asynchronously. If this is the desired behavior, the KBI
interrupt must be enabled (KBI_SC[KBIE] = 1) before executing the Stop instruction,
allowing the KBI to continue to operate while the MCU is in Stop mode. An enabled KBI
pin (KBI_PE[KBIPEn] = 1) can be used to bring the MCU out of Stop mode if the KBI
interrupt is enabled (KBI_SC[KBIE] = 1).
34.1.3 Block Diagram

The block diagram for the keyboard interrupt module is shown below..
KBACK BUSCLK
1 VDD RESET
KBF
0 CLR
KBIxP0 S KBIPE0 D Q
SYNCHRONIZER
CK
KBEDG0
KEYBOARD STOP STOP BYPASS
1 INTERRUPT FF KBIx
INTERRUPT
KBIxPn 0 REQUEST
S KBIPEn KBMOD
KBIE
KBEDGn
Figure 34-1. KBI block diagram
34.2 External signals description

The KBI input pins can be used to detect either falling edges, or both falling edge and
low-level interrupt requests. The KBI input pins can also be used to detect either rising
edges, or both rising edge and high-level interrupt requests.

Chapter 34 Keyboard Interrupts (KBI)
The signal properties of KBI are shown in the following table:

Table 34-1. External signals description
Signal Function I/O
KBIxPn Keyboard interrupt pins I

The KBI includes following registers:
• A pin status and control register, KBIx_SC
• A pin enable register, KBIx_PE
• An edge select register, KBIx_ES
See the direct-page register summary in the Memory chapter for the absolute address
assignments for all KBI registers. This section refers to registers and control bits only by
their names.
Some MCUs may have more than one KBI, so register names include placeholder
characters to identify which KBI is being referenced.
34.4 Memory Map and Registers

KBI memory map
Absolute
Width Section/
(in bits) page
(hex)
4007_9000 KBI Status and Control Register (KBI0_SC) 8 R/W 00h 34.4.1/604
4007_9001 KBIx Pin Enable Register (KBI0_PE) 8 R/W 00h 34.4.2/604
4007_9002 KBIx Edge Select Register (KBI0_ES) 8 R/W 00h 34.4.3/605
4007_A000 KBI Status and Control Register (KBI1_SC) 8 R/W 00h 34.4.1/604
4007_A001 KBIx Pin Enable Register (KBI1_PE) 8 R/W 00h 34.4.2/604
4007_A002 KBIx Edge Select Register (KBI1_ES) 8 R/W 00h 34.4.3/605

Memory Map and Registers
34.4.1 KBI Status and Control Register (KBIx_SC)

KBI_SC contains the status flag and control bits, which are used to configure the KBI.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read 0 KBF
KBIE KBMOD
Write KBACK
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
KBIx_SC field descriptions

Field Description
3 KBI Interrupt Flag
KBF
KBF indicates when a KBI interrupt request is detected. Writes have no effect on KBF.
0 KBI interrupt request not detected.

1 KBI interrupt request detected.
2 KBI Acknowledge
KBACK
Writing a 1 to KBACK is part of the flag clearing mechanism.
1 KBI Interrupt Enable
KBIE
KBIE determines whether a KBI interrupt is enabled or not.
0 KBI interrupt not enabled.

1 KBI interrupt enabled.
0 KBI Detection Mode
KBMOD
KBMOD (along with the KBEDG bits) controls the detection mode of the KBI interrupt pins.
0 Keyboard detects edges only.

1 Keyboard detects both edges and levels.
34.4.2 KBIx Pin Enable Register (KBIx_PE)

KBIx_PE contains the pin enable control bits.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read KBIPE
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

KBIx_PE field descriptions

Field Description
KBIPE KBI Pin Enables
Each of the KBIPEn bits enable the corresponding KBI interrupt pin.
0 Pin is not enabled as KBI interrupt.

1 Pin is enabled as KBI interrupt.
34.4.3 KBIx Edge Select Register (KBIx_ES)

KBIx_ES contains the edge select control bits.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read KBEDG
Write
Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
KBIx_ES field descriptions

Field Description
KBEDG KBI Edge Selects
Each of the KBEDGn bits selects the falling edge/low-level or rising edge/high-level function of the
corresponding pin.
0 Falling edge/low level.

1 Rising edge/high level.
34.5 Functional Description

This on-chip peripheral module is called a keyboard interrupt module because originally
it was designed to simplify the connection and use of row-column matrices of keyboard
switches. However, these inputs are also useful as extra external interrupt inputs and as
an external means of waking the MCU from stop or wait low-power modes.
The KBI module allows up to eight pins to act as additional interrupt sources. Writing to
the KBIx_PE[KBIPEn] bits independently enables or disables each KBI pin. Each KBI
pin can be configured as edge sensitive or edge and level sensitive based on the
KBIx_SC[KBMOD] bit. Edge sensitive can be software programmed to be either falling
or rising; the level can be either low or high. The polarity of the edge or edge and level
sensitivity is selected using the KBIx_ES[KBEDGn] bits.

34.5.1 Edge-only sensitivity

Synchronous logic is used to detect edges. A falling edge is detected when an enabled
keyboard interrupt (KBIx_PE[KBIPEn]=1) input signal is seen as a logic 1 (the
deasserted level) during one bus cycle and then a logic 0 (the asserted level) during the
next cycle. A rising edge is detected when the input signal is seen as a logic 0 (the
deasserted level) during one bus cycle and then a logic 1 (the asserted level) during the
next cycle.
Before the first edge is detected, all enabled keyboard interrupt input signals must be at
the deasserted logic levels. After any edge is detected, all enabled keyboard interrupt
input signals must return to the deasserted level before any new edge can be detected.
A valid edge on an enabled KBI pin will set KBIx_SC[KBF]. If KBIx_SC[KBIE] is set,
an interrupt request will be presented to the MPU. Clearing of KBIx_SC[KBF] is
accomplished by writing a 1 to KBIx_SC[KBACK].
34.5.2 Edge and level sensitivity

A valid edge or level on an enabled KBI pin will set KBIx_SC[KBF]. If
KBIx_SC[KBIE] is set, an interrupt request will be presented to the MCU. Clearing of
KBIx_SC[KBF] is accomplished by writing a 1 to KBIx_SC[KBACK], provided all
enabled keyboard inputs are at their deasserted levels. KBIx_SC[KBF] will remain set if
any enabled KBI pin is asserted while attempting to clear KBIx_SC[KBF] by writing a 1
to KBIx_SC[KBACK].
34.5.3 KBI Pullup Resistor

Each KBI pin, if enabled by KBIx_PE, can be configured via the associated I/O port pull
enable register, see Port Control (PORT) chapter, to use:
• an internal pullup resistor, or
• no resistor
If an internal pullup resistor is enabled for an enabled KBI pin, the associated I/O port
pull select register (see I/O Port chapter) can be used to select an internal pullup resistor.

34.5.4 KBI initialization

When a keyboard interrupt pin is first enabled, it is possible to get a false keyboard
interrupt flag. To prevent a false interrupt request during keyboard initialization, the user
should do the following:
1. Mask keyboard interrupts by clearing KBIx_SC[KBIE].
2. Enable the KBI polarity by setting the appropriate KBIx_ES[KBEDGn] bits.
3. Before using internal pullup resistors, configure the associated bits in PORT_PUEL
and PORT_PUEH.
4. Enable the KBI pins by setting the appropriate KBIx_PE[KBIPEn] bits.
5. Write to KBIx_SC[KBACK] to clear any false interrupts.
6. Set KBIx_SC[KBIE] to enable interrupts.


Appendix A
Revision history
A.1 Changes between revisions 3 and 2

Table A-1. Changes between revisions 3 and 2
Chapter Description
Chip Configuration • Updated System interconnection diagram.
Clock Distribution • Updated a note in section of FTM and PWT clocking section to "And the on-chip timer
clock (TIMER_CLK) must be at least 4x faster than the external clock from TCLK1 or
TCLK2."
Flash Memory Module • Edited the chapter to clear typo errors.
(FTMRE) • Updated to "If an is detected during the reset sequence, both FSTAT[MGSTAT] bits will
be set." in the Flash initialization after system reset section.
• Updated Flash command summary section.
• Removed Configure NVM command
Analog-to-digital converter • Updated FIFO operation to support hardware trigger multiple conversion feature
(ADC)
Pulse Width Timer (PWT) • Updated the figure of "Trigger edge detection and pulse width registers update".

How to Reach Us: Information in this document is provided solely to enable system and
software implementers to use Freescale products. There are no express
Home Page:
or implied copyright licenses granted hereunder to design or fabricate
freescale.com
any integrated circuits based on the information in this document.
Web Support: Freescale reserves the right to make changes without further notice to
freescale.com/support any products herein.
Freescale makes no warranty, representation, or guarantee regarding
the suitability of its products for any particular purpose, nor does
Freescale assume any liability arising out of the application or use of
any product or circuit, and specifically disclaims any and all liability,
including without limitation consequential or incidental damages.
“Typical” parameters that may be provided in Freescale data sheets
and/or specifications can and do vary in different applications, and
actual performance may vary over time. All operating parameters,
including “typicals,” must be validated for each customer application by
customer's technical experts. Freescale does not convey any license
under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Freescale sells products
pursuant to standard terms and conditions of sale, which can be found
at the following address: freescale.com/SalesTermsandConditions.
Freescale, the Freescale logo, and Kinetis are trademarks of Freescale
Semiconductor, Inc., Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off. All other product or
service names are the property of their respective owners. ARM and
Cortex-M0+ are the registered trademarks of ARM Limited.
©2013-2014 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.
Document Number MKE04P24M48SF0RM

Revision 3, Feburary 2014

MKE04P24M48SF0RM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MKE04P24M48SF0RM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MKE04P24M48SF0RM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

KE04 Sub-Family Reference Manual

Supports: MKE04Z8VTG4(R), MKE04Z8VWJ4(R) and

Document Number: MKE04P24M48SF0RM

1.2.1 Numbering systems..........................................................................................................................................35

1.2.2 Typographic notation.......................................................................................................................................36

1.2.3 Special terms....................................................................................................................................................36

2.2 Module functional categories..........................................................................................................................................37

2.2.1 ARM Cortex-M0+ core modules.....................................................................................................................38

2.2.2 System modules...............................................................................................................................................39

2.2.3 Memories and memory interfaces....................................................................................................................39

2.2.5 Security and integrity modules........................................................................................................................40

2.2.6 Analog modules...............................................................................................................................................40

2.2.7 Timer modules.................................................................................................................................................41

2.2.8 Communication interfaces...............................................................................................................................42

2.2.9 Human-machine interfaces..............................................................................................................................42

2.2.10 Orderable part numbers....................................................................................................................................42

3.2 Module to Module Interconnects....................................................................................................................................45

3.2.1 Interconnection overview.................................................................................................................................45

KE04 Sub-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 3, Feburary 2014

3.2.2 Analog reference options.................................................................................................................................47

3.2.3 ACMP output capture......................................................................................................................................48

3.2.4 UART0_TX modulation..................................................................................................................................48

3.2.5 UART0_RX capture........................................................................................................................................48

3.2.6 UART0_RX filter............................................................................................................................................49

3.2.7 RTC capture.....................................................................................................................................................49

3.2.8 FTM2 software synchronization......................................................................................................................50

3.2.9 ADC hardware trigger......................................................................................................................................50

3.3 Core Modules..................................................................................................................................................................50

3.3.1 ARM Cortex-M0+ core configuration.............................................................................................................50

3.3.1.1 ARM Cortex M0+ core ...............................................................................................................51

3.3.1.2 Buses, interconnects, and interfaces............................................................................................52

3.3.1.3 System Tick Timer.......................................................................................................................52

3.3.1.4 Core privilege levels....................................................................................................................53

3.3.2 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) configuration...........................................................................53

3.3.2.1 Interrupt priority levels................................................................................................................54

3.3.2.2 Non-maskable interrupt................................................................................................................54

3.3.2.3 Interrupt channel assignments......................................................................................................54

3.3.3 Asynchronous wakeup interrupt controller (AWIC) configuration.................................................................56

3.3.3.1 Wakeup sources...........................................................................................................................57

3.4 System Modules..............................................................................................................................................................58

3.4.1 SIM configuration............................................................................................................................................58

3.4.2 PMC configuration...........................................................................................................................................58

3.4.3 MCM configuration.........................................................................................................................................59

3.4.4 Crossbar-light switch configuration.................................................................................................................60

3.4.4.1 Crossbar-Light switch master assignments..................................................................................60

3.4.4.2 Crossbar switch slave assignments..............................................................................................61

KE04 Sub-Family Reference Manual, Rev. 3, Feburary 2014

3.4.5 Peripheral bridge configuration.......................................................................................................................61

3.4.5.1 Number of peripheral bridges......................................................................................................61

3.4.5.2 Memory maps..............................................................................................................................61

3.5 System Security..............................................................................................................................................................62

3.5.1 CRC configuration...........................................................................................................................................62

3.5.2 Watchdog configuration...................................................................................................................................62

3.5.2.1 WDOG clocks..............................................................................................................................63

3.5.2.2 WDOG operation.........................................................................................................................63

3.6 Clock Modules................................................................................................................................................................64

3.6.1 ICS configuration.............................................................................................................................................64

3.6.1.1 Clock gating.................................................................................................................................65

3.6.2 OSC configuration...........................................................................................................................................65

3.7 Memories and Memory Interfaces..................................................................................................................................66